Home

HP Color Laserjet Printer 3550 User's Manual

1. 1 33 3V i i GND B Power Switch INLET g E H H Operation F i Een GND aby SW3001 J3001 ormatter Panel Sie Low voltage Power Supply PCB A E BLGND F1 z o m Re2AVC 3pE tr Y J9002 c pcd J3502 tote 33503 3002 P 39 Door Switch X mm swi lalola elo lr lale ste ed B fades d e Buan iae o 47 alselsislselsatstalsatelaasiysae sels syciyactel lt 4 4 I J Fixing Unit H1 o io id dd gt l z I Euh I of p lel elel las ls i els ssss44 id Jas slo Spo alB8a8S9a89as59laezaxa Xa EEEEEEEEE a 25a I I slz zzz 2862881288123 8 ela Slc SEI pada GElusoie ald lols BEEREEBSSSoesessssssssssssasS a sls BEES 1 a NES I ERE AANA decessum d g l E e oe P feo ES E S s En Es US EE E E SE IE ES NES SESS PRESE ES DES E I EE I ECCE 41001 co Pix feo frolic lt tfeofed edel lt feal ol T J102 39 41002 i026 pe J1010 41003 41004 3 I 19 19 soo Jia DC controller PCB p Grate 2 i
2. Figure 8 24 Transfer Unit 524 Chapter8 Parts and diagrams ENWW Table 8 20 Transfer unit TRANSFER UNIT Q3658 69001 ENWW Illustrations and parts lists 525 0 BGG f Right Swing Frame Assembly Figure 8 25 ENWW 526 Chapter8 Parts and diagrams Table 8 21 Right Swing Frame Assembly RIGHT SWING FRAME ASS Y RM1 0437 000CN ENWW Illustrations and parts lists 527 Figure 8 26 Left Swing Frame Assembly 528 Chapter8 Parts and diagrams ENWW Table 8 22 Left swing frame assembly EI LEFT SWING FRAME ASS Y RM1 0439 000CN ENWW Illustrations and parts lists 529 Fuser Figure 8 27 ENWW 530 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams Table 8 23 Fuser assembly E FUSER 110 127V Q3655 69001 EI FUSER 220 240V Q3656 69001 ENWW Illustrations and parts lists 531 500 Sheet paper feeder main body Figure 8 28 ENWW 532 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams Table 8 24 500 Sheet paper feeder main body ENWW Illustrations and parts lists 533 Figure 8 29 500 Sheet paper feeder paper pick up drive assembly 534 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams ENWW Table 8 25 500 Sheet paper feeder p
3. Z J5024 a J5025 x 21 J5012 ZB ae J5003 J5005 e J706 b J5029 Figure 8 15 Lower Frame Assembly HP 3700 and HP 3500 3550 1 of 2 506 Chapter8 Parts and diagrams ENWW ENWW Illustrations and parts lists 507 e PS10 por 16 o A 2 J5024 J5011 amp J5025 J709 5012 2 o0 25 PS9 SL5 A 3709 3 J5011 Figure 8 16 Lower Frame Assembly HP 3700 and HP 3500 3550 2 of 2 508 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams ENWW PHOTO INTERRUPTER TLP1241 WG8 5362 000CN HP3500 3550 CABLE OPTION CONNECTING HP3500 3550 ENWW Illustrations and parts lists 509 BN Y Jed e o Q CL e e ogy GO e e o e SA e o FY Cot o o 2 Image Drive Assembly Figure 8 17 ENWW 510 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams Table 8 14 Image drive assembly FEE IMAGE DRIVE ASSEMBLY RM1 0415 040CN CLUTCH ELECTROMAGNETIC RK2 0248 000CN ENWW Illustrations and parts lists 511 Figure 8 18 Developing Disengaging Assembly 512 Chapter8 Parts and diagrams ENWW Table 8 15 Developing Disengaging Assembly FEN DEVELOPING DISENGAGING ASSEMBLY RM1 0434 000CN CLUTCH ELECTROMAGNETIC RK2 0176 000CN RING E XD9 0135 000CN
4. 6 Pull the fuser out of the printer For information on how to properly dispose of the fuser go to http www hp com recycle s c ME EE TS Z E lerram 999 T 3999 co oo 00 0 O65 0 0 Q na Qj O e Replacing supply items 105 7 Remove the new fuser from the bag 8 Hold the fuser with your thumbs on the blue ridges and fingers on the blue latches Push both sides of the fuser into the printer FEN i H CALEL LLE mu Hmm lj co e 90909 CF QUVA V 33x29 JC JC J JC Jr fi l PE e d It iem ms 2v 0990 CF QOVA AA W3S99 Lm IC JC m IC Y dud 106 Chapter 4 Printer maintenance ENWW 10 Rotate the green levers to the up position 11 To reattach the lower rear door rear output bin hold the door at a 45 angle and fit the peg into the round hole on the right side ENWW Replacing supply ite
5. 466 iS or anpra a a a A A 467 Supplies and accessories sss mener nnst ennt nnne 467 Replacement parts configuration ssssssssssssssseseeeenemeeen eene 473 Illustrations and parts lists ssssssseseeeeeme menn nnne 478 Alphabetical parts llSt eterne a e Mn te M ande Rh Re dex tue aaa da DE 538 N merical parts list ette eee eae OE Rd aa a Re Rd exe ia Qe eae au eene Gecdaaniane 551 Index ENWW ENWW List of tables Table 1 1 Table 1 2 Table 1 3 Table 1 4 Table 1 5 Table 1 6 Table 1 7 Table 1 8 Table 1 9 Table 1 10 Table 1 11 Table 1 12 Table 1 13 Table 2 1 Table 3 1 Table 3 2 Table 3 3 Table 3 4 Table 4 1 Table 4 2 Table 4 3 Table 5 1 Table 5 2 Table 5 3 Table 5 4 Table 5 5 Table 5 6 Table 6 1 Table 6 2 Table 6 3 Table 7 1 Table 7 2 Table 7 3 Table 7 4 Table 7 5 Table 7 6 Table 7 7 Table 7 8 Table 7 9 Table 7 10 Table 7 11 Table 7 12 Table 7 13 Table 7 14 Table 7 15 Feat res a net Mettre itas t A ies ete 6 Electrical specifications esses enne 12 Power consumption for 110 and 220 volt average in watts 12 Environmental specifications naene a aa a a EA 13 Supply storage requirements sssssssssssseeeemeennene nnns 13 Physical dimensions 4 Li ede edat aet e abere 15 Acoustic aE o aea e TEE AAA nn
6. E 9 Front and rear features 0 cccceceeeeeecennecee cee ee teen cede de ceaaeaecaeeeeeeeeeeeeagecseeaeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 9 Site requirements etate pen et e due aadacceennaudaslena an CA NE RR teda dua uu dee dir perunt duds 11 Space requirements susica iiaia aaea aa a aai 11 Electrical specifications cericsisscasacccaseatdscaasned annaa a aaa Aa aE Raae 12 Environmental specifications ccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeecaeeeeeeeeeeeeeseceecaaaaeceeeeeeseeeeeseseeesnnieeaeeees 13 Printer specifications TTD E 15 Ru p 15 Print media specifications ssssssssssssssssssssseseeeeeenene nennen nnt nnne nennen 16 Supported media weights and sizes sessssssssssssssssseeeenenmeennns 16 Hewlett Packard warranty statement sssssssssssssseenee nennen nennen emnes 19 HP s Premium Protection Print Cartridge Warranty Limited Warranty Statement 20 Premium Protection Warranty Color LaserJet Image Fuser Kit and Image Transfer Kit Limited Warranty Statement ssssssssssssseeeneeennen emen nnne 21 ldentificati n p as 22 Model and serial numbers ssssssssssssessssseseereen eene nennen nennen rns 22 Power and regulatory information sessseeeeeneenneeeeenn 22 Selecting Pap r TEES 24 Paper to avoid erect eost esee totes aaa
7. ssssssseeeeenn mem mmenen een 401 Interface troubleshooting reiten rene te tree deqneadadseaesndaddeqaezsadadegessances 403 Communications checks aeiia e E TE E 403 ElO troubleshooting e etre Pn D M daehaaiene 403 AUTOEXEC BAT standard configurations sss 404 Printer Job Language PJL commands sessemeel04 PJIE COMMENT scan cee eich itl de ede Ree ottenere 405 DPJLINFO GONEIG 3 i ete ehe tee DEEP ese rh Prin en EP enone 405 DPJL INEQ IB ciii t het t t ree e ti t ee ento Pere be eee eee ges Hide tp nd 405 OPIL INEOUSTATEJS 22 citeriore a E eto cbe Pte Ett tetto e pti sand 405 QDPJLE INFO PAGECOUNT t needed eet ent 405 0PJL3JOB dcos eee Re 406 Era MINI 406 PIMECHO 5 3 innt etate ioa t daten a extat Met oat 406 PUJL USTATUS JOB ON OFF enira erea EAE eee en nennt nnne inneren 406 QPJLUSTATUSOEF x eben eevnnt dt ueneetemnndu ene 406 Control panel troubleshooting aa tee rites Eden dein 407 Pring ameni tap ese ttp ct tee rtp ee tp ete Gates re Lia ee Pat ER Gu ADT 407 Information meri 2 3 eo re md oe o eo em nb d elo 407 Paper handling MON E 408 Gonfigure device MON coeur emeret de ren ERR HERR dinate ER AU reg ERE ERR PERS 409 Print quality mienu eee Ee EE ED ee eee pel bg d dus 411 System setup merni c e toti ntn o od et d Ode RE e eo E e ete te ae Dr 414 Henn 418 Resets ten oret n ettet rete ee de Rt ted ee e Re Ret RS T 419 Diagnost
8. sssssssesee 382 Print quality troubleshooting pages ssss emm ener 383 Chapter contents 303 Calibrating the printer 2 tia Ede abeat ers 383 Using Color neasi oeg ERES 384 AF ImageRKEt2400 rn a i aAa A eee LE A AE AAE TEAN a mee e ees 384 Paper Selection AME 384 Color options available for the HP Color LaserJet 3700 series printer 384 Standard red green blue SRGB sssssssssssseseeeeee nennen enne 384 Printing in four colors CMYK available for the HP Color LaserJet 3700 series ai D A cca ihe Pavers E eect awa ceg ainda vi eae ee ee ede 385 CMYK ink set emulation PostScript only sse nm 385 Managing Hore o tS 386 Print ini Grayscale oen ette ete lee ett oe Pede TRETEN ERE ME ERR SE 386 Automatic or manual color adjustment ssssssssee een 386 Mariual color options ner t d Pe e at dert ere ie TR Ote ERE EM pa cs 386 Matching ColOrs adit etrit reed Leid t ebd de Lnd d Dk Ludi cu cedi ba d do dad eid c nd 388 Swatch book color matching HP Color LaserJet 3700 series printer only 388 Adjusting color balance naenin eia dde agde edd Lupe du Lega uguale 389 Image deftects nee RH 390 Light Images Macalester oe etu tutu 391 Eight colors iei et etie ce em cte et tegi e ees eese ems 392 Dark image 4 eed Ee de eicere ee 392 Dark COC 2 x3 cire ctr eda ede tud n ede Da rte bet
9. sssssssss 284 Low voltage power supply PCB removal 1 of 2 sss 285 Left front cover removal 2 of 4 sssssssssssseeenemee 285 Low voltage power supply PCB removal 2 of 2 sess 286 Memory controller PCB removal 1 of 2 ss 286 Memory controller PCB removal 2 of 2 sss 287 Control panel PCB removal ssssssssssssseeee nennen 287 Developing contact assembly removal 1 of 3 ssssssesss 289 Developing contact assembly removal 2 of 3 ssssssssseess 289 Developing contact assembly removal 3 of 3 ssssssesss 290 Right Tray 2 guide removal 1 of 6 sssssssss 291 Right Tray 2 guide removal 2 of 6 ssssssssseeee 292 Right Tray 2 guide removal 3 of 6 sssssssse 292 Right Tray 2 guide removal 4 of 6 ssssssss 293 Right Tray 2 guide removal 5 Of 6 sssssssssssseem 293 Right tray guide removal 6 of 6 ssssssseeee eene 294 Right Tray 2 guide removal 1 of 3 sssssssssem 294 Right Tray 2 guide removal 2 of 3 srren ARAE 295 Right Tray 2 guide removal 3 of 3 sssssssssse em 295 500 Sheet feeder cover locations sssss eee 296 500 Sheet paper feeder front cover removal ssssssssssssssss 296 500 sheet paper feeder right cover removal
10. ssssssssssssssesssseeeeenenen ener 94 Locat ng supplies and parts ertet ee rend nete dp OYEROE Fe e eT don aa Here ee aan a E Rege 96 Replacing supply items ssssssssssssssssssssseeenee nennen emere enne nnne nr nnns n nnn nnne 97 Replacing the transfer unit iei eee reete EEEa 99 Replacing the fuser and pickup roller ssssssseseeee 103 Chapter contents 91 Cleaning the printer and accessories WARNING CAUTION CAUTION Clean the outside surfaces with a water dampened cloth Observe the warning and caution below Before you begin these steps turn the printer off and unplug all power cords to avoid shock hazard Be careful when cleaning around the fuser area It might be hot To avoid permanent damage to the print cartridge do not use ammonia based cleaners on or around the printer If toner gets on your clothes wipe it off with a dry cloth and wash your clothes in cold water Hot water sets toner into fabric Table 4 1 Cleaning the printer Component Cleaning Method Outside covers Use an HP Toner Cleaning Cloth part number 5090 3379 or a water dampened cloth Do not use solvents or ammonia based cleaners Inside general With a dry lint free cloth wipe any dust spilled toner and paper particles from the paper path area the registration roller and the print cartridge cavity Paper pickup rollers Clean with lint free paper If dirt cannot be removed dam
11. ssssssseeseeeeee eene memes 288 Swing rod lock guide right removal rsrsrsr aee ennie enii ENEE eme 288 Transfer contact assembly removal sssssssssssseeee enne 288 Developing contact assembly sss enm ennemis 288 Tray 2 cassette parts removal seira otni aana EAE ERE heh n Rt Rea Eee rk dh RR Xn 291 Tray 2 Cassette coUe rot t bate ped utu a tec teri bct apt eere a 291 Cassette Tray 2 guide right removal sssessss eme 291 500 Sheet paper feeder Tray 3 covers sssssssssssseee emnes 296 Front cover removal 500 sheet paper feeder ssssssssssssssssssseeee 296 Right cover removal 500 sheet paper feeder sssssssssssssssess 297 Left cover removal 500 sheet paper feeder sssssssssssssssssseee 297 500 Sheet paper feeder internal parts sssssssssssssseseemeene eene 298 Pick up roller removal 500 sheet paper feeder sssssssssssssssseses 298 Separation pad removal 500 sheet paper feeder sssssssssssssssssss 299 Pick up drive unit removal 500 sheet paper feeder sssssssssssss 299 500 Sheet paper feeder sensor solenoid motor PCB sssssssssssssees 300 500 Sheet paper feeder PCB removal 500 sheet feeder eeeeeeeeetreteeeeeees 300 Pick up clutch CL4 removal 500 sheet feeder
12. ee i ITOP I ra I BD1 I pe I BD2 I le I BD3 I i La BD4 i I VDO1 I l NDO1 l i VDO2 i NDO2 Formatter l VDO3 DC controller I I INDO3 I I VDO4 I NDO4 SCLK I l l SC I r4 i l ICCRT I n f PFED I ra I PDLV a la TOPR REUS Figure 5 17 Video interface signals 136 Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW NOTE Figure 5 18 ENWW The types and purposes of the VIDEO INTERFACE signals are described below VDO1 VDO1 VDO2 VDO2 VDOS3 VDO3 VDO4 VDOA VIDEO signals formatter output These signals are the information of the image the printer engine is going to print The laser drivers turn the laser diode on or off based on these signals This printer has four laser units one for each color The formatter sends each color s VIDEO signal Y2VDO1 VDO1 M VDO2 VDO2 C VDO3 VDO3 Bk VDO4 VDO4 to the DC controller The VIDEO signal is a differential signal The laser diode emits light when the VDO signal is H and the VDO signal is L The abbreviations Bk and K are used interchangeably and refer to the black toner developing operations TOP VERTICAL SYNCHRONOUS signal formatter input This signal synchronizes the vertical sub scanning line of the image which is the reference signal in the vertical direction of the laser beam This printer has four drums When the TOP signal is received the formatter counts the BD signals of ea
13. ssssssssssssssss 297 500 sheet paper feeder left cover removal sss 297 500 Sheet paper feeder pick up roller removal sussessssssss 298 500 sheet paper feeder separation pad removal ssuuusssss 299 500 Sheet paper feeder pick up drive unit removal seesssss 299 500 Sheet paper feeder sensor solenoid motor PCB locations 300 500 Sheet paper feeder PCB removal cecceceeceeeeeeeeeeeecneceeeeeeeeeeeeeee 300 500 Sheet paper feeder pick up clutch removal sssssssssss 301 500 Sheet paper feeder pick up solenoid removal ssssssss 301 500 Sheet paper feeder front frame removal 1 of 3 ssususss 302 500 Sheet feeder paper sensor removal 2 of 3 sssssssssssss 302 500 Sheet feeder paper sensor removal 3 of 3 ssssssssssss 302 Jam area locations and sensor positions ssssssssssssssesses 357 Printer frOnt dOOF teet et Rte ioa manete ee RHENUM 364 Lett side of front door irr tret dtt pectet eere 367 Repetitive defects ruler eene 402 Configuration page c termed cete ee rA HR ERR NER Pc PER Eds 404 Printer menu map HP 3700 shown sse mee 407 Printer configuration page sss mem d28 ElO page vets et eb E ab ln qub age ba dd ua pde 429 Supplies status Page
14. M 114 Operation sequence ssssssssssssssssesenereee hehehe nrm nsn sn nent nn tenen nter t entente nnns 114 Power on SEQUENCES 2 ue etre e ean ORI RR RRR EON CAR RER E Nee RARE DR ERAN Re Ae EAR PAP a dee a xaxd eek ex adiac estan IG Engine control Systelm eme or ERR ETOS actin ee inve t eas 119 DO controller PCB D aaaea 119 Low voltage power supply circuit eee eeeeeceeccecce eee ee eee eeeeeeeeaeaaeceeeeeeeeeeeesesenssncaeeaeeeeees 126 Low voltage power supply circuit eee cece ceeceeee eee eee eect eee eaeeaaeceeeeeeeeeeeeseseneceneeaeeeeees 131 Laser scanner System i io ia ee bettas Presence aa de d aive ee t add addo E E pner 139 Laser COntrol ree E 140 Scanner motor control alsanea a nnn nnns 144 Image formation SyStem 22 dieen ninaa teen aden ED dee ced cu D dee Lea e 146 Print PFOCOSS assis IR 147 DOVEIOPIMG SOCHON ELEM 156 Cartridge cleaning control sessista EE EEE ENEE 163 nello RE ITB cleaning control 2 roii A ie Fe ara dasacteger ed UE Waste toner full detection rate ctr ete a anda ue xu ee XR RR DAT 167 Transfer ITB unit detection otro toe tetur xe Eee c dere eee x rng ade ced 168 Transfer unit life detection ssssssssssssssssesssseeemeenee enne enmeeree nnne 169 ITB self aligning mechanism sese nennen nnns 170 Primary transfer roller engaging disengaging control eseeees 171 Secondary
15. ENWW Illustrations and parts lists 513 Tray 2 cassette Figure 8 19 ENWW 514 Chapter8 Parts and diagrams ENWW Table 8 16 Tray 2 cassette l TRAY 2 CASSETTE RM1 0470 000CN PLATE END RB2 3003 040CN SPRING COMPRESSION RS6 2021 000CN PAD SEPARATION RC1 0954 000CN Illustrations and parts lists 515 5 A Sale ic Me SKIT Z f A d aN Figure 8 22 HP3700 iy Figure 8 20 Pick up Feed assembly 1 of 2 516 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams ENWW ENWW Illustrations and parts lists 517 Pick up Feed assembly 2 of 2 Figure 8 21 ENWW 518 Chapter8 Parts and diagrams Table 8 17 Pick up Feed assembly ENWW Illustrations and parts lists 519 HP3500 3550 HP3700 HP3700 HP3700 HP3700 Figure 8 22 Tray 2 cassette pick up assembly 520 Chapter8 Parts and diagrams ENWW Table 8 18 Tray 2 cassette pick up assembly PHOTO INTERRUPTER TLP1241 WG8 5362 000CN ENWW Illustrations and parts lists 521 Face down delivery assembly 23 Figure 8 ENWW 522 Chapter8 Parts and diagrams Table 8 19 Face down delivery assembly D FACE DOWN DELIVERY ASSEMBLY RM1 0469 000CN PHOTO INTERRUPTER TLP1241 WG8 5362 000CN ENWW Illustrations and parts lists 523
16. FUSER DOWN 2 Use when FUSER DOWN 1 did not completely solve the problem Control panel troubleshooting 413 Table 7 44 Print quality menu continued em 0 us mem OPTIMIZEcontinued FILM OFFSET Use when fuser electrostatic offset occurs like fuser hot offset but is caused by an electrostatic charge on the fuser film GHOST PREVENTION Use when positive ghost appears PRE ROTATION Use when a repetitive horizontal line occurs every 77 mm due to a print cartridge drum stoppage or use to reduce non uniform color areas in overhead transparencies RESTORE OPTIMIZE Restores default values CREATE CLEANING PAGE Prints a cleaning page to be used for cleaning the fuser roller This page contains instructions for processing the cleaning page See Cleaning the printer and accessories for more information PROCESS CLEANING PAGE After the cleaning page is loaded in Tray 1 this menu item allows the printer to process the cleaning page The cleaning process takes a few moments See Cleaning the printer and accessories for more information CALIBRATE NOW n a Performs all printer calibrations to optimize print quality System setup menu The system setup menu allows you to make changes to default settings for general printer configuration such as PowerSave Time printer personality language and jam recovery 414 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW ENWW Table 7 45 System setup submenu e
17. sse 301 Pick up solenoid SL3 removal 500 sheet feeder sssesssssseees 301 Paper sensor PS3 removal 500 sheet feeder sss 302 ENWW Conventions ix 7 Troubleshooting Chapter eec 303 nuigoreit rito pH 306 Troubleshooting process ssssssssee eene nennen neren nennen nennen enne nnns 307 Pre troubleshooting checklist celis sesese essen keen E 307 Troubleshooting flowchart esse eene eene ener nenne 308 Troubleshooting pOWer On 2 2 citet in n tona tana Led 310 Printer error troubleshooting ssseeseeeeene nennen nnne nnn nenne 312 otatus messages n pe er Neapel Gase c a d gu ERR Edd adopt Dd idea needa 312 Warong messages arseno anta tpe aan ei da ert atom ota iPad e voee T 312 Enor MOSSAGES ereina dpa ded aea odes du pi due du E RU du v cuc aca dc AA RR EVER 312 Critical emor messages jee icona cet ded en aro T duele deae 312 Alphabetical printer messages sssssssssssssseeeneenenee nennen nemen estne 312 Numerical printer messages ettet tette iban inh adn deoa nne abd gnam eth Adae ce Lana 327 Replacement parts configuration eesesssssssssssssessesesse nennen nennen nnns 352 Formatter and DC Controller replaced at the same time ssssssssssss 352 Formatter New replacement configuration ses 352 Formatter previou
18. ssssesee emen 224 Developing engaging drive assembly removal seeseeee 225 Pick up feed assembly removal 1 of 13 sssssse 226 Pick up feed assembly removal 2 of 13 sss 226 Pick up feed assembly removal 3 Of 13 sss 227 Right swing rod arm reassembly ssssssssseee emen 227 Pick up feed assembly removal 4 Of 13 sssssseee 228 Pick up feed engaging rack assembly replacement 1 of 2 229 Pick up feed engaging rack assembly replacement 2 of 2 229 Print cartridge engaging pins replacement see 229 Pick up feed assembly removal 5 Of 13 ssssssse 230 Pick up feed assembly removal 6 Of 13 sss 231 Gear plate gear locations replacement sessssssssssssses 231 Pick up feed assembly removal 7 of 13 sss 232 Pick up feed assembly removal 8 Of 13 ssssssss 232 Pick up feed assembly removal 9 of 13 sss 233 Pick up feed assembly removal 10 of 13 ssssssssee 233 Pick up feed assembly removal 11 of 13 sssssssse 234 Pick up feed assembly removal 12 of 13 ssssssssse 234 Pick up feed assembly removal 13 of 13 ssssssss 235 Main assemblies parts location sssssssssssse 236 Tray 1 pick up
19. Environment sensor I Secondary transfer roller p J engagement sensor Cassette Tray 2 pickup solenoid Ss ca Multi purpose Tray 1 pickup solenoid EP cartridge 1 l I Primary charging roller 1 l Developing cylinder i I I I I I I l Duplexing feed solenoid Secondary transfer roller ES SL engaging solenoid Photosensitive drum Registration clutch Memory tag Memory controller EE EEEE sw Door open detection AC input i Low voltage 143 3V j on switch m power supply sy p 4 circuit ors Formatter i K cartridge drive clutch Developing cylinder engaging clutch l l I 1 Fuser drive pev ul l i i p Hj eS Es di Figure 5 5 DC controller circuit 120 Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW ENWW Block functions CPU IC1001 The 16 bit single chip microcomputer that constitutes the CPU incorporates ROM and RAM and controls the following operations of the printer according to the control programs stored in the ROM 1 Printer engine sequence 2 Fuser heater drive circuit fuser safety monitor circuit 3 Solenoids 4 Clutches 5 Sensors switches ASIC 1C1002 The application specific IC ASIC is used to interface to the IC the memory the external devices and so on It controls the following operations of the printer according to the commands from the CPU Laser scanner Communication with the formatter Hig
20. HP Web Jetadmin software Supplies status page contains information on toner level page count and estimated pages remaining No shake cartridge design Printer checks for authentic HP print cartridges at cartridge installation Internet enabled supply ordering capabilities using HP Toolbox ENWW Printer assemblies Front and rear features The two figures below show the location of each major assembly in the printer These assemblies are described in the Installation and configuration chapter Figure 1 7 Front view HP Color LaserJet 3500 3550 and 3700 series printers shown with additional 500 sheet paper feeder On off switch Tray 3 optional 500 sheets of standard paper Tray 2 250 sheets of standard paper Tray 1 100 sheets of standard paper Front door Printer control panel Output bin extender for use with all media types Output bin 150 sheets of standard paper DIMM access door available on the HP Color LaserJet 3700 series printer o 00 C0 n2LN ENWW Printer assemblies 9 Se i i Me il VAL 4 Figure 1 8 E b Q O pa Rear view HP Color LaserJet 3500 3550 and 3700 series printers shown with additional 500 sheet paper feeder Upper rear door USB connection Power connection Tray 3 optional On off switch OMANDOAKRWDND 10 Chapter 1 Printer description Parallel connection available on the HP Color LaserJet 3700
21. If this error occurs and no jam exists verify that the two pick up assembly connectors are securely seated To locate these connectors open the front door and remove the connector cover part number RC 1488 000CN on the lower front right side When the paper does not pass the registration paper sensor PS4 within time T after a paper is fed from the registration roller the CPU judges it a pickup stationary jam After considerable use 150M pages or more this jam may be the result of torn mylar tabs on the pick up assembly If they are torn replace the assembly part number RM1 456 000CN When the paper does not reach the fuser delivery paper sensor PS7 within time T after a paper is fed from the registration roller the CPU judges it a fuser delay jam When the paper does not pass the fuser delivery paper sensor PS7 within time T after paper has reached the fuser delivery paper sensor PS7 the CPU judges it a fuser stationary jam When the paper does not reach the face down paper sensor PS8 within time T after paper has reached the fuser delivery paper sensor PS7 the CPU judges it a delivery stationary jam Location Action Go to jam Location areas 1 Tray 1 pick up area 2 Tray 2 pick up feed area 3 Tray 3 pick up area 1 Tray 1 pick up area 2 Tray 2 pick up feed area 3 Tray 3 pick up area 4 transfer feed area 6 fuser face down delivery are
22. ssessssssseeeenee nennen 223 Developing engaging drive assembly removal sss 225 Pick up feed assembly removal eese tenente nete te daba sed RAR 225 Main sss moy PINS caini T 236 Tray 1 pick up roller removal ssssssssssssssesseseeene ener tnnt 237 Tray 1 separation pad removal sssssssssssssssseseee eene enemies 237 Tray 2 pick up roller removal oios arraien nnna nai aia a aaa nennen nnne 238 Tray 2 separation pad removal sssssssssssssseseeee eene tenen 238 Secondary transfer charging roller removal ssee e 239 Fuser sleeve unit removal to dee Hi rd ba a i p ER di 239 Pressure roller removal sssssseeneeenenenen mener nnne 239 Main thermistor sub thermistor removal sssssseee emn 239 Thermoswitch removal sssssssseeee enn nennen enne nennen nennen nns 239 Feed guide unit removal 2 een ridere eg d de deca E d 240 Swing guide removal right sssssssssssseneene enne m een eren 242 Swing guide removal left niei EE RAEE 245 SII 250 Door Switch SWT removal eseiieeisiisesesensee nennen EE 250 Test print switch SW1001 removal sssssee enne eem 251 Power switch SW3001 removal sess ennemis 251 SISOS Mc 252 Tray 1 multip
23. 4 Remove five screws 3 and remo C ve the image drive assembly 4 Figure 6 23 Image drive assembly removal Reinstallation tip When replacing the image drive assembly ensure that the engaging pins are in the engaged position 1 as shown below They should not be in the disengaged position 2 If the pins are not in the disengaged position turn the gear 3 in the direction of the arrow 4 until it stops Reinstallation tip Remember replacement procedures are removal procedure steps performed in reverse order It is important that step 2 above be performed after this step step 4 to maintain correct orientation of the gears and pins with respect to the engaging rack mechanism Reinstallation tip For reassembly remove the right front top cover screw 1 If this screw is not removed it can prevent the upper left corner of the image drive assembly from seating correctly 224 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW Developing engaging drive assembly removal 1 Remove the laser scanner assembly See Laser scanner assembly removal 2 Disconnect one connector 1 3 Remove two screws 2 and remove the developing engaging drive assembly 3 Reinstallation tip Gear 4 may come off during this disassembly Make sure to replace it when reassembling Figure 6 24 Developing engaging drive assembly removal Pick up feed assembly removal 1 Remove the right cover See Right cover removal
24. ENWW Motor and fans 277 Circuit Boards Figure 6 115 Circuit board locations NOTE 278 DC controller PCB Memory controller PCB High voltage power supply PCBs Low voltage power supply PCB Formatter PCB Control panel PCB aOnahWN DC controller PCB removal When the DC controller PCB is replaced in addition to replacing the PCB a configuration procedure must be performed For information on this configuration refer to Chapter 8 Replacement parts configuration 1 Remove the left cover See Left cover removal 2 Disconnect all cable connections 19 connectors for the HP Color LaserJet 3500 3550 series printer and 20 connectors for the HP Color LaserJet 3700 series printer Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW 3 Remove four screws 1 and remove the PCB 2 Figure 6 116 DC controller PCB removal Formatter PCB removal The HP Color LaserJet 3500 3550 series printer and the HP Color LaserJet 3700 series printer have different formatter PCBs and formatter enclosures The removal procedure for the PCB is different as described below NOTE When the formatter PCB is replaced in addition to replacing the PCB a configuration procedure must be performed For information on this configuration refer to Chapter 8 Replacement parts configuration 1 Remove the left front cover See Left front cover removal 2 Forthe HP Color LaserJet 3500 3550 series printer perform steps a and b be
25. Paper use ENERGY STARQO is a U S registered mark As an ENERGY STAR partner Hewlett Packard Company has determined that this product meets ENERGY STAR Guidelines for energy efficiency For more information see http www energystar gov Toner consumption APPROVED mode uses significantly less toner which might extend the life of the print cartridge Paper use This product s optional automatic two sided printing feature duplex printing can reduce paper usage and the resulting demands on natural resources The HP Color LaserJet 3550 3550n 3700 and 3700n printers support the manual duplex feature Plastics Plastic parts over 25 grams are marked according to international standards that enhance the ability to identify plastics for recycling purposes at the end of the product s life Environmental product stewardship program 31 HP LaserJet printing supplies In many countries regions this product s printing supplies for example print cartridges can be returned to HP through the HP Printing Supplies Returns and Recycling Program An easy to use and free takeback program is available in more than 30 countries regions Multi lingual program information and instructions are included in every new HP LaserJetprint cartridge and supplies package HP printing supplies returns and recycling program information Since 1992 HP has offered HP LaserJet supplies return and recycling free of charge in 8696 of the world market w
26. SEPARATION PAD ASS Y RM1 0739 000CN Table 8 17 on page 519 SHAFT DRIVE RC1 1500 000CN Table 8 8 on page 491 SHEET CABLE RETAINING RC1 2437 000CN Table 8 9 on page 495 SOLENOID RK2 0141 000CN Table 8 8 on page 492 SOLENOID RK2 0143 000CN Table 8 13 on page 509 SOLENOID RK2 0145 000CN Table 8 17 on page 519 SOLENOID RK2 0141 000CN Table 8 17 on page 519 548 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams ENWW Table 8 27 Alphabetical parts list meeps ey Description Table and page SPRING COMPRESSION RS6 2021 000CN Table 8 16 on page 515 SPRING COMPRESSION RC1 2191 000CN Table 8 26 on page 537 SPRING GROUNDING RC1 1177 000CN Table 8 9 on page 495 SPRING GROUNDING RC1 1537 000CN Table 8 12 on page 501 SPRING LEAF RB2 6450 000CN Table 8 24 on page 533 SPRING LEAF HP3500 3550 RC1 1508 000CN Table 8 13 on page 509 SPRING TENSION RC1 1149 000CN Table 8 12 on page 501 SPRING TENSION RC1 1259 000CN Table 8 12 on page 501 SPRING TENSION RC1 1260 000CN Table 8 12 on page 501 SPRING TENSION RC1 1548 000CN Table 8 12 on page 501 SPRING TENSION RC1 1185 000CN Table 8 13 on page 505 SPRING TENSION RC1 1648 000CN Table 8 13 on page 505 SPRING TORSION RC1 1328 000CN Table 8 11 on page 499 SPRING TORSION RC1 1464 000CN Table 8 17 on page 519 STOPPER ARM LEFT RC1 1626 000CN Table 8 13 on page 505 STOPPER ARM LEFT RC1 1627 000CN Table 8 13 on page 505 STOPPER ARM RIGHT RC1 1546 000CN Table 8 12 on page
27. This command disables the unsolicited JOB status for the I O channel that delivered the command For this printer it duplicates the function of PJL USTATUS JOB OFF AND PJL USTATUS DEVICE OFF NOTE All commands not supported by this printer s PUL command set are returned with the message PJL XXXX lt CR gt lt LF gt lt CR gt lt LF gt 406 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW Control panel troubleshooting When you press v to enter the menus the high level menus are displayed in the following order e INFORMATION e PAPER HANDLING e CONFIGURE DEVICE e DIAGNOSTICS e SERVICE A menu map shows how individual items are configured within each of these menus shows a sample of one page of the menu map The menu map prints on three pages Printing a menu map Press Menu to enter the MENUS Press w to highlight INFORMATION Press v to select INFORMATION Press w to highlight PRINT MENU MAP Press v to select PRINT MENU MAP E LEE UE ND LC Figure 7 6 Printer menu map HP 3700 shown Information menu Use the Information menu to access and print specific printer information ENWW Control panel troubleshooting 407 NOTE Table 7 41 Information menu Wesen 0 omi PRINT MENU MAP Prints the control panel menu map which shows the layout and current settings of the control panel menu items PRINT CONFIGURATION Prints the printer configuration page PRINT SUPPLIES AND STATUS Prints the estimated remaining l
28. eiie ettet trio Ca eR ae ROGA IER ERR aa AE EA Ee Ea aoa 445 Eriglrie Tesets ote deem ti ee c ettet edd 446 Gold reset x5 eph b ue 446 NVRAM initialiZation 3 3 ia eec tti tn EH Y Me e Eee PL Ent TRUE EFL CEP Le Dep tds 446 CalibrationXypass 2 de otto tte tea tee ott A 447 Calibrate NOW i emen ee RR eda ded pie t e intet ede 447 Seryiceimeru 155 a De eene a PIRE E RR ERMN IUE 448 Accessing the Service menu iie ii Ie ede HERE ue he dena E Med bx E Sedan RE Ete needs 448 PAGANS 8 sn fate REID NUIT 450 Main patser ER 451 Ki cp 452 SOLiSO S xh eene atto de ate en etr dte dae ces tud usu eue eem ee eedasendes 453 Solenoids and clutches eee edocet ec eei ee e e e d Rd d t 454 Motors and fans bei eee pete t E n b to 455 PCBS 2 215 ai aie ior e e ER E MR eee et e eb Seal e eee dae e re bor d aera 456 Connector locations x rnc tpe rated do ete tetera te xke eed ete doo 458 500 sheet paper feeder connectors ssssssssssssssseeeeen eene 462 General circuit diagram 22 22 Hp e eu ette eed nis 463 Chapter contents 305 Introduction This troubleshooting chapter assumes the reader has a basic understanding of the color laser printing process Explanations of each mechanical assembly printer system and the basic theory of operation are found in Chapter 5 Do not perform any of these troubleshooting processes without fully understanding the function of each mechanism This chapter contains the foll
29. hp color LaserJet 3500 3550 and 3700 series printer HP Color LaserJet 3500 3550 and 3700 series printers Service Manual 2004 Copyright Hewlett Packard Development Company L P Reproduction adaptation or translation without prior written permission is prohibited except as allowed under the copyright laws The information contained herein is subject to change without notice The only warranties for HP products and Services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein Part number Q5990 90939 Edition 1 10 2004 Trademark Credits Microsoft is a U S registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation MS DOSO is a U S registered trademark of the Microsoft Corporation PantoneG Inc s check standard trademark for color PostScript amp is a trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated TrueType is a U S trademark of Apple Computer Inc UNIX is a registered trademark of The Open Group Windows MS Windows and Windows NT are U S registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation Conventions NOTE CAUTION WARNING ENWW This manual uses the following conventions Color is used to emphasize items that are important to the material under discussion Bold is used for menu items to c
30. 2 Open the front door and remove the transfer unit See Transfer unit removal 3 Remove the print cartridges See Print cartridge removal ENWW Main Assemblies 225 4 Remove two screws 1 and disconnect the right rod bracket 2 from the front door Figure 6 25 Pick up feed assembly removal 1 of 13 5 Remove two screws 1 and disconnect the left rod bracket 2 from the front door Figure 6 26 Pick up feed assembly removal 2 of 13 226 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW 6 Remove two screws 1 and remove the right swing rod arm 2 Figure 6 27 Pick up feed assembly removal 3 of 13 Reinstallation tip When installing the swing rod arm assembly make sure the short rod is positioned as shown below 1 Figure 6 28 Right swing rod arm reassembly ENWW Main Assemblies 227 7 Push the engaging rack 1 all the way back as shown by the arrow 2 until it stops Figure 6 29 Pick up feed assembly removal 4 of 13 228 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW 8 Remove two screws 3 and remove the swing rod lock guide 4 shown in the above figure Reinstallation tip When reassembling the swing rod guide the engaging rack callout 1 below should be positioned to the back to the right with respect to the printer as shown below The engaging rack will normally be in this back position due to the tension of the spring Also the gear behind the engaging rack should be turned all
31. 28 to 43 Ib bond or CARDSTOCK 135 g m to 216 g m 50 to 80 Ib cover as the media type or print from a tray that is configured for heavy paper Because this setting affects all print jobs it is important to return the printer back to its original settings once the job has printed CAUTION In general do not use paper that is heavier than the media specification recommended for this printer Doing so can cause misfeeds paper jams reduced print quality and excessive mechanical wear HP LaserJet Tough paper When printing on HP LaserJet Tough paper use the following guidelines Handle HP LaserJet Tough paper only by the edges Oils from your fingers deposited on HP LaserJet Tough paper can cause print quality problems Use only HP LaserJet Tough paper with this printer HP products are designed to work together for optimum printing results In either the software application or the printer driver select TOUGH PAPER as the media type or print from a tray that is configured for HP LaserJet Tough paper Preprinted forms and letterhead When printing on preprinted forms and letterhead use the following guidelines Forms and letterhead must be printed with heat resistant inks that will not melt vaporize or release hazardous emissions when subjected to the printer fusing temperature of approximately 190 C 374 F for 0 1 second Inks must be non flammable and should not adversely affect any printer rollers Forms and letterh
32. 509 IMAGE DRIVE ASSEMBLY RM1 0415 040CN Table 8 14 on page 511 LABEL HIGH TEMP CAUTION RC1 2422 000CN Table 8 10 on page 497 LASER SCANNER ASS Y RM1 1142 000CN Table 8 10 on page 497 LEFT COVER ASS Y RM1 0466 000CN Table 8 5 on page 485 LEFT FRONT COVER ASS Y RM1 0467 000CN Table 8 5 on page 485 LEFT SWING FRAME ASS Y RM1 0439 000CN Table 8 22 on page 529 LENS RC1 1050 000CN Table 8 13 on page 505 LEVER I T B COUPLING RC1 1248 000CN Table 8 12 on page 501 LEVER INTERLOCK SWITCH RC1 1176 000CN Table 8 6 on page 487 LEVER ITB COUPLIN 1 RC1 1247 000CN Table 8 6 on page 487 LEVER SENSOR RC1 1514 000CN Table 8 13 on page 509 LEVER SENSOR RC1 1456 000CN Table 8 17 on page 519 544 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams ENWW Table 8 27 Alphabetical parts list ieee es ey Description Table and page LEVER SWING LOCK LEFT RC1 1647 000CN Table 8 13 on page 505 LEVER SWING LOCK RIGHT RC1 1148 000CN Table 8 12 on page 501 Low voltage power supply PCB 110 127V Low RK2 0157 000CN Table 8 3 on page 481 voltage power supply PCB 220 240V RK2 0158 000CN MEDIA SENSOR ASS Y RM1 0452 000CN Table 8 17 on page 519 Memory controller PCB RM1 0508 000CN Table 8 3 on page 481 MEMORY CONTROLLER PCB ASS Y RM1 0508 000CN Table 8 11 on page 499 MICROSWITCH RK2 0150 000CN Table 8 10 on page 497 MOTOR M1 RK2 0137 000CN Table 8 12 on page 501 MOTOR M2 RK2 0138 000CN Table 8 12 on page 501 MOTOR M5 RK2 0139 00
33. Check the formatter Check the firmware Check the display for proper connection and operation Check the display for an error code Check the firmware Check the formatter Check the display for an error code If the printer display does not light perform an engine test to check the engine You must have paper loaded in Tray 2 for the engine test Figure 7 12 Diagnostics flowchart ENWW Diagnostics 433 HP 3700 HP 3500 Figure 7 13 Formatter LED Engine diagnostics This section provides an overview of the engine diagnostics incorporated into the HP Color LaserJet 3500 3550 and 3700 series printer The printer contains extensive internal diagnostics that help in troubleshooting print quality issues paper path issues noise issues component issues and timing issues Diagnostics mode Some of the diagnostic tests automatically put the printer into a special diagnostics mode The special diagnostics mode allows the printer to perform actions that it normally could not because the printer would enter an error state Always follow the control panel directions in the Diagnostic menu to properly exit the special diagnostics mode and return the printer to a normal state Diagnostics that put the printer into special diagnostics mode There are four diagnostic tests that put the printer into a special state e Disable cartridge check e Paper path sensor test e Manual sensor test e Component test While the pri
34. Figure 5 22 ENWW 5 Upon receipt of BD1 and BD2 signals the formatter sends the VIDEO signals VDO1 VDO1 VDO2 VDO2 to the DC controller to align the scanning starting position of the image horizontally Image mask control This control prevents laser beam emission in a non image area except during the unblanking interval The DC controller puts the laser driver circuit to Force LD OFF mode to force the LD OFF while the laser beam scans a non image area except during the unblanking interval This is called the image masked status during which the LD does not emit light even when VIDEO signals VDO VDO are sent The timing to start the image mask control depends on the paper size information sent from the formatter This printer cannot detect the Tray 2 cassette paper size If the paper size measured by the registration paper sensor PS4 is smaller than the paper size information the CPU masks the image forcefully to keep the secondary transfer roller from being soiled M K image masking gt g Y C image masking EG gE BD Oc BD l mo n l 8s Ti BE E Ti Left Right masking pe Scanning direction Scanning direction Saal p T3 2 mm 2 mm 2 mm 2 mm Image mask control Notes on the figure e The shaded area indicates the area where an image can be written by the laser beam e The times T1 T2 and T3 depend on the paper size e Time T4 depends on the color e The
35. Figure 6 102 Feed motor removal 3 of 3 Delivery motor M2 removal 1 Remove the right cover See Right cover removal 2 Remove one connector 1 3 Remove two screws 2 and remove the delivery motor 3 Figure 6 103 Delivery motor removal Drum motor M3 removal 1 Remove the image drive assembly See Image drive assembly removal ENWW Motor and fans 271 2 Remove five screws 1 remove the gear plate 2 and remove two gears 3 Figure 6 104 Drum motor removal 1 of 3 3 Remove the face down delivery assembly See Face down delivery assembly removal 4 Remove the laser scanner assembly See Laser scanner assembly removal 5 Disconnect two connectors 1 remove two screws 2 and remove the developing engaging sensor unit 3 located next to the drum motor 4 Figure 6 105 Drum motor removal 2 of 3 272 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW 6 Remove four screws 1 and remove the drum motor see callout 4 in the previous figure Figure 6 106 Drum motor removal 3 of 3 Developing motor M4 removal 1 Remove the image drive assembly See Image drive assembly removal 2 Remove the face down delivery assembly See Face down delivery assembly removal 3 Remove the laser scanner assembly See Laser scanner assembly removal 4 Remove the e ring 1 and one gear 2 Figure 6 107 Developing motor removal 1 of 3 ENWW Motor and fans 273 5 Remove
36. Figure 6 30 Figure 6 31 Figure 6 32 Figure 6 33 Figure 6 34 Figure 6 35 Figure 6 36 Figure 6 37 Figure 6 38 Figure 6 39 Figure 6 40 Figure 6 41 Figure 6 42 Figure 6 43 Figure 6 44 Figure 6 45 Figure 6 46 Figure 6 47 Figure 6 48 Figure 6 49 Figure 6 50 Figure 6 51 Figure 6 52 Figure 6 53 Figure 6 54 Figure 6 55 Figure 6 56 Figure 6 57 Figure 6 58 Figure 6 59 Figure 6 60 Figure 6 61 Figure 6 62 Figure 6 63 Left front cover removal 2 of 3 ssssssssssssseeeeennee 212 Left front cover removal 3 of 3 sss 213 Riglit cover removal entier ertet etiara ER regt ER 213 Top cover removal 2 ete egest edet uta ea eee el ae 214 Upper rear door removal sss nnne nennen 214 Rear cover removal uicit bodie tL ende ita tide cht eid iens 215 Lower rear door removal eroaa ss aR a aA eene enne 215 Tray removal iieri rere eoe race e eie ex uite edite e eate 216 Main internal assemblies sssssssseeeeemeennnns 217 Transfer unit removal ssssssessssseeneeene menn 219 Transfer unit installation sssse emm emen 219 Print cartridge removal die erbe ed eee ie e died 220 Fuser tomova idit re tatio nta tu ter irata 221 Face down delivery assembly removal eeee 222 Laser scanner assembly removal sss 223 Image drive assembly removal
37. Fuser area jams area 6 1 Open the lower rear door rear output bin NOTE Make sure the green pressure levers are not in the down position If the green pressure levers are down they can cause a jam message to display on the printer control panel 2 Ifthe paper is visible press down on the green levers and remove the paper Return the green levers to the up position after removing the paper and close the lower rear door rear output bin ENWW Paper path troubleshooting 373 If the paper is not visible turn the printer off 4 Slide out the lower rear door rear output bin tray extender 5 Remove the lower rear door rear output bin by lifting and pulling the right side of the door while pressing the tab with the ridges on the left side of the door WARNING The fuser is hot Wait ten minutes after turning the printer off before removing the fuser 6 Place your thumbs on the blue ridges near the warning label and using your fingers pull up on the blue latches 374 Chapter Troubleshooting ENWW 7 Pullthe fuser out of the printer E Vu n D EHE cas co Z oo e 9399 Am 00090 00 09 jan Oo
38. HUOLTO HP Color LaserJet 3500 3500n 3550 3550n 3700 3700n 3700dn 3700dtn kirjoittimen sis ll ei ole k ytt j n huollettavissa olevia kohteita Laitteen saa avata ja huoltaa ainoastaan sen huoltamiseen koulutettu henkil T llaiseksi huoltotoimenpiteeksi ei katsota v riainekasetin vaihtamista paperiradan puhdistusta tai muita k ytt j n k sikirjassa lueteltuja k ytt j n teht v ksi tarkoitettuja yll pitotoimia jotka voidaan suorittaa ilman erikoisty kaluja VARO Mik li kirjoittimen suojakotelo avataan olet alttiina n kym tt m llelasers teilylle laitteen ollessa toiminnassa l katso s teeseen VARNING Om laserprinterns skyddsh lje ppnas d apparaten r i funktion uts ttas anv ndaren f r osynlig laserstr Ining Betrakta ej str len Tiedot laitteessa k ytett v n laserdiodin s teilyominaisuuksista Aallonpituus 775 795 nm Teho 5 m W Luokan 3B laser 38 Chapter 1 Printer description ENWW FCC Regulations NOTE ENWW This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy If this equipment is not installed and used in accordance with the instructions it may cause harmful interference to radio communications However there is
39. Object tagging combined with optimized default settings produces great color out of the box In the Windows environment the Automatic and Manual color options are on the Color tab in the printer driver Standard red green blue SRGB Standard red green blue SRGB is a world wide color standard originally developed by HP and Microsoft as a common color language for monitors input devices scanners and digital cameras and output devices printers and plotters It is the default color space used for HP products Microsoft operating systems the World Wide Web and most office software sold today The sRGB standard is representative of the typical Windows PC monitor today and the convergence standard for high definition television 384 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW NOTE ENWW Factors such as the type of monitor you use and the room s lighting can affect the appearance of colors on your screen For more information see Managing color The latest versions of Adobe PhotoShop CorelDRAW Microsoft Office and many other applications use SRGB to communicate color Most importantly as the default color space in Microsoft operating systems sRGB has gained broad adoption as a means to exchange color information between applications and devices using a common definition that ensures typical users will experience greatly improved color matching The sRGB standard improves your ability to match colors between the printer the PC monitor an
40. PS12 replacement 355 476 DC controller PCB replacement 353 354 475 DC controller previously installed replacement 353 474 enhanced I O EIO 69 formatter PCB and DC controller PCB replacement at same time 352 474 formatter PCB replacement 352 474 fuser replacement 355 476 laser scanner assembly replacement 355 476 media sensor PS5 replacement 354 media sensor PS5 replacement 476 network 68 parallel 67 transfer unit replacement 355 477 USB 66 configuration page printing 428 connectors locating 458 control panel diagnostics 436 errormessages 312 locking 76 overlays partnumbers 470 troubleshooting 407 control panel PCB removal and replacement 287 controls cartridge cleaning 163 color misregistration 174 developing cylinder engaging disengaging 162 developing motor 125 drum motor 124 environmental 178 fan 125 feed speed 186 heater temperature 127 horizontal synchronous 142 image density D max 179 image halftone D half 179 image mask 143 image stabilization 177 ITB transfer unit 167 laser 140 laser emission 142 562 Index memory tag 160 phase 145 primary transfer roller engaging disengaging 171 reverse 193 scanner motor 144 secondary transfer roller engaging disengaging 172 speed 145 video interface 135 country region of origin determining 22 cover left 500 sheet paper feeder removal and replacement 297 cover right 500 sheet paper feeder removal and replacement 297 crooked images 368 CSSO
41. Reseat the connectors J5004 and J1016 between the delivery motor and the DC controller PCB 7 Faulty developing engaging clutch Replace the developing engaging clutch 8 Faulty delivery motor Replace the delivery motor 9 Faulty DC controller PCB Replace the DC controller PCB ENWW Printer error troubleshooting 349 Table 7 3 Numerical printer messages continued Message 62 NO SYSTEM 64 PRINTER ERROR For help press alternates with To continue turn off then on 68 X PERMANENT STORAGE FULL alternates with To continue press v 68 X PERMANENT STORAGE WRITE FAIL alternates with To continue press v 68 X STORAGE ERROR SETTINGS CHANGED alternates with To continue press v 79 XXXX PRINTER ERROR alternates with To continue turn off then on 350 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting No system was found Scan buffer error A non volatile storage device is full Press v to clear the message Printing can continue but there could be unexpected behavior X Description 0 for onboard NVRAM 1 for removable flash disk A non volatile storage device is failing to write Press v to clear the message Printing can continue but there could be unexpected behavior X Description 0 for onboard NVRAM 1 for removable flash disk One or more printer settings saved in the non volatile storage device is invalid and has been reset to its factory default Press v to clear the mess
42. See Supported media weights and sizes for a complete list of available sizes 408 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW ENWW Table 7 42 Paper handling menu continued mtem e onem TRAY 1 TYPE A list of available types appears TRAY 2 SIZE TRAY 3 SIZE A list of available sizes appears TRAY 2 TYPE TRAY 3 TYPE A list of available types appears Configure device menu Allows you to configure the media type for Tray 1 The default value is ANY SIZE See Supported media weights and sizes for a complete list of available types Allows you to configure the paper size for Tray 2 or Tray 3 The default size is Letter or A4 depending on the country region See Supported media weights and sizes for a complete list of available sizes Allows you to configure the paper type for Tray 2 or Tray 3 The default is PLAIN See Supported media weights and sizes for a complete list of available types The configure device menu allows you to change or reset the default print settings to adjust the print quality and to change the system configuration and I O options Printing menu These settings affect only jobs without identified properties Most jobs identify all of the properties and override the values set from this menu This menu can also be used to set default paper size and type Table 7 43 Printing menu eme ues qmemm COPIES 1 32000 Allows you to set the default number of copies The d
43. See the Paper jam detection section for details ENWW Paper feeder 199 200 Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW Removal and replacement Chapter contents ENWW This chapter contains the following sections Chapter Content 201 Introduction eiennenn ha aaeeteetedediaes A tleraaeed wtanede A E Ea a eaeeaa eee ue 204 Removal and replacement strategy sss emen 204 Repair NOCES E 204 Caution regarding electrostatic discharge ESD sssee 204 REQUIRE TOONS C EE 204 Types Of SCIOWS E 205 SUID PUSS gee Sees dees 207 Print cartridges and transfer unit sess 208 eu m 209 Front door removal s sensi naiiai a E nn nennen eterne ene a aa ener sns 209 Left COVER NEMOVAll e I 210 Left front cover removal 2 cccceesecceeceeeeeeeeeeeseeeeaaaeeaeeeeeeeeeeeedsegeendaaaeeeseeeeeeeeteeeeeees 211 Right cover removal 2 retient p cec cdd esed ddr edd dett adea 213 Top cover remoYVal rnnt nre hae ee eR REX Se EROR X NN aea TENE NR R n ARR AMR TK U RES REAR 214 Upper rear door removal sss ener nennen nnne nnne nnns 214 Rear cover removal ssssssssssssssssssse
44. The following is the sequence of the DC controller PCB 1 The power switch is turned on the DC controller is supplied with the DC power from the low voltage power supply unit 2 The CPU starts to control the operations of the printer When the printer enters the STBY period the CPU sends signals to drive each load such as the laser diode the motors and the solenoids based on the print command and the image data received from the formatter The block diagram of this circuit is illustrated in Figure 5 5 DC controller circuit ENWW Engine control system 119 NOTE See the General circuit diagram in Chapter 7 for detailed information on the printer circuitry DC controller PCB Multi purpose Tray 1 paper sensor E i KC IC1011 O Feed motor Cassette Tray 2 paper sensor E Registration paper uU sensor dum Primary transfer engaging motor Media sensor d Kv Developing motor Fuser front paper sensor H l v Drum motor Fuser delivery paper l iu ES y pap Ea ae l Laser Scanner unit Face down delivery ru ee i paper sensor l I Scanner motor h Reversed paper sensor l sensor I _ aS Face up tray sensor U l i Secondary transfer roller Color misregistration l l l l ITB Transfer unit I I Primary transfer roller j I I Waste toner full sensor H Developing engaging sensor IC1001 cS sensor
45. The printer detects the presence of the fuser The fuser is detected by the DC controller during the WAIT period The DC controller determines that the fuser unit is not installed if it detects the following two conditions and then sends an error message to the formatter 1 The FUSER DELIVERY PAPER DETECTION signal AFFPSSNS indicates the presence of paper L 2 The temperature at the sub thermistor does not exceed 40 C 104 F after 500 ms of fuser temperature control Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW Figure 5 14 ENWW Low voltage power supply circuit This circuit converts AC voltage from the power supply receptacle to DC power and supply each load p a EL ee a p 4 ower supply unit M 1 i D i 1 Fuser i nol A E rene l rl bd iDC controller PCB l to 0d I LAVA UE I 4 Noise ACN control I Fan motor l i Fuse filter circuit lt gt i i We cs ahd dl FU3001 i lesa e annaa j i l 24VA l I I I o Scanner motor l MEET AME l I l S EE E o j I nee l 2 Power supply switch I i 1 24VA i l l b SW3001 I I a 74 Solenoids clutches I 1 MEN Ced I I i I 24VA po TTT l l 3 3V_lPaper feeder opion l Fuse I I pts i I FU3002 l I L ieee l l l l I l I Feeder motor I 1____ Te ee RE I Delivery motor l i i 1 24VB 1 ITB m
46. Unhook two claws 1 and remove the face down delivery paper sensor 2 Figure 6 78 Face down output bin delivery paper sensor removal Reversed paper sensor PS9 removal HP 3700 only 1 Remove the fuser See Fuser removal 2 Remove two screws 1 and remove the reverse guide unit 2 ENWW Sensors 257 3 Loosen the right printer Tray 2 guide See Cassette Tray 2 guide right removal HP 3500 3550 Figure 6 79 Reversed paper sensor removal 1 of 2 4 Remove one connector 1 unhook two claws 2 and remove the sensor 3 In this illustration below the Tray 2 right rail guide is shown attached but is loose allowing you to remove it to access the back side of the sensor to release the two claws from behind Figure 6 80 Reversed paper sensor removal 2 of 2 Duplex feed delivery paper sensor PS10 removal HP 3700 only 1 Remove the feed guide See Feed guide unit removal 2 Disconnect one connector 1 and remove the cables from the cable guide Lift up on the claw 2 slide the cable guide sensor holder assembly back 3 then lift it up to release it 258 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW 3 Unhook two claws from the back and remove the sensor 4 Figure 6 81 Duplex feed delivery paper sensor removal Rear output bin paper sensor PS11 removal 1 Remove the face down delivery assembly See Face down delivery assembly removal 2 Disconnect one connector 1 and unho
47. Y cartridge E 1 X Secondary transfer l roller Image formation system 146 Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW Figure 5 25 ENWW Q2 VDOA VDO4 E K cartridge VDO3 NDO3 J S 2 4 VDO2 VDO2 VDO t VDO1 i if Primary charging 4 Signal path roller Cleaning blade Papet path Photosensitive drum Laser beam Developing blade Primary transfer roller f Developin Laser scanner Q p ras unit O vc n Lo u ITB Z H Fuser film Y cartridge pes C 5 unit j NE Memory tag f M O Q Secondary transfer Pressure roller ITB cleaning roller blade Co Fuser unit D DEV Print command High voltage power supply PCB I I I I I Formatter DC controller PCB i VIDEO signal L I I Image formation system signal paths Print process The print process can be divided into nine steps which are executed in five blocks A toner image is formed on paper as it goes through each process Image formation system 147 The print process blocks and the steps performed in them are listed below Refer to Figure 5 26 Print process diagram to see the placement of the blocks e Electrostatic latent image formation block Forms an electrostatic latent image on the ph
48. an additional configuration page shown below will print for the HP Color LaserJet 3700 series printer only that provides EOI network information LO a E Figure 7 7 Printer configuration page Printer information Event log Installed personalities and options Memory Security Paper trays and options OORUN 428 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW LO Figure 7 8 EIO page HP JetDirect configuration Security settings Network statistics TCP IP settings IPX SPX settings Novell Netware settings AppleTalk settings DLC LLC settings oo NoN AUN Supplies status page The supplies status page illustrates the remaining life for the following printer supplies e Print cartridges all colors e Transfer unit e Fuser To print the supplies status page Press v to enter the MENUS Press to highlight INFORMATION Press v to select INFORMATION Press to highlight PRINT SUPPLIES STATUS 5 Pressv to select PRINT SUPPLIES STATUS The message PRINTING SUPPLIES STATUS appears on the display until the printer finishes printing the supplies status page The printer returns to the Ready state after printing the supplies status page E oup Ex ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 429 NOTE If you are using non HP supplies the supplies status page will not show the remaining life for those supplies e ag a or rer HP Part G der MP Pact 119v Q2AASA 220 1984 Magnes brn Cann z M uus Hr rer
49. contacts to the high voltage PCB or the drum grounding contacts Clean contacts if dirty Replace defective parts if contacts are deformed or damaged Defective high voltage PCB Replace the high voltage PCB Defective DC controller PCB Replace the DC controller PCB Completely blank image Table 7 21 Causes for a completely blank image High voltage PCB is defective no developing bias Replace the high voltage PCB output DC controller PCB is defective Replace the DC controller PCB Calibrate the printer after replacing the DC controller See Calibrate Now later in this chapter All black or solid color Table 7 22 Causes for an all black or solid colored image Poor contacts with the primary charging bias On the problem solid color s cartridge check the developing bias or drum grounding primary charging bias and developing bias contacts to the high voltage PCB or the drum grounding contacts Clean contacts if dirty Replace defective parts if contacts are deformed or damaged ENWW Image defects 393 Table 7 22 Causes for an all black or solid colored image continued C em 00000 Defective cartridge primary charging roller Replace the problem solid color s cartridge High voltage PCB is defective Replace the high voltage PCB DC controller PCB is defective Replace the DC controller PCB Calibrate the printer after replacing the DC controller See Calibrate Now later in this chapter
50. controller instead of the formatter The transfer kit count will not change the actual page count of the transfer kit The transfer kit count can only be reset to zero in the resets menu Range for the Allows you to reset the page count of the HP 3500 0 current fuser if the value is lost This item 60 000 automatically resets to zero when the fuser is replaced and the user selects the HP 3700 3550 choice to reset the fuser count 0 75 000 XXXXXXXXXX Allows you to update the serial number if you replace the formatter If you replace the formatter this item allows you to set the date to the date the printer was first used rather than the date the new formatter was installed See Service ID in this chapter for information on the date format LETTER If the customer uses default paper size of M A4 used in Europe this item allows you to reset the default if you replace the formatter Control panel troubleshooting 421 Tools for troubleshooting NOTE This section contains information about the Printer s embedded Web server Embedded Web server HP Color LaserJet 3700 series printer only Using the embedded Web server HP Color LaserJet 3700 series printer only When the printer is directly connected to a computer use the HP Toolbox to view web pages for the printer status When the printer is connected to the network the embedded Web server is automatically available You may access the embedded
51. event log only 1 Turn the printer off and then back on 2 For the specific error messages perform the indicated action 54 01 Environment Sensor Abnormality 1 The connector in the environment detection signal line is not properly connected Reseat the DC controller PCB connector J1015 2 Defective environment sensor replace the environment sensor 3 Defective DC controller PCB replace the DC controller PCB 54 05 Media sensor error 1 Perform the steps for error 54 32 below 2 Replace the media sensor 3 Replace the DC controller 54 06 54 11 54 12 54 13 54 14 1 Perform a Calibrate Now procedure 2 The DC controller is defective replace the DC controller PCB ENWW Table 7 3 Numerical printer messages continued 54 XX PRINTER 33 0X Scanner Beam Detect ERROR continued adjustment abnormality warning X is the scanner number 1 yellow magenta scanner 2 cyan black scanner 54 30 XX event log only HP3700 only Halftone calibration error XX Description 06 magenta data out of range 07 yellow data out of range 08 black data out of range 09 cyan data out of range ENWW 54 15 54 16 54 17 54 18 54 20 Color misregistration sensor abnormality 1 The connectors between the color misregistration sensor CPR and the DC controller PCB are not connected properly Reseat the color misregistration sensor CPR connectors J505A J505B and the DC control
52. p Display Event Log Is the printer on and displaying a readable message Does the display H indicate any of the ave you YES following YES evaluated READY the OFFLINE Event Log POWERSAVE ON A For paper jams encountered during attempts to print Event Log see Paper path troubleshooting A Show Event Log to display information on current error and correct it A Perform power on checks See note below B B After correcting all Print and messages and evaluate the errors B go to Step 3 Event Log After control panel display becomes functional go to Step 2 C After evaluating the Event Log go to Step 4 Troubleshooting process 309 NOTE If the printer s display is blank but the power on checks pass try printing an engine test page to determine whether the problem is with the engine display or with the formatter See Engine test page for instructions Information Pages Will it print a Configuration Page A Show Event Log to display information on the current error and correct it B Print Configuration Page and verifiy information C After verifying Configuration Page go to Step 5 Troubleshooting power on oO Image Quality Does the print quality meet customer requirements A Print the PQ troubleshooting pages to identify the problem B Perform corrective actions C After meeting print quality requi
53. printers These procedures are provided below Cassette Tray 2 guide right removal HP 3700 1 Remove the transfer unit and the print cartridges See Transfer unit removal and Print cartridge removal 2 Remove the lower rear door See Lower rear door rear output bin removal 3 Remove the fuser See Fuser removal 4 Remove the paper drive gear plate and the paper drive gear and shaft See Pick up feed assembly removal steps 1 through 12 5 Remove the left cover See Left cover removal 6 Remove two screws 1 and remove the duplex guide 2 from the back of the printer Figure 6 136 Right Tray 2 guide removal 1 of 6 7 Turn the printer on its back side carefully ENWW Tray 2 cassette parts removal 291 8 Remove eight screws 1 from the printer s bottom plate 2 and remove the plate Figure 6 137 Right Tray 2 guide removal 2 of 6 9 Release the duplex guide pan by lifting up on the release lever 1 then swing the pan 2 down Observe the grounding spring 3 while swinging the pan down The spring should slide out of the slot 4 Figure 6 138 Right Tray 2 guide removal 3 of 6 292 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW 10 Lower the duplex guide pan 1 until it is perpendicular with the base of the printer and pull it straight out 2 to remove it Reinstallation tip Ensure that the grounding spring 3 on the left side is connected to the contact 4 Figure
54. prompted to enter your 8 digit PIN number The PIN for the HP Color LaserJet 3500 3550 series printer is 10350003 and for the HP Color LaserJet 3700 series printer is 10370003 1 Press 4 or w until the first digit of the PIN is displayed 2 Press v to save the digit The display will replace the digit with an asterisk 3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 until all eight digits are entered 4 Press at any time to move to the previous digit Clear event log This item allows you to clear the printer s internal event log Total page count The page count stored in NVRAM and printed on the configuration page represents the number of pages that the formatter has formatted not including engine test prints If you install a new formatter when repairing a printer use this menu item to reset the page count to the previous value In this way the page count reflects the number of pages printed by the engine rather than starting over for the new formatter The page count is broken into two categories total mono pages and total color pages Transfer kit count This value can be changed in the service menu but it will not change the value of the transfer kit This value is initially set to zero at the factory This value is automatically reset to zero when a customer installs a new transfer kit and sets NEW TRANSFER KIT to YES in the Resets menu If only the formatter is replaced the transfer kit page count will not be lost Fuser kit count This
55. the end of its useful life and the SUPPLIES LOW setting in SYSTEM SETUP is set to STOP To override press v Or if the cartridge is new the new cartridge is defective the memory controller PCB or the DC controller PCB is defective The fuser kit is at end of life No action necessary No action necessary Do not turn the printer off until the printer returns to Reagy CAUTION Use only transparencies specified for use with HP Color LaserJet printers Noncompatible transparencies can damage the printer See the HP LaserJet Printer Family Print Media Specification Guide 1 Remove all non compatible transparencies from Tray 1 Load compatible transparencies in Tray 1 Press for help or See Transfer unit removal in chapter 6 and Ordering parts in chapter 8 for more information Or if the cartridge is new Replace the memory controller PCB Replace the DC controller PCB Order the identified print cartridge Press v to continue or Press for help See Ordering parts in chapter 8 for more information Press for help or See Fuser removal in chapter 6 and Ordering parts in chapter 8 for more information Printer error troubleshooting 323 Table 7 2 Alphabetical printer messages continued eem 0 Rem Message REPLACE FUSER KIT alternates with To continue press v REPLACE SUPPLIES alternates with For status press v REPLACE SUPPLIES alternates with To
56. turn the printer off and then back on See Chapter 3 HP Web Jetadmin To remove this message from the display press v To remove this message from the display press v To remove this message from the display press v 1 To remove this message from the display press v No action necessary Replace this supply with a genuine HP supply designed for this printer Incorrect Access to the menu is restricted Contact the network administrator ENWW Printer error troubleshooting 315 Table 7 2 Alphabetical printer messages continued eem 0 Rem Message INCORRECT COLOR CARTRIDGE alternates with For help press Incorrect supplies For status press v Initializing permanent storage Install color cartridge alternates with For help press A color cartridge is installed in an incorrect slot or the cartridge is the wrong type and the cover is closed or either the memory controller PCB or the DC controller PCB are defective At least one supply item is incorrectly positioned in the printer and another supply item is missing incorrectly placed out or low This message is displayed in the event log as 10 41 00 This message is displayed when the printer is turned on as soon as the individual tasks begin initialization This message is displayed when the printer is turned on to show that permanent storage is being made ready for use The cartridge is not installed or not corr
57. 2 ENWW Diagrams 459 J50175 C Siso A J5027 J5009 J5010 N Figure 7 28 Connector locations for the HP Color LaserJet 3500 3550 printer 1 of 2 460 Chapter7 Troubleshooting ENWW Figure 7 29 Connector locations for the HP Color LaserJet 3500 3550 printer 2 of 2 ENWW Diagrams 461 500 sheet paper feeder connectors Figure 7 30 Connector locations for the 500 sheet paper feeder 462 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW iagram ircuit di for the pr General c the 500 ition In add two figures iagrams ing the followi In ded sheet feeder is also provided following the general c is provi ter In it diagram Ircul The c ircuit di Operation Panel asasieseisialejaialaisiayaia a lol lo IS glsl amp a o 8 Slo gi8 ou 42 ERERERRsiaiaai e8 See ZIG lolol ES ia aia lex liao foo of SI fer f2 2152 J1002 nyt 19 J1026 fale tel dal aq 95 3 222302382 888 EE EE ES EE J101A J101B I 19 19 I J101A J101B Laser Driver Laser Driver PCB PCB Paper l Y M C Bk Feeder l ne a r oem Nie a Mae Mondeo m Paper Feeder Paper Feeder Paper Pence l Pick up Pick up Paper Sensor i Solenoid Clutch PS3 l I l Fan I Tw I l I l HN I l 2 I l i t d I I 41024 l l aoup Dupl
58. 2 pick up roller 1 by pushing in on the right side 2 of the roller unit and then pull it out and to the right 3 to remove it Figure 6 69 Tray 2 paper sensor removal 1 of 3 Reinstallation tip When installing the sensor connect the connector first then install the sensor 4 Unhook the bushing claw 1 by pushing it in then rotate it in the direction of the arrow 2 and remove both the bushing 3 and black sensor arm 4 Figure 6 70 Tray 2 paper sensor removal 2 of 3 Reinstallation tip Make sure that the flag on the sensor arm 4 in the above figure fits between the notch in the paper sensor 5 in the above figure and moves freely ENWW Sensors 253 5 Unhook two claws 1 and pull the paper sensor 2 out disconnecting the connector 3 once the sensor is pulled away from the assembly Figure 6 71 Tray paper sensor removal 3 of 3 Reinstallation tip When reinstalling the sensor connect the connector first then install the sensor Registration paper sensor PS4 removal 1 Remove the pick up feed assembly See Pick up feed assembly removal 2 Remove one screw 1 and remove the registration paper sensor holder 2 Figure 6 72 Registration paper sensor removal 1 of 2 254 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW 3 Unhook two claws 1 disconnect one connector 2 and remove the registration paper sensor 3 from the sensor holder Figure 6 73 Registration paper sensor r
59. 3 The force of paper being warped lifts up the shutter and the paper goes through the shutter This corrects the position of skewed paper Q Registration shutter Figure 5 60 Skew control mechanism 188 Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW Figure 5 61 ENWW Media detection This printer detects the media type to prevent a fuser defect The DC controller controls the media sensor PS5 for this detection The PS5 has a light emitter LED and a light receiver CMOS sensor The light from the emitter is reflected off the media surface and received at the receiver The DC controller turns on the PS5 when a fed sheet passes through the registration roller then detects the roughness of media surface according to the patterns luminance distribution within a specified area of the detected light by the CMOS sensor Based on the detected roughness the DC controller identifies the media type normal paper gloss paper gloss film or OHT and sends the media type to the formatter The DC controller changes the paper feed speed according to the detected media type when the detected media does not match the selected print mode See Feed speed control earlier in this chapter for feed speed change Media detection Fuser delivery unit The fuser delivery unit being comprised of the fuser and the delivery unit feeds paper from the fuser to a delivery tray either the face up tray or the face down t
60. 3700dn and 3700dtn printers HP warrants to you the end user customer that HP hardware and accessories will be free from defects in materials and workmanship after the date of purchase for the period specified above If HP receives notice of such defects during the warranty period HP will at its option either repair or replace products which prove to be defective Replacement products may be either new or equivalent in performance to new HP warrants to you that HP software will not fail to execute its programming instructions after the date of purchase for the period specified above due to defects in material and workmanship when properly installed and used If HP receives notice of such defects during the warranty period HP will replace software which does not execute its programming instructions due to such defects HP does not warrant that the operation of HP products will be uninterrupted or error free If HP is unable within a reasonable time to repair or replace any product to a condition as warranted you will be entitled to a refund of the purchase price upon prompt return of the product HP products may contain remanufactured parts equivalent to new in performance or may have been subject to incidental use Warranty does not apply to defects resulting from a improper or inadequate maintenance or calibration b software interfacing parts or supplies not supplied by HP c unauthorized modification or misuse d operation
61. 491 Table 8 9 on page 495 Table 8 12 on page 501 Table 8 6 on page 487 Table 8 17 on page 519 Table 8 17 on page 519 Table 8 17 on page 519 Table 8 8 on page 491 Table 8 13 on page 509 Table 8 13 on page 509 Table 8 8 on page 491 Table 8 13 on page 509 Numerical parts list 553 Table 8 28 Numerical parts list continued Part number Table and page RC1 1497 000CN Table 8 8 on page 491 RC1 1500 000CN Table 8 8 on page 491 RC1 1508 000CN Table 8 13 on page 509 RC1 1509 000CN Table 8 13 on page 509 RC1 1511 000CN Table 8 13 on page 509 RC1 1514 000CN Table 8 13 on page 509 RC1 1515 000CN Table 8 7 on page 489 RC1 1535 000CN Table 8 17 on page 519 RC1 1537 000CN Table 8 12 on page 501 RC1 1545 000CN Table 8 12 on page 501 RC1 1546 000CN Table 8 12 on page 501 RC1 1547 000CN Table 8 9 on page 495 RC1 1548 000CN Table 8 12 on page 501 RC1 1555 000CN Table 8 5 on page 485 RC1 1562 000CN Table 8 5 on page 485 RC1 1563 000CN Table 8 5 on page 485 RC1 1565 000CN Table 8 5 on page 485 RC1 1566 000CN Table 8 5 on page 485 RC1 1572 000CN Table 8 7 on page 489 RC1 1573 000CN Table 8 7 on page 489 RC1 1574 000CN Table 8 6 on page 487 RC1 1575 000CN Table 8 6 on page 487 RC1 1576 000CN Table 8 6 on page 487 RC1 1593 000CN Table 8 10 on page 497 RC1 1600 000CN Table 8 5 on page 485 RC1 1602 000CN Table 8 10 on page 497 RC1 1603 000CN Table 8 7 on page 489 RC1 1605 000CN Table 8 7 on page 489 RC1 1613 000CN Table 8 13
62. 497 BLOCK TEST PRINT CONNECTING RC1 1593 000CN Table 8 10 on page 497 BUSHING RC1 3249 0000N _ 3249 000CN Table 8 8 on page 491 8 8 on Table 8 8 on page 491 491 pene o ooo EE Table 8 8 on page 491 BUSHING RC1 1243 000CN Table 8 11 on page 499 BUSHING RC1 1218 000CN Table 8 12 on page 501 BUSHING RC1 1243 000CN Table 8 12 on page 501 BUSHING RC1 1244 000CN Table 8 12 on page 501 BUSHING RC1 1310 000CN Table 8 12 on page 501 BUSHING RC1 2182 000CN Table 8 24 on page 533 BUSHING RC1 2192 000CN Table 8 24 on page 533 538 Chapter8 Parts and diagrams ENWW Table 8 27 Alphabetical parts list continued CABLE CPR CONNECTING RM1 0482 000CN Table 8 8 on page 492 CABLE DRAWER RM1 0769 000CN Table 8 24 on page 533 CABLE ENVIRONMENT SENSOR RM1 0493 000CN Table 8 9 on page 495 CABLE FFC HP3500 3550 RK2 0179 000CN Table 8 10 on page 497 CABLE FFC HP3700 RK2 0162 000CN Table 8 10 on page 497 CABLE FORMATTER POWER SUPPLY HP3700 RM1 0483 000CN Table 8 8 on page 492 CABLE FORMATTER POWER SUPPLY RM1 0498 000CN Table 8 8 on page 492 HP 3500 3550 CABLE FRAME LOWER HP3500 3550 RM1 0497 000CN Table 8 13 on page 509 CABLE FRAME LOWER HP3700 RM1 0478 000CN Table 8 13 on page 509 CABLE HIGH VOLTAGE RM1 0485 000CN Table 8 7 on page 489 CABLE LASER FFC 1 RK2 0164 000CN Table 8 10 on page 497 CABLE LASER FFC 2 RK2 0165 000CN Table 8 10 on page 497 CABLE LEFT FRONT RM
63. 501 ENWW Alphabetical parts list 549 Table 8 27 Alphabetical parts list E MERE EER Description Table and page STOPPER ARM RIGHT RC1 2339 000CN Table 8 12 on page 501 STOPPER FRONT HINGE LEFT RL1 0215 000CN Table 8 7 on page 489 STOPPER HINGE RIGHT RL1 0216 000CN Table 8 7 on page 489 STRAP DAMPER RC1 1625 000CN Table 8 13 on page 505 SUB ROLLER ASS Y RM1 0709 000CN Table 8 24 on page 533 SUPPORT FOOT REAR RC1 2428 000CN Table 8 13 on page 509 SUPPORT PICK UP GEAR RL1 0217 000CN Table 8 8 on page 492 SWING ASS Y RM1 0707 000CN Table 8 25 on page 535 TRANSFER ROLLER ASS Y RM1 0740 000CN Table 8 17 on page 519 TRANSFER UNIT Q3658 69001 Table 8 20 on page 525 TRAY AUXILIARY RC1 1555 000CN Table 8 5 on page 485 TRAY EXPANSION 1 RC1 2318 000CN Table 8 6 on page 487 TRAY EXPANSION 2 RC1 2319 000CN Table 8 6 on page 487 TRAY 2 CASSETTE RM1 0470 000CN Table 8 16 on page 515 550 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams ENWW Numerical parts list ENWW Table 8 28 Numerical parts list Part number Q1319 69001 Q1319 69001 Q1321 69001 Q1321 67924 Q1321 69001 Q3655 69001 Q3656 69001 Q3658 69001 RB2 3003 040CN RB2 3489 000CN RB2 6324 000CNN RB2 6448 000CN RB2 6450 000CN RB2 6452 000CN RB2 6453 000CN RB2 6469 000CN RC1 0939 000 RC1 0954 000CN RC1 1038 000CN RC1 1049 000CN RC1 1050 000CN RC1 1148 000CN RC1 1149 000CN RC1 1151 000CN RC1 1152 000CN RC
64. Guide HP Color LaserJet 3500 Series Getting Started Guide HP Color LaserJet 3550 Series Getting Started Guide HP Color LaserJet 3700 Series Getting Started Guide HP Color LaserJet 3500 and 3700 Series Printer User Guide Q1321 90921 HP Color LaserJet 3550 and 3700 Series Printer User Guide Q5990 90910 HP Color LaserJet 3500 3700 Series Printer Service and Support Q1321 60115 CD ROM HP Color LaserJet 3500 3700 Series Printer Service Training Kit Q1321 60117 Parts and supplies 45 HP maintenance agreements 46 HP has several types of maintenance agreements that meet a wide range of support needs Maintenance agreements are not part of the standard warranty Support services may vary by area Check with your local HP dealer to determine the services available to you On site service agreements To provide you with the level of support best suited to your needs HP has on site service agreements with a selection of response times Next day on site service This agreement provides support by the next working day following a service request Extended coverage hours and extended travel beyond HP s designated service zones are available on most on site agreements for additional charges Weekly volume on site service This agreement provides scheduled weekly on site visits for organizations with many HP products This agreement is designated for sites using 25 or more workstation products including printers plotters computers
65. HP 3500 3550 2 of 2 6mm 8mm 10mm 12mm M3 M4 Kk k k k oO O 14 mm 16 mm 25 mm Replacement parts configuration When the parts in the list below are replaced specific tasks need to be performed These parts include e Formatter and DC Controller replaced at the same time e Formatter new and previously installed in another printer e DC Controller new and previously installed in another printer e Media sensor PS5 e Color Misregistration Sensor PS12 e Laser Scanner Assembly e Fuser e Transfer unit ITB assembly Configuration procedures for these parts are described in the following sections Ordering parts 473 NOTE Formatter and DC Controller replaced at the same time Do not replace both the formatter and the DC Controller at the same time Replace one at a time If the formatter and DC Controller are replaced at the same time in an HP Color LaserJet 3700 series printerthat has the ability to perform duplex printing this functionality will be lost To determine if the printer can duplex print a configuration page from the Information menu and reference Paper Trays and Options If Duplex Unit is listed the printer is able to duplex and the formatter and DC Controller should be replaced one at a time If the DC Controller and Formatter are replaced one at a time then the duplex printing capability will be transferred to the new DC controller or Formatter A printer specific PJL file will be needed to
66. Image transfer kit REPLACE 75 000 pages 50 months TRANSFER KIT Image fuser kit REPLACE FUSER KIT 75 000 pages 50 months Approximate life is based on 1 500 pages per month Approximate A4 letter size page count is based on approximately 5 coverage of individual colors 3Usage conditions and print patterns may cause results to vary To order supplies online go to http www hp com support clj3700 or http www hp com support clj3550 Managing supplies 95 Locating supplies and parts Supplies and parts are identified by labeling and by blue plastic handles The following graphic shows the location of each supply item and part Figure 4 3 Supply item and part locations 1 Fuser 2 Print cartridges 3 Transfer unit ITB 4 Pickup roller 96 Chapter 4 Printer maintenance ENWW Replacing supply items Carefully follow the guidelines in this section when replacing printer supplies or parts Replace a print cartridge when the printer control panel displays a REPLACE COLOR CARTRIDGE message The control panel display will also indicate the color that should be replaced unless a genuine HP print cartridge is not currently installed 1 Lift the front door handle and pull down the front door CAUTION Do not place anything on the transfer unit and do not touch the transfer unit which is located on the inside of the front door If the ITB intermediate transfer belt on the transfer unit is punctured print qu
67. Pressure roller removal Replacement of the pressure roller requires replacement of the entire fuser See Fuser removal Main thermistor sub thermistor removal Replacement of the main thermistor and the sub thermistor requires replacement of the entire fuser See Fuser removal Thermoswitch removal Replacement of the thermoswitch requires replacement of the entire fuser See Fuser removal Main assembly parts 239 Feed guide unit removal 1 Release the right and left rod brackets from the front door See Pick up feed assembly removal removal procedure steps 1 through 5 2 Push the swing guides all the way back 3 Remove the secondary transfer charging roller See Secondary transfer charging roller removal 4 Remove the fuser See Fuser removal 5 Using both hands grasp the air duct 2 and apply pressure by pinching the top and bottom of the duct at the locations indicated by callouts 1 to release two claws 1 located on the bottom rear of the duct Swing the front of the air duct upwards to remove it Figure 6 49 Feed guide unit removal 1 of 2 240 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW 6 Push both swing guides all the way back 1 remove four screws 2 and remove the feed guide 3 Figure 6 50 Feed guide removal 2 of 2 Reinstallation tip Make sure that the drive shaft 1 on the feed guide fits correctly into the drive shaft in the printer 2 IN Figure 6 51 Feed guide pr
68. TLP1241 WG8 5362 000CN Table 8 19 on page 523 PHOTO INTERRUPTER TLP1241 HP3500 3550 WG8 5362 000CN Table 8 13 on page 509 PHOTO INTERRUPTER TLP1241 HP3700 WG8 5362 000CN Table 8 13 on page 509 PICK UP FEED ASSY RM1 0456 000CN Table 8 17 on page 519 PICK UP FEED ASS Y HP3500 3550 RM1 0760 000CN Table 8 17 on page 519 PICK UP FEED ASS Y HP3700 RM1 0449 000CN Table 8 17 on page 519 PIN DOWEL XD9 0120 000CN Table 8 12 on page 502 PLATE RL1 0189 000CN Table 8 12 on page 502 PLATE CONNECTING RC1 1637 000CN Table 8 13 on page 509 546 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams ENWW Table 8 27 Alphabetical parts list o ee Description Table and page PLATE CONTACT RC1 1151 000CN Table 8 13 on page 505 PLATE CONTACT RC1 1152 000CN Table 8 13 on page 505 PLATE CONTACT RC1 1153 000CN Table 8 13 on page 505 PLATE CONTACT RC1 1155 000CN Table 8 13 on page 505 PLATE DC CONTROLLER SUPPORT RC1 1348 000CN Table 8 10 on page 497 PLATE DRIVE RC1 1277 000CN Table 8 12 on page 501 PLATE END RB2 3003 040CN Table 8 16 on page 515 PLATE END RB2 6469 000CN Table 8 26 on page 537 PLATE GROUNDING RC1 1649 000CN Table 8 8 on page 491 PLATE GROUNDING RC1 1629 000CN Table 8 12 on page 501 PLATE GROUNDING RC1 2294 000CN Table 8 12 on page 501 PLATE GROUNDING RC1 2175 000CN Table 8 24 on page 533 PLATE GROUNDING RC1 2280 000CN Table 8 24 on page 533 PLATE GROUNDING HP3500 3550 RC1 1509 000CN Table 8 13 on pag
69. TRER DAS 472 PCB locations moe a en eth E eer pe e i 481 Paper feeder PCB Assembly Location diagram sssseseeess 483 External covers and panels s eaan aa ea aaa aeaa 485 Front door assembly eiii tdet te a A AA 487 Internal components 1 of 4 ssssssessseee een 489 Internal components 2 of 4 sssssssssssseeee eee 491 Internal components 3 of 4 nusra aR i emen 495 Internal components 4 of 4 ssssssssssseeeee eee 497 Center Frame Assembly ct ettet e i ee e Reg 499 Main Right Side Plate Assembly Motors sseel 501 Main Left Side Plate Assembly sess 505 Image drive assembly 2 i d LEE is De de dde ed 511 Developing Disengaging Assembly sssse e 513 Tray 2 cassette red eI pet ade aude gaius aede eb qe ades 515 Pick up Feed assembly nianie maneia ee redactae iit 519 Tray 2 cassette pick up assembly sssseen 521 Face down delivery assembly ssesssseee eee 523 Transfer Unit cau debate ae pete Herd ee tau ae a len 525 Right Swing Frame Assembly ssssssessseeene ennemi 527 ENWW ENWW Table 8 22 Table 8 23 Table 8 24 Table 8 25 Table 8 26 Table 8 27 Table 8 28 Left swing frame assembly ssssssssseee eem 529 Fuser assembly isc scene desc ba etie adn Eu ba deve Lada ta Eee 531 500 Sheet paper fe
70. The toner on the photosensitive drum is then scraped off the drum by the cleaning blade to be delivered to the waste toner container lt During cleaning gt Waste toner container Primary charging roller Photosensitive drum Developing cylinder ITT DC bias Transfer section diagram Transfer section The transfer section see the figure on the following page consists of the transfer unit and the secondary transfer unit The transfer unit transfers the toner on the photosensitive drum to the ITB The secondary transfer unit then transfers the toner on the ITB to the paper ITB transfer unit The ITB unit consists of components such as ITB primary transfer roller ITB feed roller and waste toner full sensor As the drum motor M3 rotates the ITB feed roller the ITB feed roller rotates the ITB and the ITB rotates the primary transfer roller The primary transfer roller engaging cam is to engage or disengage the Y M and C cartridge s primary transfer rollers from the ITB It is rotated by the primary transfer roller engaging motor M5 The waste toner full sensor detects whether the toner piled up in the waste toner container if full after the ITB cleaning Secondary transfer unit The secondary transfer unit consists of components such as the secondary transfer roller secondary transfer roller engaging cam and secondary transfer engaging sensor The secondary transfer roller transfers
71. Transfer ITB unit detection The printer detects the presence of the transfer unit The DC controller monitors the waste toner full sensor PS13 and color misregistration sensor PS12 during initial rotation for detection of the ITB unit At the start of a print operation the DC controller lets the PS12 and PS13 emit light If the transfer unit is present the LED light is received at the light receivers on the sensors and vice versa 168 Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW Figure 5 47 NOTE Figure 5 48 ENWW If neither the PS12 or the PS13 receives light the DC controller judges that the transfer unit is not present OUT and sends an error message to the formatter Transfer unit in Transfer unit out Waste toner full sensor PS13 Waste toner container PS12 Color misregistration sensor Transfer unit detection If light is received only at one of the light receivers on the PS12 or P13 it will not be judged as ITB unit OUT but will be judged as the following errors Error in the PS12 only Color misregistration sensor abnormality or Error in the PS13 only Waste toner full warning Transfer unit life detection The printer detects whether the transfer unit is coming to the end of its life The DC controller monitors the accumulated rotation time of the drum motor M3 for detection of transfer unit life The DC controller writes the drum motor rotation time into the EEPROM in the DC controller every specif
72. Types Of SCIOWS M 205 SNWge E M E 207 Print cartridges and transfer unit ssssssssesseee een 208 S mm EE 209 Front door removal sssssssssseeseeenenen ener emen nennen nennen enne nne nennen 209 Left cover removal i de d tti e i i t E d dd 210 Left front cover removal ssssssssssseseeee eene nennen nnne rne ener nennen 211 Right cover remowval 2 2 Le ded decia dee tbi doe n de Ea E Rd ERG 213 Top cover removal sssssssssssssessesseeer e eene nnne nn tr nenne nene n enne nnne nens 214 Upper rear door removal 2 eer ettet re ERR Tie Re ERES Ce Ee ETERNI FUR SER ER FRE EI eG 214 Rear cover remioVal etie etr I reri tem eadeni ro da ues UEM eo dete 215 Lower rear door rear output bin removal ssseseemen 215 Tray 1 multipurpose removal sese ene eee nennen nnns 216 Malin ASSOMDINGS m E 217 Transfer unit removal ipit EE o Eran esp tec ep aug ore ERU dd ure deeds 218 Print cartridge Temoval 2 t ere Heer e P etti Lema E 219 Fuser removal irn e etie ed ut aeneus edunt as 220 Face down delivery assembly removal ssssssesseeeee ene 221 Laser scanner assembly removal sssssssssseeeeeneeen menn nnne 222 Image drive assembly removal
73. Web server from Windows 95 and later The embedded Web server allows you to view printer and network status and to manage printing functions from your computer instead of from the printer control panel Below are examples of what you can do using the embedded Web server e View printer control status information e Setthe type of paper loaded in each tray e Determine the remaining life on all supplies and order new supplies e Change the tray configurations view e Change the printer control panel menu confiuration e Print internal pages e Receive notification of printer and supplies events e Change the network configuration e View support content that is specific to the current state of the printer To use the embedded Web server you must have Microsoft Internet Explorer 4 and later or Netscape Navigator 4 and later The embedded Web server works when the printer is connected to an IP based network The embedded Web server does not support IPX based or AppleTalk printer connections Internet access is not require to open and use the embedded Web server Embedded Web server access through a network connection In a supported Web browser on your computer type the IP address for the printer in the address URL field To find the IP address print a configuration page For more information about printing a configuration page see Printer configuration page Once you open the URL you can bookmark it so that you can return to it quickly
74. a fuser sleeve If so replace the fuser If the line appears in a particular color go to A If it appears in full color go to B Table 7 29 Causes for white horizonal lines A Horizontal scratches on the photosensitive drum cartridge B Horizontal scratches on the transfer unit C The fuser sleeve is deformed by being left engaged with the pressure roller for a long time 396 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting Refer to the Table 7 39 Repetitive defect cause table later in this chapter to find out if the interval of line agrees with that of a photosensitive drum If SO replace the print cartridge Check the transfer unit surface for horizontal scratches If any replace the transfer unit Refer to the Table 7 39 Repetitive defect cause table later in this chapter to find out if the interval of line agrees with that of a fuser sleeve If so replace the fuser ENWW Color missing Table 7 30 Causes for a missing color Defective laser shutter Check the problem color laser shutter Clean the shutter if dirty Replace the shutter if deformed or damaged Poor developing bias contacts For the cartridge with the color problem color missing color s cartridge check the developing bias contacts to the high voltage PCB Clean contacts if dirty Replace defective parts if the contacts are deformed or damaged Defective cartridge primary charging roller Replace the problem color missing color car
75. a registration roller indicates If the movement of the registration shutter is not smooth defective registration shutter make it smooth If its springs are out of positions reseat them Clean the shutter if dirty Replace the pick up feed assembly if deformed Dirty Worn Deformed registration roller or If dirty clean the rollers If worn or deformed replace the registration sub roller pick up feed assembly Defective registration shutter If the movement of the registration shutter is not smooth make it smooth If its springs are out of positions reseat them Clean the shutter if dirty Replace the pick up feed assembly if deformed Damaged drive gears Check the drive gears in the pickup block If damaged replace the gears Defective registration clutch Disconnect the registration clutch connector J1016 from the DC controller PCB Measure the resistance between the connector J1016 8 REGCL and J1016 7 24VA If itis not approx 160 ohms replace the registration clutch Defective DC controller PCB Replace the DC controller PCB Front door area jams area 4 362 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW 1 Open the front door CAUTION Do not place anything on the transfer unit Do not touch the top of the transfer unit or the contacts on the left side of the transfer unit 3 If necessary turn the green roller wheel toward the rear of the printer to advance the paper Remove any paper NOTE If the pap
76. aaa deuda ced ga 24 Paper that can damage the printer ssssssssssssssese eene 24 Printing on special media eee ee ete ee tne nee eee eee ee nemen nennen nennen nennen nen 26 Transparencies rn eee rendir cede adc ees dead hehe ge ex tee ed ener lu eu ERE e YE dad NEAR EXE TE EE danke 26 GIOSSY PAPER rM 26 eel 26 dubie E 27 Ec r M M 27 Heavy paper a e EES 28 HP LaserJet Tough paper reiten nete i i a oe aai 28 Preprinted forms and letterhead sssssssssssssseseeeeneee een 28 Recycled paper inen eee ei eror i rein ree re ie ade ees 29 Medial Weight cccecccceseccceeteseceteesecceeesesenaeteecenaeuecenesdaceasetsecaaeteseceeteaaeszesseceasetseeenaense 29 Environmental product stewardship program ccecceeeeeeeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeceaeaaeeeeeeeeeeteeeeesenaees 31 Protecting the environment sssssssssseeeee eene een enne en nr nennen 31 Declaration of Conformltles 2 re ree enne at erede e Fa e Yeu e ELA EHE Eds 34 Safety statements M 37 Laser Safety Statement iccccciececndadeciencateinieariiattstenadgieiendinieand EA 37 ENWW Conventions Vv vi Canadian DOC regulations 2 euius ciiin cente nth ese nahe nba Lad 37 EMI statement Ko
77. appears only with a certain software application or print job contact the software vendor for assistance 4 HP 3700 only Try a different driver 5 If the message persists with different software applications and print jobs disconnect all cables to the printer that connect it to the network or PC 6 Turn the printer off 7 HP 3700 only Remove all memory DIMMs or third party DIMMs from the printer Do not remove the firmware DIMM in the lower slot J1 8 For the HP 3700 remove the EIO card from the printer 9 Turn the printer on 10 HP 3700 only If the error no longer exists install each DIMM and EIO device one at a time making sure to turn the printer off and back on as you install each device 11 HP 3700 only Replace a DIMM or EIO device if you determine that it causes the error 12 HP 3700 only Remember to reconnect all cables that connect the printer to the network or computer 13 HP 3700 only If the error persists replace the firmware DIMM 14 Replace the formatter and calibrate the printer Printer error troubleshooting 337 Table 7 3 Numerical printer messages continued 50 X FUSER ERROR A fuser error has occurred alternates with X Description For help press 1 low fuser temperature 2 fuser warmup service 3 high fuser temperature 4 faulty fuser 8 low fuser temperature subthermistor 9 high fuser temperature subthermistor 338 Chapter 7
78. approach ENWW Parts and supplies NOTE ENWW This section identifies parts and supplies ordering information and how to obtain HP assistance Ordering parts Field replaceable and accessory part numbers are found in chapter 8 of this manual Order replacement parts from Hewlett Packard Customer Support Americas HPCS A or Hewlett Packard Customer Support Europe HPCS E Use only accessories specifically designed for this printer Accessories can be ordered from an authorized service or support provider See Ordering related documentation and software later in this chapter and Ordering parts in chapter 8 for additional ordering information By phone Hewlett Packard Customer Support Americas HPCS A 800 227 8164 U S only Hewlett Packard Customer Support Europe HPCS E 49 70 311 4225 3 By Internet Hewlett Packard Parts Direct http partsdirect hp com By mail Hewlett Packard Company Hewlett Packard Company HPCS A HPCS E 8050 Foothills Blvd Wolf Hirth Stra e 33 Roseville CA 95678 D 7030 B blingen Germany Ordering supplies Order supplies directly from Hewlett Packard The phone numbers for ordering supplies are e U S HP Shopping home 1 888 999 4747 e U S Small Medium Business store 1 800 888 0262 e Canada 800 387 3154 Toronto 416 671 8383 e United Kingdom 07 34 441 212 e Other local phone numbers may also be available Parts and supplies 43 Exchange program HP offers rema
79. assembly parts The following procedures describe removal of parts located on or around the major internal mechanical assemblies Figure 6 43 Main assemblies parts location Sub thermistor TH2 Main thermistor TH1 Thermoswitch TP Fuser sleeve unit Tray 1 multipurpose pick up roller Tray 1 separation pad Tray 2 pick up roller Tray 2 separation pad Secondary transfer charging roller 10 Pressure roller 11 Left swing guide 12 Right swing guide 13 Tray 1 guide unit 14 Feed guide unit 236 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW OANDAABRWDND Tray 1 pick up roller removal 1 Remove the transfer unit See Transfer unit removal 2 Unhook one claw 1 and slide the idler roller 2 in the direction of the arrow 3 Rotate the Tray 1 pick up roller 3 upwards to release it from the shaft and lift the roller out Figure 6 44 Tray 1 pick up roller removal NOTE Replace the separation pad whenever you replace the pick up roller Tray 1 separation pad removal 1 Remove the Tray 1 pick up roller See Tray 1 pick up roller removal above Slide the left idler roller 1 in the direction of the arrow 2 Place a flat blade screwdriver under each slot 3 and twist the screwdriver to pry the pad loose to remove it Figure 6 45 Tray 1 separation pad removal NOTE Replace the pick up roller whenever you replace the separation pad ENWW Main assembly parts 237 Tray 2 pick up
80. cartridge like a monochrome cartridge consists of a photosensitive drum primary charging roller developing cylinder stirrer etc They are driven by two motors the drum motor M3 for the K cartridge and the developing motor M4 for the Y M and C cartridges The cartridges in this printer are driven by two motors so that the K cartridge can be driven independently for monochrome prints preventing the wear of the photosensitive drum The DC controller PCB signals the K developing clutch CL2 to perform monochrome printing The abbreviations Bk and K are used interchangeably and refer to the black developing operations 156 Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW Each cartridge has a built in memory tag into which the memory controller PCB reads writes data DC controller PCB Ty E E OO e Fe LZ E DA ul 7 3g 2 u Memory controller PCB o m S T ze c A n A o gt e tr S T T S S o5 5 Oo c c c c oO d uj zm Ee o9 o aD o o w gt O ilm um 2 2 uc 3 3 Ww w a gt z O 2 g G a g i cor E 5 i id A a o o Waste toner container Oo Q Q x 4 ut ui ht ls m Wu Lu iu sa 4n E O3 x 71 Primary charging roller w iu Lu i d E uU Memory tag cc fr Ww w Toner level I sensor E light receiver I 7 K cartridge i Toner container Toner level a wa sensor Stirrer
81. controller monitors the voltage of these two signals MAINTH SUBTH and accordingly sends the FUSER HEATER DRIVE signal FSRD via the ASIC C1002 Based on this signal the fuser heater drive circuit controls and maintains the fuser heater at the specified temperature This control system is divided into the following five controls e Initial rotation temperature control Prevents damage to the fuser sleeve unit when the power switch is turned on The CPU turns on the fuser heater before it drives the feed motor when the temperature of the heater is below 55 C 131 F on switch on detected by TH2 It drives the motor after the fuser heater is left on for the prescribed time period e Start up temperature control Determines the initial temperature of the fuser heater according to its temperature when energized detected by TH2 When the heater is energized within 30 seconds after completion of a print the previous printing temperature is the start up temperature 128 Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW ENWW e Print temperature control Maintains the fuser heater in the printer at the target temperature The CPU raises the target temperature in stages in one sprinting process to prevent the fuser sleeve temperature from falling as the paper goes through During printing of multiple pages the target temperature also varies in stages depending on the number of pages printed e Between sheets temperature control Keeps the temperatur
82. defects centnm ete metet tete et ts 390 M endinrzt zm c 391 Lats Color ete ette e e e et eile edens 392 Dark Image vse ani a ae ee el a E A AA 392 Dark colof rrr unga hin hieu Gender 393 Completely blank image 2 ellie ee eate ee eate ii bp ede n aede deed e 393 All black or solid Color sonneratii rette d an ee teo dies 393 Dots in vertical lines ice deer rented trece tpe de ade e dde dead ie de eee dete 394 Dirt on back of paper rot te m E et e D e ode i te e ams 394 Dirt onifrontof paper 1 iren eb hee dh dee Ec Roc ve ig aed Marden ee ev eto be a ede ld 394 b e zm tates EKORO ANE vs ace sbavadede anand tans ARAETA 395 White vertical lines 2 rct edente tpe es ted ees ge e tbe e de ie dte 395 Horizontal line ts ite ree ne Roe Ue ei ep 396 White horizontal line iure te p geo Der ve aan oad ie aide eed Sloe belts 396 Golormlissllig eco ee ott Cae eee ctt HR ee uc Re tel Bane REA 397 Blank Spots oro ee e ee ele die euet eg el Red 397 POORTUSING iiaa iiia E dote FETU LT tpud e rut o E e 397 Image distortiori ete tec oiia ieai eiei aeir bandon hades 398 Golor mistegistratiOn oem sc eerte dese etae reete tad teme teme 398 Ina e ED A E 399 Misplaced image 1 ne etri edid Potter etr eda denen 399 Reversed color ote edet b de Leod dede De a idle id de ander pet eee 400 Snailitracks 2 b en toten ER CP EU ete E CERRO ERE 400 Repetitive defects troubleshooting
83. delivery assembly removal and replacement 221 face down delivery paper sensor removal and replacement 257 failure detection laser diode 144 scanner motor 145 fan control circuit 125 fasteners 472 feed guide removal and replacement 240 feed motor M1 removal and replacement 269 feed speed control 186 flicker prevention mechanism 129 Index 563 font DIMMs installing 79 formatter PCB removal and replacement 279 replacement configuration 352 474 replacement configuration previously installed 353 474 front cover 500 sheet paper feeder removal and replacement 296 front door removal and replacement 209 fuel gages 436 functions block 121 failure detection 130 flicker prevention 129 fuser detection 130 motors 121 protective 129 132 fuser count resetting 448 covers 91 life 207 removal and replacement 220 replacing 103 warranty 21 fuser block print process 154 fuser control circuit 127 fuser delivery paper sensor PS removal and replacement 256 fuser detection 130 fuser front paper sensor PS6 removal and replacement 256 fuser sleeve removal and replacement 239 fuser delivery unit 189 fusing problems 397 G glossy paper printing 26 grayscale printing 386 H heater temperature control 127 heavy paper printing 28 high voltage power supply circuit 132 high voltage power supply PCB removal and replacement 281 horizontal synchronous control 142 HP ImageREt 2400 384 HP Jetdirect external print server installi
84. depending on the media being used Also see the OPTIMIZE setting later in this chapter for further print quality adjustments 400 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW Repetitive defects troubleshooting CAUTION NOTE ENWW Defects on printer rollers can cause image defects to appear at regular intervals on the page Use the repetitive defects ruler see Figure 7 4 Repetitive defects ruler following the table on the next page to measure the distance between defects that recur on a page Use Table 7 39 Repetitive defect cause table below to determine which roller is causing the defect To resolve the problem try cleaning the roller first If the roller is still dirty after cleaning or if it is damaged replace it Do not use solvents or oils to clean rollers Instead rub the roller with lint free paper If dirt is difficult to remove rub the roller with lint free paper dampened with rubbing alcohol Defects on the Tray 2 pickup roller or the multipurpose tray pickup roller do not cause a repetitive defect Defects on these rollers cause a defect to appear only on the leading edge of the image Table 7 39 Repetitive defect cause Problem Area Period of Problem defect mm Dirt on Blank Dirt on Poor front spots back fuser Tray 2 feed roller About 42 X Tray 2 feed sub roller About 41 Registration roller About 44 Registration sub roller About 41 X Primary charging roller About 26 Photosensitive drum About 77
85. determine the frequency of a particular jam If a jam occurs repeatedly around the same page count consider this a single jam that the customer tried to clear e Try printing from all available input trays to identify whether the problem is isolated to one tray e Print the job in both simplex and duplex modes to identify if the problem occurs only in one mode or the other e Try printing on paper from an unopened ream that has been stored correctly If the jam does not occur with this media then the customer s media might be causing the problem e fthe jam occurs from when the printer is turned on check the paper path for small torn pieces of paper Also check for broken sensors or flags and check for loose or defective connections e Ifthe paper is torn folded or wrinkled typically along the leading edge inspect the paper path for items that could be causing the damage e If the customer is using non HP supplies try replacing those supplies with genuine HP supplies to see if the problem goes away e f necessary instruct the customer on proper media storage correct loading technique and printer operation Make sure the customer knows not to grab paper in the output bin during duplex printing Paper path checklist e Verify that media is correctly loaded in the input trays and that all length and width guides are set correctly e Clean the printer Toner and paper dust in the paper path can inhibit free movement of med
86. developing motor is controlled by the DC controller which sends the DEVELOPING MOTOR ACCELERATION signal YMCDEVACO and the DEVELOPING MOTOR DECELERATION signal YMCDEVDEC to drive the motor DC controller PCB Developing motor poseer 24V J1014 J5006 i lala 24VB 5 l l l 16 YMCDEVACG 3 Di YMCDEVDEC 2 i 18 YMCDEVFG 4 l l 15 PGND 4 l l l l Developing motor control circuit The DC controller judges the developing motor faulty under the following conditions and sends an error message to the formatter e Developing motor start abnormality The interval of the DRMITBFG signals does not become regular in 1000 ms from the start of the developing motor e Developing motor rotation abnormality The interval of the YMCDEVFG signal stays irregular for 100 ms or more after it has become regular Fan control The fan control controls the drive of the fan The fan a DC brushless motor with a built in Hall effect device exhausts air to prevent the temperature from rising around the fuser unit The fan operates under the control of the FAN DRIVE signal FAND the DC controller DC controller PCB l Fan J1024 Lt FAND E 2 PGND l I l I I I I 3 IFANS I re I I I I Fan control circuit Engine control system 125 Figure 5 11 NOTE The DC controller monitors the FAN ROTATION DETECTION signal FANS to control the RPM of the fan The F
87. e Light sets trapping at a minimal level e Off is the default trapping setting Trapping is turned off For the HP Color LaserJet 3700 series printer the following values are available for the RGB Color settings e Default instructs the printer to interpret RGB color as SRGB The sRGB standard is the accepted standard of Microsoft and the World Wide Web Consortium http www w3 org e Vivid instructs the printer to increase the color saturation in the midtones Less colorful objects are rendered more colorfully This value is recommended for printing business graphics e Device instructs the printer to print RGB data in raw device mode To render photographs properly with this selection you must manage image color in the application or operating system ENWW Managing color 387 Matching colors The process of matching printer output color to your computer screen is quite complex because printers and computer monitors use different methods of producing color Monitors display colors by light pixels using an RGB red green blue color process but printersprint colors using a CMYK cyan magenta yellow and black process Several factors can influence your ability to match printed colors to those on your monitor These factors include e print media e printer colorants inks or toners for example e printing process inkjet press or laser technology for example e overhead lighting e personal differences in perception of co
88. e eee uestes eod cene rea deaur u eode i s 422 Embedded Web server HP Color LaserJet 3700 series printer only 422 HP Toolbox tette es a erp n icis 424 Printer configuration page ssssssssee ee nennen nemen nen rennes 428 Supplies status page iere tete nate id nr eite eter teen ditt 429 Usage page HP 3700 only ssssssssssseeeene ennemi 430 Event log eec a eed CORP DL LL e bg e t e teas 431 DiaQnOSlCS EE 433 Diagnostics flowchart ici soc eere dees rag eed ea dede eget d ee pera 433 Erigirnie diagriostics 2 c inneni eea iina aeei dee e ee tpe ded oed dod 434 Diagnostics from the Control Panel ssssssssseee eee eene 436 Printer display menu a ii ie ede d tee te eee de i ee ea eee 436 Diagnostics test menu etr t duce OP db Ep oes ERE 436 Paper Path TeSt ei a rtt ttes eie sterii iai n bleed et eiat 439 Component Test special mode test sssssssssssssssseeeeenee OQ Print Stop Teste oe cette t e cedet lul d ten 442 Ihformation MEN oderit er tede uen MEUSE 443 Configure device menu printing menu sssssseeeneennemnenemneen nenne 443 Configure device menu resets menu sssssssseeene nennen enne 443 Configure device menu print quality menu ssssseeenne nennen A43 Testpages 45 ios nbe D ciu hai DH aD 445 Enigme test page iu Leere pe ree e pta e ee MPa adea Paese tut ee bb Phase o REEE 445 Formatter test page
89. face down with the top of the envelope to the left and the short edge feeding into the printer first In high humidity environments envelopes should be printed long edge first to prevent them from sealing during printing For long edge printing envelopes should be loaded long edge first face down See the Printing envelopes from the Tray 1 section in the HP Color LaserJet 3550 and 3700 series printer User Guide to change the printer driver envelope orientation Labels In either the application or the printer driver selectLabels as the media type or configure Tray 1 for labels When printing labels use the following guidelines e Verify that the label adhesive material can tolerate temperatures of 190 C 374 F for 0 1 second e Verify that there is no exposed adhesive material between the labels Exposed areas can cause labels to peel off during printing which can cause paper jams Exposed adhesive can also cause damage to printer components e Donotre feed a sheet of labels e Verify that labels lie flat e Do not use labels that are wrinkled bubbled or otherwise damaged Printing on special media 27 Heavy paper When printing on heavy paper use the following guidelines Any tray will print most heavy media that does not exceed 105 g m 28 Ib bond Use cardstock only in Tray 1 135 g m to 216 g m 50 to 80 Ib cover In either the software application or the printer driver select HEAVY 106 g m to 163 g m
90. four screws 1 Figure 6 108 Developing motor removal 2 of 3 6 Disconnect one connector 1 and remove the developing motor 2 Figure 6 109 Developing motor removal 3 of 3 Primary transfer roller engaging motor M5 removal 1 Remove the image drive assembly See Image drive assembly removal CAUTION It is important to refer to the image driver assembly removal procedure s Reinstallation notes to ensure correct installation of this assembly If reassembly is not performed correctly it can result in damage to the print cartridge drive pins the image drive assembly drive pins and the swing guide mechanism 2 Remove the right swing guide See Swing guide removal right 274 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW 3 Referto the pick up feed guide assembly removal procedure steps 1 through 12 and remove the right side gear plate See Pick up feed assembly removal CAUTION It is important to refer to the pick up feed assembly removal procedure s Reinstallation notes to ensure correct installation of this assembly If reassembly is not performed correctly it can result in damage to the print cartridge drive pins the image drive assembly drive pins and the swing guide mechanism 4 Remove the e clip 1 remove two screws 2 and then remove the gear plate 3 Reinstallation tip When reinstalling the gear plate ensure that the gear 4 is turned all the way counterclockwise as shown below Refer
91. hole punched paper e Do not use multipart forms e Do not use paper that has already been printed on or that has been fed through a photocopier e Do not use paper with a watermark if you are printing solid patterns Paper that can damage the printer In rare circumstances paper can damage the printer The following paper must be avoided to prevent possible damage to the printer e Do not use paper with staples attached e Do not use transparencies designed for Inkjet printers or other low temperature printers or transparencies designed for monochrome printing Use only transparencies that are specified for use with HP Color LaserJet printers e Do not use photo paper intended for Inkjet printers 24 Chapter 1 Printer description ENWW e Do not use paper that is embossed or coated and that is not designed for the temperatures of the HP Color LaserJet 3500 3550 and 3700 series printer image fusers Select paper that can tolerate temperatures of 190 C 374 F for 0 1 second HP produces a selection of paper that is designed for the HP Color LaserJet 3500 3550 and 3700 series printer e Donotuse letterhead paper with low temperature dyes or thermography Preprinted forms or letterhead must use inks that can tolerate temperatures of 190 C 374 F for 0 1 second e Do not use any media that produces hazardous emissions or that melts offsets or discolors when exposed to 190 C 374 F for 0 1 second ENWW Selecting pape
92. i etti ta emeret readmore Fete ette en 430 Usage page OR 431 Event log ans sens e nei 432 Diagnostics flowchart sssssssssee enm emm een 433 Formatter LED ee D 434 Location of Sensors aeoo aikorde iin eiti tpi edes apod dad ded 437 Location of motors and fans osceann rindende an aS a aAa 440 Location of solenoids and clutches sse 441 Test Page SWIC nyae ESRA ere AS LAE AAA dc te aN 445 Conventions xxi xxii Figure 7 18 Figure 7 19 Figure 7 20 Figure 7 21 Figure 7 22 Figure 7 23 Figure 7 24 Figure 7 25 Figure 7 26 Figure 7 27 Figure 7 28 Figure 7 29 Figure 7 30 Figure 7 31 Figure 7 32 Figure 8 1 Figure 8 2 Figure 8 3 Figure 8 4 Figure 8 5 Figure 8 6 Figure 8 7 Figure 8 8 Figure 8 9 Figure 8 10 Figure 8 11 Figure 8 12 Figure 8 13 Figure 8 14 Figure 8 15 Figure 8 16 Figure 8 17 Figure 8 18 Figure 8 19 Figure 8 20 Figure 8 21 Figure 8 22 Figure 8 23 Figure 8 24 Figure 8 25 Figure 8 26 Figure 8 27 Figure 8 28 Figure 8 29 Figure 8 30 Location of main patts caet tante t t n cents 451 Location of Switches idein eei envios Doug pest a eee eeu iue a bugs 452 Location of Sensors tie tei o metere t Rte O eee a de xe tee hd 453 Location of solenoids and clutches sssssssssssssssseee 454 Location of motors and fans sss 455 PCGB locations tote eco e dani e ie du Rob a
93. in slot X has overflowed its I O buffer during a busy state HP 3700 only The printer s parallel buffer has overflowed during a busy state HP 3700 only when an EIO device is installed The printer serial buffer has overflowed during a busy state The printer s USB buffer has overflowed during a busy state HP 3700 only A serial data error parity framing or line overrun has occurred while the printer was receiving data Press for help or See Paper path troubleshooting later in this chapter NOTE If Jam Recovery is set to OFF some pages will not be reprinted Re send the missing pages 1 Press v to continue printing NOTE A loss of data will occur 2 Reduce the complexity of the print job to avoid this error HP 3700 only Add additional memory to allow printing of more complex pages HP 3500 3550 only on the printer driver set Raster Compression on the Advanced tab to Maximum Press v to continue printing NOTE A loss of data will occur Press v to continue printing NOTE A loss of data will occur Press v to continue printing NOTE A loss of data will occur Press v to continue printing NOTE A loss of data will occur Press v to continue printing NOTE A loss of data will occur Printer error troubleshooting 333 Table 7 3 Numerical printer messages continued Message 40 EIO X BAD TRANSMISSION alternates with To continue pres
94. is broken it will be in the down position and the cartridge can not be inserted The black cartridge can be inserted if the part is not broken and working Reseatthe ITB Ensure the shipping locks are removed if the printer is a new set up and that the levers are down If the levers are up check the yellow toner cartridge for any damage If either the yellow cartridge or the ITB are damaged replace them Measure the gap between the ITB and the metal bracket at the bottom end where the ITB makes contact with the yellow cartridge below the recycling instruction label If the gap is about 1 to 2 mm 0 4 to 0 08 inches then the ITB is in the correct position If the gap is 5 to 6 mm 0 2 to 0 23 inches then the ITB is alienated and in mono printing mode The wide gap can cause the 10 92 00 error to occur 13 XX YY FUSER JAM There is a jam inside the lower rear If the printer is unable to clear the jam LOWER REAR DOOR door rear output bin behind the automatically see Pap er path fuser troubleshooting later in this chapter alternates with or For help press Press for help See Paper path troubleshooting later in this chapter for more paper jam troubleshooting 13 XX YY JAM INSIDE There is a jam inside the front door Press for help FRONT DOOR or alternates with See Paper path troubleshootinglater in this chapter For help press NOTE If Jam Recovery is set to OFF some pages will not be rep
95. item allows you to reset the fuser count if the value is lost such as when you replace the formatter This value is initially set to zero at the factory Enter a value up to 60 000 for the hp 3500 and 75 000 for the HP 3700 3550 This value is automatically reset to zero when a customer installs a new transfer kit and sets NEW FUSER KIT to YES in the Resets menu Serial number If you replace the formatter use this item to reset the serial number of the printer 448 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW NOTE ENWW Service ID This item allows the date that the printer was first used to be shown through the control panel eliminating the need for customers to keep paper receipts for proof of warranty Because the printer does not have an internal clock the service ID date s availability is dependent on the printer being connected to a source that can provide the date such as the installer the driver or the embedded Web server In cases where the printer is not connected to a date source the service ID will not be available and the control panel will display 000000 Restoring the Service ID If you replace the formatter the date is lost Use this menu item to reset the date to the original date the printer was first used The date format is YYDDD Calculate the date as follows 1 To calculate YY subtract 1990 from the calendar year For instance if the printer was first used in 2002 calculate YY as follows 2002 1990 12 YY
96. l l l l l l I l I l Figure 5 23 Scanner motor control The DC controller performs this control The DC controller generates the reference clock based on the oscillation frequency of the oscillator X1001 It compares the intervals between the reference clock and the BD INPUT signal BD2l in the frequency comparator and monitors the RPM of the scanner motor The DC controller sends the SCANNER MOTOR ACCELERATION signal ACC1 or the SCANNER MOTOR DECELERATION signal DEC1 to the scanner motor driver according to the monitored speed to control the rotation speed of the motor The following sections describe each control performed by the scanner motor control 144 Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW Speed control The speed control maintains the scanner motor rotation at a specified speed The following is the sequence of steps performed by the speed control 1 The DC controller sends the ACC1 signal to the scanner driver IC at the scanner motor startup to rotate the motor 2 The DC controller forces the laser on and monitors the revolutions of the scanner motor by comparing the intervals between the BD INPUT signal BD2I and the reference clock 3 When the revolution reaches a specified number of revolutions the DC controller sends the DEC1 signal and decelerates the scanner motor The DC controller controls the speed of the scanner motor by sending the ACC1 or DEC1 signal afterwards Phase control This c
97. manually through the control panel The Fuser Kit count can be reset to zero by setting Configure Device RESETS RESET SUPPLIES NEW FUSER KIT YES Transfer unit ITB assembly replacement configuration Under normal circumstances the printer will prompt you to order a new transfer unit when the control panel reads ORDER TRANSFER KIT This message indicates the transfer unit is nearing its end of life When you replace a transfer unit under these circumstances the control panel will not automatically prompt you to reset the transfer unit count If you continue printing with the ORDER TRANSFER KIT message it will eventually covert to the REPLACE TRANSFER KIT message At that time printing is stopped and a new transfer unit must be installed When you replace a transfer unit under these circumstances the control panel automatically prompts you to reset the transfer unit count after you have installed the new transfer unit If you replace the transfer unit for any reason before the control panel reads REPLACE TRANSFER KIT for instance if the transfer unit is defective you will need to calibrate the printer and reset the transfer unit count manually through the control panel To ensure optimum print quality the printer will need to be calibrated by performing 3 Calibrate Now s using the printer control panel by selecting Configure Device PRINT QUALITY CALIBRATE NOW The Transfer Kit count can be reset to zero by setting Configure De
98. messages 312 blank images 393 blank spots 397 calibrating the printer 383 checklist 307 color misregistration 398 color missing 397 control panel diagnostics 407 critical error messages 312 dark color 392 dark images 392 diagnostics 434 dirt on paper 394 duplex jams 369 EIO 403 embedded Web server 422 error messages 312 eventlog 431 front door area jams 362 fuser area jams 373 general process 308 general paper path 379 horizontal lines 396 image defects 390 image formation 381 light color 392 ENWW light images 391 lower rear door areajams 376 misplaced images 399 multifeeds 360 networks 403 numerical printer messages 327 paper jam error messages 357 paper path 356 poor fusing 397 power on 310 print quality 381 print quality environmental problems 382 print quality overhead transparency 381 print quality paper jams 382 printer errors 312 process 307 registration transfer area jams 363 repetitive defects 401 reversed color 400 skewed paper 368 smearing 399 snail tracks 400 status messages 312 toner buildup 382 transfer feed area jams 362 tray 2 paperjams 361 tray 3 paperjams 361 upper rear door area jams 371 vertical dots 394 vertical lines 395 warning messages 312 wrinkled paper 367 U UEL universal exit language 405 UNIX software 73 UNIX Linux networks 70 unpacking the printer 50 upper rear door removal and replacement 214 usage page printing 430 USB
99. motor Defective DC controller PCB Replace the DC controller PCB Area 2 Tray 2 jam troubleshooting Removing paper jams located in the Tray 2 cassette area requires removing the paper tray then removing any paper stuck in the tray input area Check the area inside the tray opening to ensure that all paper has been removed Table 7 7 Causes for jams in the Tray 2 area C mum Worn Deformed cassette pickup roller If worn or deformed replace the roller Defective separation pad If dirty clean the pad If worn or deformed replace the pad Dirty Worn Deformed feed roller If dirty clean the roller If worn or deformed replace the roller Damaged drive gears Check the drive gears in the pickup feed block If damaged replace the gears Defective cassette pickup solenoid Disconnect the cassette pickup solenoid connector J1016 from the DC controller PCB Measure the resistance between the connector J1016 6 CSTSL and J1016 5 24VA If it is not approx 160 ohms replace the cassette pickup solenoid Defective feed motor Replace the feed motor Defective DC controller PCB Replace the DC controller PCB Area 3 Tray 3 500 sheet feeder area jam troubleshooting Removing paper jams located in the Tray 3 optional 500 sheet feeder area requires removing the paper tray then removing any paper stuck in the tray input area Check the area inside the tray opening to ensure that all paper has been removed Table 7 8 Caus
100. no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures e Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna e Increase separation between equipment and receiver e Connect equipment to an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is located e Consult your dealer or an experienced radio TV technician Any changes or modifications to the printer that are not expressly approved by HP could void the user s authority to operate this equipment Use of a shielded interface cable is required to comply with the Class B limits of Part 15 of FCC rules FCC Regulations 39 40 Chapter 1 Printer description ENWW service approach Chapter contents ENWW This chapter contains the following sections Chapter Content 41 Search APPFOACH EET 42 Parts and supplies sssssssssssssssssssseseseen enne eren nennen emere nnne EEEE EEEE ens 43 Ordering Boreae 43 Ordering supplies ssesssssssssseseseeeeenene ener eene en nennt nnne enne tnter nnne 43 Exchange program iced a tasa teras d da turre
101. o ommo SHOW EVENT LOG Displays the last 50 events on the control panel display starting with the most recent PQ TROUBLESHOOTING Prints a series of print quality assessment pages that help troubleshoot any print quality problems DISABLE CARTRIDGE CHECK Allows you to print with one or more print cartridges removed to help troubleshoot many print problems PAPER PATH SENSORS Shows the values of the sensors Values are updated as paper passes each sensor Jobs can be initiated from the control panel or sent from the computer PAPER PATH TEST Used to isolate the cause of paper jams MANUAL SENSOR TEST Allows you to test the paper path sensors and switches for correct operation COMPONENT TEST Activates individual parts independently to isolate noise leaking and other hardware issues PRINT STOP TEST Isolates print quality faults more accurately by stopping the printer in mid print cycle This allows you to see where the image begins to degrade Note this causes a jam that may need to be removed Service menu The Service menu is PIN protected for added security Only authorized service people have access to the service menu When you select SERVICE from the list of menus you are prompted to enter your 8 digit PIN number The PIN for the HP Color LaserJet 3500 3550 printer is 10350003 and for the HP Color LaserJet 3700 printer is 10370003 1 Press w or a until the first digit of the PIN is displayed 2 Press v to save
102. on page 509 RC1 1622 000CN Table 8 13 on page 505 RC1 1623 000CN Table 8 13 on page 505 RC1 1625 000CN Table 8 13 on page 505 RC1 1626 000CN Table 8 13 on page 505 554 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams ENWW ENWW Table 8 28 Numerical parts list continued Part number RC1 1627 000CN RC1 1628 000CN RC1 1629 000CN RC1 1630 000CN RC1 1637 000CN RC1 1640 000CN RC1 1641 000CN RC1 1642 000CN RC1 1647 000CN RC1 1648 000CN RC1 1649 000CN RC1 1661 000CN RC1 1662 000CN RC1 1665 000CN RC1 2165 000CN RC1 2175 000CN RC1 2178 000CN RC1 2179 000CN RC1 2180 000CN RC1 2182 000CN RC1 2191 000CN RC1 2192 000CN rc1 2235 000CN RC1 2236 000CN RC1 2237 000CN RC1 2280 000CN RC1 2294 000CN RC1 2296 000CN RC1 2318 000CN RC1 2319 000CN RC1 2322 000CN RC1 2323 000CN RC1 2330 000CN Numerical parts list 555 Table 8 28 Numerical parts list continued Part number Table and page RC1 2330 000CN Table 8 13 on page 505 RC1 2334 000CN Table 8 8 on page 491 RC1 2339 000CN Table 8 12 on page 501 RC1 2364 000CN Table 8 10 on page 497 RC1 2422 000CN Table 8 10 on page 497 RC1 2428 000CN Table 8 13 on page 509 RC1 2437 000CN Table 8 9 on page 495 RC1 3240 000CN Table 8 12 on page 501 RC1 3249 000CN Table 8 8 on page 491 RC12331 000CN Table 8 13 on page 505 RK2 0017 000CN Table 8 9 on page 495 RK2 0137 000CN Table 8 12 on page 501 RK2 0138 000CN Table 8 12 on page 501 RK2 013
103. on supply 10 Missing memory on supply YY Description 00 Black print cartridge 01 Cyan print cartridge 02 Magenta print cartridge 03 Yellow print cartridge A new supply has been installed that is not made by HP This message is displayed until an HP supply is installed or v is pressed The cartridges are not engaged poor primary transfer bias contacts defective high voltage supply or control signal errors YY Description 00 Black print cartridge 01 Cyan print cartridge 02 Magenta print cartridge 03 Yellow print cartridge Open and close the front door Ensure the cartridges are fully seated Swap the cartridge for the color indicated with a cartridge in another slot to determine whether the error follows the cartridge or stays with the slot If the error follows the cartridge replace that cartridge otherwise continue with step 4 Check the memory controller PCB contacts to the memory tag Clean if dirty Reseat the memory controller PCB connector J201 and DC controller PCB connector J1025 Defective memory controller PCB replace the memory controller PCB Defective DC controller PCB replace the DC controller PCB If you believe you purchased an HP supply please call the HP fraud hotline at 1 877 219 3183 Service or repairs required as a result of using non HP supplies are not covered under HP warranty To continue printing press v The first pending print job will be c
104. on the left and right sides of the ITB assembly toward the bottom toward the printer of the door 398 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW Table 7 34 Causes for smearing continued Defective cartridge Check if the photosensitive drum in the problem misregistered color s cartridge rotates smoothly If not replace the cartridge misregistered color s cartridge If worn or chipped replace the gear Dirty color misregistration sensor Clean the lens of the color misregistration sensor Defective color misregistration sensor Replace the color misregistration sensor Defective transfer unit If the transfer unit does not rotate smoothly replace the transfer unit i Worn Chipped drive gears Check drive gears between the image drive unit i Worn Chipped cartridge drive gears Check drive gears connected into the problem and the drum motor If worn or chipped replace the gear Defective image drive unit Replace the image drive unit Defective laser scanner unit Replace the laser scanner unit E Defective DC controller PCB Replace the DC controller PCB Smearing Table 7 35 Causes for smearing Poor contacts to each cartridge and printer Clean the grounding contacts on each cartridge grounding and the printer If the problem remains after cleaning check contacts for deformation or damage Replace parts if deformed or damaged Make sure all contacts are connected correctly The movement of the fuser front paper
105. on the left side of the printer turn the printer ON Close the front cover Load plain white paper in the multi purpose tray As the printer goes into READY period press the engine test print switch and test print NO on R One piece of paper will be fed into the printer from the multipurpose tray and will be delivered to the face down delivery tray 354 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW ENWW Color Misregistration Sensor PS12 replacement configuration To ensure optimum print quality the printer will need to be calibrated by performing 3 Calibrate Now s using the printer control panel by selecting CONFIGURE DEVICE PRINT QUALITY CALIBRATE NOW Laser scanner Assembly replacement configuration To ensure optimum print quality the printer will need to be calibrated by performing 3 Calibrate Now s using the printer control panel by selecting CONFIGURE DEVICE PRINT QUALITY CALIBRATE NOW Fuser replacement configuration Under normal circumstances the printer will prompt you to order a new fuser when the control panel reads ORDER FUSER KIT This message indicates the fuser is nearing its end of life When you replace a fuser under these circumstances the control panel will not automatically prompt you to reset the fuser count If you continue printing with the ORDER FUSER KIT message it will eventually covert to the REPLACE FUSER KIT message At that time printing is stopped and a new fuser must be installed When you replac
106. or part description followed by HP 3500 3550 or HP 3700 indicates that the item or part is for use for the HP Color LaserJet 3500 3550 series printer or the HP Color LaserJet 3700 series printer only Table 8 1 Supplies and accessories Part Product Part number Description number Firmware DIMMs C9719 67901 16 64 programmed firmware DIMM Q3992 67901 16 128 programmed firmware DIMM for the HP 3700dn and HP 3700dtn bundles only Flash Memory DIMMs C4287A C9665 67951 4 MB Flash DIMM Memory upgrades C7848A C7848 67901 Synchronous 64 MB DIMM DIMMs SDRAM C7850A C7850 67901 Synchronous 128 MB DIMM SDRAM C9653A C9653 67901 Synchronous 256 MB DIMM SDRAM Ordering parts 467 Table 8 1 Supplies and accessories continued Product Part number Description number Accessories Q2486A Q2486 67901 Optional 500 sheet paper feeder Tray 3 Internal EIO connectivity for the HP Color LaserJet 3700 series printer Internal EIO I O PCB J6057A J6057 69001 HP Jetdirect 615n internal print Exchange part server 10 100 TX Ethernet HI Speed USB 2 0 Connectivity for the HP Color LaserJet 3700 series printer J4167A HP Jetdirect 610n print server J6058A HP Jetdirect 680n 802 11b wireless print server J4135A iL HP Jetdirect connectivity card USB serial and LocalTalk External EX I O PCB J7942A J7942 69001 HP Jetdirect en3700 external Exchange print server 10 100base Tx USB 2 0 Hl speed exchange Conn
107. paper and flex it rotate it 180 degrees or flip it over Reload paper into the input tray NOTE Do not fan paper Fanning can create static electricity which can cause paper to stick together Reset the printer Wait until the page completely settles in the output bin before removing it Reset the printer and print the document again Wait until the page completely settles in the output bin before removing it Remove the top sheet of paper If the paper is heavier than 163 g m 43 Ib it may not be picked from the tray Replace the paper This paper does not separate easily You might need to feed single sheets from Tray 1 Check the printer control panel for messages prompting you to replace supplies or print a supplies status page to verify the remaining life of the supplies Replace the print paper Paper should be stored in the original packaging in a controlled environment ENWW General paper path troubleshooting Use the following suggestions to isolate the cause of the problem Once you have identified the cause use the tables that follow to find a recommended solution NOTE Use the paper path test in the Diagnostics menu to print pages while troubleshooting See Paper Path Test section later in this chapter for information about the paper path test e View or print the event log and determine if a particular jam error occurs more often than others Try to identify a pattern e From the event log
108. paper jam recovery If paper jam recovery is disabled the pages involved in a jam will not be reprinted Avoiding paper jams The table below lists common causes of paper jams and suggests solutions for resolving them Paper path troubleshooting 377 Table 7 15 Common causes of paper jams Common causes of paper jams Paper does not meet HP recommended paper specifications A supply item is installed incorrectly causing repeated You are reloading paper that has already passed through a printer or copier An input tray is loaded incorrectly Paper is skewed Paper is binding or sticking together Paper is removed before it settles into the output bin When duplexing the paper is removed before the second side of the document is printed Paper is perforated or embossed Printer supply items have reached the end of their useful Paper was not stored correctly 378 Chapter Troubleshooting Use only paper that meets HP specifications See Supported media weights and sizes Verify that all print cartridges the transfer unit and the fuser are correctly installed Do not use paper that has been previously printed on or copied Remove any excess paper from the input tray Be sure that the paper does not exceed the maximum stack height mark in the input tray Input tray guides are not adjusted correctly Adjust input tray guides so they hold paper firmly in place without bending it Remove
109. re enable duplexing in the current printer will not work on any other printer if both the formatter and DC Controller are replaced at the same time This file will only work in the current printer Call for assistance from HP Support to obtain the PJL file Also perform the Formatter and DC Controller replacement steps as required below Formatter New replacement configuration The values for Total Mono Pages Total Color Pages Serial Number Service ID Cold Reset Paper if needed and the Fuser Kit Count will need to be reset using the service menu The Transfer Kit count will be unaffected by the replacement of a formatter Print a configuration page and a supplies status page in the Information menu to obtain the page counts counts for any of the supplies serial number and the born on date If a configuration page and a supplies status page cannot be printed this information can be obtained from the Service menu prior to replacing the formatter To ensure optimum print quality the printer will need to be calibrated by performing 3 Calibrate Now s using the printer control panel by selecting Configure Device PRINT QUALITY CALIBRATE NOW Formatter previously installed in another printer replacement configuration When the formatter PCB is being replaced with one that was installed in another printer an NVRAM initialization will need to be performed Before doing an NVRAM INIT print a configuration page and a supplies sta
110. slotted rail 2 to release the pin 3 Press in on the left hinge at the base as shown by the arrow then pull the left side of the tray out and to the right to remove the tray 3 Figure 6 15 Tray 1 removal 216 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW Main Assemblies The following procedures describe removal of the printer s major internal mechanical assemblies Main internal assemblies Figure 6 16 Fuser Developing engaging drive assembly Image drive assembly 2 3 4 5 6 7 Pick up feed assembly Laser scanner assembly Transfer unit Face down delivery assembly 217 Main Assemblies ENWW Transfer unit removal CAUTION Do not touch the surface 5 shown in the figure below of the image transfer belt ITB since it can cause an image defect NOTE If the transfer unit failed or has been replace for some reason other than reaching its end of life end of life is indicated by a control panel message stating that the transfer unit requires replacement then in addition to replacing the unit a configuration procedure must be performed For information on this configuration refer to Chapter 8 Replacement parts configuration 1 Open the front door 218 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW 2 Hold the blue handles 1 on both sides of the transfer unit With your right thumb press and hold the lever 2 on the right side handle then lift the handle up 3 followed by the left
111. solenoid removal 1 of 2 ENWW Solenoids and Clutches 265 3 Disconnect one connector 1 remove one screw 2 and remove the secondary transfer roller engaging solenoid 3 Figure 6 93 Secondary transfer roller engaging solenoid removal 2 of 2 Duplex feed solenoid SL5 removal HP 3700 only 1 Remove the right 250 sheet tray guide See Cassette Tray 2 guide right removal HP 3700 2 Disconnect one connector 1 remove one screw 2 and remove the duplex feed solenoid 3 Figure 6 94 Duplex feed solenoid removal Registration clutch CL1 removal 1 Remove the right cover See Right cover removal 266 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW 2 Disconnect one connector 1 remove two screws 2 and remove the plate 3 t LA WES Figure 6 95 Registration clutch removal 1 of 2 3 Remove the bushing 1 and remove the registration clutch 2 The bushing needs to be used for the replacement clutch Figure 6 96 Registration clutch removal 2 of 2 Reinstallation tip Do not forget to reinstall the bushing 1 removed from the previous clutch The bushing is keyed and fits into the clutch plate one way Also the slotted metal tab on the clutch 3 in the figure above fits on clutch plate s metal tab 4 see the previous figure Black K development clutch CL2 image drive removal 1 Remove the image drive unit See Image drive assembly removal ENWW Solenoids and
112. the AC power is supplied to the low voltage power supply circuit where it is converted to 24 V 5 V and 3 3 V DC power required inside the printer Engine control system 131 CAUTION CAUTION The major recipients of the 24 V 5 V and 3 3 V DC power are listed below e 24 V motors solenoids clutches high voltage power supply PCB memory controller PCB and optional parts e 5 V laser driver PCB high voltage power supply PCB formatter and sensors except for the photo interrupter e 3 3 V formatter sensor photo interrupter ICs inside the control panel DC controller and the memory controller Protective function The low voltage power supply circuit has a protective function against overcurrent and overvoltage to prevent failure in the power supply circuit It automatically breaks the output voltage when overcurrent or overvoltage occurs due to an issue such as a short at the load side Turn off the power switch SW3001 to repair the load side then turn the power back on after the repair is complete since the DC voltage from the low voltage power supply circuit may be stopped by this function There are two power supply fuses FU3001 FU3002 in the circuit which have a protective function The power supply fuse opens and interrupts the current when an overcurrent occurs in the AC line To recover the low voltage power supply after it has been broken for protection turn the power off by switching o
113. the HP Color LaserJet 3550 and 3700 series printer User Guide or HP LaserJet Printer Family Print Media Specification Guide for ordering information To download a copy of the HP LaserJet Printer Family Print Media Specification Guide go to http www hp com support clj3500 for the HP Color LaserJet 3500 series to http www hp com support clj3500 for the HP Color LaserJet 3550 series and to http www hp com support clj3700 for the HP Color LaserJet 3700 series and then select manuals It is possible that paper could meet all of the guidelines in this chapter or the HP LaserJet Printer Family Print Media Specification Guide and still not print satisfactorily This may be due to abnormal characteristics of the printing environment or to other variables over which Hewlett Packard has no control for example extremes in temperature and humidity Hewlett Packard recommends testing any paper before buying it in large quantities CAUTION Using paper that does not conform to the specifications listed here or in the print media guide can cause problems that require service This service is not covered by the Hewlett Packard warranty or service agreements Paper to avoid The printer can handle many types of paper Use of paper outside the printer specifications will cause a loss of print quality and will increase the chance of paper jams e Do not use paper that is too rough e Do not use paper with cutouts or perforations other than standard 3
114. the cables 1 from the cable harness 2 3 Remove the screw 4 from the bracket 3 and remove the metal bracket Figure 6 59 Left swing guide removal 1 of 6 ENWW Main assembly parts 245 4 Remove three screws 1 and swing the cable harness 2 to the right The cable harness does not need to be completely removed to remove the transfer contact assembly However if the cable harness needs to be removed disconnect the cable connector 3 from the back of the harness to remove the harness Reinstallation tip The power switch rod 4 rides in a slot at the bottom of the cable harness When reinstalling the cable harness make sure the switch rod is inserted in this slot E qm m LIN al io j S SE Figure 6 60 Left swing guide removal 2 of 6 5 Remove one screw 1 and unhook three claws 2 to remove the transfer contact assembly 3 Reinstallation tip When installing the transfer contact assembly make sure that the plastic tab 4 fits under the metal tab 5 and that the door switch SW1 is in place Figure 6 61 Left swing guide removal 3 of 6 246 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW 6 Remove two screws 1 and remove the left swing rod arm 2 Figure 6 62 Left swing guide removal 4 of 6 7 Push the left swing guide 1 in as far as it will go 2 Figure 6 63 Left swing guide removal 5 of 6 ENWW Main assembly parts 247 8 Remove one spring 1 and re
115. the digit The display will replace the digit with an asterisk 3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 until all eight digits are entered 4 Press at any time to move to the previous digit Use the Service menu to reset counts clear the event log enter the serial number enter the date the printer was first used and reset the default paper size Table 7 49 Service menu ewe quee emm CLEAR EVENT LOG Allows you to clear the printer s internal event log TOTAL MONO PAGES Range 0 Allows you to reset the page count after 9999999 replacing the formatter The page count should reflect the number of pages printed on the print engine rather than the formatter Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW ENWW Table 7 49 Service menu continued mtm o ues uem TOTAL COLOR PAGES REFURBISH PAGE COUNT TRANSFER KIT COUNT FUSER KIT COUNT SERIAL NUMBER SERVICE ID COLD RESET PAPER Range 0 Allows you to reset the page count after 9999999 replacing the formatter The page count should reflect the number of pages printed on the print engine rather than the formatter Range 0 Allows the page count to be reset to the 9999999 original refurbished page count when the printer is repaired Range for the This item automatically resets to zero HP 3500 3550 when the transfer unit is replaced and the user selects the choice to reset the 0 60000 transfer count HP 3700 3550 0 75 000 NOTE This value is now stored on the DC
116. the print job Settings have been changed before the printer automatically restarts or external device modes have changed If you believe you purchased an HP supply please call the HP fraud hotline at 1 877 219 3183 Service or repairs required as a result of using non HP supplies are not covered under HP warranty Press v to clear this message or Press Stop to continue printing If desired use and to highlight a different size or type and then press v to select the size or type Press to return to the previous size or type No action necessary NOTE Not all messages are described in the tables those messages that are not listed are self explanatory Numerical printer messages The following table lists the numerical control panel messages The alphabetical messages are listed in the previous table ENWW Printer error troubleshooting 327 Table 7 3 Numerical printer messages Message 10 XX YY SUPPLY MEMORY ERROR alternates with For help press NOTE The printer cannot always determine whether the error is the cartridge or the printer reader writer 10 32 00 UNAUTHORIZED SUPPLY alternates with For help press 10 92 YY CARTRIDGES NOT ENGAGED alternates with Open and close front door 328 Chapter Troubleshooting The printer cannot read or write to at least one print cartridge memory tag or at least one memory tag is missing XX Description 00 Memory error
117. the user guide Control panel overlay Getting started guide OnahwWhND HP Color LaserJet 3700dtn printer package contents 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 HP Color LaserJet 3700dtn Tray 3 500 sheet paper feeder tray Power cable Four print cartridges CD ROM the CD ROM contains the user guide Control panel overlay Getting started guide Parallel and USB cables are not included with HP Color LaserJet 3700 series printers Use an IEEE 1284 compliant parallel cable or a standard 2 meter USB cable Checking the package contents 49 Unpacking the printer NOTE Save all the packing materials in case you need to repack and transport the printer at a later date WARNING The printer weighs approximately 33 5 kg 73 3 Ibs HP recommends having two or more people lift or move the printer 1 Prepare the location by selecting a sturdy level surface in a well ventilated dust free area Make sure there is enough space around the printer so that the air vents on the left side and rear of the printer are not blocked CAUTION Do not place the printer in direct sunlight or in an area that has abrupt temperature and humidity changes Recommended ranges 17 to 25 C 62 6 to 77 F and 20 to 60 percent relative humidity NOTE If the printer has an optional 500 sheet paper feeder it is packaged on top of the printer Lift the 500 sheet paper feeder from the package and place it in the prepared location 50 Chapter 3 Installatio
118. the way clockwise 2 To reinstall the swing rod lock guide perform the following steps Figure 6 30 Pick up feed engaging rack assembly replacement 1 of 2 1 Insert the tab on the front of the swing rod lock guide callout 4 above into the slot in the printer frame 5 and then swing the back into position and install the two screws 3 2 Once the swing rod lock guide is installed push the engaging rack all the way forward 1 until it stops This must be done to ensure that the print cartridge engaging pins are in the disengaged position as described below Figure 6 31 Pick up feed engaging rack assembly replacement 2 of 2 The above reassembly procedure ensures that once the reassembly is complete the print cartridge engaging pins are pulled back or disengaged as shown by callout 2 below Callout 1 shows the pins extended or in the engaged position If the engaging pins are in the wrong position if they are engaged the front door will not close because the print cartridge drive shaft will hang up on the engaging pins when the front door is closed This can result in damage to the engaging pins print cartridges or the swing guide closing mechanism j Figure 6 32 Print cartridge engaging pins replacement ENWW Main Assemblies 229 9 Disconnect one connector 1 remove two screws 2 remove the clutch plate 3 and remove the clutch 4 Reinstallation tip When reinstalling the clutch insert t
119. to see if ITB gears are not aligned the problem follows the cartridge or if it stays with the location Left arm drum lock is broken Select the v Move down through the menu and highlight Diagnostics Select the v Move down through the menu and highlight Disable Cartridge check Select the v Remove the cartridge that is the issue To determine which cartridge is the issue look at the last two digits of the 10 92 XX error code 00 black 01 cyan 02 magenta 03 yellow Place the cartridge with the issue in another color slot and put the good cartridge in the trouble cartridge slot Close the door If the 10 92 XX error is still present see if it is still the same cartridge If the black cartridge was moved to the yellow spot did the error message change from 10 92 00 to 10 92 03 or did the error remain a 10 92 00 If the error followed the cartridge replace the cartridge but if it stayed the same the printer may have a broken cartridge alignment knob and should be replaced 330 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW Table 7 3 Numerical printer messages continued Checkifthe left rail guide is in place If it is not in place replace it part number RC1 1642 000CN If the left guide is out of place and is put back in place ensure the left arm guide is working properly slides in the guide rail If the Left Guide rail has been replaced check the left arm drum lock If the part
120. to upgrade the printer with the following items e More printer memory DIMMs are available in 64 128 and 256 MB e Flash memory DIMMs available in 4 MB unlike standard printer memory flash DIMMs can be used to permanently store downloaded items in the printer even when the printer is off e DIMM based accessory fonts macros and patterns e Other DIMM based printer languages and printer options e Memory expansion which can support up to 448 MB of memory You might want to add more memory to the printer if you often print complex graphics or PostScript documents or if you use many downloaded fonts Additional memory also allows the printer to print multiple collated copies at the maximum speed Single in line memory modules SIMMs used on previous HP LaserJet printers are not compatible with this printer To order DIMMs see Ordering parts in chapter 8 Before ordering additional memory see how much memory is currently installed by printing a configuration page 1 Press Menu to enter the MENUS 2 Press to highlight Information 3 Press v to select Information 4 Press w to highlight PRINT CONFIGURATION 5 Press v to print the configuration page Chapter 3 Installation and configuration ENWW Installing memory and font DIMMs You can install more memory for the printer and you can also install a font DIMM to allow the printer to print characters for languages such as Chinese or the Cyrillic alphabet NOTE Stat
121. troubleshooting information Windows PC and Apple Macintosh print drivers Supported printer personalities HP JetReady 4 1 for the HP Color LaserJet 3500 3550 series printer Storage features Environmental features e PowerSave setting e High content of recyclable components and materials 6 Chapter 1 Printer description 16 ppm in both monochrome and color If the performance of the printer is less than this see the HP Color LaserJet 3550 and 3700 series printer User Guide for factors affecting printer performance Prints on a variety of media For more information see Print media specifications MIPS RISC 350 MHz processor 64 MB of SDRAM Can be expanded to 448 MB Graphic display on control panel Enhanced control panel help HP Toolbox a Web application for status and troubleshooting information Windows PC and Apple Macintosh print drivers Embedded Web server to access support and order supplies administrator tool for network connected printers HP PCL 6 PostScript 3 emulation Automatic language switching e Notapplicable e Fonts and forms PowerSave setting High content of recyclable components and materials ENWW ENWW Table 1 1 Features continued HP Color LaserJet 3500 3550 HP Color LaserJet 3700 series printer series printer Paper handling Accessories Not applicable Prints on paper from 76 x 127 mm 3 x 5 inches up t
122. troubleshooting pages Use the built in print quality troubleshooting pages to help diagnose and solve print quality problems PON gt 5 Press MENU to enter the MENUS Press w to highlight DIAGNOSTICS Press v to select DIAGNOSTICS Press to highlight PQ TROUBLESHOOTING Press v to print the pages The printer returns to the Ready state after printing the print quality troubleshooting pages If the print quality defects are found when you review the print quality troubleshooting pages perform a printer calibration See Calibrating the printer Calibrating the printer Calibration is a printer function that optimizes print quality If you experience any print quality problems calibrate the printer N Oa F ON gt Press MENU to enter the MENUS Press w to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE Press v to select CONFIGURE DEVICE Press w to highlight PRINT QUALITY Press v to select PRINT QUALITY Press to highlight CALIBRATE NOW Press v to select CALIBRATE NOW Image formation troubleshooting 383 Using Color The HP Color LaserJet 3500 3550 series printer and the HP Color LaserJet 3700 series printer offer great color printing as soon as you set up the printer They provide a combination of automatic color features to generate excellent color results for the general office user Also the HP Color LaserJet 3700 series printer provides sophisticated tools for the professional who is experienced with using color The HP C
123. waste toner full detection lens Clean if dirty Replace the lens if damaged The connectors in the waste toner full detection signal line are not properly connected Reseat the waste toner full sensor connector J801 and DC controller PCB connector J1009 Defective waste toner full sensor Replace the waste toner full sensor Defective DC controller PCB Replace the DC controller PCB Order the transfer kit Press v to continue printing See Ordering parts in chapter 8 for more information ENWW Table 7 2 Alphabetical printer messages continued Message Request accepted please wait Resend upgrade Restoring factory settings Restoring Resetting Kit Count Rotating COLOR motor alternates with To exit press v STOP key Rotating motor alternates with To exit press v STOP key Setting saved TRAY X TYPE SIZE alternates with To change size or type press v ENWW eem 0 Rm The printer has accepted a request to No action necessary print an internal page but the current job must finish printing before the internal page will print The firmware upgrade was not completed successfully Attempt upgrade again For the HP 3700 printer you might need to use the parallel port to send the upgrade file The printer is restoring factory settings No action necessary YES was selected in the RESET No action necessary SUPPLIES menu to reset the counts for
124. will continue for the until REPLACE FUSER KIT is shown estimated number of pages indicated T Press for help See Ordering parts in chapter 8 for more information More than one supply item is low Press v to identify which supplies should be ordered or print a supplies status page Order the identified supplies Printing can continue until REPLACE SUPPLIES is reached or Press for help See Ordering parts in chapter 8 for more information The number of pages remaining for the Order the transfer kit Printing can continue transfer unit has reached the low threshold and the SUPPLIES LOW setting in SYSTEM SETUP is set to STOP See Ordering parts in chapter 8 for more until REPLACE TRANSFER KIT is reached Press for help information The printer has paused Press the Stop key to resume printing The printer is performing a Paper Path Test No action necessary A firmware upgrade is in process No action necessary Do not turn off the printer The printer is in the process of clearing data The printer is in the PowerSave mode Press any control panel button or the Any button pressed or the receipt of data receipt of data will clear PowerSave will clear PowerSave and execute the action The printer is generating the configuration page The printer will return to the online Ready state when the page is completed No action necessary No action necessary 320 Chapter Troubles
125. you are unable to resolve the problem use the information in this section to identify the root cause of the problem Image defects fall into the categories listed in Table 7 16 Image defects Possible causes and recommended solutions for each of these categories are listed in the tables that follow In general the items are listed in order from minor repairs to major repairs Check the items in the order in which they appear Table 7 16 Image defects Light image Image light in all colors See Table 7 17 Causes for light images Light color Image light in a particular color See Table 7 18 Causes for one color printing light Dark image Image dark in all colors See Table 7 19 Causes for dark images Dark color Image dark in a particular color See Table 7 20 Causes for one color printing dark Completely blank No image is printed See Table 7 21 Causes for a completely blank image All black solid color Image is all black or solid color See Table 7 22 Causes for an all black or solid colored image Dots in vertical lines White dots appear in image See Table 7 23 Causes for vertical lines of white dots Dirt on back of paper Dirt on the back of the page See Table 7 24 Causes for dirt on the back of the paper Dirt on front of paper Dirt on the front of the page See Table 7 25 Causes for dirt on the front of the paper Vertical lines Vertical line appears in image See Table 7 26 Causes for vertical lines White ver
126. 000CN Table 8 8 on page 491 RC1 1283 000CN Table 8 8 on page 491 RC1 1284 000CN Table 8 8 on page 491 RC1 1286 000CN Table 8 8 on page 491 RC1 1287 000CN Table 8 8 on page 491 RC1 1288 000CN Table 8 8 on page 491 552 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams ENWW ENWW Table 8 28 Numerical parts list continued Part number RC1 1291 000CN RC1 1292 000CN RC1 1294 000CN RC1 1295 000CN RC1 1298 000CN RC1 1300 000CN RC1 1302 000CN RC1 1306 000CN RC1 1310 000CN RC1 1328 000CN RC1 1329 000CN RC1 1330 000CN RC1 1342 000CN RC1 1343 000CN RC1 1345 000CN RC1 1347 000CN RC1 1348 000CN RC1 1349 000CN RC1 1350 000CN RC1 1353 000CN RC1 1354 000CN RC1 1355 000CN RC1 1361 000CN RC1 1362 000CN RC1 1407 000CN RC1 1433 000CN RC1 1456 000CN RC1 1464 000CN RC1 1488 000CN RC1 1491 000CN RC1 1492 000CN RC1 1493 000CN RC1 1496 000CN Table and page Table 8 8 on page 491 Table 8 8 on page 491 Table 8 8 on page 491 Table 8 8 on page 491 Table 8 8 on page 491 Table 8 8 on page 491 Table 8 8 on page 491 Table 8 13 on page 509 Table 8 12 on page 501 Table 8 11 on page 499 Table 8 11 on page 499 Table 8 11 on page 499 Table 8 7 on page 489 Table 8 11 on page 499 Table 8 9 on page 495 Table 8 10 on page 497 Table 8 10 on page 497 Table 8 11 on page 499 Table 8 9 on page 495 Table 8 8 on page 491 Table 8 10 on page 497 Table 8 8 on page
127. 0CN Table 8 12 on page 501 MOUNT REGISTRATION CLUTCH RC1 1186 000CN Table 8 8 on page 491 MOUNT SOLENOID HP3500 3550 RC1 1511 000CN Table 8 13 on page 509 MOUNT SOLENOID HP3700 RL1 0203 000CN Table 8 13 on page 509 MULTI PURPOSE TRAY ASS Y RM1 0464 000CN Table 8 6 on page 487 OPERATION PANEL ASS Y RM1 0511 000CM Table 8 5 on page 485 PAD CUSHION RC1 2330 000CN Table 8 12 on page 502 PAD CUSHION RC1 2330 000CN Table 8 13 on page 505 PAD CUSHION RC12331 000CN Table 8 13 on page 505 PAD SEPARATION RC1 0954 000CN Table 8 16 on page 515 ENWW Alphabetical parts list 545 Table 8 27 Alphabetical parts list ieee ee Description Table and page PAD SEPARATION RC1 0939 000 Table 8 17 on page 519 PAPER FEED ASS Y RM1 0460 000CN Table 8 13 on page 509 PAPER FEEDER DRIVER PCB ASS Y RM1 0768 000CN Table 8 25 on page 535 Paper feeder PCB RM1 0768 000 Table 8 4 on page 483 PAPER PICK UP DRIVE ASS Y RM1 0701 000CN Table 8 25 on page 535 PAPER SEPARATION PAD ASS Y RM1 0827 000CN Table 8 26 on page 537 PAPER TRAY 3 500 SHEET FEEDER RM1 0705 000CN Table 8 26 on page 537 PHOTO INTERRUPTER WG8 5571 000CN Table 8 24 on page 533 PHOTO INTERRUPTER TLP 1241 WG8 5362 000CN Table 8 11 on page 499 PHOTO INTERRUPTER TLP1241 WG8 5362 000CN Table 8 13 on page 505 PHOTO INTERRUPTER TLP1241 WG8 5362 000CN Table 8 17 on page 519 PHOTO INTERRUPTER TLP1241 WG8 5362 000CN Table 8 18 on page 521 PHOTO INTERRUPTER
128. 1 0488 000CN Table 8 8 on page 492 CABLE MAIN HP3500 3550 RM1 0495 000CN Table 8 10 on page 497 CABLE MAIN HP3700 RM1 0475 000CN Table 8 10 on page 497 CABLE OPERATION PANEL RM1 0489 000CN Table 8 5 on page 485 CABLE OPTION CONNECTING HP3500 3550 RM1 0496 000CN Table 8 13 on page 509 CABLE OPTION CONNECTING HP3700 RM1 0476 000CN Table 8 13 on page 509 CABLE SENSOR RM1 0770 000CN Table 8 24 on page 533 CABLE TM FFC RK2 0163 000CN Table 8 10 on page 497 CASSETTE GUIDE RIGHT ASS Y RM1 0736 000CN Table 8 13 on page 509 CASSETTE PICK UP ROLLER ASS Y RM1 0731 000CN Table 8 8 on page 491 CASSETTE PICK UP ROLLER ASS Y RM1 0731 000CN Table 8 24 on page 533 CLAMP CABLE WT2 5841 000CN Table 8 8 on page 492 ENWW Alphabetical parts list 539 Table 8 27 Alphabetical parts list continued CLAMP CABLE WT2 5841 000CN Table 8 9 on page 495 CLAMP CABLE WT2 0507 000CN Table 8 10 on page 497 CLAMP CABLE WT2 5738 000CN Table 8 10 on page 497 CLAMP CABLE WT2 5754 000CN Table 8 10 on page 497 CLAMP CABLE WT2 5841 000CN Table 8 11 on page 499 CLUTCH ELECROMAGNETIC RK2 0247 000CN Table 8 8 on page 492 CLUTCH ELECTROMAGNETIC RK2 0248 000CN Table 8 14 on page 511 CLUTCH ELECTROMAGNETIC RK2 0176 000CN Table 8 15 on page 513 CLUTCH MECHANICAL RB2 6324 000CNN Table 8 13 on page 509 CLUTCH MECHANICAL RC1 1433 000CN Table 8 17 on page 519 COLOR MIS REG SENSOR ASS Y RM1 0451 000CN Table 8 17 on pag
129. 1 1153 000CN RC1 1155 000CN RC1 1156 000CN RC1 1158 000CN RC1 1159 000CN RC1 1169 000CN FORMATTER PCB HP3500 3550 includes cage Table 8 10 on page 497 Formatter PCB HP3500 3550 Formatter PCB HP3700 Formatter Kit HP3700 Table 8 3 on page 481 FORMATTER PCB HP3700 includes cage Table 8 10 on page 497 Numerical parts list 551 Table 8 28 Numerical parts list continued Part number Table and page RC1 1170 000CN Table 8 9 on page 495 RC1 1175 000CN Table 8 7 on page 489 RC1 1176 000CN Table 8 6 on page 487 RC1 1177 000CN Table 8 9 on page 495 RC1 1181 000CN Table 8 10 on page 497 RC1 1184 000CN Table 8 9 on page 495 RC1 1185 000CN Table 8 13 on page 505 RC1 1186 000CN Table 8 8 on page 491 RC1 1213 000CN Table 8 10 on page 497 RC1 1218 000CN Table 8 12 on page 501 RC1 1224 000CN Table 8 8 on page 491 RC1 1229 000CN Table 8 12 on page 501 RC1 1230 000CN Table 8 12 on page 501 RC1 1231 000CN Table 8 12 on page 501 RC1 1233 000CN Table 8 12 on page 501 RC1 1234 000CN Table 8 12 on page 501 RC1 1242 000CN Table 8 12 on page 501 RC1 1243 000CN Table 8 11 on page 499 RC1 1243 000CN Table 8 12 on page 501 RC1 1244 000CN Table 8 12 on page 501 RC1 1246 000CN Table 8 12 on page 501 RC1 1247 000CN Table 8 6 on page 487 RC1 1248 000CN Table 8 12 on page 501 RC1 1252 000CN Table 8 9 on page 495 RC1 1259 000CN Table 8 12 on page 501 RC1 1260 000CN Table 8 12 on page 501 RC1 1277 000CN Table 8 12 on page 501 RC1 1281
130. 10 Waste toner full sensor PS16 Secondary transfer roller engaging sensor 166 Chapter 5 Theory of operation ITB feed roller Primary transfer roller Primary transfer roller engaging cam ITB ITB cleaning blade ITB cleaner screw ENWW ITB cleaning control This controls the removal of the residual toner from the ITB to prevent an image defect The following is the sequence of this control 1 The cleaning blade on the ITB is always in contact with the ITB and scraping the residual toner off the ITB See callout A in figure Figure 5 45 ITB cleaning control below 2 The toner scraped off the ITB is transferred onto the waste toner conveyor belt by the ITB cleaning screw 3 The waste toner is delivered to the waste toner container sitting inside the ribs of the conveyor during transfer See callouts B and C in figure Figure 5 45 ITB cleaning control below Callout C Waste toner container 4 amp Waste toner path To waste toner Belts rotational direction container ae ITB Waste toner conveyor belt Callout B ITB cleaning blade Callout A Yi GAMMA MA ITB cleaning blade mio ITB cleaning E gt screw BES E gt z e 7 g EE tL o gt Figure 5 45 ITB cleaning control NOTE Residual toner ITB cleaner cover No bias is applied during the ITB cleaning control Waste toner full detection The DC controller monitors the waste toner full sen
131. 11 Internal components 4 of 4 496 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams ENWW Table 8 10 Internal components 4 of 4 FORMATTER PCB HP3700 includes cage FORMATTER PCB HP3500 3550 includes Q1319 69001 cage ENWW Illustrations and parts lists 497 Figure 8 12 Center frame assembly 498 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams ENWW ENWW Table 8 11 Center Frame Assembly e poems sermons i b sememaeonrcowmoumees scrumem 0 ko meses C o Illustrations and parts lists 499 37 26 M1 45003 i f J5027 i S5 35 J5028 fr Figure 8 13 Main Right Side Plate Assembly Motors 500 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams ENWW Table 8 12 Main Right Side Plate Assembly Motors ENWW Illustrations and parts lists 501 Table 8 12 Main Right Side Plate Assembly Motors continued br eee eem f 502 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams ENWW ENWW Illustrations and parts lists 503 Main Left Side Plate Assembly Figure 8 14 ENWW 504 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams Table 8 13 Main Left Side Plate Assembly ENWW Illustrations and parts lists 505
132. 12 2 To calculate DDD use the following formula 30 calendar month 1 calendar day DDD If the calendar day is 31 use 30 instead For instance if the printer was first used on October 17 calculate DDD as follows Subtract 1 from 10 October is the tenth month of the year 10 1 9 4 Multiply 9 by 30 9 x 30 270 Add 17 to 270 270 17 287 Thus DDD 287 Converting the Service ID to an actual date You can use the printer s Service ID number to determine whether the printer is still under warranty Convert the Service ID into the installation date as follows 1 Add 1990 to YY to get the actual year that the printer was installed 2 Divide DDD by 30 If there is a remainder add 1 to the result This is the month 3 The remainder from the calculation in step 2 is the date Using the Service ID 12287 as an example the date conversion is as follows 1 12 1990 2002 so the year is 2002 2 287 divided by 30 9 with a remainder of 17 Since there is a remainder add 1 to 9 to get 10 which represents October The remainder in step 2 is 17 so that is the date 4 The complete date is 17 October 2002 A 6 day grace period is built into the date system Cold reset paper When you perform a cold reset the paper size stored in NVRAM is reset to the default factory setting If you replace a formatter board in a country region such as Europe that uses AA as the standard paper size use this menu to reset t
133. 216 by 279 mm 60 to 105 g m 500 sheets 8 5 by 11 in 16 to 28 Ib bond 75 g m 20 Ib bond A4 210 by 297 mm 60 to 105 g m 500 sheets 8 3 by 11 7 in 16 to 28 Ib bond 75 g m 20 Ib bond Capacity can vary depending on media weight and thickness and environmental conditions Table 1 11 Automatic two sided printer available on some models of the HP Color LaserJet 3700 series eas ames 7 Dimensions Weight or thickness or Weight or thickness Capacity C E 216 by 279 mm 60 to 105 g m unlimited sheets sheets 8 5 by 11 in 16 to 28 Ib bond Legal 216 by 356 mm 60 to 105 g m unlimited sheets sheets 8 5 by 14 in 16 to 28 Ib bond 210 by 297 mm 60 to 105 g m unlimited sheets sheets 8 3 by 11 7 in 16 to 28 Ib bond 1The printer automatically prints on paper weights up to 163 gm 43 Ib bond However automatic two sided printing on weights above the maximum value noted in this table can produce unexpected results ENWW Print media specifications 17 Manual two sided printing Any of the supported paper sizes and types listed for printing from Tray 1 can be manually duplexed See the two sided duplex printing section in the HP Color LaserJet 3550 and 3700 series printer User Guide for more information 18 Chapter 1 Printer description ENWW Hewlett Packard warranty statement HP PRODUCT DURATION OF LIMITED WARRANTY HP Color LaserJet 3500 3500n 3550 3550n 3700 One year limited warranty 3700n
134. 25 Causes for dirt on the front of the paper A Defective cartridge deteriorated toner or Replace the cartridge of the color that matches scratches on the developing cylinder the defect photosensitive drum or primary charging roller Repetitive dirt dirty registration sub roller fuser Refer to the Table 7 39 Repetitive defect cause sleeve feed sub roller or face down delivery table later in this chapter identify the roller with roller which the problem is associated Clean the dirty roller Replace the roller if the dirt does not come off C Dirty multi purpose tray pickup roller Clean dirty places on the roller Replace the roller if the dirt does not come off Defective transfer unit Check the transfer unit surface If scratched or dented replace the transfer unit Defective transfer unit cleaning blade Replace the transfer unit Vertical lines Table 7 26 Causes for vertical lines Photosensitive drum has grooves going around the Replace the cartridge for the color of the vertical circumference lines Fuser sleeve has grooves around the circumference Replace the fuser White vertical lines If the lines appear in a particular color go to step A If they appear in full color print go to step B Table 7 27 Causes for white vertical lines A Circumferential scratches on the developing Replace the print cartridge cylinder print cartridge Circumferential scratches on the photosensitive
135. 28 cartridge cleaning control 163 life detection 161 presence detection 160 cassette see also tray 2 291 cautions 11 CD service parts information 44 Chapter 113 201 303 465 circuit assemblies 42 capacity 12 ENWW circuit boards 278 circuits DC controller 119 fuser control 127 heater temperature control 128 high voltage power supply 132 low voltage power supply 126 131 CL1 see registration clutch 266 CL2 see black development clutch 267 CL3 see developing engaging drive clutch 268 cleaning covers 91 printer and accessories 91 spilled toner 92 cleaning block print process 155 clear event log 448 clutch black development CL2 267 developing engaging drive CL3 268 CMYK ink set emulation 385 coated media 25 cold reset paper type 449 color adjusting balance 389 automatic adjustment 386 CMYK 385 CMYK ink set emulation 385 HP ImageREt 2400 384 managing 386 manual adjustment 386 matching 388 options 384 paper selection 384 print quality 384 reversed 400 RGB 384 swatch book color matching 388 using 384 color misregistration control 174 detection 176 color misregistration sensor PS12 removal and replacement 260 replacement configuration 355 476 colored paper 26 Index 561 commands DOS 404 PJL 404 Commercial Service and Support Organization America CSSO A 43 Europe CSSO E 43 compact disc service parts information 44 components replacing 42 configuration color misregistration sensor
136. 28T GUIDE CABLE GUIDE CABLE GUIDE CABLE GUIDE CABLE GUIDE CABLE Table and page Table 8 9 on page 495 Table 8 8 on page 491 Table 8 8 on page 491 Table 8 8 on page 491 Table 8 8 on page 491 Table 8 8 on page 491 RC1 1234 000CN Table 8 12 on page 501 Table 8 8 on page 491 Table 8 8 on page 491 Table 8 8 on page 491 Table 8 8 on page 491 Table 8 8 on page 491 Table 8 8 on page 491 Table 8 8 on page 491 RC1 1231 000CN Table 8 12 on page 501 RC1 1233 000CN Table 8 12 on page 501 RC1 3240 000CN Table 8 12 on page 501 RC1 1230 000CN Table 8 12 on page 501 RC1 1302 000CN Table 8 8 on page 491 RC1 1213 000CN Table 8 10 on page 497 RC1 1229 000CN Table 8 12 on page 501 RC1 2334 000CN Table 8 8 on page 491 RC1 1181 000CN Table 8 10 on page 497 RC1 2322 000CN Table 8 13 on page 509 RC1 2323 000CN Table 8 13 on page 509 RC1 1306 000CN Table 8 13 on page 509 Alphabetical parts list 543 Table 8 27 Alphabetical parts list 77 MERC RC NERO Description Table and page GUIDE CASSETTE LEFT RC1 1491 000CN Table 8 13 on page 509 GUIDE CASSETTE RIGHT HP3500 RC1 1492 000CN Table 8 13 on page 509 GUIDE DUPLEXING HP3700 RC1 1613 000CN Table 8 13 on page 509 HOLDER MEMORY CONTROLLER PCB RC1 1343 000CN Table 8 11 on page 499 HOLDER SENSOR RC1 1329 000CN Table 8 11 on page 499 HOLDER SENSOR RC1 1049 000CN Table 8 13 on page 505 HOLDER SENSOR RC1 1496 000CN Table 8 13 on page
137. 3 Unhook two claws 2 and remove the connector cover 3 It may be easier to unhook the upper claw from the other side of the printer frame 24 Release one claw 4 and remove the right swing guide rail 5 It may be easier to unhook the claw from the other side of the frame Reinstallation tip The swing guide rail is also secured with a screw located on the other side of the frame which was removed in a previous step Figure 6 40 Pick up feed assembly removal 11 of 13 25 Release one pin 1 and remove the front left swing guide rail 2 In addition to the pin at the back of the rail the front is secured with sticky tape Apply steady pressure to release it Reinstallation tip When reinstalling the swing guide rail insert the tab at the back in first and then slide the front in place Apply a slight pressure to the front to secure the tape Figure 6 41 Pick up feed assembly removal 12 of 13 234 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW 26 Disconnect three connectors 1 27 Remove eight screws 2 and un route the cable 3 28 For the HP Color LaserJet 3500 3550 series printers remove the pick up feed assembly 5 for the HP Color LaserJet 3700 series printers release the duplex pan by pulling out on the green button 4 and then remove the pick up feed assembly 5 we IIIS em Figure 6 42 Pick up feed assembly removal 13 of 13 LE und broderi brown ENWW Main Assemblies 235 Main
138. 306 Troubleshooting process ssssssssseee eene nene nernen nennen nen nennen enn 307 Pre troubleshooting checklist eese esci Ea 307 Troubleshooting flowchart esse eene nennen eren nennen 308 Troubleshooting DOWOTFsO 2 11er e inar AEE TAE 310 Printer error troubleshooting sssssseeee eene nennen enne enne enne 312 ICE III M M m 312 Warning messages sss eene ennemi en nene iren nnn nnne n nennen nnne 312 Enor toI iiec 312 Crit cal error messages esee pour ee deeds pad qan ta Dua pepe deae mp dia prex due Meade 312 Alphabetical printer messages ssssssssssssssseeeneseneen enne erem rt nsns annen 312 Numerical printer messages dette petite ihnen ce ER go dm FR aguas tta Adae ee aA 327 Replacement parts configuration eeesssssssssssssssesesse eene nnne nnne 352 Formatter and DC Controller replaced at the same time sssssssssssss 352 Formatter New replacement configuration see 352 Formatter previously installed in another printer replacement configuration 353 DC Controller New replacement configuration se 353 DC Controller previously installed in another printer replacement configuration 354 Media sensor PS5 replacement configuration sseee 354 Color Misregistration Sensor P
139. 3700dtn printer models only The printer control panel displays the message 13 XX YY JAM REMOVE TRAY 2 1 Remove Tray 2 2 Remove any paper in the top of the tray opening Paper path troubleshooting 369 3 Onthe left side of the tray opening pull the green lever straight forward until the metal paper access plate duplex pan drops TNS 4 Remove any jammed paper 9 FU 5 Press the metal access plate duplex pan up until it locks in place 6 Replace Tray 2 7 Press v to resume printing Area 6 Fuser face down delivery jam troubleshooting Table 7 14 Fuser face down delivery area If the jam has occurred around the fuser Reseat the fuser delivery sensor lever if it does not move area a defective fuser delivery sensor is smoothly or it is out of position Replace the lever if likely damaged or deformed 370 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW Table 7 14 Fuser face down delivery area continued Defective face down delivery sensor lever Reseat the face down delivery sensor lever if it does not move smoothly or it is out of position Replace the lever if damaged or deformed Defective fuser delivery sensor lever Reseat the fuser delivery sensor lever if it does not move smoothly or it is out of position Replace the lever if damaged or deformed The rotation of the fuser sleeve or Replace the fuser if worn o
140. 4 paper sizes standard on the HP Color LaserJet 3700dtn printer Tray 3 For more information see Print media specifications A 150 sheet face down output bin top and a 25 sheet face up output bin rear Automatic two sided printing on HP Color LaserJet 3700dn and 3700dtn printers Optional 500 sheet paper feeder Tray 3 that supports letter and A4 paper sizes standard on the HP Color LaserJet 3700dtn printer Tray 3 DIMM Optional flash DIMM Printer features 7 Table 1 1 Features continued HP Color LaserJet 3500 3550 HP Color LaserJet 3700 series printer series printer Connectivity Supplies Chapter 1 Printer description High speed universal serial bus USB 2 0 cable interface HP Jetdirect en3700 external print server standard on theHP Color LaserJet 3500n 3550n printer HP Web Jetadmin software Supplies status page contains information on toner level page count and estimated pages remaining No shake cartridge design Printer checks for authentic HP print cartridges at cartridge installation Internet enabled supply ordering capabilities using HP Toolbox Standard bidirectional parallel cable interface IEEE 1284 compliant for backward compatibility Universal serial bus USB cable interface Optional enhanced input output EIO network card standard on HP Color LaserJet 3700n 3700dn and 3700dtn printers eP Embedded Web server
141. 54 500 Sheet paper feeder pick up clutch removal NOTE The entire unit needs to be replaced for replacement of the pick up clutch Pick up solenoid SL3 removal 500 sheet feeder 1 Remove Tray 3 2 Remove the right cover See Right cover removal 3 Disconnect one connector 1 remove two screws 2 and remove the solenoid plate 3 Figure 6 155 500 Sheet paper feeder pick up solenoid removal 4 Remove the one screw to remove the pick up solenoid from the plate ENWW 500 Sheet paper feeder sensor solenoid motor PCB 301 Paper sensor PS3 removal 500 sheet feeder 1 Remove Tray 3 2 Turn the 500 sheet paper feeder over 3 Remove two screws 1 and remove the lower front frame 2 Figure 6 156 500 Sheet paper feeder front frame removal 1 of 3 4 Press in on one claw by inserting a flat blade screwdriver into the slot 1 at the same time pry up at slot 2 to release the cover 3 then swing the left side of the cover out to remove it Figure 6 157 500 Sheet feeder paper sensor removal 2 of 3 5 Disconnect one connector 1 unhook two claws 2 and remove the paper sensor 3 Figure 6 158 500 Sheet feeder paper sensor removal 3 of 3 302 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW Troubleshooting Chapter contents ENWW This chapter contains the following sections Chapter Content 303 MMOGUCUON RH
142. 56 69001 Image fuser kit 220 240V Supplies for the 3700 Q2670A Black print cartridge for the series printer HP Color LaserJet 3700 series printer Q2681A Cyan print cartridge for the HP Color LaserJet 3700 series printer Q2682A Yellow print cartridge for the HP Color LaserJet 3700 series Q2683A Magenta print cartridge for the HP Color LaserJet 3700 series printer printer Q3658A Q3658 69001 Image transfer kit Q3655A Q3655 69001 Image fuser kit 110 127V Q3656A Q3656 69001 Image fuser kit 220 240V Cables C cable IEEE 1284 compliant parallel cable 3 m approximately 10 feet long with 25 pin male micro 36 pin male C size connector D C6518A 8120 8485 USB 2 meter standard ENWW Ordering parts 469 Table 8 1 Supplies and accessories continued Part Product Part number Description number C6520A lL ol USB 2 0 printer cable 3 meter 8120 6812 AC power cord 50 sheets HP Color LaserJet Transparencies letter 50 sheets HP Color LaserJet Transparencies A4 HP LaserJet High Gloss paper letter 200 sheets HP LaserJet Soft Gloss paper letter C2934A C2936A Q2419A C4179A C4179B 200 sheets HP LaserJet Soft Gloss paper A4 i Q1298A EENNN HP LaserJet Tough paper letter HPU1132 HP Premium Choice LaserJet paper letter CHP410 HP Premium Choice LaserJet paper A4 HP LaserJet paper letter HP LaserJet paper A4 5851 1468 HP LaserJet Printer Family Print Media Specification Guide 5021 0337 PCL
143. 6 139 Right Tray 2 guide removal 4 of 6 11 Remove two screws 1 from the duplex position guide assembly 2 and remove it Figure 6 140 Right Tray 2 guide removal 5 of 6 ENWW Tray 2 cassette parts removal 293 12 Remove two screws 1 and remove the tray guide 2 Figure 6 141 Right tray guide removal 6 of 6 Cassette Tray 2 guide right removal HP 3500 3550 1 Remove Tray 2 2 Remove two screws 1 and remove the duplex guide 2 from the back of the printer Figure 6 142 Right Tray 2 guide removal 1 of 3 3 Turn the printer on its back 294 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW 4 Remove eight screws 1 from the bottom plate 2 and remove the plate Figure 6 143 Right Tray 2 guide removal 2 of 3 5 Remove two screws 1 from the right tray guide and remove the guide 2 Figure 6 144 Right Tray 2 guide removal 3 of 3 ENWW Tray 2 cassette parts removal 295 500 Sheet paper feeder Tray 3 covers This section describes the removal and replacement procedures for the 500 sheet paper feeder covers Figure 6 145 500 Sheet feeder cover locations 1 Right cover 2 Left cover 3 Front cover Front cover removal 500 sheet paper feeder 1 Remove Tray 3 2 Remove the 500 sheet paper feeder right and left covers See Right cover removal 500 sheet paper feeder and Left cover removal 500 sheet paper feeder 3 Liftup on the top edge of the front cover to relea
144. 66 registration paper sensor PS4 removal and replacement 254 regulatory information power rating 22 remanufactured assemblies 44 removal and replacement black development clutch CL2 267 color misregistration sensor PS12 260 control panel PCB 287 568 Index DC controller PDB 278 delivery motor M2 271 developing engaging drive assembly 225 developing engaging drive clutch CL3 268 developing engaging sensor PS14 261 developing motor M4 273 door switch 250 drum motor M3 271 duplex feed delivery paper sensor 258 duplex feed solenoid SL5 266 environment sensor PS15 261 exhaust fan FAN1 277 face down delivery assembly 221 face down delivery paper sensor 257 feed guide 240 feed motor M1 269 formatter PCB 279 front cover 500 sheet paper feeder 296 front door 209 fuser 220 fuser delivery paper sensor PS7 256 fuser front paper sensor PS6 256 fuser sleeve 239 high voltage power supply PCB 281 image drive assembly 223 laser scanner assembly 222 left cover 210 left cover 500 sheet paper feeder 297 left front cover 211 low voltage power supply PCB 285 lower rear door 215 media sensor PS5 255 memory controller PCB 286 paper sensor 500 sheet paper feeder 302 PCB 500 sheet paper feeder 300 pick up clutch 500 sheet paper feeder 301 pick up roller 500 sheet paper feeder 298 pick up solenoid 500 sheet paper feeder 301 pick up feed assembly 225 power switch 251 pressure r
145. 9 000CN Table 8 12 on page 501 RK2 0141 000CN Table 8 8 on page 492 RK2 0141 000CN Table 8 17 on page 519 RK2 0143 000CN Table 8 13 on page 509 RK2 0145 000CN Table 8 17 on page 519 RK2 0150 000CN Table 8 10 on page 497 RK2 0153 000CN Table 8 9 on page 495 RK2 0157 000CN Table 8 8 on page 491 RK2 0157 000CN Low voltage power supply PCB 110 127V Low Table 8 3 on page 481 RK2 0158 000CN voltage power supply PCB 220 240V 556 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams ENWW Table 8 28 Numerical parts list continued Part number Table and page RL1 0193 000CN Table 8 8 on page 491 RL1 0203 000CN Table 8 13 on page 509 RL1 0215 000CN Table 8 7 on page 489 RL1 0216 000CN Table 8 7 on page 489 RL1 0217 000CN Table 8 8 on page 492 RM1 0415 040CN Table 8 14 on page 511 RM1 0419 000CN Table 8 9 on page 495 RM1 0434 000CN Table 8 15 on page 513 RM1 0437 000CN Table 8 21 on page 527 RM1 0438 000CN Table 8 7 on page 489 RM1 0439 000CN Table 8 22 on page 529 RM1 0440 000CN Table 8 7 on page 489 RM1 0441 000CN Table 8 9 on page 495 RM1 0442 000CN Table 8 9 on page 495 RM1 0443 000CN Table 8 5 on page 485 rm1 0444 000CN Table 8 5 on page 485 RM1 0445 000CN Table 8 7 on page 489 RM1 0446 000CN Table 8 7 on page 489 RM1 0449 000CN Table 8 17 on page 519 RM1 0451 000CN Table 8 17 on page 519 RM1 0452 000CN Table 8 17 on page 519 RM1 0456 000CN Table 8 17 on page 519 RM1 0458 000CN Table 8 13 on page 509 RM1 0459 000CN Table 8 13 on page 509 RM1 0460 000CN T
146. 943 2001 EMC CISPR 22 1997 EN 55022 1998 Class B9 EN 61000 3 2 2000 EN 61000 3 3 1995 A1 EN 55024 1998 FCC Title 47 CFR Part 15 Class B ICES 003 Issue 4 GB9254 1998 GB17625 1 2003 Supplementary Information The product herewith complies with the requirements of the EMC Directive 89 336 EEC and the Low Voltage Directive 73 23 EEC and carries the CE Marking accordingly 1 The product was tested in a typical configuration with Hewlett Packard Personal Computer Systems 2 This Device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two Conditions 1 this device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation 3 The product includes LAN Local Area Network options When the interface cable is attached to LAN connectors the product meets the requirements of EN55022 Class A in which case the following applies Warning This is a class A product In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures 4 For regulatory purposes this product is assigned a Regulatory model number This number should not be confused with the marketing names HP Color LaserJet 3700 series or the product numbers Q1321A Q1322A Q1323A Q13244 Boise Idaho 83713 USA 1 August 2004 For Regulatory Topics Only Australia Contact Produc
147. A Commercial Service and Support Organization America 43 CSSO E Commercial Service and Support Organization Europe 43 cutouts 24 D DC controller circuit 119 function 119 replacement configuration 353 355 475 476 replacement configuration previously installed 354 475 DC controller PCB removal and replacement 278 delivery motor M2 removal and replacement 271 Deskjet transparencies avoiding 26 detection cartridge life 161 cartridge presence 160 color misregistration 176 developing cylinder engaging disengaging 163 failure 130 failure laser diode 144 failure scanner motor 145 image density 180 ITB transfer unit 168 jams 199 media 189 toner level 161 transfer roller engaging disengaging secondary 173 transfer unit life 169 waste toner full 167 developing cylinder engaging disengaging control 162 detection 163 ENWW developing disengaging assembly part numbers 506 508 developing engaging drive assembly removal and replacement 225 developing engaging drive clutch CL3 removal and replacement 268 developing engaging sensor PS14 removal and replacement 261 developing motor M4 removal and replacement 273 developing motor control 125 developing motor control circuit 125 developing section cartridges 156 engaging disengaging unit 157 memory tag control 160 development block print process 151 diagnostics control panel 436 engine 434 manual sensor test 436 mode 434 paper path sensors 436
148. AG ley see 950290 l l EE 5 TONSNS2 LED Q2 7 TONSNS I al 9 4 ase E B CRG I a ia 2 Ia q aaa 5 eg sre av Hg M 203 es 8 l 5 ae 8 POELE fidget E S n5 i Eurer t TAG l Sag EE 8 tese aSa Il fore SO8Gcp Faq I go IET nnnm SESS 25255 PREMATA H LED3 a3 I age Pere denesaad ree 20500 HREZLOOP SSE MEMTD CRG uuu ue IS ju co 13 MEMCLK4 I alo iale 5 Aal MREBENRRRESEEE Holela clelelelalel delle 14 MEMCLK3 C uoo I Ug 15 MEMCLK2 TAG I l J1024 J1023 J1018 J1009 JI014 Toes 1029 MEMCLK1 dona ep ea yr ebay registration Sensor Secondai Multi purpose CRG l E I oo Transfer Roller jp ee Tray Paper Multi purpose Secondary Transfer BK s20s l pi sor Engaging Sensor ensor Sensor Tray Pick up Roller Engaging TAG J5012DA 501208 Media Sensor I us Color Color I PS2 PS16 PS4 PS1 Solenoid Solenoid J5012DA J5012DB isregistration isregistration PS5 Sensor L Senso R LIC LIK aL LIE St 14 DR JP2020 Lll s702 sne 704 J701 Tm TW E J601 l I aay i Lu pos Te T phi OTR J5009L J5010L 2 JHVRESET 18 DPR JP2018 J5009DH J5010DH 3 HVDATA 17 JP2006 OTR13 J5009D J5010D 4 HVDACLK 16 su D HVDALD 15 DDEV4 P2024 wo 0 xj c HVCLK3 14 a EDO IPETTTTIIII SoN NRRRRRRRSER HVCLK2 1 apog pe 502401 J5026H m iyi J5027L Jelelslelel fo of S msn HVCLK1 TRH Says Jso24D 5026 J5027H J5028L A LH JP2010 FECRETEERE een J5028H shio TRI HE Hev e lele r o ol J5028D a u TRIR 9 s dad p sge igi POSON Top oxec r e
149. ANS signal outputs turn L when the fan rotates at the speed of the specified RPM when the DC controller judges the fan normal The DC controller judges the fan faulty and sends the error message to the formatter when the FANS signal has not been input turns H for 10 seconds or more Low voltage power supply circuit The low voltage power supply circuit converts AC voltage from a power supply receptacle to DC power and supplies the fuser with the power to drive its heater The low voltage power supply circuit has two components e Fuser control circuit controls the temperature of the fuser e Low voltage power supply circuit generates the DC power required inside the printer and supplies the AC power to the fuser control circuit Low voltage power supply circuit Fuser Fuser control circut DC controller PCB Low voltage AC input power supply circuit Low voltage power supply circuit The terms fixing and fuser refer to the same operation or assembly and are used interchangeably in this document Also ITB unit and transfer unit refer to the same assembly and are used interchangeably throughout this document 126 Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW Figure 5 12 ENWW Fuser control circuit The fuser control circuit controls the temperature of the fuser The following figure shows the ceramic heater fusing method used by this printer Sub thermistor T
150. B photosensitive drum and the primary charging roller During the transfer step not all toner is transferred from the ITB and the drums onto the paper but some remains on top of them This remaining toner is called residual toner waste toner In this block residual toner is cleared from the ITB and photosensitive drums to keep a clear image in the following prints Step 8 ITB cleaning The residual toner on the ITB is scraped away with a cleaning blade and falls into the cleaner cover The residual toner in the cleaner cover is collected in the waste toner container adjacent to the ITB afterwards ITB cleaning blade P ITB ITB cleaner cover Residual toner Figure 5 36 ITB cleaning Step 9 Drum cleaning ENWW Image formation system 155 Figure 5 37 NOTE The residual toner on the drum is scraped away with a cleaning blade and delivered to the waste toner container inside the cartridge afterwards This cleans the surface of the photosensitive drum Waste toner container Cleaning blade Residual waste toner Photosensitive drum Drum cleaning Developing section The developing section consists of four cartridges and the developing engaging unit The cartridges form a visible toner image on the photosensitive drum and the developing engaging unit disengages the developing cylinder from the photosensitive drum Below are descriptions of the cartridges and the developing engaging unit Cartridges Each
151. CAL LAW THE ABOVE WARRANTY IS EXCLUSIVE AND NO OTHER WARRANTY OR CONDITION WHETHER WRITTEN OR ORAL IS EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED AND HP SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF MERCHANTABILITY SATISFACTORY QUALITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY LOCAL LAW IN NO EVENT WILL HP OR ITS SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE FOR DIRECT SPECIAL INCIDENTAL CONSEQUENTIAL INCLUDING LOST PROFIT OR DATA OR OTHER DAMAGE WHETHER BASED IN CONTRACT TORT OR OTHERWISE THE WARRANTY TERMS CONTAINED IN THIS STATEMENT EXCEPT TO THE EXTENT LAWFULLY PERMITTED DO NOT EXCLUDE RESTRICT OR MODIFY AND ARE IN ADDITION TO THE MANDATORY STATUTORY RIGHTS APPLICABLE TO THE SALE OF THIS PRODUCT TO YOU Premium Protection Warranty Color LaserJet Image Fuser Kit and Image Transfer Kit Limited Warranty Statement 21 Identification HP s Product Stewardship program monitors product design to help protect the environment Model and serial numbers The model number and serial numbers are listed on identification labels located on the rear of the printer The model number is alphanumeric such as Q5990A for the HP Color LaserJet 3550 printer The serial number contains information about the country region of origin the printer version production code and the production number of the printer see Figure 1 11 Serial number information printer version country na region of SerialNo CNBB123456 l SEE UCT
152. Clutches 267 2 Disconnect one connector 1 remove the e clip 2 and remove the black development clutch 3 P Figure 6 97 Black development clutch removal 2 of 2 Developing engaging drive clutch CL3 removal 1 Remove the developing engaging drive assembly See Developing engaging drive assembly removal 2 Remove the e ring 1 and remove the developing engaging drive clutch 2 Figure 6 98 Developing engaging drive clutch removal 268 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW Motor and fans Figure 6 99 Motor and fan locations M1 Feed motor M2 Delivery motor M3 Drum motor M4 Developing motor M5 Primary transfer roller engaging motor FAN1 Exhaust fan Feed motor M1 removal 1 Remove the right swing guide See Swing guide removal right 2 Remove the feed guide See Feed guide unit removal ENWW Motor and fans 269 3 Press down on the motor cover claw 1 and lift up on the cover 2 to remove it If possible release the cover claw 1 from the other side of the frame Figure 6 100 Feed motor removal 1 of 3 4 Disconnect one connector 1 and release the cable guide 2 by pressing in on the claw 3 Move the guide to the side the cables can remain in the guide Figure 6 101 Feed motor removal 2 of 3 270 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW 5 Remove two screws 1 and remove the feed motor 2 n E m e e hb E a V f Jd PE P ae D mc
153. DC motor Clockwise 4 speed full 1 2 photosensitive drums counter 1 3 1 4 ITB Black developing clockwise cylinder M4 Drives the yellow Y DC motor Clockwise 4 speed full 1 2 Developing magenta M and 1 3 1 4 motor cyan C developing cylinders M5 Primary Engages and Stepping motor Clockwise transfer disengages the counter roller primary transfer roller clockwise engaging motor FAN1 Fan Exhausts heat around the fuser scanner assembly and print cartridges 122 Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW Figure 5 6 ENWW Motor locations Table 5 3 Function of solenoids SL2 Tray 2 cassette pick up solenoid Drives the Tray 2 cassette pick up roller SL1 Tray 1 multipurpose tray pick up solenoid Drives the Tray 1 multipurpose tray pick up roller SL4 Secondary transfer roller engaging solenoid Engages and disengages the secondary transfer roller SL5 Duplexing feed solenoid Not available for Drives the Tray 1 multipurpose tray pick up roller the HP 3500 3550 Table 5 4 Function of clutches CL1 Registration clutch Drives the registration roller CL2 K black developing clutch Drives the K cartridge CL3 Developing engaging clutch Engages and disengages the developing cylinder Engine control system 123 Figure 5 7 Figure 5 8 Solenoid and clutch locations Drum motor control The drum motor control controls the drive of the drum motor M3 The d
154. Dame 5 E 5 Os o s c w os a uzioso z z uou amp 9 z Ojer an S cla S Aa H cS i D 5 S Z r gt 2O 4u OQ iuvrz oz2 29 O HM us 2w 5 gt S Ws g9 H2 9 o8 Zomr u oj u amp xo 2j u 5 9 ARES a ogl e Z xa g2 c ale 9 amp l5 z z 9 amp 9 Sa o 9 ES g S xlz na g cz 9 oO Z x E F2 gt Z E ale a Ek g9 x oj iu o E e o E O amp i 9 Olt E Q ale fe ulrigib oO KJH zi cix w Sle a F O FIG b Elg alg ela 2 8 2 s 85 aj w A Face down tray T ud O ic D Q clo ae oO r ajz delivery roller Ou 4 Biz Ww o El oe D 5 t ou z HIS 2 EE EE E 2 6 c z g w amp i E a EE Ela 7 O Cres elgg Bog x ula gu wj w E Who By uw AE 295 B pec JUKE W tt x x a 5 Ift lu c a m 2 is a au E 3 3 g a 5 a iL i Registration shutter Delive roller Registration roller Ee av A UU N S N 69 ph I 1 PS9 ES A Fuser delivery Fuser sleeve unit Secondary transfer Casette Tray 2 pickup roller roller roller Pressure roller Duplexing feed Secondary transfer roller Multi purpose Tray 1 roller engaging cam pickup roller Pickup feed system PS1 Tray 1 multipurpose tray paper sensor PS2 Tray 2 cassette paper sensor PS4 Registration paper sensor PS5 Media sensor PS6 Fuser front paper sensor PS7 Fuse
155. Dots in vertical lines Table 7 23 Causes for vertical lines of white dots C mm 0 Deformed Deteriorated transfer unit or primary Replace the transfer unit transfer charging roller Deformed Deteriorated secondary transfer charging Replace the secondary transfer charging roller roller High voltage PCB is defective Replace the high voltage PCB DC controller PCB is defective Replace the DC controller PCB Calibrate the printer after replacing the DC controller See Calibrate Now later in this chapter Dirt on back of paper If defect is repetitive dirt go to step A if not go to step B Table 7 24 Causes for dirt on the back of the paper A Repetitive dirt dirty registration roller pressure Refer to the Table 7 39 Repetitive defect cause roller feed roller fuser delivery roller or face table later in this chapter to identify the roller with down delivery sub roller which the problem is associated Clean the dirty roller Replace the roller if the dirt does not come off Dirty cassette pickup roller feed guide fuser Clean any dirty places on the rollers Replace the inlet guide and fuser delivery guide roller if the dirt does not come off Dirt on front of paper If the defect appears in a particular color go to step A If it does not appear in a particular color and it is repetitive go to step B or if it is not repetitive go to step C 394 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW ENWW Table 7
156. ESS THAN X PAGES alternates with Ready ENWW This message is displayed when the user presses the Stop key but there is no active job or buffered data to cancel This message is displayed for two seconds before the printer is returned to the READY state Not made by HP This message is displayed until an HP supply is installed or v is pressed This message is displayed in the event log as 10 30 xx The printer has detected that a non HP supply is currently installed and v override was pressed The identified print cartridge is nearing the end of its useful life The printer is ready and will continue for the estimated number of pages indicated No action necessary If you believe you purchased an HP supply please call the HP fraud hotline at 1 877 219 3183 Service or repairs required as a result of using non HP supplies is not covered under HP warranty To continue printing press v The first pending job will be cancelled If you believe that you installed a genuine HP toner cartridge wait approximately one minute to ensure the message does not change to another error message such as 10 92 XX If another message appears troubleshoot this second message If the message does not change within one minute perform the following steps 1 If this toner cartridge was previously used in another printer and is low on toner it will not be recognized as an HP supply this is the correct message You can u
157. ETHER BASED IN CONTRACT TORT OR OTHERWISE Some countries regions states or provinces do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages so the above limitation or exclusion may not apply to you THE WARRANTY TERMS CONTAINED IN THIS STATEMENT EXCEPT TO THE EXTENT LAWFULLY PERMITTED DO NOT EXCLUDE RESTRICT OR MODIFY AND ARE IN ADDITION TO THE MANDATORY STATUTORY RIGHTS APPLICABLE TO THE SALE OF THIS PRODUCT TO YOU ENWW Hewlett Packard warranty statement 19 HP s Premium Protection Print Cartridge Warranty Limited Warranty Statement 20 This HP Print Cartridge is warranted to be free from defects in materials and workmanship This warranty does not apply to print cartridges that a have been refilled refurbished remanufactured or tampered with in any way b experience problems resulting from misuse improper storage or operation outside of the published environmental specifications for the printer product or c exhibit wear from ordinary use To obtain warranty service please return the product to place of purchase with a written description of the problem and print samples or contact HP customer support At HP s option HP will either replace products that prove to be defective or refund your purchase price TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY LOCAL LAW THE ABOVE WARRANT Y IS EXCLUSIVE AND NO OTHER WARRANTY OR CONDITION WHETHER WRITTEN OR ORAL IS EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED AND HP SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ANY IMP
158. EVENT LOG 5 Pressv to select PRINT EVENT LOG ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 431 The message PRINTING EVENT LOG appears on the display until the printer finishes printing the event log The printer returns to the Ready state after printing the event log UI Figure 7 11 Event log Current page count and printer serial number Event number the most recent is at the top of the list Error code Page count at which the event occurred Description of the event akWNM 432 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW Diagnostics Additional diagnostic information is provided in this section Diagnostics flowchart Use this flowchart to help identify the cause of high level printer problems These problems are indicated by abnormalities in the printer s power on sequence The LED that the flowchart refers to is on the formatter Figure 7 13 Formatter LED on the next page indicates where this LED is located This is a heartbeat LED that blinks on and off when the formatter is operating properly A Does the LED blink with 4 fast bursts at power on B Does the LED blink at a fast steady rate during memory testing 1 blink per 8 MB C Is the LED off for about 8 seconds while the boot code is decompressing then the display activates D Does the LED blink at a steady rate of 1 blink per second Check the firmware Check the memory Check the formatter Check display for an error code Check the memory
159. H2 contact Fuser sleeve A Power supply unit DC controller PCB 1 oce I Main thermistor TH1 l contact l Z l I Fuser heater i w Fuser i FUSER HEATER Fuser heater i DRIVE signal control safety 1 circuit circuit l I P l I I I I I c IC1001 I I I I I I FUSER TEMPERATURE CPU DETECTION signal l Z l i i I Thermoswitch TP non contact Fuser Pressure roller Ceramic heater fusing method The fuser control circuit has three main components e Fuser heater H1 A ceramic heater that heats the fuser sleeve e Thermistors TH1 TH2 Two thermistors monitor temperature e Main thermistor TH1 Monitors print temperature and between sheets temperature contact type e Sub thermistor TH2 Monitors temperature rise at the end the initial rotation temperature and the start up temperature contact type e Thermoswitch TP One thermoswitch is placed on top of the fuser heater non contact type When the fuser heater is abnormally overheated the switch opens and cuts off the power supply to the heater The temperatures in the fuser are controlled by the fuser control circuit and the fuser heater safety circuit according to the commands from the CPU 1C 1001 on the DC controller Heater temperature control Engine control system 127 The heater temperature control controls the drive signals of the fuser heater to monitor and maintain the s
160. HP 3700 only values are Allows you to configure EIO devices TCP IP installed in the EIO slot IPX SPX See Enhanced I O EIO configuration HP color LaserJet 3700 series printer APPLETALK DLC LLC SECURE WEB RESET SECURITY LINK SPEED only in chapter 3 for more information Resets menu The Resets menu allows you to reset factory settings to disable and enable PowerSave and update the printer after new supplies are installed Table 7 47 Resets submenu ees quem emn RESTORE FACTORY SETTINGS None Allows you to clear the page buffer remove all perishable personality data reset the printing environment and return all default settings to factory defaults However this menu does not restore HP Jetdirect network settings to factory default values POWERSAVE Allows you to enable and disable PowerSave The default is ON RESET SUPPLIES NEW Allows you to inform the printer that a new TRANSFER transfer kit or new fuser kit has been KIT installed The page count for the new NEW FUSER supply will be set to 0 KIT Diagnostics menu The Diagnostics menu allows you to run tests that can help you identify and solve problems with the printer Table 7 48 Diagnostics menu LINKEN I NN PRINT EVENT LOG Prints an event log that displays the last 50 entries in the printer s event log starting with the most recent Control panel troubleshooting 419 420 Table 7 48 Diagnostics menu continued bet
161. HT RC1 1563 000CN Table 8 5 on page 485 COVER SCREW RC1 1605 000CN Table 8 7 on page 489 COVER SENSOR RB2 6453 000CN Table 8 24 on page 533 CROSSMEMBER RB2 6452 000CN Table 8 24 on page 533 DAMPER UNIT HINGE LEFT RC1 1572 000CN Table 8 7 on page 489 DAMPER UNIT HINGE RIGHT RC1 1573 000CN Table 8 7 on page 489 DAMPER UNIT MP PICK UP RC1 1038 000CN Table 8 12 on page 502 DC controller PCB HP3500 DC controller PCB HP RM1 0510 000CN Table 8 3 on page 481 3550 DC controller PCB HP3700 RM1 2324 000CN RM1 0506 000CN DC CONTROLLER PCB HP3500 3550 RM1 0510 000CN Table 8 10 on page 497 DC CONTROLLER PCB HP3700 RM1 0506 000CN Table 8 10 on page 497 DEV DISENGAGING DRIVE ASS Y RM1 0419 000CN Table 8 9 on page 495 DEVELOPING CONTACT ASS Y RM1 0446 000CN Table 8 7 on page 489 DEVELOPING DISENGAGING ASSEMBLY RM1 0434 000CN Table 8 15 on page 513 ENWW Alphabetical parts list 541 Table 8 27 Alphabetical parts list nc ee E Description Table and page DEVELOPING MOTOR ASS Y M4 RM1 0737 000CN Table 8 12 on page 501 DRAWER CROSSMEMBER ASS Y RM1 0440 000CN Table 8 7 on page 489 DRUM MOTOR ASS Y M3 RM1 0733 000CN Table 8 12 on page 502 DUCT AIR RC1 1354 000CN Table 8 10 on page 497 DUCT AIR FRONT RC1 1350 000CN Table 8 9 on page 495 DUCT FAN RC1 1345 000CN Table 8 9 on page 495 DUPLEX FEED GUIDE ASS Y HP3700 RM1 0461 000CN Table 8 13 on page 509 DUPLEX GUIDE ASS Y HP3700 RM1 0458 000CN Tab
162. I O EIO configuration HP color LaserJet 3700 series printer only 69 70 NetWare networks When using Novell NetWare products with an HP Jetdirect print server Queue Server mode provides improved printing performance over Remote Printer mode The HP Jetdirect print server supports Novell Directory Services NDS as well as bindery modes For more information see the HP Jetdirect Print Server Administrator s Guide For Windows 98 Me NT 4 0 2000 and XP systems use the printer installation utility for printer setup on a NetWare network Windows and Windows NT networks For Windows 98 Me NT 4 0 2000 and XP systems use your printer installation utility for printer setup on a Microsoft Windows network The utility supports printer setup for either peer to peer or client server network operation AppleTalk networks Use the HP Toolbox to set up the printer on an EtherTalk or LocalTalk network For more information see the HP Jetdirect Print Server Administrator s Guide included with printers equipped with the HP Jetdirect print server UNIX Linux networks Use the HP Jetdirect printer installer for UNIX utility to set up the printer on HP UX or Sun Solaris networks For setup and management on UNIX or Linux networks use HP Web Jetadmin To obtain HP software for UNIX Linux networks visit HP Customer Care online at http www hp com support net printing For other installation options supported by theHP Jetdirect print serv
163. IMM Try the DIMM in another slot except for the firmware DIMM in slot 1 Make sure there are DIMMS installed Make sure the DIMMs are supported Try the DIMM in another printer 53 10 03 HP 3500 3550 Replace the formatter HP 3700 Perform the following steps 1 Try the firmware DIMM in slot 1 in another printer 2 Replace the formatter PCB Printer error troubleshooting 341 Table 7 3 Numerical printer messages continued Message 54 XX PRINTER ERROR 342 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting A printer command error has occurred NOTE Some messages are displayed in the event log and some are displayed on both the control panel and in the event log as identified below XX Description Event log only messages 01 humidity environmental sensor error 05 media sensor error 06 Dmax density sensor out of range 11 yellow density sensor error 12 magenta density sensor error 13 cyan density sensor error 14 black density sensor error 15 yellow CPR sensor error 16 magenta CPR sensor error 17 cyan CPR sensor error 18 black CPR sensor error 20 CPR sensor error Control panel and event log message 21 yellow toner remaining sensor error 22 magenta toner remaining sensor error 23 cyan toner remaining sensor error 24 black toner remaining sensor error 31 Media sensor calibration failure Event log only message 32 Media sensor is not calibrated
164. INTER ERROR alternates with To continue turn off then on ENWW The DC controller is not communicating with the formatter The problem could be caused by a timing error or an intermittent connection Event log only 55 01 00 DC controller memory error 55 5 HP 3700 only A job was sent while Resend Upgrade is on the display A printer fan error has occurred as a result of a faulty fan connection fan or DC controller 5 Press v to continue If the message persists turn the printer off and then back on Reseat or replace the connectors between the DC controller and the formatter If the problem persists replace the DC controller PCB Replace the formatter For the following specific error perform indicated action 55 01 00 Replace the DC controller PCB 55 5 Do not replace the DC controller PCB or formatter PCB Resend the firmware upgrade before sending any more print jobs Turn the printer off and then back on Reseat the DC controller PCB connector J1024 Replace the fan Replace the DC controller PCB Printer error troubleshooting 345 Table 7 3 Numerical printer messages continued 59 XYcontinued A printer motor error has occurred Turn the printer off and then back on PRINTER ERROR X and Y are detailed below l For the following errors perform the alternates with X Description indicated action 5 Primary transfer roller engaging Toc ntin e motor M5
165. ITITI T NN TL Figure 1 11 Serial number information Table 1 12 Model names and numbers Power and regulatory information The identification label on the rear of the printer also contains power rating and regulatory information as shown in Figure 1 12 Sample label 22 Chapter 1 Printer description ENWW CAUTION Converting the voltage on the printer can damage the printer Do not use any voltage other than the operating voltage Any attempt to convert operating voltages will void the product warranty for example attempting to change a 110V printer to a 220V printer HEWLETT PACKARD x Tested To Comply D c m Peme 1 gE SO drugs Hirt s umm BD R Fabriqu le sub chapter J ET ea il il i il i i ill SPA E L omplies with L anadian EMU oO Z amero p 6 2003 Ulass B requirements T e Conforme la Classe B des pa a Zz ma uum Em ll mitn i wi i Misi compatbate eetvomago tques id CO t Pro duit de Chine STEMX2 gt PEI lt gt PET lt Figure 1 12 Sample label ENWW Identification 23 Selecting paper You can use many types of paper and other print media with this printer This section provides guidelines and specifications for selecting and using different print media Before purchasing any paper or specialized forms in quantity verify that your paper supplier obtains and understands the print media requirements specified in the HP LaserJet Printer Family Print Media Specification Guide See
166. J1026 31027 ejl E REER e e e re re E MAINTH 6 E EARREAAAR BRERRRRERRRRESREA Sas gt l see x I ESTEE lo jo le g allaa ee Jl 199999 Ld E a fa FC lala ae enp Ee T Ae _ al M 3 J5020D 5 E p isigi 8 t BEgBRed 8 02004 scceas aagaeeaae PRERE EERE ae ge LAN ES z J5O20L Jaaa HN ay Dini kw ba tas Ni S ae EEEEE ES 2 lE x val gis rios a eerie e 222 px 34 J ET 3 ggl olal a JIO1A J101B Hat 4 0 g5014D ol uma 50080 J5017D s ont ey ee E J5008H 1 oc I a J5014DH zm 15002 jen J5017H l i SF I 25014 A J5017L ES ge 19 19 J5t J50018 TN PS EN S esl l Laser Scanner l ai ea n L PEENE Developing SL2 L ed I Unit l Engaging j Laser Driver Laser Driver e3 Senad Drum Motor P Bk Developer HE PCB PCB Scanner Scanner l Developing Primary Transfer Solendid cane 1G PS11 Face up Tray Sensor Motor Motor i S Paper I Y M C Bk C Bk l Engaging Feed Motor Roller Engaging Fixing Front 3 Feeder I I Clatch Motor Sensor ee m PS6 ale paper Feeder Paper Feeder Paper Feeder j meen Memory Controller PCB Pick up Pick up Paper Sensor Environment Waste Toner fedal J5003 ae J5007L T D Solenoid Clutch PS3 I Sensor Full Sensor depot eei FA oner Detection l i PS15 PS13 EEN Light Light l Fan Face down J6005D Emitter Receiver I TW Delivery Sensor LIIS LEDI Qi l l Png 838 Registration Clutch 1 ao 1 CRG l LIC J5029L reso wuto 2 TONLED Y oo I i CETA J5029DH 1 TONES 1 T
167. LIED WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF MERCHANTABILITY SATISFACTORY QUALITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY LOCAL LAW IN NO EVENT WILL HP OR ITS SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE FOR DIRECT SPECIAL INCIDENTAL CONSEQUENTIAL INCLUDING LOST PROFIT OR DATA OR OTHER DAMAGE WHETHER BASED IN CONTRACT TORT OR OTHERWISE THE WARRANTY TERMS CONTAINED IN THIS STATEMENT EXCEPT TO THE EXTENT LAWFULLY PERMITTED DO NOT EXCLUDE RESTRICT OR MODIFY AND ARE IN ADDITION TO THE MANDATORY STATUTORY RIGHTS APPLICABLE TO THE SALE OF THIS PRODUCT TO YOU Chapter 1 Printer description ENWW Premium Protection Warranty Color LaserJet Image Fuser Kit and Image Transfer Kit Limited Warranty Statement ENWW This HP product is warranted to be free from defects in materials and workmanship until the printer provides a low life indicator on the control panel This warranty does not apply to products that a have been refurbished remanufactured or tampered with in any way b experience problems resulting from misuse improper storage or operation outside of the published environmental specifications for the printer product or c exhibit wear from ordinary use To obtain warranty service please return the product to place of purchase with a written description of the problem or contact HP customer support At HP s option HP will either replace products that prove to be defective or refund your purchase price TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY LO
168. MENUS Press to highlight Configure Device Press v to select Configure Device Press w to highlight PRINT QUALITY Press v to select PRINT QUALITY Press to highlight CALIBRATE NOW Press v to select CALIBRATE NOW Wait for the printer to calibrate oN Oar WRN DR The transfer unit count is reset and the printer is ready to use Replacing the fuser and pickup roller Replace the fuser when the printer control panel displays REPLACE FUSER KIT The image fuser kit contains a replacement fuser and a Tray 2 pickup roller for this printer After replacing the fuser you must also replace the pickup roller Instructions for replacing the pickup roller follow the instructions for replacing the fuser Replacing supply items 103 To replace the fuser 1 Turn the printer off WARNING The fuser might be hot Wait 10 minutes before proceeding 2 Open the lower rear door rear output bin 104 Chapter 4 Printer maintenance ENWW NOTE ENWW 4 Lift and pull the lower rear door rear output bin while using your finger to press the tab with ridges on the left side of the door Remove the lower rear door rear output bin 5 Place your thumbs on the blue ridges near warning label and using fingers pull up on the blue latches
169. N 100w wng ZW 200w Aiewjeq v LW 101001 p34 043uo9 eunje1eduie Buixi4 Papeete pe pepe eps pete eters eee eee tee d iagram iming T Figure 5 3 ENWW 118 Chapter 5 Theory of operation Engine control system The engine control system functions as the brain of the printer It controls the laser scanner System the image formation system and the pickup feed system according to the commands received from the formatter The engine control system consists of the following e DC controller printed circuit board PCB assembly e High voltage power supply PCB e Low voltage power supply PCB The block diagram below illustrates the engine control system Each circuit is described in the following paragraphs I l M I l l I l DC controller PCB K LASER SCANNER SYSTEM l I 77 l l i Igh voltage power i Formatter KY 9 TE ce IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM supply l l D MR M i Q l I Low voltage power 2 supply PCB j PICK UP FEED SYSTEM a ara ee n B ee E EE J Figure 5 4 Engine control system NOTE Components described as a PCB may consist of a single circuit board or a circuit board plus other parts such as cables and sensors DC controller PCB The DC controller PCB is controlled by the CPU on the DC controller It controls the operation sequences of this printer
170. Ota 8 Figure 7 9 Supplies status page Oak WNDN Black print cartridge information Cyan print cartridge information Magenta print cartridge information Yellow print cartridge information Transfer unit kit information Image fuser kit information Usage page HP 3700 only The usage page lists a page count for each size of media that has passed through the printer This page count includes the number of pages that were printed on one side the number that were printed on two sides duplexed and totals of the two printing methods for each media size It also lists the average percentage of page coverage for each color 1 2 3 4 5 Press v to enter the MENUS Press w to highlight INFORMATION Press v to select INFORMATION Press to highlight PRINT USAGE Press v to select PRINT USAGE 430 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW The message PRINTING USAGE appears on the display until the printer finishes printing the usage page The printer returns to the Ready state after printing the usage page O Usage Tetas egens ma Figure 7 10 Usage page 1 Printer identification information 2 Usage totals 3 Percent of coverage broken down by color Event log The event log lists the printer events including printer jams service errors and other printer conditions 1 Press v to enter the MENUS 2 Press w to highlight DIAGNOSTICS 3 Press v to select DIAGNOSTICS 4 Press v to highlight PRINT
171. P Jetdirect print Servers icit e ten Eee en e a Vx ta ea vx da ux Nu TEN Rn Ee Vade 69 Available enhanced I O interfaces sssssssssssseeeeeeneneene mene 69 NetWare networks EE Mgr Mateo aav M To desse Deoa va Meet edd 70 Windows and Windows NT networks sssssseeenm nennen nennen 70 AppleTalk networks sssssssssssssssseneenenn enne emen n nnne n nennen nnn sinet nennen nnns 70 UNIX Linux networks hii ean edi ede 70 Printer software o oo ee eee e eee t entree reenter Aia AANE AEEA EEE EEEE EAN di T Printer driVers innen tnde reete eaae vin o n RR e RAE uae ea OE ERA tee 71 Software for networks 000 0 eeeeee eet tte ee ee tetera nennen nnne nenne ener nnns enn nnne nnns 72 Bcc c C 73 Setting security on the printer sssssssssseee eene nnne 76 Locking the control panel nente nite etu et de Ehud ea P de eee eco Po dece 76 Using an ASCII PJL escape sequence to set security ssssssseeeee 77 Printer memory for the HP Color LaserJet 3700 series printer ssssesssss 78 ENWW Installing memory and font DIMMS essssssesseeeneennm emm ene ennemis 79 Enabling memory nete mdi ee EE e EL Edu teda d Eau Ee ve dao RR LA d dod 83 Enabling the language font DIMM HP color LaserJet 3700 only sssssss 83 Checking DIMM installation HP color LaserJet 3700 o
172. P s end of life product return and recycling program Material Safety Data Sheets See http www hp com go environment or http www hp com hpinfo community environment productinfo safety Environmental product stewardship program 33 Declaration of Conformities Declaration of Conformity according to ISO IEC Guide 22 and EN 45014 Manufacturer s Name Hewlett Packard Company Manufacturer s Address 11311 Chinden Boulevard Boise Idaho 83714 1021 USA declares that the product Product Name HP Color LaserJet 3500 HP Color LaserJet 3550 Regulatory Model Number BOISB 0302 01 Product Options All conforms to the following Product Specifications SAFETY IEC 60950 1999 EN60950 2000 IEC 60825 1 1993 A1 1997 A2 2001 EN 60825 1 1994 A11 1996 A2 2001 Class 1 Laser LED Product GB4943 2001 EMC CISPR 22 1997 EN 55022 1998 Class B EN 61000 3 2 2000 EN 61000 3 3 1995 A1 EN 55024 1998 FCC Title 47 CFR Part 15 Class B ICES 003 Issue 4 GB9254 1998 GB17625 1 2003 Supplementary Information The product herewith complies with the requirements of the EMC Directive 89 336 EEC and the Low Voltage Directive 73 23 EEC and carries the CE Marking accordingly 1 The product was tested in a typical configuration with Hewlett Packard Personal Computer Systems 2 This Device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two Conditions 1 this device may not cause harmful interference a
173. PJL Technical Reference Package For downloadable versions go to http www hp com support clj3550 or http www hp com support clj3700 When connected select Manuals HPJ1124 CHP310 Q1298B HP LaserJet Tough paper A4 Reference materials Ferrite Cores Panel overlays 470 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams ENWW ENWW Table 8 1 Supplies and accessories continued 5963 7863 HP LaserJet Printer Family Paper Specifications Guide 5021 0337 PCL PJL Technical Reference Package CD ROM Q2670 67901 Black Print Cartridge CL J 3500 3550 3700 Q2670 67902 Black Print Cartridge CL J 3500 3550 3700 Europe Q2671 67901 Cyan Print Cartridge CLJ 3500 3550 Q2671 67902 Cyan Print Cartridge CLJ 3500 3550 Europe Q2681 67901 Cyan Print Cartridge CLJ 3700 Q2681 67902 Cyan Print Cartridge CLJ 3700 Europe Q2672 67901 Yellow Print Cartridge CL J 3500 3550 Q2672 67902 Yellow Print Cartridge CL J 3500 3550 Europe Ordering parts Product number Reference materials Supplies 471 Table 8 1 Supplies and accessories continued Product Part number Description number EE Q2682 67901 Yellow Print Cartridge CLJ 3700 Q2682 67901 Yellow Print Cartridge CLJ 3700 Europe Q2673 67901 Magenta Print Cartridge CLJ 3500 3550 Q2673 67902 Magenta Print Cartridge CLJ 3500 3550 Europe Q2683 67901 Magenta Print Cartridge CLJ 3700 Q2683 67902 Magenta Print Cartridge CLJ 3700 Europe 5090 3379 Toner cleaning clot
174. Pickup fesd umit c r 184 itum erint r AEEA TERET 189 Duplexing feed unit HP 3700 printer only ssssse ee ttieeeeeetaeeeeee 192 NI Inqge i sete pp 195 acis EERRTPEE 197 Pickup delivery sequence sssssssssssssseeeeneneenen emend DG Paper jam detection sssssssssseeeenee eene eem ennt rnnt nnn nens 199 ENWW Chapter contents 113 Basic operation The HP Color LaserJet 3500 3550 and 3700 series printer functions are divided into four systems 1 Engine control system 2 Laser scanner system 3 Image formation system 4 Pickup feed system Upon receipt of printing commands from the external device via the formatter the engine control system provides control for the laser scanner system the image formation system and the pickup feed system and performs print operations The engine control system receives status from each system and sends the necessary information back to the formatter LASER SCANNER SYSTEM ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM PICKUP FEED SYSTEM To external device computer etc through the video controller Figure 5 1 Basic system operation NOTE The terms fixing and fuser refer to the same operation or assembly and are used interchangeably in this document Also ITB unit and transfer unit refer to the same assembly and are used interchangeably throughout this document Operation sequence A microcomputer in the engine control system
175. Replace the print cartridge drum E Vertical scratches on the transfer unit Replace the transfer unit E Vertical scratches on the fuser sleeve Replace the fuser Image defects 395 Horizontal line If the line appears in a particular color go to step A If it appears in full color print go to step B Table 7 28 Causes for horizontal line The developing cylinder is deformed by being left engaged with the photosensitive drum for a long time Horizontal scratches on the photosensitive drum cartridge Print cartridge cleaning blade leaves a line of toner on the drum C blade blur This error is similar to using a dust pan and broom The line repeats every 77mm Horizontal scratches on the fuser sleeve White horizontal line Refer to the Table 7 39 Repetitive defect cause table later in this chapter to find out if the interval of line agrees with that of a developing cylinder If so output about 20 pages of print to solve the problem If the problem is not resolved replace the cartridge Refer to the Table 7 39 Repetitive defect cause table later in this chapter to find out if the interval of line agrees with that of a photosensitive drum If so replace the cartridge At the printer control panel set CONFIGURE DEVICE PRINT QUALITY OPTIMIZE PRE ROTATION ON Refer to the Table 7 39 Repetitive defect cause table later in this chapter to find out if the interval of line agrees with that of
176. Runs 255 Fuser front paper sensor PS6 removal sss 256 Fuser delivery paper sensor removal 1 of 2 ssssssssee 256 Fuser delivery paper sensor removal 2 of 2 sss 257 Face down output bin delivery paper sensor removal 257 Reversed paper sensor removal 1 of 2 sssssssse 258 Reversed paper sensor removal 2 Of 2 sss 258 Duplex feed delivery paper sensor removal ssssses 259 Rear output bin paper sensor removal sssssssssssseeeeeee 259 Color misregistration sensor removal essee em 260 Waste toner level sensor removal ssssssse mme 261 Developing engaging sensor removal sssssem e 261 Environmental sensor removal ssssssesee een 262 Secondary transfer roller engaging sensor removal ssusss 262 Solenoid and clutch locations sssee em 263 Tray 1 pick up solenoid removal ssssssssseeeeeene 264 Tray 2 pick up solenoid removal 1 of 2 ssssee 264 Tray 2 pick up solenoid removal 2 of 2 sse 265 Secondary transfer roller engaging solenoid removal 1 of 2 265 Secondary transfer roller engaging solenoid removal 2 of 2 266 Duplex feed Solenoid removal sssssssssssesseeee
177. S12 replacement configuration 355 Laser scanner Assembly replacement configuration sseeeeeee 355 Fuser replacement configuration sese 355 Transfer unit ITB assembly replacement configuration eeeeseses 355 Paper path troubleshooting sss nenne eren nennen nnne nenne 356 Paper patli Jalm areas eee ett e e Dx ERU ERR aa AR ME Ade NARRA L QNNM EE LE dues adn 357 Paper Jam error message dixe edere xn RR RH Ru REX AREE E ORE R E 357 Paper path areas jam troubleshooting sssssseeee e 360 Paper jam recovery featu re siis diente E ra dd de uaa dene E Rude ERR dde Rh ERR Adan 377 Avoiding paper jams eee 377 General paper path troubleshooting c cceeececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceaecaeeeeeeeeeeeeeteesenseenaneas 379 Persistent jams oo ueneno re dete redet xe e Ra De AA EEEE abo enden E ede re eaa 380 Image formation troubleshooting sssseseeene nennen nemen nnns 381 Print quality problems associated with media sssssssssssseee 381 Overhead transparency defect aeeessssisieese niece nnb ehe 381 Print quality problems associated with the environment ssesssssssssss 382 Print quality problems associated with paper jams ssssssssse 382 Print quality problems associated with toner buildup
178. SL2 Tray 2 cassette pickup solenoid SL4 Secondary transfer roller engaging solenoid CL1 Registration clutch Feed speed control The feed speed control changes the feed speed based on the media to prevent a fuser defect There are four speed settings normal half speed one third speed and one quarter speed The DC controller changes the speed according to the print mode sent from the formatter Table 5 5 Print media and feed speeds provides types of media and the feed speeds 186 Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW ENWW Table 5 5 Print media and feed speeds The printer can detect the type of media see Media detection on the following page The DC controller controls the print mode as follows according to the selected print mode if the selected print mode does not agree with the detected media The types of media that the printer can detect are plain paper gloss paper gloss film and OHT overhead transparency The printer can not identify envelope thick paper thin paper or label They are judged as normal paper When the selected print mode is either normal paper envelope thick paper label or auto the mode remains unchanged e When in OHT print mode If plain paper gloss paper or gloss film is detected the DC controller judges it media mismatch When judged as a mismatch the DC controller sends the error message to the formatter cuts off the secondary transfer bias delivers the paper and stops the pr
179. To install counts Page counts te time period Image fuser kit REPLACE FUSER KIT 60 000 pages 75 000 pages HP 3500 See Fuser 60 months removal HP 3550 3 700 50 months Approximate life is based on 1 000 pages per month for the HP Color LaserJet 3500 series printer and 1500 pages per month for the HP Color LaserJet 3550 3700 series printer Usage conditions and print patterns cause results to vary CAUTION Hewlett Packard recommends the use of HP products in this printer Use of non HP products can cause problems that require service not covered by the Hewlett Packard warranty or service agreements Print cartridges and transfer unit It is recommended that you remove the print cartridges and transfer unit when servicing internal printer components Place the print cartridges and transfer unit in a safe place while they are out of the printer CAUTION Grasp the print cartridges by the blue handles to avoid accidentally touching the photosensitive drum inside each cartridge Do not place any items on the transfer unit or touch the transfer belt If the belt is punctured or otherwise damaged print quality problems will result For instructions on removing the transfer unit see Transfer unit removal and for instructions on removing the print cartridges see Print cartridge removal 208 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW Covers The following procedures describe removal of the printers extern
180. Troubleshooting WARNING The fuser is HOT Turn the printer off and allow it to cool for approximately 10 minutes before removing the fuser 50 1 error Fuser failure Abnormally Low Temperature Main Thermistor perform the following steps 1 The connector between the fuser and the printer is not connected properly Reseat the fuser Check the connector J5013 between the fuser and the printer Replace it if damaged 2 Break in the main thermistor Turn the printer off and remove the fuser Measure the resistance between the fuser connectors J5013LA 2 MAINTH and J5013LA 1 GND If it is not within the rage of 330k ohms to 50k ohms at ambient temperature replace the fuser 3 Faulty DC controller PCB Replace the DC controller PCB 50 2 error Fuser Failure Abnormal Warm up Perform the following steps 1 The connector between the fuser and the printer is not connected properly Reseat the fuser Check the connector J5013 between the fuser and the printer Replace it if damaged 2 Break in the main thermistor Turn the printer off and remove the fuser Measure the resistance between the fuser connectors J5013LA 2 MAINTH and J5013LA 1 GND If it is not within the rage of 330k ohms to 50k ohms at ambient temperature replace the fuser 3 Break in the fuser heater Measure the resistance between the fuser connectors J5013L 2 FSRH and J5013L 1 FSRN with the fuser removed If it is not within the ra
181. US 2 Press w to highlight Configure Device 3 Pressv to select Configure Device 4 Press w to highlight PRINT QUALITY 5 Pressv to select PRINT QUALITY 6 Press w to highlight CREATE CLEANING PAGE 7 Pressv to select CREATE CLEANING PAGE A page with a pattern prints from the printer 8 Remove all paper from Tray 1 9 Remove the cleaning page and load it face down in Tray 1 NOTE f you are not still in the MENUS navigate to PRINT QUALITY using the above instructions 10 At the printer control panel press w to highlight PROCESS CLEANING PAGE 11 Press v to select PROCESS CLEANING PAGE The printer control panel displays the message Cleaning The cleaning process takes a few minutes ENWW Cleaning the printer and accessories 93 Managing supplies Using storing and monitoring print cartridges can help ensure quality printer output Supplies life The life of the print cartridge depends on usage patterns and the amount of toner that print jobs require For example when printing text at 5 coverage an HP print cartridge lasts an average of 4 000 or 6 000 pages depending on the printer model A typical business letter is about 596 coverage Cartridge life expectancy is reduced by frequently printing many one or two page jobs heavy coverage and automatic duplexing At any time you can verify the life expectancy by checking the print cartridge life For more information on how to check the life of the print cartr
182. Ue e ba Reb pda 456 Location of DC controller PCB connectors HP 3700 een 457 Location of DC controller PCB connectors HP 3500 3550 457 Connector locations for the HP Color LaserJet 3700 printer 1 of 2 458 Connector locations for the HP Color LaserJet 3700 printer 2 of 2 459 Connector locations for the HP Color LaserJet 3500 3550 printer 1 of 2 460 Connector locations for the HP Color LaserJet 3500 3550 printer 2 of 2 461 Connector locations for the 500 sheet paper feeder sssssse 462 General circuit diagram 1 of 2 sss 463 General circuit diagram 2 of 2 sss emm 464 Main parts 1 Of 3 reise ce Lo ee Dp Ede e Died Lu e ceu e te ed 478 Main parts 2 Of 8 ait gei ta aUe nf E 479 Main parts 3 of 3 500 sheet paper feeder sssssssssssssssss 480 PCB locations 1 of 2 5 arcte cocotte ereptus 480 Paper Feeder PCB Assembly Location Diagram 2 of 2 R90 1 482 External covers and panels ssssssssssssssseeeeeeeene 484 Front door assembly 2 iege eere tale ea be Qe ua edd aU eo v amd ed 486 Internal components 1 of 4 ssssssssssseeeee emen 488 Internal components 2 of 4 ssssssssssseeeeeeemen 490 Internal components 3 of 4 ssssssssssseeeeee een 494 Internal components 4 of 4 sssssssssss
183. VS1 6175 006CN VS1 6176 006CN VS1 6492 010CN VS1 6492 016CN VS1 6910 012CN WG8 5362 000CN WG8 5362 000CN WG8 5362 000CN WG8 5362 000CN WG8 5362 000CN WG8 5362 000CN WG8 5362 000CN WG8 5571 000CN WP2 5156 000CN WT2 0507 000CN WT2 5738 000CN WT2 5754 000CN WT2 5841 000CN Numerical parts list 559 Table 8 28 Numerical parts list continued WT2 5841 000CN Table 8 9 on page 495 WT2 5841 000CN Table 8 11 on page 499 XD2 2100 602CN Table 8 12 on page 502 XD2 2300 402CN Table 8 5 on page 485 XD9 0120 000CN Table 8 12 on page 502 XD9 0134 000CN Table 8 8 on page 491 XD9 0135 000CN Table 8 15 on page 513 XD9 0136 000CN Table 8 8 on page 491 XD9 0136 000CN Table 8 12 on page 502 XD9 0137 000CN Table 8 8 on page 492 560 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams ENWW Index Symbols Numerics 500 sheet feeder paperjams 361 500 sheet paper feeder see also tray 3 296 A access denied 76 accessories cleaning 91 ordering 43 adjusting color balance 389 ammonia based cleaners avoiding 92 AppleTalk networks 70 ASCII escape sequence 77 assemblies locating 9 remanufactured 44 replacing 42 atmospheric pressure 13 AUTOEXEC BAT parallel I O settings 404 automatic photocurrent control APC 142 B black development clutch CL2 removal and replacement 267 block functions 121 born on date 449 browsers supported 424 C calibrate now 447 calibrating print quality 383 calibration bypassing 447 cardstock printing
184. X About 38 X Le EHE NE NEN pp CENE NN NR amp gp Je cy pce Lo o MEME NE ee Log Developing cylinder fuser sleeve About 75 Pressure roller About 41 fuser delivery roller About 46 Face down delivery roller About 41 X Face down delivery sub roller About 28 Cassette pick up roller Note Note X Multi purpose tray pick up roller Repetitive defects troubleshooting 401 NOTE A problem that appears only at the leading edge of image with no repetition First occurrence of print defect 26 mm 1 0 inches 28 mm 1 1 inches a 38 mm 1 5 inches gt 41 mm 1 6 inches x 42 mm 1 65 inches 44 mm 1 73 inches 46 mm 1 8 inches 75 mm 2 95 inches 77 mm 3 0 inches gt Figure 7 4 Repetitive defects ruler NOTE Repetitive defects for the transfer unit normally will appear every other page since the transfer belt is longer that a page However the distance of the repetitive can vary depending on the type of paper fed It is possible to see a repetitive defect more than once on the same page 402 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW Interface troubleshooting NOTE ENWW This section contains information about printer communication troubleshooting Communications checks Communication problems are normally the customer s responsibility Time spent attempting to resolve these problems might not be covered by the product s Hewlett Packard warranty Refer the custome
185. Y Figure 8 29 CASSETTE Figure 8 30 Main parts 3 of 3 500 sheet paper feeder Figure 8 3 PCB locations 1 of 2 Figure 8 4 ENWW 480 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams ENWW Table 8 3 PCB locations Rer eedem remm DC controller PCB HP3500 RM1 0510 000CN DC controller PCB HP 3550 RM1 2324 000CN DC controller PCB HP3700 RM1 0506 000CN Memory controller PCB RM1 0508 000CN 4 Low voltage power supply PCB 110 127V RK2 0157 000CN Low voltage power supply PCB 220 240V Rises os OD 5 Formatter PCB HP3500 3550 Q1319 69001 Formatter PCB HP3700 Q1321 69001 Formatter Kit HP3700 Q1321 67924 ie Control panel PCB RM1 0511 000CN 3 High voltage power supply PCBs RM1 0505 000CN Illustrations and parts lists 481 Figure 8 5 Paper Feeder PCB Assembly Location Diagram 2 of 2 R90 1 482 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams ENWW Table 8 4 Paper feeder PCB Assembly Location diagram Paper feeder PCB RM1 0768 000 ENWW Illustrations and parts lists 483 6 HP3500 3550 1 External covers and panels Figure 8 6 ENWW 484 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams Table 8 5 External covers and panels _ rorcovenassy O mmessono ENWW Illustrations and parts lists 485 Figure 8 7 Front door assembly 486 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams ENWW Table 8 6 Front doo
186. a 6 fuser face down delivery area 6 fuser face down deliver area ENWW ENWW Table 7 4 Error messages and associated jam locations continued Event log code 13 0A 00 13 10 00 Error message 13 0A 00 HP 3500 3550 13 20 00 HP 3700 Delivery stationary jam 13 20 00 HP 3700 only Duplexing feed delay jam 13 20 00 HP 3700 only Duplexing feed stationary jam 13 20 00 HP 3700 only Duplexing pick up delay jam 13 20 00 HP 3700 only Duplexing pick up stationary jam 13 20 00 HP 3500 3550 only Printer could not automatically eject paper 13 21 00 HP 3500 3550 13 20 00 HP 3700 Open door jam 13 90 00 Incompatible transparencies jam 13 11 00 13 12 00 13 13 00 13 20 00 13 21 00 13 90 00 Action When the paper does not pass the face down paper sensor PS8 within time T after paper has reached the fuser delivery paper sensor PS7 the CPU judges it a delivery stationary jam When the paper does not reach the reversed paper sensor PS9 within time T after the delivery motor has started rotating counterclockwise the CPU judges it a Duplexing feed delay jam When the paper does not pass through the sensor within time T since a paper has reached the reversed paper sensor PS9 the CPU judges it a duplexing feed stationary jam When the paper does not reach the duplexing feed paper sensor PS10 within time T after paper has reached the reversed pap
187. a e RARE TERRAE AR T Na RR E TRA RR RE NR RAR Ra 44 Sie rqpeM Em 44 World Wide WED i rtc eren en ei teet br rer deed ature Ha dao EE anne 44 HP service parts information CD ROM sssssssessseeeeeeeneennene nnne 44 HP support assistant CD ROM ccccccccccesececcececeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaeaesaaaaaeaea 44 Customer care reseller sales and service support center ecceceeeeeeeeeeeeeneteeeeees 44 Ordering related documentation and software sssssssssseeeeenene 45 HP maintenance agreements ssec essere tees ese natae bah th lob da te nna a RR aka a EANTA 46 Onrsite service agreemiernts isss n doc deme desea e estu Ep te qe Da rena e eds a ce destacada aea 46 Chapter contents 41 Search approach Printer repair normally begins by using the printer internal diagnostics and the three step process below 1 Isolate the problem to the major system for example the host computer the network or server or the printer system 2 Determine if the problem is located in an accessory or in the printer engine 3 Troubleshoot the problem Once a faulty part is located the printer can usually be repaired at the assembly level by replacing field replaceable units FRUs Some mechanical assemblies might need to be repaired at the subassembly level Hewlett Packard does not support replacement of components on the printer circuit assembles 42 Chapter 2 Service
188. a ndnna 65 USB georifeltiz ulonm E 66 Connecting the USB cable ccceccceeceeneeeeeeeeneeteneecnenseeeaenee nested siint nnne 66 Parallel configuration HP Color LaserJet 3700 series printer only sss 67 Network Configuration iis eee ea t ERE Ra ODE REI GR E EXER Rudd C RA Ra doge adda 68 Enhanced I O EIO configuration HP color LaserJet 3700 series printer only 69 HP Jetdirect print servers ssssssssssssssssesseeeeeeeerenn nennen nennen tnn nnne 69 Available enhanced I O interfaces ssssssssseeeeneeneene nemen 69 NetWare networks rtr iiy N era p i agr ba edo cap ees bru 70 Windows and Windows NT networks ssssssseeeenn nennen nennen 70 AppleTalk MetWOTKS mE 70 UNIX LINUX networks 2 22 21 nena NA ENE AAE N 70 Printer SOftWare eit t c dicar c rd a aa aeaa T Printer drivers coorta Ht aed iere nderit ler Re ria rave Eee a Pet E Due d nea o gd 71 Software for networks red re ed oH taux ub dp etx ux exic dlc es Msi accu dp ced u XR Hg dde e Mane 72 BIER 73 setting security on the pribter cric ca dati decane edie EEE Peta Eee PERRA uua 76 Locking the control panel sssssssseeeeeneenn een een ener en mener 76 Using an ASCII PJL escape sequence to set security ssssssseeeeee 77 Printer memory for the HP Color LaserJet 3700 series printer ess
189. able 8 13 on page 509 RM1 0461 000CN Table 8 13 on page 509 RM1 0462 000CN Table 8 13 on page 509 RM1 0463 000CN Table 8 6 on page 487 RM1 0464 000CN Table 8 6 on page 487 RM1 0465 020CN Table 8 5 on page 485 RM1 0466 000CN Table 8 5 on page 485 RM1 0467 000CN Table 8 5 on page 485 RM1 0468 000CN Table 8 5 on page 485 ENWW Numerical parts list 557 Table 8 28 Numerical parts list continued Part number Table and page RM1 0469 000CN Table 8 19 on page 523 RM1 0470 000CN Table 8 16 on page 515 RM1 0475 000CN Table 8 10 on page 497 RM1 0476 000CN Table 8 13 on page 509 RM1 0477 000CN Table 8 10 on page 497 RM1 0478 000CN Table 8 13 on page 509 RM1 0482 000CN Table 8 8 on page 492 RM1 0483 000CN Table 8 8 on page 492 RM1 0485 000CN Table 8 7 on page 489 RM1 0488 000CN Table 8 8 on page 492 RM1 0489 000CN Table 8 5 on page 485 RM1 0493 000CN Table 8 9 on page 495 RM1 0498 000CN CABLE FORMATTER POWER SUPPLY Table 8 8 on page 492 HP 3500 3550 RM1 0510 000CN DC controller PCB HP3500 DC controller PCB Table 8 3 on page 481 RM1 2324 000CN HP 3550 DC controller PCB HP3700 RM1 0506 000CN 558 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams ENWW ENWW Table 8 28 Numerical parts list continued Part number RM1 0731 000CN RM1 0733 000CN RM1 0736 000CN RM1 0737 000CN RM1 0739 000CN RM1 0740 000CN RM1 0760 000CN RM1 0768 000 RM1 0768 000CN RM1 0769 000CN RM1 0770 000CN RM1 0827 000CN RM1 1142 000CN RS6 2021 000CN VS1 5057 002CN
190. additional 500 sheet paper feeder sssssssssssss 9 Rear view HP Color LaserJet 3500 3550 and 3700 series printers shown with additional 500 sheet paper feeder sss 10 Space requirements for the HP Color LaserJet 3500 3550 series printer 11 Space requirements for the HP Color LaserJet 3700 series printer With optionialll Tay 3 retient te tiet eter tenere e t tec ges 12 Serial number information 0 cccccccececceeeeeeeeecceeeceeeeeeeeseeeeeeecencsaeeeeeeeeeeeess 22 Satnple label itemm e e ERE ie 23 EMI statement for Korea ssssssssssssesseeeee emere 37 VCCI statement for Japan misiis eien aaaea a e eaaa aea nemen 37 HP Color LaserJet 3500 3550 printer package contents 48 Additional contents shipped with the HP Color LaserJet 3500n 3550n encima LE 48 HP Color LaserJet 3700 3700n or 3700dn printer package contents 49 HP Color LaserJet 3700dtn printer package contents sssssss 49 USB CONNECUON 3 2 ea eter e I e dete A eee ed 66 Parallel port connection ssssssssssssssssseeeeenennmeenen enne 67 Toner specks tar tt ee ote eee t ege MAT E ha deseen d 93 Toner smearing 2 ace eoe Ue quede etae ee ee 93 Supply item and part locations ssssssseseeeenesd 96 Basic system operation eeclesie RE A teet EEE TER e noit rnnt 114 Power on sequenc
191. adjusted Follow the procedure below to adjust the light intensity 1 Turn the printer OFF 2 Open the front cover 3 While pressing the engine test print switch on the left side of the printer see Figure 7 16 Location of solenoids and clutches turn the printer ON Close the front cover Load plain white paper in the Tray 1 As the printer goes into Ready period press the engine test print switch and test print NO A One sheet of paper will be fed into the printer from the Tray 1 and will be delivered to the face down delivery tray DC Controller previously installed in another printer replacement configuration To ensure optimum print quality the printer needs to be calibrated by performing 3 Calibrate Now s using the printer control panel by selecting Configure Device PRINT QUALITY CALIBRATE NOW see Calibrate Now in chapter 7 Light intensity of the media sensor must be adjusted Follow the procedure below to adjust the light intensity 1 Turn the printer OFF 2 Open the front cover 3 While pressing the engine test print switch on the left side of the printer see Figure 7 16 Location of solenoids and clutches turn the printer ON Close the front cover Load plain white paper in the Tray 1 As the printer goes into Ready period press the engine test print switch and test print NO eA One sheet of paper will be fed into the printer from the Tray 1 and will be delivered to the face down de
192. age Figure 6 121 HP 3500 3550 and HP 3700 Figure 6 122 High voltage power supply PCB removal 1 of 5 7 Remove the screws from the back of the formatter cage the HP 3500 3550 is shown for both the HP 3500 3550 and HP 3700 remove two screws 1 for the HP 3500 3550 remove three screws 1 and 2 for the HP 3700 282 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW 8 Remove the formatter cage 3 while removing the cage for the HP 3500 3550 release the cable tie 4 Figure 6 123 High voltage power supply PCB removal 2 of 5 9 Disconnect two connectors 1 remove two screws 2 press down on the claw 3 and pull the fan assembly 4 out from the printer Figure 6 124 10 Disconnect the remaining cable connectors from the PCB 19 connectors for the HP 3500 3550 and 20 for the HP 3700 and remove the cables from three cable clamps 1 ENWW Circuit Boards 283 11 Remove four screws 2 and remove the DC controller PCB plate 3 from the printer While removing the controller PCB plate remove the cables from the remaining harness clamps Figure 6 125 High voltage power supply PCB removal 4 of 5 12 Remove three screws 1 unhook eight claws 2 working from the top down pull out on the bottom sides of the PCB to release two pins 3 and then lift up to release it from the lower support 4 Once the PCB is released from the printer disconnect the connector 5 as you pull the PCB away
193. age Printing can continue but there could be unexpected behavior X Description 0 for onboard NVRAM 1 for removable flash disk HP Color LaserJet 3700 series printer only A critical hardware error has occurred Turn the printer off and then back on HP 3700 only reseat the firmware DIMM Make sure it is in slot 1 the bottom slot Download new firmware HP 3700 try downloading through the parallel port Replace the firmware DIMM Turn the printer off and then back on Perform a cold reset HP 3700 only replace the firmware DIMM Replace the formatter PCB Press v to continue For the following errors perform the indicated action 68 0 turn the printer off and then back on If the error persists execute an NVRAM initialization 68 1 use the HP Web Jetadmin software to delete files from the flash disk press v to continue For the following errors perform the indicated action 68 0 turn the printer off and then back on If the error persists execute an NVRAM initialization 68 1 use the HP Web Jetadmin software to delete files from the flash disk Press v to continue Turn the printer off and then back on Check the printer settings to determine which settings have been changed Turn the printer off and then back on Reseat the firmware DIMM Reseat the formatter PCB Replace the firmware DIMM Replace the formatter PCB ENWW Table 7 3 Numerical print
194. al covers D Figure 6 2 Cover locations Left cover Top cover Front door Tray 1 multipurpose tray Left front door includes control panel DIMM cover HP 3700 only Right cover Upper rear door Rear cover 0 Lower rear door rear output bin doo0 o0C0 Lec0cn2mN Front door removal 1 Open the front door 2 Remove the transfer unit and the print cartridges See Transfer unit removal and Print cartridge removal Remove the right cover see Right cover removal 4 Remove the left cover see Left cover removal Remove two e clips 1 from the front door rod bracket ENWW Covers 209 6 Remove two screws 2 from the right hinge 3 Figure 6 3 Front door removal 1 of 2 7 Remove two screws 1 from the left hinge 2 Figure 6 4 Front door removal 2 of 2 8 Lifting up slightly on the front door to relieve the pressure on the hinges pull the hinges out and then remove the front door Reinstallation tip Each hinge is keyed and will only fit into the side from which it was removed You may want to initial the hinge with an R or L to identify them Left cover removal 1 Remove three screws 1 210 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW 2 Slide the cover back in the direction of the arrow 2 about one inch and then pull it out away from the printer to remove it Figure 6 5 Left cover removal Left front cover removal 1 Remove left cov
195. ality problems may result 2 Remove the used print cartridge from the printer ENWW Replacing supply items 97 3 Remove the new print cartridge from the bag Place the used print cartridge in the bag for recycling 4 Grasp both sides of the cartridge and distribute the toner by gently rocking the cartridge from side to side 5 Remove the orange shipping locks and the orange shipping tape from the new print cartridge Discard the shipping tape and shipping locks according to local regulations 98 Chapter 4 Printer maintenance ENWW 6 Align the print cartridge with the tracks inside the printer and using the blue handle insert the print cartridge until it is firmly seated After a short calibration time the control panel should display Ready NOTE If a cartridge is in the wrong slot or the wrong type for the printer the control panel will display the message INCORRECT lt COLOR gt or Incorrect supplies 8 Installation is complete Place the used print cartridge in the box in which the new cartridge arrived See the enclosed recycling guide for recycling instructions 9 If you are using a non HP print cartridge check the printer control panel for further instructions For additional help go to hitp www hp com support clj3500 for the HP Color LaserJet 3500 series printer to http www hp com support clj3550 for the HP Color LaserJet 3550 series printer or to http www hp com support clj3700 for the HP C
196. alternates with Ready To clear press v 322 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting The printer has experienced a period of heavy use To maintain a supported operating temperature the printer will print and pause in one minute intervals The printer is currently processing a job but is not yet picking pages When paper motion begins this message will be replaced by a message that indicates which tray the job is being printed from The printer is actively processing a job from the designated tray HP 3700 only A device failure has occurred on the specified storage device HP 3700 only The new RAM disk installed in slot X is initializing HP 3700 only The printer received a PJL file system command that attempted to perform an illogical operation for example to download a file to a non existent directory HP 3700 only The printer received a PJL file system command that attempted to store something on the file system but was unsuccessful because the file system is full HP 3700 only The file system is protected and no new files can be written to it eem 0 Rem No action necessary To avoid intermittent mode in the future reduce the amount of heavy use No action necessary No action necessary Printing may continue for jobs that do not require the RAM disk To remove this message from the display press v No action necessary Printing may continue To remove this message from the displ
197. an remove or swap cartridges While performing the disable cartridge check you can navigate the menus and print internal pages as desired from the control panel Use the button to access the menus as you normally would You can also send external print jobs to the printer To exit this diagnostic press the Stor button and then select EXIT diagnostics Paper Path Sensors special mode test This test allows you to test the printer s sensors for proper operation Each sensor is represented by a letter as indicated in the table below A one below the letter on the display indicates paper is present This test allows you to print internal pages or send an external job to the printer This test will also test the new Media sensor PS5 which senses OHT Gloss Gloss Film and Plain paper Manual Sensor Test special mode test This test allows you to manually test paper path sensors and the door open switch Each sensor is represented by a letter as indicated in the tables below 436 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW NOTE Figure 7 14 ENWW The reversed paper sensor PS9 and duplexing feed delivery paper sensor PS10 are for the HP Color LaserJet 3700 series printer only PS6 SSPPS11 e PS7 amp PS10 PS16159 ea ppPs4 Location of sensors PS1 Tray 1 paper sensor PS2 Tray 2 cassette paper sensor PS3 Tray 3 paper sensor see 500 sheet paper feeder PS4 Registration paper sensor PS5 Media sensor PS6 F
198. ancelled Open and close the front door to fully engage the cartridges Reseat the print cartridges Check the printer primary transfer bias contacts to the transfer unit Clean if dirty If the contracts cannot be cleaned or they are damaged replace the transfer unit Replace the high voltage power supply PCB Replace the DC controller PCB ENWW Table 7 3 Numerical printer messages continued Dem qm Perform the following steps to fix the Message ENWW Four color slippage bands occur across the ITB belt because the right side cleaning blade shipping tab is out of position This can cause interference with the yellow cartridge where the cleaning blade shipping tab contacts the OPC white plastic hub and the OPC ground contact adjacent to the OPC hub This interference between the cleaning blade and the yellow cartridge prevents the proper engagement between the ITB drive roller coupler and the engine ITB resulting in non engagement of the ITB drive roller coupler to the engine which can produce separate color toner slippage bands across the ITB belt surface beneath each toner cartridge You may also hear a thumping noise and experience a vibration in the upper right portion of the front cover Due to the interference a paper jam 13 xx xx error 13 20 00 on an HP 3700 with a corresponding 13 05 00 paper jam in the event log or a 13 50 00 message for an HP 3500 3550 printer problem 1 Right
199. and 81 but are rounded to standard book or text weights of 50 60 70 and 80 Table 1 13 Weight equivalence table Bond weight Text Book Cover Bristol Index weight Tag weight Metric 17 x22 in Weight cda weight 24 x36 in weight 25 x 38 in 22 5 x 17 29 35 39 64 g m2 34 42 46 75 g m2 36 44 49 80 g m2 41 50 90 g m2 45 55 61 100 g m2 49 58 65 105 g m2 50 61 68 110 g m2 62 75 135 g m2 67 82 148 g m2 68 83 150 g m2 74d 90s 163 g m2 TT 943 170 g m2 Printing on special media 29 Table 1 13 Weight equivalence table continued 1208 1468 1624 264 g m2 72 183 100 123 150 166 271 g m2 30 Chapter 1 Printer description ENWW Environmental product stewardship program NOTE ENWW Environmental protection for this product is described in this section Protecting the environment Hewlett Packard Company is committed to providing quality products in an environmentally sound manner This product has been designed with several attributes to minimize impacts on the environment Ozone production This product generates no appreciable ozone gas O Power Consumption Power usage drops significantly while in PowerSave mode which saves natural resources and saves money without affecting the high performance of this product This product qualifies for ENERGY STAR Version 3 0 which is a voluntary program to encourage the development of energy efficient office products
200. and disk drives Extended warranty HP Carepak provides coverage for the HP hardware product and all HP supplied internal components The hardware maintenance covers a one to three year period from date of the HP product purchase For more information contact the HP Customer Care Service and Support group Chapter 2 Service approach ENWW Installation and configuration Chapter contents ENWW This chapter contains the following sections Chapter Content S EEEE EEEE 47 Checking the package contents 0 cee eect eter tenet etre tne e i RAEE 48 Unpacking the printer sssssssssssssessssenenneeeen e emere nnne nne trennen nn nnns 50 Installing the print cartridge tiet ette tete rre RR Eee de 55 Loading paper into Tray 3 optional sseeem emend 57 Loading paper Into Tray Z icri meti Ete ETE Hie ncaa aad gudeei anneal 59 Loading paper into Tray 1 optional procedure sssssm e 61 COnNGClUNG HOWEN E 62 Installing a new control panel overlay Optional c cece eee eee teeeetteeeeereeieeeeereed 63 Testing the printer Operation ciini eet tense udin rna d ees ae eR NAR ER TuS RR A TRA ERAI d UAR RR dni 64 Using Powerb9awve TMG coe ret att a Ga ee A 65 To set PowerSave TilTie ruine ita d anr EMG edu ELE aati 65 To disable enable PowerSave eene etin tenente ta nain anie nn
201. ansient voltages that cause permanent damage to the formatter PCB This circumstance is not covered by the Hewlett Packard warranty LO im i Figure 7 5 Configuration page AUTOEXEC BAT standard configurations This section contains information about programming the printer Parallel DOS commands Ensure that the AUTOEXEC BAT file contains the following statements for parallel interface communications MODE LPT1 P For MS DOS version 4 0 and above MODE LPT1 B NOTE This example assumes that you are using parallel printer port LPT1 If you are using LPT2 or LPT3 replace LPT1 in the example with the appropriate printer port Printer Job Language PJL commands See the HP Printer Job Language Technical Reference Manual for a complete description of PJL commands This manual is available with the HP PCL PJL Reference Set on CD ROM part number 5021 0337 PJL Enter This command enables the specified printer language If the printer does not receive this command it enables the default language This ensures the correct operation applications that do not support PJL The command syntax is 404 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW ENWW PJL Enter LANGUAGE PCL PostScript lt CR gt lt LF gt UEL universal exit language This command also referred to as the universal exit language command terminates the current printer language and returns control to PJL It performs the following actions e P
202. anty Limited Warranty Statement 20 Premium Protection Warranty Color LaserJet Image Fuser Kit and Image Transfer Kit Limited Warranty Statement ssssssssssseeeeenennen nennen ener nennen 21 identification psp 22 Model and serial numbers ccccceeeeeeeeeeeceeceeeeeeeesecaeaaaeeeeeeeeesececaaaeaaeeeeeeeeesensenaanaeeees 22 Power and regulatory information sssssseseeneeeneeenneneenn 22 Selecting PAPER muscis eot snantaeasandedcesaandusanadaaddecauaudnddandacaadens anodacenn dadeecbaaeudccntadeaddaataataaacn 24 Paper tO avid EHE EI 24 Paper that can damage the printer cecceceeeeeeeeeeeeseeneecaeeeeeeeeeeeeeseceseccueaeeeeeeeneess 24 Printing on specal media riter trt eite tec Eai de baee ESAE deque ev deep M dude 26 Transparencies 26 CIE PLI 26 Colored paper cn ee en reed e e rice rri ada vied date e Re E e Eus 26 Envelopes xe rper Rr ERE Land CERE FLx ERR EHI ERES tadcs XE H Cn aa A BEeEEKEFEME Kex EU eeu pO 27 E llgp EM 27 In A Moo 28 HP LaserJet Tough paper ceteri eret nro eren ave e Feeder ee etat aba aene ens 28 Preprinted forms and letterhead ssssssssssssssesesee eene een 28 atzeTu No lo i EE 29 Chapter contents 1 2 Media Weer Reo eet ttti eum afe tett
203. any of the supplies that cannot be detected as new A component test is in progress the component selected is color Cartridge motor Press Stop when ready to stop this test The printer is executing a Component Press Stop when ready to stop this test Test and the component selected is motor A menu selection has been saved No action necessary The printer is reporting the current Press v to change size or type configuration of tray X Printer error troubleshooting 325 Table 7 2 Alphabetical printer messages continued eem Rem If the tray has paper or is closed and the paper guides are in the correct position perform the following action for the specified tray Message TRAY X OPEN OR EMPTY The specified tray is open or is empty and needs to be filled If the tray is not open or has paper installed a problem may exist with the sensor sensor connections or the DC controller PCB 326 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting Tray 1 multipurpose tray 1 Damaged Tray 1 paper sensor lever replace the lever The connectors in the Tray 1 paper detection signal line are not connected properly Reseat the paper sensor connector J701 relay connector J5028 and DC controller PCB connector J1006 Defective Tray 1 paper sensor Replace the Tray 1 paper sensor Defective DC controller PCB Replace the DC controller PCB Tray 2 cassette tray 1 Damaged Tray 2 paper sensor lever replace the lev
204. aper pick up drive assembly FED PAPER PICK UP DRIVE ASS Y RM1 0701 000CN SWING ASS Y RM1 0707 000CN PAPER FEEDER DRIVER PCB ASS Y RM1 0768 000CN ENWW Illustrations and parts lists 535 500 Sheet paper feeder tray Tray 3 Figure 8 30 ENWW 536 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams ENWW Table 8 26 500 Sheet paper feeder tray Tray 3 FEED PAPER TRAY 3 500 SHEET FEEDER RM1 0705 000CN PLATE END RB2 6469 000CN SPRING COMPRESSION RC1 2191 000CN PAPER SEPARATION PAD ASS Y RM1 0827 000CN Illustrations and parts lists 537 Alphabetical parts list Table 8 27 Alphabetical parts list Description Table and page ARM DRUM LOCK LEFT DRUM LOCK LEFT RC1 1170 000CN 1170 000CN Table 8 9 on page 495 8 9 on Table 8 9 on page 495 495 EL eT DRUM LOCK LEFT EE 1169 000CN Table 8 13 on page 505 ARM DRUM LOCK LEFT RC1 1622 000CN Table 8 13 on page 505 ARM DRUM LOCK LEFT RC1 1623 000CN Table 8 13 on page 505 ARM DRUM LOCK RIGHT RC1 1361 000CN Table 8 9 on page 495 ARM DRUM LOCK RIGHT RC1 1246 000CN Table 8 12 on page 501 ARM DRUM LOCK RIGHT RC1 1362 000CN Table 8 12 on page 501 ARM DRUM LOCK RIGHT RC1 1545 000CN Table 8 12 on page 501 ARM INTERLOCK SWITCH RC1 1175 000CN Table 8 7 on page 489 ARM SENSOR RB2 6448 000CN Table 8 24 on page 533 BASE CONTROLLER HP3500 3550 rc1 2235 000CN Table 8 10 on page
205. at you can return to it quickly in the future HP toolbox sections The HP toolbox software contains the following sections e Status tab e Troubleshooting tab e Alerts tab e Documentation tab e Advanced Printer Settings window Each page in HP toolbox contains links to the HP website for product registration product support and for ordering supplies You must have Internet access to use any of these links If you use a dial up connection and did not connect when you first opened the HP toolbox you must connect before you can visit these web sites Status tab The Status tab has links to the following main pages e Device Status View printer status information This page will indicate printer conditions such as a paper jam or an empty tray After you correct a problem with the printer click the Refresh button to update the device status e Supplies Status View detailed supplies status such as the percentage of toner remaining in the print cartridge and the number of pages printed with the current print cartridge This page also has links to order supplies and to find recycling information e Print Info Print the configuration page and various other information pages that are available for the printer such as the supplies status page and the demo page Troubleshooting tab The Troubleshooting tab provides links to various printer troubleshooting information such as how to clear a paper jam how to resolve print quality proble
206. ation clutch CL 1 is turned on This allows the paper to be fed The feeding speed changes based on the media specified by the formatter See Paper feeder for details ENWW Pickup feed system 185 9 The toner is transferred onto the paper on the ITB and the paper is then fed to the fuser delivery unit DC controller PCB al signal SL2 CSTSL REGSNS MPSL MULTI PURPOSE TRAY PAPER DETECTION CSTSNS signal IMPSNS signal JERONTSNS ENGAGING SOLENOID DRIVE CASSETTE PICKUP SOLENOID DRIVE signal FEED MOTOR CONTROL signal MEDIA DETECTION signal REGISTRATION PAPER DETECTION signal DRIVE signal DRUM MOTOR CONTROL sign FUSER FRONT PAPER DETECTION SECONDARY TRANSFER ROLLER MULTI PURPOSE PICKUP SOLENOID Registration shutter REGISTRATION CLUTCH DRIVE signal REGCL CASSETTE PAPER DETECTION signal Registration roller m Wes Registration Seller Co Secondary transfer roller Cassette pickup roller Separation pad Tray 2 Secondary transfer roller Multi purpose Tray 1 engaging cam pickup roller Figure 5 59 Pickup delivery unit block PS1 Tray 1 multipurpose tray paper sensor PS2 Tray 2 cassette paper sensor PS4 Registration paper sensor PS5 Media sensor PS6 Fuser front paper sensor M1 Feed motor M3 Drum motor SL1 Tray 1 multipurpose tray pickup solenoid
207. ation pad is worn Replace the separation pad assembly Tray 1 multipurpose tray separation pad has a Make sure the spring is set in place If the spring defective spring is damaged replace the separation pad assembly Tray 2 separation pad is worn Replace the separation pad assembly Tray 2 separation pad has a defective spring Make sure the spring is set in place If the spring is damaged replace the separation pad spring Area 1 Tray 1 pick up jam troubleshooting Removing paper jams located in the Tray 1 multipurpose area requires removing all paper from the tray including pulling any jammed paper Table 7 6 Causes for jams in the Tray 1 pick up area Dirty worn or deformed multi purpose If dirty clean the roller If worn or deformed replace the tray pickup roller roller Defective separation pad If dirty clean the pad If worn or deformed replace the pad Damaged drive gears Check the drive gears in the pickup feed area If damaged replace the gear Defective multi purpose tray pickup Disconnect the multi purpose tray pickup solenoid solenoid connector J1006 from the DC controller PCB Measure the resistance between the connector J1006 14 MPSL and J1006 13 24VA If it is not approx 160 ohms replace the multi purpose tray pickup solenoid 360 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW ENWW Table 7 6 Causes for jams in the Tray 1 pick up area continued Cause Defective feed motor Replace the feed
208. attempted to store something on the file system but was unsuccessful because the file system is full HP 3700 only The file system is protected and no new files can be written to it HP 3700 only Device failure FS DEVICE can be either FLASH DEVICE or RAM DISK DEVICE HP 3700 only This message indicates a PJL file system command was received that attempted to perform an illogical operation that is download a file to a non existent directory FS DEVICE can be either FLASH DEVICE or RAM DISK DEVICE HP 3700 only This message indicates a PJL file system command was received that attempted to store something on a file system but was unsuccessful due to the file system being full FS DEVICE can be either FLASH DEVICE or RAM DISK DEVICE HP 3700 only The device is write protected and no new files can be written to it FS DEVICE can be either FLASH DEVICE or RAM DISK DEVICE A new HP cartridge has been installed The printer returns to the Ready state after approximately 10 seconds This genuine HP supply was not designed for this printer and is not supported Print quality might be affected Use HP Web Jetadmin software to delete files from the Flash Memory and try again To remove this message from the display press v See HP Web Jetadmin Chapter 3 To enable writing to the Flash Memory turn off write protection using HP Web Jetadmin To remove this message from the display
209. auses for white horizonal lines ese em 396 Causes for a missing color sssssse eene emen 397 Causes for blank spots sssssssssssssssssssseeee eene 397 Causes for poor Tusing m Rp eren pA 397 Causes for distortion or blurring sseennn en 398 CGauses for smearirng ceo ettet ehe reete ini eap tdeo needed nin dne 398 Causes for smiearing 1 ecce aec e ete eee ae tee de pde doe gees ead 399 Causes for a misplaced image sss eee 399 Causes for reversed color sssssssss een A00 Causes for reversed color sssssssssseee emn A00 Repetitive defect cause eee see ated legii add 401 Communications check sssssssseeee eem I3 Information Menu netiis 408 Paper handling menu sssssseem eme 408 Printing Men eee eb Ee e Rec eee eset ug ese bea tee Logo ndd 409 Print quality men irit rt tee totom ite MIR 412 System setup submenu eden de entera re Eo Eee e an das 415 l O submenhli Reed seaieaaeeeeicrat 418 Resets SUBMENU sisene eann eta Pese Eedteiet eget heel nues 419 Diagnostics Tieni feat Ee te rre ter ton EE ete e ba Pen 419 Service meru isnt etes eet ete e E 420 Paper path and manual sensor test control panel information 438 Supplies and accessories iie tree ecc e beet ics 467 GOMMON fasteners 2 bred piste ACA oru e A eene a DUM
210. ave mode to 1 MINUTE 15 MINUTES 30 MINUTES or to 1 HOUR 1 5 HOURS 2 HOURS or 4 HOURS The default setting is 30 MINUTES NOTE The printer display appears dimmed when the printer is in PowerSave mode PowerSave mode does not affect printer warm up time unless the printer is in PowerSave mode for more than eight hours To set PowerSave Time 1 Press Menu to enter the MENUS 2 Press w to highlight Configure Device 3 Press v to select Configure Device 4 Press w to highlight SYSTEM SETUP 5 Pressv to select SYSTEM SETUP 6 Press to highlight Powersave Time 7 Pressv to select Powersave Time 8 Press w or a to select the appropriate time period 9 Press v to set the time period 1 0 Press Menu To disable enable PowerSave 1 Press Menu to enter the MENUS 2 Press w to highlight Configure Device 3 Pressv to select Configure Device 4 Press v to highlight RESETS 5 Pressv to select RESETS 6 Press w to highlight POWERSAVE 7 Pressv to select POWERSAVE 8 Press w or a to select on or off 9 Press v to set the selection 1 0 Press Menu ENWW Using PowerSave Time 65 USB configuration All printer models support USB connections The USB port is on the back of the printer Connecting the USB cable Plug the USB cable into the printer Plug the other end of the USB cable into the computer Figure 3 5 USB connection 1 USB port 2 USB connector 66 Chapter 3 Installatio
211. ay press v If the message reappears there might be a problem with the software application Use HP Web Jetadmin software to delete files from the RAM disk memory and try again To remove this message from the display press v See HP Web Jetadmin in chapter 3 for more information To enable writing to the RAM disk memory turn off write protection using HP Web Jetadmin To remove this message from the display press v See HP Web Jetadmin in chapter 3 for more information ENWW Table 7 2 Alphabetical printer messages continued eem Rem Message Ready Diagnostics mode alternates with To exit press v STOP key Receiving upgrade RELOAD TRAY X TRNSPRNCY SIZE alternates with Verify transparency meets specification REPLACE COLOR CARTRIDGE alternates with For help press REPLACE COLOR CARTRIDGE alternates with To continue press v REPLACE FUSER KIT For help press ENWW The printer is online and ready for data No status or device attendance messages are pending at the display The printer is online and ready for data No status or device attendance messages are pending at the display A firmware upgrade is in progress The transparency currently loaded might not be supported The identified print cartridge has reached the end of life Printing will not continue until the cartridge is replaced The identified print cartridge is nearing
212. by 127 mm 60 to 163 g m 100 sheets 3 by 5 in 16 to 43 Ib bond 75 g m 20 Ib bond Maximum size paper 216 by 356 mm 60 to 163 g m 100 sheets 8 5 by 14 in 16 to 43 Ib bond 75 g m 20 Ib bond Minimum size glossy 76 by 127 mm 75 to 120 g m Maximum stack paper 3 by 5 in 20 to 32 Ib bond height 12 mm 0 47 in Maximum size glossy 216 by 356 mm 75 to 120 g m Maximum stack paper 8 5 by 14 in 20 to 32 Ib bond height 12 mm 0 47 in Minimum size 76 by 127 mm 0 12 to 0 13 mm thick 50 sheets transparencies 3 by 5 in 4 7 to 5 mils thick Maximum size 216 by 356 mm 0 12 to 0 13 mm thick 50 sheets transparencies 8 5 by 14 in 4 7 to 5 mils thick Minimum size 76 by 127 mm 60 to 90 g m 10 sheets envelopes 3 by 5 in 16 to 24 Ib bond Maximum size 216 by 356 mm 60 to 90 g m 10 sheets envelopes 8 5 by 14 in 16 to 24 Ib bond Minimum size label 76 by 127 mm 75 to 163 g m 50 sheets 3 by 5 in 20 to 43 Ib bond Maximum size label 216 by 356 mm 75 to 163 g m 50 sheets 8 5 by 14 in 20 to 43 Ib bond Minimum size 76 by 127 mm 135 to 216 g m 50 sheets cardstock 3 by 5 in 43 to 43 Ib bond Maximum size 216 by 356 mm 135 to 216 g m 50 sheets cardstock 8 5 by 14 in 43 to 43 Ib bond The printer supports a wide range of standard and custom sizes of print media Capacity can vary depending on media weight and thickness and environmental conditions Smoothness 100 to 250 Sheffield Use only transparencies designed f
213. cL te Dore eed 393 Completely blank image sse erisin nenne ener enne 393 All black or solid Color titre metere ree ea i etes 393 Dots in vertical lines roro eret ced eres lado atte de HU de rd ed eee dete 394 Dirton back Of paper tete ete nha cR TR dace cede RR Ee RR a a TR ERR aae nao 394 Dirt om front of Daper 3 e cette est tuia e t itte ined tue 394 Verticalilines 5 3 52 one oer DEUS UE REDIMI 395 White vertical lies cce e c b etd cie tente D dent leid eee iade 395 Horizontal line 1 2 et e edi D e tot eb emer ette dededte ce 396 White horizontal ling iicet he ette emer eee ERE PL Eee dis 396 Color MISSING 22 5 1 tide d De et RAN SEU 397 Blank SPIS ein T 397 Poor Meng itai tette e tute E efte D e EIE GE Red 397 Image distortionics eR tod ten dae unes 398 Color misregistrationis e oon e IE 398 SIMI m 399 Misplaced lmage 3 5 tenet tee eei ode tet tete ex Da ones dates t a DE ET 399 Reversed color 2 2 IHR epis np 400 Snailitracks cu te uie eeu tnu i ia es 400 Repetitive defects troubleshooting ssssesseene enne eene 401 Interface troubleshooting eintreten AAA e RR ERA MLRRR ER AMOR ERR RNMURR n ERA dkgS 403 Communications checkKs 4 eee tere tenete enne e Leno A denen con 403 EIO troubleshooting ss n e on phe uae 403 AUTOEXEC BAT standard configurations se
214. ch color and sends each color s VIDEO signals corresponding to the specific number of scanning in sequence to the DC controller This synchronizes the leading edge of each color s image on the drum with the leading edge of the paper The figure below illustrates the output timing of the VIDEO signals in response to the TOP signal TOP VIDEO signal for one page VDO1 Y ra HRE t1 VDO2 M t2 LH EEH ELE VDOS C VDO4 Bk gt t3 p lt _S S t4 t Number of counted BD signals Output timing of the VIDEO signal in response to the TOP signal Engine control system 137 BD1 BD2 BD3 BD4 HORIZONTAL SYNCHRONOUS signals formatter input This signal synchronizes the horizontal main scanning line the reference signal in the horizontal direction of the laser beam When the TOP signal is received the formatter counts the BD signals of each color and sends each color s VIDEO signal synchronized with each BD signal corresponding to the specific number of scanning in sequence to the DC controller This justifies the writing position of the image The figure below illustrates the output timing of the VIDEO signal synchronized with the BD signal TOP op BD1 JJ VIDEO signal for one line r4 VDO11 A U t time varies according to the paper size Figure 5 19 Output timing of the VIDEO signal synchro
215. column to ensure that the part number selected is for the correct printer model NOTE In this manual the abbreviation PCB stands for printed circuit board assembly Components described as a PCB may consist of a single circuit board or a circuit board plus other parts such as cables and sensors 466 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams ENWW Ordering parts NOTE NOTENOTE NOTE ENWW All standard part numbers are stocked and can be ordered from Hewlett Packard Customer Support Americas HPCS A or Hewlett Packard Customer Support Europe HPCS E For information about contacting HPCS A or HPCS E see Parts and supplies in chapter 2 Parts that have no reference designator or part number are not field replaceable and cannot be ordered Supplies and accessories The items listed in Table 8 1 Supplies and accessories are available through your local authorized HP dealer To find a dealer near you or if your local dealer is temporarily out of stock call the HP Customer Information Center at 800 752 0900 See Ordering related documentation and software Ordering related documentation and software in chapter 2 for documentation part numbers Supplies and accessories are available directly from Hewlett Packard at the following numbers e U S 800 538 8787 e Canada 800 387 3154 Toronto 416 671 8383 e United Kingdom 0734 441212 Contact your local HP Parts Coordinator for other local phone numbers Any item
216. configuration To ensure optimum print quality the printer will need to be calibrated by performing 3 Calibrate Now s using the printer control panel by selecting CONFIGURE DEVICE PRINT QUALITY CALIBRATE NOW Light intensity of the media sensor must be adjusted Follow the procedure below to adjust the light intensity 1 Turn the printer OFF 2 Open the front cover 3 While pressing the engine test print switch on the left side of the printer see Figure 7 16 Location of solenoids and clutches turn the printer ON Close the front cover Load plain white paper in the multipurpose tray As the printer goes into READY period press the engine test print switch and test print NO on R One sheet of paper will be fed into the printer from the multipurpose tray and will be delivered to the face down delivery tray ENWW Replacement parts configuration 353 NOTE DC Controller previously installed in another printer replacement configuration To ensure optimum print quality the printer needs to be calibrated by performing 3 Calibrate Now s using the printer control panel by selecting CONFIGURE DEVICE PRINT QUALITY CALIBRATE NOW see Calibrate Now Light intensity of the media sensor must be adjusted Follow the procedure below to adjust the light intensity 1 Turn the printer OFF 2 Open the front cover 3 While pressing the engine test print switch on the left side of the printer see Figure 7 16 Location
217. configuration 66 using PowerSave Time 65 utilities other 75 software 73 V vacuuming 92 ventilation 11 video interface control 135 Index 571 voltage weight power consumption 12 media 16 29 Windows networks 65 70 Ww wrinkled paper 367 warranty extended 46 fuser 21 print cartridge 20 statement 19 transfer unit 21 waste toner full detection 167 waste toner level sensor PS13 removal and replacement 260 Websites printer specifications 13 websites Material Safety Data Sheet MSDS 32 printer specifications 15 product and support information 44 service part information 44 572 Index ENWW invent 2004 Hewlett Packard Development Company L P www hp com Q5990 90939
218. continue press v REPLACE TRANSFER KIT For help press REPLACE TRANSFER KIT alternates with To continue press v The fuser is near end of life and the SUPPLIES LOW setting in SYSTEM SETUP is set to STOP At least one supply item is out and needs to be replaced and another supply item is either out or low More than one supply item is low and the SUPPLIES LOW setting in SYSTEM SETUP is set to STOP The transfer unit is at end of life The transfer unit is near end of life and the SUPPLIES LOW setting in SYSTEM SETUP is set to STOP 324 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting Order the fuser kit Press v to continue printing Printing can continue until REPLACE FUSER KIT is reached or Press for help See Ordering parts in chapter 8 for more information Press v to identify which supplies should be replaced Press for help or Refer to the appropriate section Removal and replacement strategy in chapter 6 or Ordering parts in chapter 8 for more information Press v to identify which supplies should be ordered Order the identified supplies Press v to continue printing See Ordering parts in chapter 8 for more information Press for help See Transfer unit removal and Ordering parts in chapter 8 for more information Or if transfer unit is new 1 Reset the transfer kit page count in the CONFIGURE DEVICE RESETS menu Defective waste toner full detection lens Check the
219. controls the operation sequence for the printer Table 5 1 Basic operation sequence describes the main operational periods from the point when the printer is turned on until a print operation is completed and each motor stops rotating 114 Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW Table 5 1 Basic operation sequence STBY standby period INTR initial rotations period LSTR last rotations period ENWW From the time the power Switch is turned on until the ITB cleaning is completed From the end of the WAIT or LSTR period until either a print command is sent from the formatter or the power switch is turned off From the time the formatter sends a print command until the registration paper sensor detects the end of the paper From the time the INTR period is completed and the TOP signal is sent to the formatter until the fuser delivery paper sensor detects the paper From the end of PRINT until the delivery motor stops muse umm E Clear the charge from the drum surface and clean the ITB To keep the printer ready to print Stabilize the sensitivity of the photosensitive drum to be ready for printing Form the image on the photosensitive drum according to the VIDEO signal sent from the formatter and transfer the toner image to the paper via the ITB Deliver the paper out of the printer Detect the presence of the cartridge and the environmental conditions Control the color misregis
220. cumulative length of time equals approximately 10 mm 0 4 inch of print distance It is a BD error when an abnormal rotation occurs when the image masking control is released The BD error will result when the interval of the BDI signals goes out of tolerance even once while the scanner motor rotates steadily and the image masking control is off ENWW Laser scanner system 145 Image formation system NOTE Figure 5 24 The image formation system which serves as the nerve center of the printer forms a toner image on paper The DC controller controls the image formation system which consists of units such as the developing section four cartridges and the developing disengaging unit the transfer section transfer unit and secondary transfer roller and the fuser The DC controller controls the laser scanner unit and the high voltage power supply circuit to form an image on paper according to the VIDEO signals VDO VDO upon receipt of a print command from the formatter Figure 5 24 Image formation system and Figure 5 25 Image formation system signal paths illustrate the image formation system The terms fixing and fuser refer to the same operation or assembly and are used interchangeably in this document Also ITB unit and transfer unit refer to the same assembly and are used interchangeably throughout this document 1 e Developing section i Transfer section K cartridge C cartridge M cartridge
221. cy mode in the CONFIGURE DEVICE PRINT QUALITY PRINT MODES TRANSPARENCY to B TRNSPRNCY Best Transparency mode This change will optimize transparency print quality and minimize transparency curl Image formation troubleshooting 381 NOTE If the printer s media sensor rejects a supported Color LaserJet transparency make sure the transparencies are not from an old box Try transparencies from a new box e Inthe printer driver Paper tab select Transparency as the paper type Also make sure that the tray is correctly configured for transparencies e Check that the transparencies meet the specifications for this printer See Supported media weights and sizes in chapter 1 For more information on media specifications and ordering information consult the HP LaserJet Printer Family Print Media Specification Guide For the HP Color LaserJet 3500 3550 series printer go to http www hp com support clj3550 For the HP Color LaserJet 3700 series printer go to http www hp com support clj3700 For downloadable manuals select Manuals e The transparencies you are using are not designed for proper toner adhesion Use only transparencies designed for HP Color LaserJet printers e Handle transparencies by the edges Oil from fingers can cause spots and smudges on the transparencies e Small random dark areas on the trailing edge of solid fill pages may be caused by transparencies sticking together in the output bin Try printing the job in smal
222. d MEMID LEDS 08 amp SE em HERES ae mm m LL Jd MEMCLRE CRG bai id Ga la APPEEREEI jedes po ER 14 MEMCLKS a J204 TITIT I 1 MEMCLK2 TAG J1023 J1015 J1009 J1014 J1028 H029 MEMCLK1 olor Misregistration Sensor Seconda istration Multi purpose CRG T Color NUR Sensor be ae REAA So Tray Pener Multi purpose Secondary Transfer BK u20s aper Sensor Engaging Sensor eti Sensor Tray Pick up Roller Engaging TAG Color PS2 PS PS4 Solenoid Solenoid Media Sensor registration Misragistration acl JP2002 PS5 Sensor L Sensor R I alg Lik zL St DPRI28 JP2020 pon p LIT s702 ULTI us UEIT 704 LI o1 TM p pes OTRA DUET LLLLII I J5009L R JHVRESET 18 DPRI4 JP2018 45009DH HVDATA 17 JP2006 OTR13 HVDACLK 1 J5009D 6 Doea E JP2008 J5026L laff acl ioo SI HC E DDEV3 JP2022 J5026H p py J5027L amp TR2S 1 JP2010 Bm TEE S E SUN i es 1J5027D l E ez eje fei fal ded ed 1 Sye somp 7 JP2012 lal MM ODEVI gl lol Bsz Be aBel Ride ig ono i Paone BL laa i gle Eza is 18 GND Fi DBLD T2001 eant goa Sopa codo EN S OTR uA S AE kao c cnn e RRI JP2026 ziziziz2 zizi l2z a elele S Pelele S E 1 324VB 2 OFSR isses MNEHEMRENEES EE 1 aE 1 High voltage J1008 Jiot2 J1006 Power Supply PCB eniea buxa General circuit diagram 1 of 2 Figure 7 31 463 Diagrams ENWW 6
223. d by contacting the HP Website at http www hp com go msdshttp www hp com hpinfo community environment productinfo safety Material restrictions This HP product does not contain batteries This HP product does not contain added mercury This product contains lead in solder that could require special handling at end of life For recycling information see http www hp com recycle contact your local authorities or go to the Electronics Industries Alliance Website http www eiae org Material Safety Data Sheet MSDS Material Safety Data Sheets MSDS for supplies containing chemical substances for example toner can be obtained by accessing the HP LaserJet Supplies Website at http www hp com hpinfo community environment productinfo safety htm 32 Chapter 1 Printer description ENWW ENWW Extended warranty HP SupportPack provides coverage for the HP hardware product and all HP supplied internal components The hardware maintenance covers a three year period from date of the HP product purchase The customer must purchase the HP SupportPack within 90 days of the HP product purchase For more information contact the HP Customer Care Service and HP Customer Support group See Hewlett Packard warranty statement For more information On HP environmental programs including Product environmental profile sheet for this and many related HP products HP s commitment to the environment HP s environmental management system H
224. d other input devices scanners and digital cameras automatically without the need to become a color expert Printing in four colors CMYK available for the HP Color LaserJet 3700 series printer Cyan magenta yellow and black CMYK are the inks used by a printing press The process is often called four color printing CMYK data files are typically used by and originate from graphic arts printing and publishing environments The printer will accept CMYK colors through the PS printer driver The printer color rendering of CMYK is designed to provide rich saturated colors for text and graphics CMYK ink set emulation PostScript only The printer s color rendering of CMYK can be made to emulate several standard Offset Press ink sets e Default This selection is good for general purpose rendering of CMYK data It is designed to render photographs well while at the same time providing rich saturated colors for text and graphics e Specifications for Web Offset Publications SWOP Common ink standard in the U S and other locations e Euroscale Common ink standard in Europe and other locations e Dainippon Ink and Chemical DIC Common ink standard in Japan and other locations e Device Emulation is turned off To render photographs properly with this selection images require color management in the application or operating system Use the SWOP or EURO emulation of CMYK inks to achieve the best match of PANTONE four colo
225. de the ITB unit is holding the primary transfer rollers for Y M and C with the primary transfer roller holder keeping the ITB in contact with the photosensitive drums 2 Whena monochrome print starts the DC controller rotates the primary transfer roller disengaging motor M5 clockwise for a specified time 3 When the M5 rotates for the specified time the primary transfer disengaging cam turns one quarter of a revolution 4 As it turns the cam pushes the primary transfer roller holder down and disengages the Y M and C rollers from the photosensitive drum Image formation system 171 Figure 5 50 NOTE The primary transfer rollers engage back with the drums when the M5 is turned counterclockwise and the cam pushes the holder up DC controller PCB Primary transfer Yo roller 5 i CJ Primary transfer Ccartridge roller holder K cartridge MOTOR DRIVE signal PRIMARY TRANSFER ENGAGING M cartridge Q Om 31 ws tr Primary transfer roller engaging cam Primary transfer roller engaging disengaging control Y cartridge CJ Engaged Disengaged The opposite photosensitive drums Y M and C stop when the primary transfer rollers are disengaged Secondary transfer roller engaging disengaging control This controls the engagement of the secondary transfer roller with the ITB to transfer toner on the ITB to the paper The DC controller drives the secondary tra
226. ditional drivers The following drivers are not included on the CD ROM but are available from http www hp com go clj3700_ software These drivers are for the HP Color LaserJet 3700 series printer only e OS 2 PS and PCL printer driver e UNIX model scripts e Linux drivers NOTE The OS 2 drivers are available from IBM and are packaged with OS 2 They are not available for Traditional Chinese Simplified Chinese Korean and Japanese languages NOTE For more information about Windows 3 1x drivers go to http www hp com support clj3500 or http www hp com support clj3700 Software for networks For a summary of available HP network installation and configuration software solutions see the HP Jetdirect Print Server Administrator s Guide You can find this guide on the CD included with the printer 72 Chapter 3 Installation and configuration ENWW HP Web Jetadmin HP Web Jetadmin allows you to manage HP Jetdirect connected printers within your intranet using a browser HP Web Jetadmin is a browser based management tool and should be installed only on the network administrator computer It can be installed and run on a variety of systems To download a current version of HP Web Jetadmin and for the latest list of supported host systems visit HP Customer Care Online at http www hp com go webjetadmin When installed on a host server any client can access HP Web Jetadmin using a supported Web browser such as Microsoft Internet Exp
227. e ceceeececececeeeeceeeeeaeeaeeeceeeeeeeaeecaaeeaeceeeeeeeesetensaneeeeeeess 116 Timing diagraim i oido o iE edere ith ep Pcr taber es dd ce ip icta 118 Engine control system eie assine eE enema 119 DGC controller circuit 5 1 tiet eerte tutt tuis 120 Motor loCcatiols a l ere RA ERE RR ERARSBRA TRE CREMA a e ER HEERRRENSRRTRR TRIER 123 Solenoid and clutch locations sssssssseeeeneeee 124 Drum motor control circuit essssssesesseem nnn 124 Developing motor control circuit eseee ene 125 FancconttoL cir clt erue ore e DE A ERE a RU eR RH ees 125 Low voltage power supply circuit sssssssseem 126 Ceramic heater fusing method sssssssssse eene 127 Heater temperature control circuit eesssssseeneeees 128 Low voltage power supply circuit ssssssseem 131 High voltage power supply circuit seee m 133 Videointerface oaan td M RSEN CAR NEAR e A e A 135 Video interface signals ain oinor aeea ee tagen AE OR 136 Output timing of the VIDEO signal in response to the TOP signal 137 Output timing of the VIDEO signal synchronized with the BD signal 138 Conventions xvii xviii Figure 5 20 Figure 5 21 Figure 5 22 Figure 5 23 Figure 5 24 Figure 5 25 Figure 5 26 Figure 5 27 Figure 5 28 Figure 5 29 Figure 5 30 Figure 5 31 Figure 5 32 Figure 5 33 Fig
228. e 509 PLATE JOINT LEFT RC1 1602 000CN Table 8 10 on page 497 PLATE REINFORCEMENT RC1 1242 000CN Table 8 12 on page 501 PLATE SHIELD RC1 1349 000CN Table 8 11 on page 499 POSITION GUIDE ASS Y HP3700 RM1 0462 000CN Table 8 13 on page 509 RAIL SWING LEFT FRONT RC1 1642 000CN Table 8 7 on page 489 ENWW Alphabetical parts list 547 Table 8 27 Alphabetical parts list ppc ere Description Table and page RAIL SWING LEFT REAR RC1 1641 000CN Table 8 13 on page 505 RAIL SWING RIGHT FRONT RC1 1661 000CN Table 8 7 on page 489 RAIL SWING RIGHT FRONT RM1 0477 000CN Table 8 10 on page 497 RAIL SWING RIGHT REAR RC1 1662 000CN Table 8 12 on page 501 RIGHT SWING FRAME ASS Y RM1 0437 000CN Table 8 21 on page 527 RING E XD9 0136 000CN Table 8 8 on page 491 RING E XD9 0134 000CN Table 8 8 on page 491 RING E XD9 0137 000CN Table 8 8 on page 492 RING E XD9 0136 000CN Table 8 12 on page 502 RING E XD9 0135 000CN Table 8 15 on page 513 RINIG GRIP XD2 2100 602CN Table 8 12 on page 502 ROD FRONT COVER LEFT RC1 1158 000CN Table 8 6 on page 487 ROD FRONT COVER RIGHT RC1 1159 000CN Table 8 6 on page 487 ROD POWER SWITCH RC1 1347 000CN Table 8 10 on page 497 ROLLER PICK UP RC1 1535 000CN Table 8 17 on page 519 SE RING HP3500 3550 XD2 2300 402CN Table 8 5 on page 485 SENSOR UNIT HUMIDITY WP2 5156 000CN Table 8 9 on page 495 SENSOR UNIT TCU FULL DETECT RM1 0509 000CN Table 8 13 on page 505
229. e 519 CONNECTOR 16P VS1 6492 016CN Table 8 12 on page 502 CONNECTOR 2P VS1 5057 002CN Table 8 8 on page 492 CONNECTOR 6P VS1 6175 006CN Table 8 24 on page 533 CONNECTOR 6P HP3500 3550 VS1 6176 006CN Table 8 13 on page 509 CONNECTOR SNAP TIGHT VS1 6910 012CN Table 8 12 on page 501 CONNECTOR SNAP TIGHT W VS1 6492 010CN Table 8 13 on page 505 Control panel PCB RM1 0511 000CN Table 8 3 on page 481 COVER CASSETTE RC1 1665 000CN Table 8 8 on page 491 COVER CONNECTOR RC1 1488 000CN Table 8 8 on page 491 COVER CONTROLLER HP3500 3550 RC1 2236 000CN Table 8 10 on page 497 COVER DIMM RC1 1562 000CN Table 8 5 on page 485 COVER FMTR CABLE HP3500 3550 RC1 2364 000CN Table 8 10 on page 497 540 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams ENWW Table 8 27 Alphabetical parts list ro RAD ee Description Table and page COVER FRONT RC1 2178 000CN Table 8 24 on page 533 COVER HINGE RC1 2296 000CN Table 8 5 on page 485 COVER JAM CLEARING RC1 1566 000CN Table 8 5 on page 485 COVER LASER SHUTTER RC1 1640 000CN Table 8 11 on page 499 COVER LEFT RC1 2180 000CN Table 8 24 on page 533 COVER LOWER FRAME HP3700 RC1 2237 000CN Table 8 13 on page 509 COVER LOWER LEFT RB2 3489 000CN Table 8 24 on page 533 COVER MOTOR RC1 1353 000CN Table 8 8 on page 491 COVER MP TRAY RC1 1574 000CN Table 8 6 on page 487 COVER REAR RC1 1565 000CN Table 8 5 on page 485 COVER REAR RC1 2179 000CN Table 8 24 on page 533 COVER RIG
230. e e Vertical scan starting position The DC controller operates this control after a door is closed after replacement of a cartridge or a specified number of pages are printed after replacement of a cartridge or a command is received from the formatter The following is the sequence of this control 1 The DC controller writes four colors misregistration detection patterns the reference pattern right and the pattern to be measured left onto the ITB 174 Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW 2 The DC controller measures each color s misregistration based on the positions of the patterns detected by the misregistration detection See Color misregistration control The measured information is then sent to the formatter 4 The formatter controls each color s VIDEO signals according to such information making an adjustment to the horizontal scan starting position horizontal scanning scale or scan starting position A vertical color misregistration is also corrected by the DC controller without communicating with the formatter through the speed control over the scanner motor in this printer See Color misregistration control In principle the DC controller automatically sends a command to the formatter when the printer meets the above conditions However when the above conditions are not met the formatter can send a command to the DC controller to execute this control ENWW Image formation system 175 NOTE The hor
231. e 180 Pick p feed system oci ote e ORE Pe TERR RD ERI 183 Pickup feed system blocks sss emend 184 Pickup delivery unit block ssseem mmm 186 Skew control mechanism sss enm 188 Medlia detection e epPRMSe PME 189 Fuser delivery rilt 2 ice e E etie e cete reb petis Ha etes cote 191 Duplexing unit iode ridere decet elk reii iue dede eee ex aL ER dde ER 193 Reverse corntrol 2 co one eno dne eq ied eio 194 Paper feeder dade d lle die dese ae dabei 197 Paper feeder PCB signal flow sssssse 198 Pickup delivery sequence sssssssssssssseeeeeeneenementernnnnn 199 Phillips and Posidrive screwdriver comparison ssssssssssss 205 Cover locations sinisesse ed eee o eee de ted de don bee ace t ed ud dU de 209 Front door removal ToT 2 erri ettet tete dein dae 210 Front door removal 2 of 2 ssssssssssssssseeeeee eee 210 Left cover removal it e tO En pe Pe 211 Left front cover removal 1 of 3 sss enne 211 Left front cover removal 2 of 4 ssssssssssssee emen 212 ENWW ENWW Figure 6 8 Figure 6 9 Figure 6 10 Figure 6 11 Figure 6 12 Figure 6 13 Figure 6 14 Figure 6 15 Figure 6 16 Figure 6 17 Figure 6 18 Figure 6 19 Figure 6 20 Figure 6 21 Figure 6 22 Figure 6 23 Figure 6 24 Figure 6 25 Figure 6 26 Figure 6 27 Figure 6 28 Figure 6 29
232. e 29 Environmental product stewardship program sssssesssseseseeeenee enne 31 Protecting the enviroriment 4 coe terere tenerte id eter pere Geddes aad 31 Declaration of Conformities asore serciiiigiii aineen iii iaar nennen nennen nennen enne 34 Safety statements ente spatii eee icone cene 37 Laser safety statement ode d ed e ae ed d be eR t te d ee eate e tad 37 Canadian DOC regulations sssssssssssseseee AAE EIN AAR nnns 37 EMl staterient Korea ceder ehe ete lee na rg eee ed vt ee epe 37 VCCI statement Japan etre ne nione cereo eee ne RS 37 Laser statement for Finland sse eene eee 38 FCC Regulations 3 oet eo tette ete eed dde ete ether dte eae 39 Chapter 1 Printer description ENWW Printer configurations Figure 1 1 Figure 1 2 ENWW HP Color LaserJet 3500 3550 printer HP Color LaserJet 3500 3550 printer The HP Color LaserJet 3500 printer is a four color laser printer that prints 12 pages per minute ppm in both monochrome black and white and color The HP Color LaserJet 3550 printer prints 16 pages per minute ppm in both monochrome black and white and color Trays The printer comes with a multipurpose tray Tray 1 that holds up to 100 sheets of various paper types and sizes or 10 envelopes and a 250 sheet paper feeder Tray 2 that supports various paper sizes It supports an optional 500 sheet paper feeder Tray 3 See Print media specificati
233. e 7 26 Table 7 27 Table 7 28 Table 7 29 Table 7 30 Table 7 31 Table 7 32 Table 7 33 Table 7 34 Table 7 35 Table 7 36 Table 7 37 Table 7 38 Table 7 39 Table 7 40 Table 7 41 Table 7 42 Table 7 43 Table 7 44 Table 7 45 Table 7 46 Table 7 47 Table 7 48 Table 7 49 Table 7 50 Table 8 1 Table 8 2 Table 8 3 Table 8 4 Table 8 5 Table 8 6 Table 8 7 Table 8 8 Table 8 9 Table 8 10 Table 8 11 Table 8 12 Table 8 13 Table 8 14 Table 8 15 Table 8 16 Table 8 17 Table 8 18 Table 8 19 Table 8 20 Table 8 21 Image defects cett tandem oe tee dee 390 Causes for light images ssesse eene memes 391 Causes for one color printing light seeen 392 Causes for dark images cata tienen nente ee sende de nail enda 392 Causes for one color printing dark sssse nn 393 Causes for a completely blank image see 393 Causes for an all black or solid colored image sssssesss 393 Causes for vertical lines of white dots sssssse 394 Causes for dirt on the back of the paper sssssssssssssesssss 394 Causes for dirt on the front of the paper sessssssssssssssssss 395 Causes for vertical lines menyren aiaiai ii AARNEN aN 395 Causes for white vertical lines ess m 395 Causes for horizontal line arnzer innan eneidiaa raa 396 C
234. e SWOP or EURO emulation for CMYK inks in the HP Color LaserJet 3700 PostScript emulation driver when printing from PANTONES certified applications 388 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW CAUTION ENWW Adjusting color balance This printer features automatic color calibration to provide high quality color output In situations that require critical color control you can manually adjust the density balance of the printer s four toner colors The available range for each color is from 5 to 5 The default value is 0 This procedure should only be performed by your network administrator Performing this procedure changes the color balance of the printer by altering halftones and affects all print jobs To adjust color density 1 Press v to enter the MENUS 2 Press w to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE MENU 3 Pressv to select CONFIGURE DEVICE MENU Press to highlight PRINT QUALITY Press v to select PRINT QUALITY Press or to highlight ADJUST COLOR Press or to highlight the desired color on On R Press w or a to highlight the correct density setting 9 Press v to select the density setting 10 Press to set the density for the next color 11 After setting the density for each color press Menu Matching colors 389 Image defects If specific defects occur repeatedly print a Print Quality Troubleshooting page see Print quality troubleshooting pages in this chapter and follow the instructions on the first page If
235. e a fuser under these circumstances the control panel automatically prompts you to reset the fuser count after you have installed the new fuser If you replace the fuser for any reason before the control panel reads REPLACE FUSER KIT for instance if the fuser is defective you will need to reset the fuser count manually through the control panel The Fuser Kit count can be reset to zero by setting CONFIGURE DEVICE RESETS RESET SUPPLIES NEW FUSER KIT YES Transfer unit ITB assembly replacement configuration Under normal circumstances the printer will prompt you to order a new transfer unit when the control panel reads ORDER TRANSFER KIT This message indicates the transfer unit is nearing its end of life When you replace a transfer unit under these circumstances the control panel will not automatically prompt you to reset the transfer unit count If you continue printing with the ORDER TRASFER KIT message it will eventually covert to the REPLACE TRANSFER KIT message At that time printing is stopped and a new transfer unit must be installed When you replace a transfer unit under these circumstances the control panel automatically prompts you to reset the transfer unit count after you have installed the new transfer unit If you replace the transfer unit for any reason before the control panel reads REPLACE TRANSFER KIT for instance if the transfer unit is defective you will need to calibrate the printer and reset the transfer un
236. e cartridge of the photosensitive drum problem light color EE Defective high voltage PCB Replace the high voltage PCB Defective DC controller PCB Replace the DC controller PCB Poor primary transfer bias contacts On the transfer unit check the primary transfer bias contacts with the high voltage PCB Clean contacts if dirty Replace defective parts if contacts are deformed or damaged Deformed Deteriorated primary Replace the transfer unit transfer charging roller Defective high voltage PCB Replace the high voltage PCB Defective laser scanner unit Replace the laser scanner unit EE Defective DC controller PCB Replace the DC controller PCB Dark image Table 7 19 Causes for dark images Image density is not adjusted correctly Calibrate the printer See Calibrate Now later in this chapter 392 Chapter Troubleshooting ENWW Table 7 19 Causes for dark images continued Dirty color misregistration sensor lens Clean the color misregistration sensor lens Defective color misregistration sensor Replace the color misregistration sensor Defective environmental sensor Replace the environmental sensor Defective DC controller PCB Replace the DC controller PCB Dark color Table 7 20 Causes for one color printing dark Poor contacts with the primary charging bias On the problem dark color s cartridge check the developing bias or drum grounding primary charging bias and developing bias
237. e delivery tray for printing the other side Two stationary A4 or letter size papers may be inside the printer during duplex printing only one legal size paper may be inside the printer during duplex printing DC controller PCB PRI signal DUSL I E FEED MOTOR CONTROL signal signal PAPOUTSNS FACE DOWN DELIVERY DETECTION EM e GENE EM DELIVERY MOTOR CONTROL signal lt DUPLEXING FEED SOLENOID DRIVE Q om PS8 Delivery roller m HO I REVERSED PAPER DETECTION signal DURVSNS DUPLEXING FEED DETECTION signal DUFESNS FUSER DELIVERY PAPER DETECTION signal AFFPSSNS F i I user delivery roller l PS10 Duplexing feed roller Duplexing unit PS7 Fuser delivery paper sensor PS8 Face down delivery sensor PS9 Reversed paper sensor PS10 Duplexing feed paper sensor M1 Feed motor M2 Delivery motor SL5 Duplexing feed solenoid Reverse control This control reverses a printed sheet of paper for printing on the second side The DC controller monitors the fuser delivery paper sensor PS7 and controls the delivery motor M2 The following is the sequence of reversing paper 1 For duplex printing the paper is fed to the face down tray after one side is printed 2 When the end of the paper is detected by the fuser delivery paper sensor PS7 the delivery motor M2 rotates counterclockw
238. e is made visible by applying the toner using the contact development method in this process The contact development is the method to press the toner onto the drum surface to develop an image by bringing the developing cylinder and the drum in absolute contact This printer uses a non magnetic single component toner development agent made from resins and other materials Step 3 Development The toner is applied onto the electrostatic latent image on the photosensitive drum surface in this step The toner has an insulating property and gets charged to bear a negative potential being rubbed against the rotating developing cylinder and the blade surface Image formation system 151 Figure 5 30 NOTE Figure 5 31 Contacting the photosensitive drum the negatively charged toner sticks to the area exposed to the laser beam This is because the exposed area has higher less negative potential than the developing cylinder while the toner has almost the same potential as the cylinder This is called the phenomenon of contact which makes visible the electrostatic latent image on the drum Photosensitive Blade Developing cylinder y_ Z DC bias Stirrer Toner feed roller 777 Image development The exposed area on the photosensitive drum is indicated positive in Figure 5 30 Image development even though the actual potential on the drum is negative This is to express the potential difference between t
239. e note that the duplex print is available only for the media in the print mode plain thin gloss paper gloss film shown in the table Jam detection This printer has the following sensors to detect the presence and positions of papers e Registration paper sensor PS4 e Fuser front paper sensor PS6 e Fuser delivery paper sensor PS7 e Face down delivery paper sensor PS8 e Reversed paper sensor PS9 e Duplexing feed paper sensor PS10 The microcomputer CPU in the DC controller identifies a paper jam by checking whether the paper is present at the sensor at the checking time The checking time is stored in its memory When it judges so the CPU stops the printer and sends a paper jam notice to the formatter The following is the timing of the paper jam detection The specified time T is based on the normal feed speed 1 1 1 Pickup delay jam This printer checks the paper movement at all pickup sources twice if necessary as the paper pickup can be delayed due to a pickup error When paper does not reach the registration paper sensor PS4 within the allotted time after paper pickup the CPU judges it a pickup delay jam 2 Pickup stationary jam When the paper does not pass the registration paper sensor PS4 within the allotted amount of time after paper is fed from the registration roller the CPU judges it a pickup stationary jam 3 Fuser delay jam When the paper does not reach the fuser delivery paper sens
240. e of the fuser heater lower than the target temperature during continuous printing This prevents the temperature rise of the fuser sleeve between sheets The between sheets temperature varies depending on the paper feed speed and the kind of paper being printed e Throughput control Prevents both ends of the fuser sleeve unit from overheating during continuous printing of narrow paper For continuous printing this control decreases the throughput to slow down the paper pickup speed when the temperature of the sub thermistor reads over 260 C 500 F and the paper width is narrower than 210 mm 8 27 inches Flicker prevention The flicker prevention mechanism prevents flicker when the user s printer is connected to the same AC line as other lighting fixtures Because the printer s heater drive circuit uses a triac for switching AC flicker can occur when the voltage in the AC line falls due to a user connecting a printer to the same AC line as other lighting fixtures increasing the amount of current passing through the heater To prevent flicker this printer uses a zero crossing circuit to monitor the voltage of the AC line The CPU monitors the ZERO CROSSING DETECTION signal ZEROX to optimize the timing of energizing the heater Protective function The CPU fuser heater safety circuit and thermoswitch prevent overheating of the fuser by interrupting the current to the heater The abnormal temperature rise is prevented by the fol
241. e primary transfer charging rollers in each cartridge at the specified time The values of these biases vary according to the commands from the DC controller Secondary transfer bias generation The secondary transfer bias TR2 is output to transfer the toner on the ITB to paper There are two kinds of biases one DC positive and the other DC negative They are generated in the secondary transfer high voltage generation circuit in the high voltage power supply The high voltage power supply circuit applies them to the secondary transfer charging roller according to the following print sequences e Print bias DC positive The bias to transfer the toner on the ITB to paper during the printing process e Between sheets bias DC positive The bias to prevent the residual toner on the ITB from adhering to the secondary transfer roller during continuous printing e Cleaning bias DC positive negative The bias to put the toner adhered to the secondary transfer roller back to the ITB The values of these biases vary according to the commands from the DC controller The DC controller adjusts the voltage of the transfer bias constant according to the TRANSFER CURRENT FEED BACK signal TR2S sent from the secondary transfer high voltage generation circuit The DC controller also controls the rated current Fuser bias generation The fuser bias FSR is output to prevent the toner on the paper from adhering to the fuser sleeve before fuser proc
242. e stack of paper is flat in the tray at all four corners and keep it below the height tabs 58 Chapter 3 Installation and configuration ENWW Loading paper into Tray 2 1 Pull Tray 2 out of the printer 2 Move the side width guides until the blue arrows on the width guides point to the size of paper you are loading 3 On the back of the tray press the blue ridges and slide the length guides until the arrow symbol points to the paper size you are loading ENWW Loading paper into Tray 2 59 4 Load the paper into the tray If this is special paper such as letterhead load it with the side to be printed down and the top edge toward the front of the tray NOTE Do not fan the paper before loading 5 Push down on the stack of paper to lock the metal lift plate into place Make sure that the stack of paper is flat and that the paper is below the height tabs 60 Chapter 3 Installation and configuration ENWW Loading paper into Tray 1 optional procedure 1 Open Tray 1 and raise the output bin extension NOTE If printing special media such as envelopes use Tray 1 3 Slide the width guides slightly wider than the print media Remove any unused print media and close the tray when finished printing o ja 0 o ENWW Loading paper into Tray 1 optional procedure 61 Connecting powe
243. e to install or configure but you must have a supported Web browser on your computer To access the embedded Web server type the IP address for the printer in the address line of the browser To find the IP address print a configuration page For more information about printing a configuration page see the user guide Features The HP embedded Web server allows you to view printer and network card status and manage printing functions from your PC With the HP embedded Web server you can do the following e View printer status information e Determine the remaining life on all supplies and order new ones e View and change tray configurations e View and change the printer control panel menu configuration e View and print internal pages e Receive notification of printer and supplies events e Add or customize links to other Web sites e Select the language in which to display the embedded Web server pages e View and change network configuration e View support content that is printer specific and specific to the printer s current state For a complete explanation of the features and functionality of the embedded Web server see the user guide 74 Chapter 3 Installation and configuration ENWW ENWW Other components and utilities Several software applications are available for Windows and Macintosh OS users as well as for network administrators These programs are summarized below Table 3 3 Other software application
244. ead should be sealed in a moisture proof wrapping to prevent changes during storage Before loading preprinted paper such as forms and letterhead verify that the ink on the paper is dry During the fusing process wet ink can come off preprinted paper When duplex printing on the HP Color LaserJet 3700 series printer load preprinted forms and letterhead into Tray 2 and Tray 3 first side up top edge toward the back of the tray To load preprinted forms and letterhead into Tray 1 load them with the first side down bottom edge in first When simplex one sided printing load preprinted forms and letterhead into Tray 2 and Tray 3 face up with the top edge of the page to the left To load preprinted forms and letterhead into Tray 1 place them in the tray with the side to be printed facing up and top short edge in first 28 Chapter 1 Printer description ENWW NOTE ENWW Recycled paper This printer supports the use of recycled paper Recycled paper must meet the same specifications as standard paper See the HP LaserJet Printer Family Print Media Specification Guide Hewlett Packard recommends that recycled paper contain no more than five percent ground wood Media weight Table 1 13 Weight equivalence table shows equivalent weights for different grades of paper A boldface type value indicates a commonly available standard weight for that grade Text and book grades marked with an asterisk actually calculate to 51 61 71
245. ectivity for the HP Color LaserJet 3500 3550 series printer HP Jetdirect 380x 802 11b wireless print server USB 1 1 HP Jetdirect 175x print server J6035B fast Ethernet 10 100base Tx USB 1 1 J6072A HP bt1300 Bluetooth wireless printer adapter for USB or parallel External EX J3264A J7942 69001 HP Jetdirect 500x print server connectivity for the Token Ring HP Color LaserJet 3700 series printer J3265A HP Jetdirect 500x print server fast Ethernet J3258B HP Jetdirect 170x print server Ethernet J7942A HP Jetdirect en3700 external print server 10 100base Tx Hi Speed USB 2 0 J6061A i 4 HP Jetdirect 380x 802 11b wireless print server USB 1 1 468 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams ENWW Table 8 1 Supplies and accessories continued Product Part number Description number J6035B HP Jetdirect 175x print server fast Ethernet 10 100base Tx ai n Supplies for the Q2670A HP Color LaserJet 3500 3550 series printer Q2671A Cyan print cartridge for the HP Color LaserJet 3500 3550 series printer m Magenta print cartridge for the HP bt1300 Bluetooth wireless printer adapter for USB or parallel Black print cartridge for the HP Color LaserJet 3500 3550 series printer Q2672A Yellow print cartridge for the HP Color LaserJet 3500 3550 Q2673A HP Color LaserJet 3500 3550 series printer series printer Q3658A Q3658 69001 Image transfer kit Q3655A Q3655 69001 Image fuser kit 110 127V Q3656A Q36
246. ectly installed in the printer there is poor coupling to the cartridge poor primary transfer bias contacts or the high voltage power supply PCB or the DC controller PCB are defective 316 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting Press for help or Verify that the cartridge is installed into the correct slot slots are color coded for each cartridge and that it is properly seated Replace the memory controller PCB Replace the DC controller PCB Press v and then press for help or See Ordering parts in Chapter 8 for more information No action necessary No action necessary Press for help Verify that the cartridge is installed into the correct slot slots are color coded for each cartridge and that it is properly seated Reseat the cartridge making sure that the drum drive gears on the cartridge and printer are correctly coupled Check the printer primary transfer bias contacts to the transfer unit Clean if dirty If the dirt does not come off or the contacts are damaged replace the unit Replace the high voltage power supply PCB Replace the DC controller PCB ENWW Table 7 2 Alphabetical printer messages continued eem 0 Rm Message INSTALL FUSER For help press INSTALL SUPPLIES For status press v INSTALL TRANSFER UNIT alternates with For help press LOAD TRAY X TYPE SIZE alternates with To use another tray press v LOAD TRAY X TYPE SIZE alternat
247. eder main body ssssssssssseeeeeee 533 500 Sheet paper feeder paper pick up drive assembly 535 500 Sheet paper feeder tray Tray 3 sssssssem 537 Alphabetical parts lists mienia inden eene 538 Numerical parts list 5 rte tette tei dere dee Lea enano aai ai Eana 551 Conventions xv xvi ENWW ENWW List of figures Figure 1 1 Figure 1 2 Figure 1 3 Figure 1 4 Figure 1 5 Figure 1 6 Figure 1 7 Figure 1 8 Figure 1 9 Figure 1 10 Figure 1 11 Figure 1 12 Figure 1 13 Figure 1 14 Figure 3 1 Figure 3 2 Figure 3 3 Figure 3 4 Figure 3 5 Figure 3 6 Figure 4 1 Figure 4 2 Figure 4 3 Figure 5 1 Figure 5 2 Figure 5 3 Figure 5 4 Figure 5 5 Figure 5 6 Figure 5 7 Figure 5 8 Figure 5 9 Figure 5 10 Figure 5 11 Figure 5 12 Figure 5 13 Figure 5 14 Figure 5 15 Figure 5 16 Figure 5 17 Figure 5 18 Figure 5 19 HP Color LaserJet 3500 3550 printer ssssssssssses 3 HP Color LaserJet 3500n 3550n printer ssssssssssssssss 3 HP Color LaserJet 3700 printer sss 4 HP Color LaserJet 3700n printer ssssssssssssR He 4 HP Color LaserJet 3700dn printer sssssssssssssssssseeee 5 HP Color LaserJet 3700dtn printer sssssssssssssssse 5 Front view HP Color LaserJet 3500 3550 and 3700 series printers shown with
248. eeeee en 496 Center frame assembly sess A98 Main Right Side Plate Assembly Motors sees 500 Main Left Side Plate Assembly sssssse eem 504 Lower Frame Assembly HP 3700 and HP 3500 3550 1 of 2 506 Lower Frame Assembly HP 3700 and HP 3500 3550 2 of 2 508 Image Drive Assembly rtr tert tet be tege ANEA 510 Developing Disengaging Assembly ssssemme 512 Tray 2 cassette iuit ette toe at ect REEL ee vedette dus 514 Pick up Feed assembly 1 of 2 sss emm 516 Pick up Feed assembly 2 of 2 sss emm 518 Tray 2 cassette pick up assembly sssssen 520 Face down delivery assembly sssssse eene 522 Transfer Unit eR DRM EE 524 Right Swing Frame Assembly issernida R EA ian 526 Left Swing Frame Assembly sss emm enn 528 Fuser eoe ei e eom ech ertet feeb etin vasa C t bg Oron v Lanta 530 500 Sheet paper feeder main body sssssssssssssssseeeeeee 532 500 Sheet paper feeder paper pick up drive assembly 534 500 Sheet paper feeder tray Tray 3 eceeeeeceeeesneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeenaaes 536 ENWW Printer description Chapter contents ENWW This chapter contains the following sections Chapter contents ccruinde iaaa aidai ada aa a adana eret entente enel Printer COnfiQuratiomS ETE E T 3 HP Color La
249. efault number of copies is 1 DEFAULT PAPER SIZE A list of Allows you to set the default available sizes paper size appears DEFAULT CUSTOM PAPER SIZE UNIT OF MEASURE X DIMENSION Allows you to set the default size for any custom job without dimensions Available for Tray 1 Y DIMENSION Control panel troubleshooting 409 Table 7 43 Printing menu continue DUPLEX DUPLEX BINDING OVERRIDE A4 LETTER MANUAL FEED COURIER FONT WIDE A4 PRINT PS ERRORS 410 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting d OFF ON LONG EDGE SHORT EDGE NO YES NO OFF REGULAR DARK NO YES OFF ON HP 3700dn and 3700dtn only Allows you to enable or disable the duplex function automatic 2 sided printing The default is OFF You can override this setting in the printer driver Allows you to choose whether a duplex job will be flipped on the long edge or the short edge Allows you to set the printer to print an A4 job on letter size paper when no A4 paper is loaded or to print a letter size job on A4 when no letter size paper is loaded The default is NO The default is OFF Setting it to ON makes MANUAL FEED the default for jobs that do not select a tray You can override this setting in the printer driver HP 3700 only Allows you to select a version of the Courier font The default is REGULAR HP 3700 only Allows you to change the printable area of A4 paper so that eighty 10 pitch characte
250. el should display the message NEW FUSER KIT 10 If the message NEW FUSER KIT appears go to step 11 If the message does not appear you must reset the fuser count See To reset the fuser count 11 On the printer control panel press to highlight YES and then press v to select it The fuser count is reset and the printer is ready to use To reset the fuser count D N oO U e wN 9 Press Menu to enter the MENUS Press w to highlight Configure Device Press v to select Configure Device Press to highlight RESETS Press v to select RESETS Press w to highlight RESET SUPPLIES Press v to select RESET SUPPLIES Press w to highlight NEW FUSER KIT Press v to select NEW FUSER KIT 10 Press to highlight YES 11 Press v to select YES The fuser count is reset and the printer is ready to use ENWW Replacing supply items 111 112 Chapter 4 Printer maintenance ENWW Theory of operation Chapter contents This chapter contains the following sections Chapter contents sssssssssssssssssssseeee nennen d Basic operation e EP 114 Operation sequence ssssssssssssssssssseeeeere rennen e nnne nien enter rrer rne nn sn EEEE 114 Power on sequences eec tnnt enne Fe eaae ni FR HR E aaa deria aa 16 Engine control system ssssssssssssssseeeneeeeeen nennen enne ennemi nennen enne 119 DC controller POB p N 119 Low voltage power supply circuit ss
251. elivery troubleshooting 370 general paper path troubleshooting 379 lower rear door area 376 lower rear door area removal 376 multifeeds 360 persistent 380 recovery feature 377 registration transfer area jams 363 transfer feed area 362 tray 1 360 tray 2 361 tray 3 361 troubleshooting 356 upper rear door area 371 upper rear door area removal 371 paper path sensors test 436 paper pickup drive unit part numbers 501 paper sensor 500 sheet paper feeder removal and replacement 302 parallel configuration 67 part numbers control panel overlays 470 developing disengaging assembly 506 508 drum drive unit 505 internal components 489 paper pickup drive unit 501 reference material 471 supplies 471 parts compact disc information 44 locating 96 ordering 43 467 ENWW parts ordering internet 43 passwords setting 76 PCB control panel 287 DC controller 278 formatter 279 high voltage power supply 281 low voltage power supply 285 memory controller 286 replacement configuration requirements 352 473 PCB 500 sheet paper feeder removal and replacement 300 PCBs locating 456 perforations 24 phase control 145 phone numbers Commercial Service and Support Organizations 43 pick up clutch 500 sheet paper feeder removal and replacement 301 pick up drive unit 500 sheet paper feeder removal and replacement 299 pick up roller 500 sheet paper feeder removal and replacement 298 pick up solenoid 500 sheet paper feeder removal and rep
252. em 404 Printer Job Language PJL commands ssseeeme AOA DPJL COMMENT eves tee iet ete ert p d te e ute LEE o eR RR DE ER Eos 405 PJL INFO CONFIG viscera itt e atte es eder euh ett opea E deb d dec ed ee 405 PIL INFO ID estou Rh 405 QDPJLEINEQ USTATUS erre ee aa 405 PJIL INFO PAGEGOUNT itte t dette e eet ted tede 405 DPJL JOB iter oe c d ea aere ete tanen ee eee 406 DPJLEEOJ ir utere eed e i atus riens 406 oA No erc 406 PJL USTATUSJOB ON OEFFP titii ttt tbe eO e aep dee er 406 PILUSTATUSOEFF nni inten ttti eee cot aote Dex aote ed ea ree aep b poete tel 406 Control panel troubleshooting siririna iniii anaiai idia 407 304 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW ENWW Printing ameni MaD ettet et oe e ten 407 Information menu nesmurtinio ki bite Dedi la Cede th Lodi d cdd db eod ed tu dd ia pd 407 Paper handling Menu secus c toa eere te et tope cote inten pe o et are 408 Configure device menu 4 eic edocet edente ede d sane eun ede Ped ee td ev ende d de 409 Print quality menu oii dh ee tror ate e Her t Gt eee 411 System Setup qne iuc coti aon eel avt o De Rei dae ld nese debe vale dev e i LE depu v un 414 Hexe cR 418 Resets mend nee ile oder d eges tue e eue dede edes cd lea gedaan 419 Diagnostics TTIenu ote octo rte n ti ted e eer pei bo e feet 419 Service men dci ace eue ned ee pue e ede vete regie i te get aee ae le eee ed 420 Tools for troubleshooting 2x orent tape ttt
253. emoval sss eene eene nne nenenrnerrn nnns 239 Main thermistor sub thermistor removal sss 239 Thermoswitch removal ssssssssssssssesseseeeeneenme rennen nnn nnne rrr trennen nnn 239 Feed guide unit remoVval 21 iiit redi hens ERR S 240 Chapter contents 201 Swing guide removal right sereo iaa rA a ennemis 242 Swing guide removal left enne ennemis 245 SWIICheS ed meet bets et ete E Lett t tenet PEL Rt E da ER ea 250 Door Switch SW1 removal ssssssssesssseeeen eene ene ennemis 250 Test print switch SW1001 removal ssssseen eene nennen 251 Power switch SW3001 removal ssssssseeeen m emm nennen nnns 251 SEMSOMS cu diede den aee rte eie eH m ee E eet dude oue etes det eum de qutt ee Ends 252 Tray 1 multipurpose tray paper sensor PS1 removal seeeene 253 Tray 2 cassette paper sensor PS2 removal sss 253 Registration paper sensor PS4 removal sssssssee en 254 M dia sensor PS5 removal dede eene eee dnca ee dete d itai ii aaia 255 Fuser front paper sensor PS6 removal sse 256 Fuser delivery paper sensor PS7 removal sssssse emm 256 Face down delivery paper sensor PS8 removal sss 257 Reversed paper sensor PS9 removal HP 3700 only sees 257 Duplex feed delivery pap
254. emoval ENWW Circuit Boards 287 Miscellaneous parts This section describes replacement for those parts not described in other sections Swing rod guide left removal 1 Remove the left swing guide See Swing guide removal left 2 Remove the ground 1 wire from the guide Use needle nose pliers to pull the ground wire out of the contact 2 Reinstallation tip Remember to reconnect the ground wire to the contact 2 Use needle nose pliers to insert the wire back into the clip Remove the cables 3 from the guide 4 Remove one screw 4 and pull the back end of the swing guide 5 out slightly Then pull it to the left to remove the front tab 6 from the slot in the front Swing rod lock guide right removal To remove the right swing rod guide refer to the Pick up feed assembly removal steps 1 through 8 Transfer contact assembly removal To remove the transfer contact assembly refer to Swing guide removal left steps 1 through 5 Developing contact assembly 1 Remove the high voltage power supply PCB See Exhaust fan FAN1 removal 288 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW 2 Remove three springs 1 from inside located under the left swing guide The left swing guide is not shown for illustration purposes only Remove these springs carefully they are delicate and can be easily damaged Figure 6 133 Developing contact assembly removal 1 of 3 3 Remove the plastic cover 1 by p
255. emoval 2 of 2 Media sensor PS5 removal NOTE When the media sensor is replaced in addition to replacing the sensor a configuration procedure must be performed For information on this configuration refer to Chapter 8 Replacement parts configuration 1 Remove the color misregistration sensor See Color misregistration sensor PS12 removal 2 Disconnect one connector 1 3 Swing the front side of the media sensor upward 2 then lift the sensor 4 up removing it from the two shafts 3 hy ar i X i Figure 6 74 Media sensor removal ENWW Sensors 255 Fuser front paper sensor PS6 removal 1 Remove the feed guide unit See Feed guide unit removal 2 Disconnect one connector 1 unhook two claws 2 and remove the sensor 3 Figure 6 75 Fuser front paper sensor PS6 removal Fuser delivery paper sensor PS7 removal 1 Remove the fuser See Fuser removal 2 Move the two green levers down 1 3 Remove two screws 2 and remove the lower fuser cover 3 Figure 6 76 Fuser delivery paper sensor removal 1 of 2 256 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW 4 Disconnect one connector 1 unhook two claws 2 and remove the fuser delivery paper sensor 3 Figure 6 77 Fuser delivery paper sensor removal 2 of 2 Face down delivery paper sensor PS8 removal 1 Remove the face down output bin delivery assembly See Face down delivery assembly removal 2
256. emove the transfer unit and the print cartridges See Transfer unit removal and Print cartridge removal 2 Disconnect the left rod bracket from the front door by removing two screws from the bracket See Pick up feed assembly removal step 4 3 Remove two screws 1 and pull the shield plate 2 out Adjust the position of the swing guide as required to access the screws The left swing guide has been removed for clarity in illustrating this removal procedure It is not necessary to remove the swing guide to remove this PCB Figure 6 130 Memory controller PCB removal 1 of 2 286 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW 4 Release one claw 1 at the top of the PCB 2 and swing the right side of the PCB out 3 Then pull it to the right to free it from the retainer tab 4 and support tab 5 Disconnect the cable 6 at the top as you remove the PCB Reinstallation tip When installing the memory controller PCB install the cable first then set the PCB on the bottom tab 5 shown in the figure above Then insert the PCB under the retainer tab 4 and ensure that the alignment pin 7 is positioned in the PCB alignment hole Be di Figure 6 131 Memory controller PCB removal 2 of 2 Control Panel PCB removal 1 Remove the left front cover See Left front cover removal 2 Remove three screws 1 and remove the control panel PCB assembly 2 Figure 6 132 Control panel PCB r
257. en scroll back up and select PRINT TEST PAGE to execute the test Source Select Tray 1 Tray 2 or Tray 3 if the optional 500 sheet paper feeder is installed Duplex Enable or disable 2 sided printing for the 3700 only Copies Set the numbers of copies to be printed the choices are 1 10 50 100 or 500 Component Test special mode test The component test allows you to exercise individual parts independently to isolate problems Each component test can be exercised once or repeatedly If CONTINUOUS is selected as the repeat option the test will cycle the component on and off This process will repeat for 2 minutes and then the test will terminate ENWW Diagnostics from the Control Panel 439 Menus cannot be accessed during component tests so the button serves the same function as the Stop button There are 18 component tests Figure 7 15 Location of motors and fans M1 Feed motor M2 Delivery motor M3 Drum motor M4 Developing motor M5 Primary transfer roller engaging motor FAN1 Exhaust fan 440 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW Figure 7 16 ENWW Location of solenoids and clutches SL1 SL2 SL4 SL5 CL1 CL2 CL3 Tray 1 pick up solenoid Tray 2 pick up solenoid pick up feed assembly Secondary transfer roller engaging solenoid Duplex feed solenoid Registration clutch K development clutch image drive unit Developing engaging clutch developing engaging drive unit The following 18
258. er The connectors in the Tray 2 paper detection signal line are not connected properly Reseat the Tray 2 paper sensor connector J702 relay connector J5028 and DC controller PCB connector J1006 Defective Tray 2 paper sensor Replace the paper pickup sensor Defective DC controller PCB Replace the DC controller PCB Tray 3 500 sheet feeder 1 Damaged paper 500 sheet feeder paper sensor lever Replace the paper feeder paper sensor lever The connectors in the 500 sheet paper feeder paper detection signal line are not connected properly Reseat the paper feeder paper sensor connector J703 and paper feeder PCB connector J4004 Defective 500 sheet paper feeder paper sensor Replace the paper feeder paper sensor Defective 500 sheet paper feeder PCB Action Replace the paper feeder PCB Defective DC controller PCB Replace the DC controller PCB ENWW Table 7 2 Alphabetical printer messages continued Message UNAUTHORIZED SUPPLY IN USE alternates with Ready UNSUPPORTED DATA ON FS DIMM IN SLOT X alternates with To clear press v USE TRAY X TYPE SIZE Wait for printer to reinitialize Description The printer has detected that a non HP supply is currently installed and press v override was pressed HP 3700 only The data on the DIMM is not supported although the DIMM itself may be supported The printer is offering a selection of alternate paper to use for
259. er See Left cover removal 2 Open the front door and remove the transfer unit See Transfer unit removal 3 Disconnect the control panel connector 1 and remove one screw 2 Cut the cable tie that is connected around the cable ferrite bead 3 and the cable harness 4 Figure 6 6 Left front cover removal 1 of 3 4 Remove the power switch rod 1 from the power switch button 2 ENWW Covers 211 5 If necessary to better access the area remove the toroid from the cable To remove the toroid lift up on the strip 1 and swing the top cover 2 open and then remove the toroid from the wires Figure 6 7 Left front cover removal 2 of 4 6 Unhook one claw 3 from the bottom of the cover and pull out the bottom of the cover to loosen it Reinstallation tip Remember to put the switch rod back into the switch button Figure 6 8 Left front cover removal 2 of 3 212 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW 7 Unhook three more claws by pressing in or squeezing at the indicated locations 1 working up from the bottom to remove the cover 2 from the printer Figure 6 9 Left front cover removal 3 of 3 Right cover removal 1 Open the rear output bin and the upper rear door 2 Remove three screws 1 Pull down and out on the bottom edge of the cover 2 to release two claws then pull out on the front edge 3 to release the additional claws and remove the cover 4 Figure 6 10 Righ
260. er see the HPJ etdirect Print Server Administrator s Guide included with printers equipped with the HP Jetdirect print server Chapter 3 Installation and configuration ENWW Printer software NOTE NOTE ENWW Included with the printer is a CD ROM containing the printing system software The software components and printer drivers on this CD ROM help you use the printer to its fullest potential See the getting started guide for installation instructions For the latest information about the printing system software components view the Readme files on the CD ROM This section summarizes the software included on the CD ROM The printing system includes software for end users and network administrators operating in the following operating environments e Microsoft Windows 98 Me and NT 4 0 e Microsoft Windows 2000 XP 32 bit and XP 64 bit e Apple Mac OS version 9 1 and later and Mac OS X version 10 1 and later For a list of the network environments supported by the network administrator software components see Network configuration For a list of printer drivers updated HP printer software and product support information for the HP Color LaserJet 3500 series printer go to http www hp com support clj3500 For the HP Color LaserJet 3550 series printer go to http www hp com support clj3550 For the HP Color LaserJet 3700 series printer go to http www hp com support clj37 00 Printer drivers Printer drivers access t
261. er sensor When the paper does not pass the sensor through within time T since a paper has reached the duplexing feed paper sensor PS10 the CPU judges it the duplexing pickup stationary jam Check all areas of the printer for a residual paper jam When the front door is open during printing the CPU judges it the door open jam There is a jam inside the front door caused by incompatible transparencies Location Action Go to jam Location areas 6 fuser face down delivery area 5 duplex feed area 5 duplex feed area 6 fuser face down delivery area 5 duplex feed area 5 duplex feed area 4 transfer feed area 5 duplex feed area 6 Fuser facedown delivery area check all jam locations 4 transfer feed area Paper path troubleshooting 359 Table 7 4 Error messages and associated jam locations continued Error message Eventlog Action Location code Action Go to jam Location areas Note Residual paper jam If paper is detected by sensors check all jam other than PS6 and PS7 the DC locations controller delivers the paper automatically Paper path areas jam troubleshooting Paper jam troubleshooting information is provided in this section for the six paper areas identified in Figure 7 1 Jam area locations and sensor positions in this chapter Multiple pages are fed Table 7 5 Causes for multiple pages feeding Tray 1 multipurpose tray separ
262. er PCB Action Replace the DC controller PCB 348 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW Table 7 3 Numerical printer messages continued eme o omm Rm 59 CO Error on control panel Unable to move the right swing guide arm all the way back due to a missing t If any of these t s are missing replace the right swing guide These t s are white plastic pieces shaped like a t inserted into the right swing guide 59 12 00 event log only An error occurred in the developing engaging mechanism 1 The movement of the developing engaging lever is not smooth Make the movement of the lever smooth Replace the gear for the lever if damaged 2 Damage on the drive gears Check each drive gear between the delivery motor and the developing engaging clutch Replace any if damaged 59 XY 3 Faulty developing engaging sensor lever PRINTER ERROR Reseat the developing engaging sensor lever to the correct position if its movement alternates with is not smooth or it is out of position Replace the lever if it is damaged or To continue deformed turn off then on 4 Faulty developing engaging sensor Replace the developing engaging sensor 5 The connectors in the developing engaging clutch drive signal line are not connected properly Reseat the connectors J5014 and J1019 between the developing engaging clutch and the DC controller PCB 6 The connectors in the delivery motor drive signal line are not connected properly
263. er messages continued 8X YYYY HP Color LaserJet 3700 series 1 Turn the printer off and then back on EIO ERROR printereny 2 Reseat the EIO card The EIO accessory card in slot X 3 Replace the EIO card has encountered a critical error 99 ERROR Event log only Resend firmware upgrade RFU remote firmware upgrade failed ENWW Printer error troubleshooting 351 Replacement parts configuration NOTE When the parts in the list below are replaced specific tasks need to be performed These parts include e Formatter and DC Controller replaced at the same time e Formatter new and previously installed in another printer e DC Controller new and previously installed in another printer e Media sensor PS5 e Color Misregistration Sensor PS12 e Laser Scanner Assembly e Fuser e Transfer unit ITB assembly Configuration procedures for these parts are described in the following sections Formatter and DC Controller replaced at the same time Do not replace both the formatter and the DC Controller at the same time Replace one at a time If the formatter and DC Controller are replaced at the same time in an HP Color LaserJet 3700 series printer that has the ability to perform duplex printing this functionality will be lost To determine if the printer can duplex print a configuration page from the INFORMATION menu and reference Paper Trays and Options If Duplex Unit is listed the printer is able to duplex and the f
264. er sensor PS10 removal HP 3700 only 258 Rear output bin paper sensor PS11 removal ssssssssesssssseeee 259 Color misregistration sensor PS12 removal seen 260 Waste toner level sensor PS13 removal ssesseee 260 Developing engaging sensor PS14 removal sss 261 Environment sensor PS15 removal sss emen 261 Secondary transfer roller engaging sensor PS16 removal ssssesss 262 Solenoids and Cl tches 3 v tr rtc eerte oboe eco rade ch Ere c te ud a 263 Tray 1 multipurpose tray pick up solenoid SL 1 removal eseesss 263 Tray 2 pick up solenoid SL2 removal sesessseeeeee enn 264 Secondary transfer roller engaging solenoid SL4 removal sess 265 Duplex feed solenoid SL5 removal HP 3700 only see 266 Registration clutch CL1 removal ascona A enm een eren 266 Black K development clutch CL2 image drive removal sssesssess 267 Developing engaging drive clutch CL3 removal sssee 268 Motor and fans oe RR RM MM ME 269 Feed motor MA removal aep inerce Dre het Heures eise te Page he Phi rete testet e d da np Ete 269 Delivery motor M2 removal napiren a nenne ennemis 271 Drum motor M3 removal 5 2 5 e ede d d Recte td E ed reca 271 Deve
265. er tears make sure that all paper fragments are removed from the paper path before resuming printing 4 Replace the magenta and yellow print cartridges 5 Close the door Registration transfer area jams area 4 ENWW Paper path troubleshooting 363 1 Liftthe latch 1 on the printer front door and open the door 2 Figure 7 2 Printer front door CAUTION Do not place anything on the surface of the transfer unit Also do not touch the transfer unit contacts located on the left side of the unit 2 Remove the transfer unit 1 by grabbing the blue handles 2 on both sides of the transfer unit With your right thumb press and hold the lever 3 on the right side handle then lift the handle up 4 followed by lifting the left side 5 Set the unit aside on a flat surface Be careful not to touch the black upper surface transfer belt of the unit Ma 364 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW ENWW 3 Remove the yellow and magenta cartridges 1 from the printer by grabbing the blue handle 2 on the cartridge and pulling it upward and out P sni 4 Close the front door approximately half way matching the arrow on the right door bracket 1 with the arrow on the inside of the printer 2 5 Remove any visible paper from inside the printer s transfer area Paper path troubleshooting 365 6 Locate the top flat bar 1 and pull up on the white tab marked with black dots 2 to raise the bar to a vert
266. es printer are equipped with several utilities that make it easy to monitor and manage the printer on a network ENWW Printer software 73 HP Toolbox The HP Toolbox is an application that you can use for the following tasks e Check the printer status e Configure the printer settings e View troubleshooting information e View online documentation e Print internal printer pages You can view the HP Toolbox when the printer is directly connected to your computer or when it is connected to a network You must have performed a complete software installation to use the HP Toolbox Embedded Web server available for the HP Color LaserJet 3700 series printer This printer is equipped with an embedded Web server that allows access to information about the printer and network activities A Web server provides an environment in which Web programs may run much in the same way that an operating system such as Windows provides an environment for programs to run on your PC The output from these programs can then be displayed by a Web browser such as Microsoft Internet Explorer or Netscape Navigator An embedded Web server resides on a hardware device such as a printer or in firmware rather than as software that is loaded on a network server The advantage of an embedded Web server is that it provides an interface to the printer that anyone with a network connected PC and a standard Web browser can access There is no special softwar
267. es for jams in the fuser face down delivery area Worn or deformed paper feeder pickup If worn or deformed replace the paper feeder pickup roller roller Dirty worn or deformed feed roller If dirty clean the feed roller If worn or deformed replace the roller Damaged drive gears Check the drive gears in the pickup block If damaged replace the gears Paper path troubleshooting 361 Table 7 8 Causes for jams in the fuser face down delivery area continued Defective paper feeder pickup solenoid Disconnect the paper feeder pickup solenoid connector J4002 from the paper feeder PCB Measure the resistance between the connector J4002 1 SL and J4002 2 24VA If itis not approx 160 ohms replace the paper feeder pickup solenoid Defective paper feeder pickup clutch Disconnect the paper feeder pickup clutch connector J4003 from the paper feeder PCB Measure the resistance between the connector J4003 1 CL and J4003 2 24VA If itis not approx 160 ohms replace the paper feeder pickup clutch Defective paper feeder PCB Replace the 500 sheet paper feeder PCB Defective DC controller PCB Replace the DC controller PCB Area 4 transfer feed area jam troubleshooting Table 7 9 Transfer feed area If the jam has occurred around a feed If dirty clean the rollers If worn or deformed replace the roller indicates a dirty worn deformed pick up feed assembly registration roller or registration sub roller If around
268. es vae omm SHOW ADDRESS AUTO OFF COLOR BLACK MIX AUTO MOSTLY COLOR PAGES MOSTLY BLACK PAGES AUTO allows the printer s IP address to be shown on the printer control panel alternating with the Ready message The default is OFF This menu item is displayed only if the printer is connected to a network available for the HP Color LaserJet 3700n 3700dn and 3700dtn printer models This menu item establishes how the printer switches from color to monochrome black and white mode for maximum performance and print cartridge life AUTO will reset the printer to the factory default setting The default is AUTO Select MOSTLY COLOR PAGES if nearly all of your print jobs are color with high page coverage Select MOSTLY BLACK PAGES if you print mostly monochrome print jobs ora combination of color and monochrome print jobs Control panel troubleshooting 415 Table 7 45 System setup submenu continued emm o ue eme TRAY BEHAVIOR USE Allows you to specify REQUESTED settings for the tray TRAY selection behavior MANUALLY This setting allows you to configure the FEED PROMPT trays to behave like trays in some PS DEFER previous HP printers MEDIA The default for USE REQUESTED TRAY is EXCLUSIVELY The default for MANUALLY FEED PROMPT is ALWAYS PS DEFER MEDIA affects how paper is handled when printing from an Adobe PS print driver ENABLED uses HP s paper handl
269. es with For help press ENWW The fuser is either not installed or not correctly installed in the printer the connector between the fuser and the printer is not connected properly there is a break in either the main thermistor or the fuser heater or the DC controller PCB is faulty At least one supply item is missing or is not correctly seated in the printer and another supply item is missing incorrectly placed out or low Insert the supply item or make sure the installed supply item is fully seated The transfer unit is either not installed or not correctly installed in the printer is defective the high voltage power supply connection to the transfer unit is defective or the DC controller PCB is defective Tray X is either empty or configured for a type and size other than what is specified in the job Tray X is either empty or configured for a type and size other than specified in the job No other tray is available Press for help Make sure the fuser is correctly seated in its slot See Fuser removal in Chapter 6 for more information Reseat the fuser Check the connector J5013 between the fuser and the printer Replace it if damaged Turn the printer off and remove the fuser Measure the resistance between the fuser connectors J5013LA 2 MAINTH and J5013LA 1 GND If it is not within the range of 330k to 50k ohms at ambient temperature replace the fuser Measure the resistance between t
270. esets MENU ssssssssseeee nennen enne 443 Configure device menu print quality menu eee eee settee teeter ee eeeetaeeeeeeetaeeeeeteaaed 443 TSE PAQOS cererii a eind iien nAaR aAa AEA AEEA AAEN ANEA OEE NOE a ANa sweet 445 Engine test page aee tees EEA EE EAA 445 Formatter test page 2 eese EnaA ANANA nnn EERE nan hh s nnns 445 Pagine SII PONE EIER 446 Gold reset oia een dta add Pea eased E Sit ones eR aaa edit du on 446 NYRAM Initialization S 446 Calibration bypass sse eee enne nennen nnnm nennen nenne nennen nnns 447 Calibrate NOW u 447 Serylice MSM cope vies Ten teh reete Hr t roe bed faros re E Eu O sp ee a 448 Accessing the Service Menu sarritasun inania rep v nde dme co dap ne demde dug Re ddnde de 448 BIETI PE E E M 450 Main pants esaea dane A a a ea 451 OWEN O Sens a N Ea aE M 452 SONSONS aiaiai araa i A NA 453 Solenoids and clutclies inner ode E pa ep ex puta n pate eodd u ud 454 Motors and Tans m 455 ecce DERIT 456 Connector locations n ctrca der n ra d ga d gea cud eR 458 500 sheet paper feeder connectors cccccccccceccececeeeeeeeeeseceseaesseaeessseseceeeseseeeseeeeeees 462 General circuit diagr a iet iinne eti p eM ees lain dean Ele pep enc deca Ed decus 463 8 Parts and diagrams IMacieideenuicee D 465 augeret eio pe
271. ess It is the DC positive bias generated in the fuser high voltage generation circuit in the high voltage power supply circuit The high voltage power supply circuit applies this bias to the pressure roller of the fuser unit at the specified time 134 Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW Figure 5 16 ENWW Video interface control The video interface enables communication between the formatter and the DC controller The formatter uses the video interface to monitor the printer status continuously It sends the VIDEO signal via the video interface when the printer is ready for printing The DC controller turns the laser on off according to the VIDEO signal I I I I I I I I I I I I I External devices host computer etc i I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Formatter DC controller PCB Laser scanner unit MRA I VIDEO ma gt K laser driver I VIDEO st gt C laser driver VIDEO sa gt M laser driver VIDEO signal VIDEO INTERFACE signal see figure 5 16 Y laser driver DAT Kei Video interface Operational description The VIDEO INTERFACE signal is exchanged as follows during print 1 When the printer engine is ready for printing the DC controller notifies the formatter using a status command SC signal The formatter sends a print command in the form of an SC signal to the DC controller when both the printer engine and the data for one page are
272. ex Duplex Feed A3 i p J5012D 3 2 7501208 ay PA Solenoid J5012DA J5012DB P SS r ey lt feofeul SL5 E TN 4709 mS sont NT J5011DH lolol leo J5011D DODO 0 Olgas 5024DH YS uso2sL iofal 50240 450250 wi e w 950250 dda EEE ERE PEE dia EER PEREEMA o J1005 J1013 1 433V 1 amp 433V 5 Power Switch INLET shat AO SW3001 J3001 Formatter mM Low voltage Power Supply PCB 12 BLGND z Soe Rzav 3p R 24VC 4 5 123 J9002 J3502 J3503 J3002 39 Door Switch O lalola elo fel efe feed elope al 4001 Swi pocas aaeeea ddA il gl 8 5 dd 4 E E i om alal l 5 z les aaa a bass foe olles ESSE EE RS 5 aga ddae saig seSSeStsaaeesopgs Sz Way J 1 al PARRE ERE RRR EER ERE MARE E CIE ES SES Ex ES ES ES E Asse 3 41001 led AFRE lels r ejo s e eleded sell el ser S DC controller PCB me us Sof 2 19
273. ff and then back on The connectors in the laser scanner control line are not connected properly Reseat the DC controller PCB connectors J1022 J1026 J1027 and the laser scanner unit connectors J101A J101B J5001A J5001B J5020 Faulty laser scanner unit replace the laser scanner unit Faulty DC controller PCB replace the DC controller PCB Press v to continue If the message persists turn the printer off and then back on The connectors in the laser scanner control line are not connected properly Reseat the DC controller PCB connectors J1022 J1026 J1027 and the laser scanner connectors J101A J101B J5001A J5001B J5020 Faulty laser scanner replace the laser scanner Faulty DC controller PCB replace the DC controller PCB ENWW Table 7 3 Numerical printer messages continued Message 53 XY ZZ CHECK DIMM A Bank B alternates with Press STOP to continue ENWW HP 3700 only An error occurred in printer memory Values of A and ZZ are A Device Location 1 DIMM Slot 1 bottom slot 2 DIMM Slot 2 3 DIMM Slot 3 4 DIMM Slot 4 ZZ Error Number 00 DIMM unsupported 01 DIMM SPD failure unrecognized memory 03 DIMM error HP 3500 3550 amp HP 3700 53 10 03 Memory error 1 Press Stop See Installing memory and font DIMMs in chapter 3 for DIMM installation information 2 Check the ZZ error number for the specific DIMM then Reseat the D
274. ff or unplugging and leave the printer off for three minutes or longer before turning the power back on Safety For the safety of users and service technicians the 24 V is divided into two 24 VA and 24 VB The 24 VA is supplied from the DC controller all the time whereas the power supply of the 24 VB stops when the door open detection switch SW1 is cut off The high voltage power supply circuit motors and solenoids are supplied with the 24 VB They stop when the front cover is opened This is to protect the users and the service technicians from an electric shock or injury to their hands The 24 VB also functions as a DOOR OPEN DETECTION signal DOPEN The CPU judges the door open when the 24 VB supply stops Sleep mode This function saves the power consumption of the printer It is controlled by the DC controller and goes through the following sequence 1 The DC controller receives a sleep command from the formatter 2 The DC controller then sends the SLEEP signal REM24 to the low voltage power supply circuit within the specified time from receipt of such command L to H 3 When REM24 signal H is sent the low voltage power supply circuit stops the power supply of 24V to each load and puts the fuser temperature control fans and motors into the STOP state The printer returns to the WAIT period when it receives the command to release the sleep mode from the formatter High voltage power sup
275. fie s jed 1 TRIS 8 JP2012 a 5 TTT TRINA Y ODEVI ESSE E 5a ec lez RENERE BERL Bel L 388b Bed l3 d Sb pes Sog ssa Tagine Bells Sissel ssa asad PRERE 18 GND 4 nas TRE x ci ci Fc cad mim ea ee ea rug EE AER zi UTR zz22 22652 e er pr po creo eco asada esso 1 24VB 2 rg DECECO jedes o or eoo S ERE daga Halooo 24VB 1 B CESCE PAAPA RP A YAMA High voltage J1005 J1008 Jiot2 J1006 Power Supply PCB 2 of 2 ircuit diagram General c Figure 7 32 ENWW 464 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting Parts and diagrams Chapter contents ENWW This chapter contains the following sections Chapter Content 465 nwreree 466 rdering Parts D EE 467 Supplies and ACCESSES asian a aeaa anaa eaa a aaaea enne nnns 467 Replacement parts configuration ssssssssssssssssee eene ee eene 473 IllustrationSand parts lIStS er eren tenti vec enne Lee Ix ener ELE tn no rae nete eee evene ue 478 Chapter contents 465 Introduction The figures in this chapter show the major subassemblies in the printer and their component parts A table materials list follows each exploded assembly diagram Each table lists the reference designator item number the associated part number and the description of each part NOTE When looking for a part number pay careful attention to the voltage listed in the description
276. flected from the area the toner is on 3 The light receiver converts the received light amount to voltage and sends it to the DC controller in the form of the COLOR MISREGISTRATION DETECTION signal REGPDM 4 The DC controller detects the positions of the detection patterns according to the time the REGPDM signals vary DC controller PCB Color misregistration detection pattern Ps Color misregistration sensor R Detection pattern p a Color misregistration sensor L REGPDM Light emitor Light receiver LED PD COLOR MISREGISTRATION DETECTION signal REGPDM LED DRIVE signal REGLED Figure 5 54 Color misregistration detection The DC controller notifies the formatter of each error when the following errors are found during color misregistration detection The initial value is reset to the new color misregistration adjustment value whenever an error occurs e Color misregistration sensor abnormality warning No light is received at the light receivers e Color misregistration measurement out of range warning The measurement is found to be out of specified range Image stabilization control This controls the variation of the image density caused by an environmental change or deterioration of the photosensitive drum toner etc ENWW Image formation system 177 There are three kinds of controls executed as necessary e Environmental change control The environmental conditio
277. formatter may not send a command to specify the paper size when paper is fed from the manual feed tray In such cases the T1 and T2 are set for letter size and the T3 is set for the size detected by the registration paper sensor PS4 as the printer cannot detect the paper width Laser scanner system 143 Failure detection This control monitors any failure of the laser diode The laser IC converts the laser current of the LD to voltage during initial APC and sends the PDOUT signal to the CPU When the voltage of the PDOUT signal is below a specified value the CPU judges the laser faulty and informs the formatter Scanner motor control This control rotates the scanner motor to strike the laser beam at the correct position on the photosensitive drum The scanner motor which is integral with this drive circuit is a three phase eight pole DC brushless motor with a built in Hall device Frequency divider Scanner motor driver PCB DC controller PCB Laser driver PCB gp GE S CL E J1026 J101A I Se CE ed l x 1 15 BDA 5 aptes l i l I I Eel LL ae eee ce uiae ie parie mb Dar re de a uf Renfe l l MEME ZZ meei I 424VA i 24VA Scanner motor l l 1 l J1022 I L 5 lt Scanner driver IC l l I I 2 2 I Frequency i i Integrated Drive comparator 1 circuit circuit I E 1C1001 l CPU L 4 Reference i clock n i I l X1001 l i i I I
278. from the printer Reinstallation tip When reinstalling the high voltage power supply PCB connect the connector 5 first Next install the bottom of the PCB into the bottom support 4 then align the board onto the two lower pins 3 and working upward hook the claws 2 on each side of the board Ensure that the board is aligned so it fits on the upper alignment pin 6 Figure 6 126 High voltage power supply PCB removal 5 of 5 284 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW Low voltage power supply PCB removal 1 Remove the formatter See Formatter PCB removal 2 Remove two screws 1 3 Pull the low voltage power supply PCB toward you about two inches Disconnect the Switch rod 2 from the power switch on the PCB as you pull it out Reinstallation tip Remember to put the switch rod back into the power switch when reassembling the power supply unit Figure 6 127 Low voltage power supply PCB removal 1 of 2 If necessary you may need to remove the toroid from the cable to allow better access to the area at the front of the PCB To remove the toroid lift up on the strip 1 and swing the top 2 open and then remove the toroid from the wires Figure 6 128 Left front cover removal 2 of 4 ENWW Circuit Boards 285 4 Disconnect four connectors 1 and remove the power supply 2 Figure 6 129 Low voltage power supply PCB removal 2 of 2 Memory controller PCB removal 1 Open the front door r
279. g is too heavy for the paper type setting you selected and the toner is not fusing to the paper The moisture content of the paper is uneven too high or too low Use paper from a different source from an unopened ream of paper or dry out the paper 100 C for 24 hours Some areas of the paper reject toner Use paper from a different source or from an unopened ream of paper The letterhead you are using is printed on rough paper Use a smoother xerographic paper If this solves your problem consult with the supplier of your letterhead to verify that the paper used meets the specifications for this printer See Supported media weights and sizes in chapter 1 The paper is excessively rough Use a smoother xerographic paper Overhead transparency defect Overhead transparencies can display any of the image quality problems that any other type of paper will cause as well as defects specific to printing on transparencies In addition because transparencies are pliable while in the print path they are subject to being marked by the paper handling components NOTE Allow transparencies to cool for at least 30 seconds before handling them ENWW Change the pre rotation setting in the CONFIGURE DEVICE PRINT QUALITY OPTIMIZE PRE ROTATION ON This will enhance transparency print quality by reducing what looks like fire marks by heating up the fuser pressure roller closer to the temperature of the sleeve Change the transparen
280. ge Determine the language in which to display the embedded Web server information e Time Services Allows time synchronization with a network time server Tools for troubleshooting 423 NOTE Networking tab This tab allows the network administrator to control network related settings for the printer when it is connected to an IP based network This tab will not appear if the printer is directly connected to a computer or if the printer is connected to a network using anything other than an HP Jetdirect print server card Other links This section contains links that connect you to the Internet You must have Internet access in order to use any of these links If you use a dial up connection and did not connect when you first opened the embedded Web server you must connect before you can visit these web sites Connecting might require that you close the embedded Web server and reopen it e HP Instant Support TM Connects you to the HP website to help you find solutions This service analyzes your printer error log and configuration information to provide diagnostic and support information specific to your printer e Order Supplies Click this link to connect to the HP website and order genuine HP supplies such as print cartridges and paper e Product Support Connects to the support site for the HP Color LaserJet 3500 3550 series printer and the HP Color LaserJet 3700 series printer Then you can search for help regarding general top
281. ge of 12 ohms to 52 ohms at ambient temperature replace the fuser film unit 4 Faulty DC controller PCB Replace the DC controller PCB ENWW Table 7 3 Numerical printer messages continued 50 X FUSER ERROR 50 3 error Fuser Failure Abnormally High Temperature Main Thermistor 1 The connector between the fuser and the printer is not connected properly Reseat the fuser Check the connector J5013 between the fuser and the printer Replace it if damaged 2 Short in the main thermistor Turn the printer off and remove the fuser Measure the resistance between the fuser connectors J5013LA 2 MAINTH and J5013LA 1 GND If it is in the rage of 330k ohms to 50k ohms at ambient temperature replace the fuser 3 Faulty DC controller PCB Replace the DC controller PCB 50 4 error 1 Faulty fuser power supply PCB replace the low voltage power supply PCB 2 Faulty DC controller PCB replace the DC controller PCB 3 For the following errors perform the indicated action 50 8 error Fuser Failure Abnormally Low Temperature Sub Thermistor 1 The connector between the fuser and the printer is not connected properly Reseat the fuser Check the connector J5013 between the fuser and the printer Replace it if damaged 2 Break in the sub thermistor Turn the printer off and remove the fuser Measure the resistance between the fuser connectors J5013LA 4 SUBTH and J5013LA 3 3 3V If it reads 600 ohm
282. ges after a jam The default is AUTO Control panel troubleshooting 417 Table 7 45 System setup submenu continued AUTO Determines how the RAM disk feature is configured AUTO allows the printer to determine the optimal RAM disk Size based on the amount of available memory OFF disables the RAM disk but a minimal RAM disk is still available The default is AUTO HP Color LaserJet 3700 series printer only LANGUAGE A list of Sets the default available control panel languages language appears I O menu The I O menu allows you to configure the printer s I O options Table 7 46 I O submenu pee ues uem o I O TIMEOUT 5 300 Allows you to select the I O timeout in seconds PAGE BUFFERING OF Sets whether the printer should maximize performance or minimize engine wear while waiting for information to be transferred Select ON if the printer uses USB 1 1 or Ethernet 10 base T The default is OFF available for the HP Color LaserJet 3500 3550 series printer PARALLEL INPUT HIGH SPEED Allows you to select the speed at which ADVANCED the parallel port communicates with the host and to enable or disable the FUNCTIONS addu ERE bidirectional parallel communication The default for HIGH SPEED is YES The default for ADVANCED FUNCTIONS is ON HP Color LaserJet 3700 series printer only 418 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW ENWW Table 7 46 I O submenu continued emm o utes nemi Possible
283. gure 6 69 Figure 6 70 Figure 6 71 Figure 6 72 Figure 6 73 Figure 6 74 Figure 6 75 Figure 6 76 Figure 6 77 Figure 6 78 Figure 6 79 Figure 6 80 Figure 6 81 Figure 6 82 Figure 6 83 Figure 6 84 Figure 6 85 Figure 6 86 Figure 6 87 Figure 6 88 Figure 6 89 Figure 6 90 Figure 6 91 Figure 6 92 Figure 6 93 Figure 6 94 Figure 6 95 Figure 6 96 Figure 6 97 Figure 6 98 Figure 6 99 Figure 6 100 Figure 6 101 Figure 6 102 Figure 6 103 Figure 6 104 Figure 6 105 Figure 6 106 Figure 6 107 Figure 6 108 Figure 6 109 Figure 6 110 Figure 6 111 Figure 6 112 Figure 6 113 Figure 6 114 Figure 6 115 Figure 6 116 Figure 6 117 Figure 6 118 Figure 6 119 Left swing guide removal 6 of 6 sssssssse emen 248 Left swing guide replacement ssssssseee eme 249 Switch locations x iot t cte e ot recs 250 Door switch removal asrini 1 etel Lentes ette tet ed rue bd Ho e de erede e e uh 250 Sensor localtlors uice cm ete to TRE Hs te Rt IM eva ages 252 Tray 2 paper sensor removal 1 of 3 ssssssssssseeee 253 Tray 2 paper sensor removal 2 of 3 sssssssssseeee 253 Tray paper sensor removal 3 of 3 ssssssssseeeeee em 254 Registration paper sensor removal 1 of 2 ssssssees 254 Registration paper sensor removal 2 of 2 sssssee 255 Media sensor removal rma riirii eene eerte derent E a ee ERR
284. h NOTE The only difference between the print cartridges listed above is that the Europe only print cartridges have different languages on the instruction sheet inside the box Table 8 2 Common fasteners peer se rotamer ue SCREW TP M4X6 XA9 1450 000CN Secures metal frame panels to metal frame no panels SCREW W M3X6 XA9 1477 000CN Secures the drawer cross WASHER member to the frame see Figure 8 11 Internal components 4 of 4 SCREW W M3X6 XA9 1461 000CN Secures motor M2 to the WASHER RS frame SCREW W M3X8 XA9 1420 000CN Secures metal to metal WASHER ground wire feed guide rear two screws SCREW W M3X12 XA9 1452 000CN Secures laser scanner WASHER assembly to the metal frame SCREW RS M3X6 XA9 1499 000CN Secures metal to metal SCREW RS M3X8 XA9 1445 000CN secures any material except metal to metal 472 Chapter8 Parts and diagrams ENWW ENWW Table 8 2 Common fasteners continued u a mme m XB4 7300 805CN Secures sensor PCB to plastic environmental toner full color misregistration and media SCREW TAPPING M4X10 XB4 7401 005CN Secures anything to TRUSS HEAD plastic SCREW M4X4 5 RC1 1624000CN Secures the right side of STEPPED the pick up feed assembly to the frame SCREW S M3X8 XA9 1500 000CN Secures plastic to metal front door components rear swing guide rail components to center frame see Figure 8 16 Lower Frame Assembly HP 3700 and
285. h voltage power supply circuit Each motor s drive Fan motor s drive Writing and reading data to and from the EEP ROM Memory tag Reset IC 1C1003 The IC1003 monitors 3 3V voltage and resets the CPU and ASIC when the power is turned on EEP ROM 1C1010 EEP ROM stores various backup data Feeder motor driver IC 1C1011 IC1011 controls the feed motor See Motors solenoids and clutches below for details Delivery motor driver IC 1C1014 IC1014 controls the delivery motor and primary transfer engaging motor See Motors solenoids and clutches below for details oon BF WN gt Motors solenoids and clutches This printer has seven motors four solenoids three for the HP Color LaserJet 3500 3550 series printer and three clutches for paper feed and image formation The specifications of such motors solenoids and clutches are listed in the following tables The motors with failure detector are discussed in Failure detection Engine control system 121 Table 5 2 Motor Functions mc Direction of Speed pese Failure p eee pese M1 Feed Drives the pick up Stepping motor Clockwise 4 speed full 1 2 motor roller feed roller 1 3 1 4 duplexing feed roller and fuser M2 Drives the feed roller Stepping motor Clockwise 5 speed full 1 2 No Delivery developing engaging counter 1 3 1 4 double motor clutch CL3 drive clockwise assembly and output delivery rollers Drives four colors
286. he fuser connectors J5013L 2 FSRH and J5013L 1 FSRN with the fuser removed If it is not within the range of 12 to 52 ohms at ambient temperature replace the fuser Replace the DC controller PCB Press v and then press for help or Refer to http www hp com support clj3550 or http www hp com support clj3700 Press for help Ensure the transfer unit is fully seated that the contracts are not damaged See Transfer unit removal in Chapter 6 for more information Replace the transfer unit Replace the high voltage power supply PCB Replace the DC controller PCB Press for help or Press v to print from another tray Press for help Printer error troubleshooting 317 Table 7 2 Alphabetical printer messages continued eem 0 Rm Message Loading program X alternates with DO NOT POWER OFF MANUALLY FEED OUTPUT STACK alternates with Then press v to print second sides If no paper is in the manual feed tray MANUALLY FEED TYPE SIZE alternates with To continue press v MANUALLY FEED TYPE SIZE alternates with For help press MANUALLY FEED TYPE SIZE alternates with To use another tray press v Moving solenoid alternates with To exit press v STOP key Moving solenoid and motor alternates with To exit pressv STOP key HP 3700 only Programs and fonts can be stored on the printer file system and are loaded into RAM when the
287. he clutch onto the clutch shaft Make sure that the slotted tab on the clutch fits into the tab 6 on the clutch plate Also ensure that the white shaft bushing 5 which is keyed is correctly seated into the notch on the clutch plate Figure 6 33 Pick up feed assembly removal 5 of 13 10 Disconnect three connectors 1 11 Remove the cable 2 from the cable holders 3 230 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW 12 Remove six screws 4 and remove the main gear plate 5 Figure 6 34 Pick up feed assembly removal 6 of 13 Reinstallation tip If the gears come off the gear plate reinstall them as shown in the figure below However when reinstalling the gear plate it is easier to install the larger gear callout 1 into the printer and then install the gear plate and remaining gears Figure 6 35 Gear plate gear locations replacement 13 Remove gear 1 this gear might have come off when the gear plate was removed in the previous step Gear 4 might also have come off during removal of the gear plate but should be reinstalled as shown below Reinstallation tip When reinstalling the gear plate it is easier to install the gear 1 shown in the figure below first and then install the gear plate and remaining gears ENWW Main Assemblies 231 14 Remove two screws 2 and lay the solenoid cover plate 3 down it will still be connected to the solenoid Reinstallation tip The solenoid plate has th
288. he default paper size to A4 LETTER and A4 are the only available values Service menu 449 Diagrams This section contains printer diagrams for locating parts for troublshooting 450 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW Main parts Figure 7 18 Location of main parts Face down delivery roller Laser scanner assembly Print toner cartridge Photosensitive drum Primary transfer charging roller Toner collection unit Transfer unit Registration shutter Tray 1 multipurpose pickup roller 10 Tray 1 multipurpose tray separation roller 11 Registration roller 12 Tray 2 cassette separation roller 13 Tray 2 cassette pickup roller 14 Media sensor 15 Sec
289. he developing cylinder and the exposed area E lt J Exposed drum surface Potential V gt DESINIT US IUE te TOS ONE ETRDE NE ET OPETEP Developing cylinder Unexposed drum surface Potential difference between the developing cylinder and the exposed area Transfer block This block consists of three steps where a toner image on a photosensitive drum is transferred onto paper Step 4 Primary transfer 152 Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW Figure 5 32 Figure 5 33 ENWW The toner image on the photosensitive drum is transferred onto the ITB in this step The ITB is a thin seamless belt made of resins It is of low resistance and eliminates the applied bias by itself As a positive DC bias is applied to the transfer roller opposite the drum to charge the ITB positive a negatively charged toner on the drum is transferred onto the ITB Each color s toner image is transferred in order of Y M C and K and forms one toner image overlaying one color s image on another ITB A DC bias Primary transfer Step 5 Secondary transfer A toner image on the ITB is transferred onto paper in this step After the paper is fed into the primary transfer the secondary transfer roller is raised to press the paper onto the ITB A positive DC bias is then applied to the secondary transfer roller to charge the paper positive so that the negatively charged toner image formed on the ITB is transferred onto
290. he formatter that the printer is ready to pick up paper for duplex printing When a TOPR signal is received becomes L the formatter sends a duplexing pick up command to the DC controller 138 Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW Laser scanner system The laser scanner system forms latent images on the photosensitive drum according to the VIDEO signals sent from the formatter The laser scanner unit is illustrated below 10 CTRL11 CTRL20 CTRL21 VDO1 VDO1 VDO2 VDO2 PDOUT3 PDOUTA PDOUT1 PDOUT2 A A 7 LA in A Scanner drive Scanner mirror 4 faced PCB Scanner motor Figure 5 20 Laser scanner unit The laser scanner unit is controlled by the DC controller and consists of four laser units and two laser driver PCBs two each of the units sitting on one laser driver and two scanner motors one scanner mirror reflects two colors laser beams The following is the sequence of the printing process ENWW Laser scanner system 139 1 Upon receiving a print command from the formatter the DC controller outputs the SCANNER MOTOR SPEED CONTROL signals Y M ACC1 DEC1 C Bk ACC2 DEC2 and rotates the scanner motor to rotate two four faced mirrors NOTE The abbreviations Bk and K are used interchangeably and refer to the black developing operation 2 When the scanner motor starts rotating the DC controller outputs LASER CONTROL signals CTRL10 40 CTRL 11 41 and emits a laser beam to inpu
291. he printer features and allow the computer to communicate with the printer The following printer drivers are included with the printer on a CD ROM Table 3 1 Printer drivers for the HP Color LaserJet 3500 3550 series printer Operating system JetReady 4 0 Windows NT 4 0 NOTE Windows NT does not support USB eser e LL Wesen e LCD NN RN Not all printer features are available from all drivers or operating systems See the online Help in your driver for availability of features Printer software 71 Table 3 2 Printer drivers for the HP Color LaserJet 3700 series printer Windows NT 4 0 v v NOTE Windows NT does not support USB eee LLL enema e Not all printer features are available from all drivers or operating systems See the online Help in your driver for availability of features For Windows 2000 and Windows XP 32 bit and 64 bit download the PCL 5 driver from http www hp com go clj3700 software 3For Windows XP 64 bit download the PCL 6 driver from http www hp com go clj3700 software NOTE If your system did not automatically check the Internet for the latest drivers during software installation download them for the HP Color LaserJet 3500 series printer from http www hp com go clj3500_ software For the HP Color LaserJet 3550 series printer go to http www hp com go clj3550_ software For the HP Color LaserJet 3700 series printer go to http www hp com go clj3700 software Ad
292. here HP LaserJet supplies are sold Postage paid and pre addressed labels are included within the instruction guide in most HP LaserJet print cartridge boxes Labels and bulk boxes are also available through the Website hitp www hp com recycle More than 10 million HP LaserJet print cartridges were recycled globally in 2002 through the HP Planet Partners supplies recycling program This record number represents 26 million pounds of print cartridge materials diverted from landfills Worldwide HP recycled an average of 80 of the print cartridge by weight consisting primarily of plastic and metals Plastics and metals are used to make new products such as HP products plastic trays and spools The remaining materials are disposed of in an environmentally responsible manner e U S returns For more environmentally responsible return of used cartridges and supplies HP encourages the use of bulk returns Simply bundle two or more cartridges together and use the single pre paid and pre addressed UPS label that is supplied in the package For more information in the U S call 1 800 340 2445 or visit the HP Website at http www hp com recycle e Non U S returns Non U S customers should visit the http www hp com recycle Website for further information regarding availability of the HP Supplies Returns and Recycling Program Paper Material Safety Data Sheets MSDS for supplies containing chemical substances for example toner can be obtaine
293. hooting ENWW Table 7 2 Alphabetical printer messages continued Message Printing DEMO PAGE Printing ENGINE TEST Printing EVENT LOG Printing FILE DIRECTORY Printing FONT LIST Printing MENU MAP Printing PQ troubleshooting Printing REGISTRATION PAGE PRINTING STOPPED To continue press v Printing SUPPLIES STATUS Printing USAGE PAGE Processing ENWW The printer is generating the demo page The printer will return to the online Ready state when the page is completed This message is displayed while the engine test page is being printed initiated by pressing the engine test button on the DC controller PCB The printer is generating the event log page The printer will return to the online Ready state when the page is completed HP 3700 only The printer is generating the mass storage directory page The printer will return to the Ready state when the page is completed HP 3700 only The printer is generating either the PCL or PS personality typeface list The printer will return to the Ready state when the page is completed The printer is generating the printer menu map The printer will return to the Ready state when the page is completed The printer is generating the print quality troubleshooting pages The printer will return to the Ready state when the pages are printed The printer is generating the registration page The printer will re
294. hp com go partsinfo HP support assistant CD ROM This support tool offers a comprehensive online information system designed to provide technical and product information about HP products To subscribe to the quarterly service in the U S or Canada call 800 457 1762 In Hong Kong SAR Indonesia Malaysia or Singapore call Mentor Media at 65 740 4477 Customer care reseller sales and service support center The Customer Care Reseller Sales and Support Center is available to assist resellers and service technicians To reach this support center call 1 800 544 9976 HP authorized resellers and support To locate authorized HP resellers and support call 800 243 9816 in the U S or 800 387 3867 in Canada 44 Chapter 2 Service approach ENWW ENWW HP service agreements Call 800 743 8305 in the U S or 800 268 1221 in Canada Other areas Outside of North America and Europe contact the local HP sales office for assistance in obtaining technical support for resellers and service technicians Ordering related documentation and software Table 2 1 Related documentation and software shows where to order related documentation and software Telephone numbers for the various sources are e Hewlett Packard Customer Support Americas HPCS A 1 800 hpinvent U S only e Hewlett Packard Customer Support Europe HPCS E 49 70 311 4225 3 Table 2 1 Related documentation and software HP LaserJet Family Print Media
295. ia through the printer and can block the sensors e Usethe paper path test in the Diagnostic menu to vary the input selections of the printer to determine if the problem is associated with a particular area of the printer e Worn rollers or separation pads can cause multifeeds Check the condition of the pickup rollers and separation pads e Defective paper sensors along the paper path might signal a false jam e Scraps of media left in the paper path can cause intermittent jams Always check that the paper path is clear when cleaning the printer and when clearing jams Also remove the fuser and carefully check it for jam debris ENWW Paper path troubleshooting 379 Persistent jams If jams occur repeatedly use the information in this section to diagnose the root cause of the problem The tables in this section list possible causes and recommended solutions for jams in each area of the paper path Items are listed in the order you should investigate In general items at the beginning of the list are relatively minor repairs Items at the end of the list are more significant repairs Basic troubleshooting for paper jams The basic troubleshooting process for paper jams consists of the following 1 Gather data 2 Identify the cause of the problem 3 Fixthe problem Data collection To troubleshoot paper jams gather the following information e the exact paper jam error code displayed on the control panel e the location of the
296. ic electricity can damage DIMMs When handling DIMMs either wear an antistatic wrist strap or frequently touch the surface of the DIMM antistatic package and then touch bare metal on the printer 1 Turn the printer off ENWW Installing memory and font DIMMs 79 3 Openthe DIMM access door by gently prying it with a flat bladed screwdriver Remove the door by pulling the door toward the back of the printer 4 Loosen the screws that hold the formatter door to the printer and remove the formatter door 5 Remove the DIMM from the antistatic package Locate the alignment notches on the bottom edge of the DIMM 80 Chapter 3 Installation and configuration ENWW 6 Holding the DIMM by the edges align the notches on the DIMM with the bars in the DIMM slot E UNEES amp 7T Firmly press the DIMM straight into the slot Close the locks on each side of the DIMM until they snap into place T ZA TEE a NOTE If you have difficulty inserting the DIMM or closing the latches make sure the notches on the bottom of the DIMM are aligned with the bars in the slot If the DIMM still does not go in make sure you are using the correct type of DIMM ENWW Installing memory and font DIMMs 81 8 Align the formatter door in the tracks at the bottom of the slot a
297. ic photocurrent control Laser scanner system 141 e Horizontal synchronization control e Image masking control The LASER CURRENT OUTPUT signal PDOUT is an analog signal generated by transforming the amount of laser to a current value The DC controller obtains each laser s light amount based on the PDOUT signal and passes such information on to the formatter while the formatter adjusts the PWM adjusts the laser emission timing according to the halftone Laser emission control The laser emission control controls on off of the laser diode LD according to the VIDEO signals When the DC controller puts the laser driver circuit into print mode the laser driver circuit turns on off the LD at a specified light amount according to the VIDEO signals VDO VDO received from the formatter Automatic photocurrent control APC This control ensures that the amount of light emitted by the LD remains constant There are two APCs both of which are controlled by the laser driver circuit in the same way e Initial APC Performed at the scanner motor startup adjusts the amount of laser light e Between lines APC Performed during the print process adjusts the amount of laser light for the next one line before it is written The following is the sequence of APC control 1 When the DC controller puts it into Force LD ON mode the laser driver circuit forces the LD to emit light 2 The light amount of the LD is detected by the photo di
298. ical position 3 The bar will remain vertical NOTE Do not touch the registration sensor lenses 4 7 Raise the bottom media sensor bar 1 by pulling on the white tabs marked with the black dots 2 located on either side of the sensor NOTE Do not touch the registration sensor lenses 3 or the media sensor 1 i qi i got aaah 366 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW 8 While holding the media sensor bar upright remove any visible pieces of paper 1 9 When the paper is removed lower the bottom media sensor bar back down into place 10 Swing the top flat bar down into place over the bottom media sensor bar 11 Open the front door to its fully open position and reinstall the yellow and magenta cartridges 12 Reseat the transfer unit by holding the blue handles and inserting the left side first Align the two holes 2 in the transfer unit with the pegs 1 on the printer door and lower the unit into place Do not touch the black surface transfer belt or the contacts on the left side of the transfer unit Figure 7 3 Left side of front door 13 Close the front door Paper is wrinkled or folded ENWW Paper path troubleshooting 367 To diagnose the cause of wrinkled or folded paper use the Print Stop Test in the Diagnostics test menu Adjust the stop time so the paper stops before it enters the fuser Open the front door If paper is wrinkled at this stage use Table 7 10 Causes for wrinkled or folded
299. ics HP Toolbox The HP Toolbox is a Web application that you can use for the following tasks e Check the printer status e Configure the printer settings e View troubleshooting information e View online documentation e Set up pop up alerts Windows only You can view the HP Toolbox when the printer is directly connected to your computer or when it is connected to a network You must perform a complete software installation to use the HP Toolbox You do not have to have Internet access to open and use the HP Toolbox However if you click a link in the Other Links area you must have Internet access to go to the site associated with the link See Other links for more information Supported operating systems The HP toolbox is supported for the following operating systems e Windows 98 2000 Me and XP e Mac OS 10 2 or later Supported browsers To use the HP toolbox you must have one of the following browsers 424 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW NOTE ENWW For Windows e Microsoft Internet Explorer 5 2 or later e Netscape Navigator 6 or later e Opera Software ASA Opera For Macintosh e Microsoft Internet Explorer 5 2 or later e Netscape Navigator 6 or later e All pages can be printed from the browser To view HP Toolbox On the Start menu select Programs and then HP toolbox Double click the Status Client icon The HP toolbox opens in a Web browser Once you open the URL you can bookmark it so th
300. ics Menu EL 419 Service enu oii te te tu Lee tot e a ea lg 420 Tools for troubleshooting 2 2 derrotar a abe eeepc vel det xa aae cv ase Va nuc 422 Embedded Web server HP Color LaserJet 3700 series printer Only 422 HP T60lD9X 52 cie Eee Lee eee e Leto e e e ede e e pee dos 424 Printer contiguratlon page 2 eieae aaa rte ce en aat vg er tete AAR 428 Supplies status page 2 1 edo eee cioe tb eh er rl ee at enr o e ec Ede eed bg 429 Usage page HP 3700 only iis Gti toc eee te idet eter 430 Conventions xi xii Event log nete ae ade foeda Cea Mae Edda e dde Edad dca eiae d 431 DIAQMOSUCS e 433 Diagnostics flowchart sse eene nennen nene rne nennen enne 433 Engine Xo rfe aoro dad digieeeeaniadeeaiaeeaied lies 434 Diagnostics from the Control Panel sssssssseeee eene 436 Printer display MON sii eee iriiri e decere ena Le YE deo aa E en Eu LL aa REEL ERR LE ER Rd 436 Diagnostics test menu ssssssssssssee eee enne en nnne nnne nennen 436 Paper Path Test PT 439 Component Test special mode test ec ccceceeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeaaeeeeeseeeetetteetsssereeees OQ Prikl Stop TSU EET 442 Information menu ssssssessseseneneneee eene na keiina keia iniiai kaiaa 443 Configure device menu printing menu ssssseeneennnnenemneen nen 443 Configure device menu r
301. idge see the user guide Approximate replacement intervals for supplies for the HP Color LaserJet 3500 series printer The following table lists the estimated replacement intervals for supplies and the printer control panel messages that prompt when to replace each item Table 4 2 Approximate replacement intervals Printer message Page count Approximate time period Black cartridge REPLACE BLACK 6 000 pages 6 months CARTRIDGE Color cartridge REPLACE COLOR 4 000 pages 4 months CARTRIDGE Image transfer kit REPLACE 60 000 pages 60 months TRANSFER KIT Image fuser kit REPLACE FUSER KIT 60 000 pages 60 months Approximate life is based on 1 000 pages per month Approximate A4 letter size page count is based on approximately 5 coverage of individual colors 3Usage conditions and print patterns may cause results to vary To order supplies online go to http www hp com support clj3500 Approximate replacement intervals for supplies for the HP Color LaserJet 3550 3700 series printer The following table lists the estimated replacement intervals for supplies and the printer control panel messages that prompt when to replace each item 94 Chapter 4 Printer maintenance ENWW ENWW Table 4 3 Approximate replacement intervals Printer message Page count Approximate time period Print cartridges REPLACE BLACK 6 000 pages 4 months CARTRIDGE Color cartridge REPLACE COLOR 6 000 pages 4 months CARTRIDGE
302. ied time when the drum motor rotates The EEPROM that stores the accumulated rotation time of the drum motor judges that the transfer unit is at the end of its life when the accumulated time exceeds a specified time and sends an error message to the formatter DC controller PCB DRUM MOTOR DRIVE signal Accumulated data on number of drum rotation EEPROM Transfer unit life detection control Image formation system 169 NOTE The accumulated rotation time of the drum motor can be cleared by the formatter Remember to reset the transfer unit life expectancy value accumulated rotation time of the drum motor using the control panel when replacing the ITB unit ITB self aligning mechanism This printer automatically aligns the position of the ITB to prevent tearing of the belt due to its misalignment The alignment rollers alignment gear and alignment arm inside the ITB unit move the ITB feed roller back and forth to align the belt see the figure below as described by the following steps 1 The ITB has a rib on the back along the left edge of the belt Inside the ITB unit two alignment rollers are positioned at both sides of the rib so that the rib ITB will rotate the roller if it is in contact with one of the rollers If the ITB is drawn leftward or rightward during rotation the rib will touch one of the alignment rollers and turns the roller If the ITB is drawn rightward the right roller turns and if it is draw
303. ies printer only 67 Network configuration NOTE The network configuration feature is available for the HP Color LaserJet 3700 series printer when an EIO device is installed You might need to configure certain network parameters on the printer You can configure these parameters from the printer control panel the embedded Web server or for most networks from the HP Web Jetadmin software or the HP Toolbox NOTE For more information about using the embedded Web server see Using the embedded Web server in the user guide For a complete list of supported networks and for instructions on configuring network parameters from software see the HP Jetdirect Print Server Administrator s Guide The guide comes with printers in which an HP Jetdirect print server is installed 68 Chapter 3 Installation and configuration ENWW Enhanced I O EIO configuration HP color LaserJet 3700 series printer only This printer comes equipped with one enhanced input output EIO slot This slot holds compatible external devices such as the HP Jetdirect print server network cards or other devices EIO network cards can maximize printer performance when printing from a network In addition they provide the ability to place the printer anywhere on a network This eliminates the need to attach the printer directly to a server or to a workstation and allows you to place the printer closer to the network users If the printer is configured through an EIO netwo
304. ife for the supplies reports PAGE statistics on total number of pages and jobs processed print cartridge manufacture date serial number page counts and maintenance information SUPPLIES STATUS Displays the supplies status in a scrollable list PRINT USAGE PAGE HP 3700 only Prints a count of all media sizes that have passed through the printer lists whether they were simplex duplex monochrome or color and reports the page count PRINT DEMO Prints a demonstration page PRINT FILE DIRECTORY HP 3700 only Prints the name and directory of files stored in the printer PRINT PCL FONT LIST HP 3700 only Prints the available PCL fonts PRINT PS FONT LIST HP 3700 only Prints the available PS emulated PostScript fonts Paper handling menu The Paper handling menu allows you to configure input trays by size and type It is important to configure the trays with this menu before you print for the first time If you have used previous HP LaserJet printers you might be accustomed to configuring Tray 1 to first mode or cassette mode To mimic the settings for first mode configure Tray 1 for size ANY SIZE and type ANY TYPE To mimic the settings for cassette mode set either the size or type for Tray 1 to a setting other than ANY SIZE or ANY TYPE Table 7 42 Paper handling menu ees quee mem o TRAY 1 SIZE A list of available Allows you to configure the sizes appears paper size for Tray 1 The default value is ANY SIZE
305. ime Storage condition Normal maximum of 2 5 years 0 to 35 C 32 to 95 F Site requirements 13 Table 1 5 Supply storage requirements continued Severe maximum of 18 days High 35 to 40 C 95 to 104 F Low 0 to 20 C 32 to 4 F Severe maximum of 18 days Maximum temperature change 40 to 15 C 104 to 59 F rate within 3 minutes 20 to 25 C 4 to 77 F within 3 minutes Humidity Normal maximum of 2 5 years 35 to 85 RH Severe maximum of 18 days High 85 to 95 RH Low 10 to 35 RH Atmospheric pressure 460 to 760 mm Hg 18 1 to 29 9 in Hg Storage time Storage time 25years 0000000 5 25years 0000000 1The average storage time includes use time Use cartridges Lo 2 5 years of the date code on the cartridge 14 Chapter 1 Printer description ENWW Printer specifications Table 1 6 Physical dimensions HP Color 467 mm 447 mm 499 5 mm 36 6 kg LaserJet 18 4 in 17 6 in 19 67 in 80 52 Ibs 3500 3550 series with print cartridges HP Color 603 mm LaserJet 23 8 in i 3500 3550 series printer with print cartridges and optional Tray 3 447 mm 499 5 mm 42 kg 17 6 in 19 67 in 92 4 Ibs HP Color 467 mm 447 mm 499 5 mm 37 8 kg LaserJet 3700 18 4 in 17 6 in 19 67 in 83 16 Ibs series printer with print cartridges HP Color 603 mm 447 mm 499 5 mm 43 4 kg LaserJet 3700 23 8 in 17 6 in 19 67 in 95 48 Ibs series prin
306. in the future 1 The embedded Web server has three tabs that contain settings and information about the printer the Information tab the Settings tab and the Network tab Click the tab that you want to view 2 Seethe following sections for more information about each tab 422 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW ENWW Information tab The Information pages group consists of the following pages e Device Status This page displays the printer status and shows the life remaining of HP supplies with O percent indicating that a supply is empty The page also shows the type and size of print paper set for each tray To change the default settings click Change Settings e Configuration page This page shows the information found on the printer Configuration page e Supplies Status This page shows the life remaining of HP supplies with O percent indicating that a supply is empty This page also provides supplies part numbers To order new supplies click Order Supplies in the Other Links area on the left side of the window To visit any website you must have Internet access e Eventlog This page shows a list of all printer events and errors e Usage page This page shows a summary of the number of pages the printer has printed grouped by size and type e Device Information This page also shows the printer network name address and model information To change these entries click Device Information on the Settings tab e Control Pa
307. including calibration registration and color halftone settings ENWW Control panel troubleshooting 411 Table 7 44 Print quality menu ees ues qmemm ADJUST COLOR SET REGISTRATION AUTO SENSE MODE INK TRANSPARENCY PRINT MODES 412 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting CYAN DENSITY MAGENTA DENSITY YELLOW DENSITY BLACK DENSITY RESTORE COLOR VALUES PRINT TEST PAGE SOURCE ADJUST TRAY 1 ADJUST TRAY 2 ADJUST TRAY 3 EXPANDED SENSING TRANSPARENCY ONLY REJECT GUARD FUSER ACCEPT NOT ADVISED A list of available modes appears Allows you to modify the halftone settings for each color The default for each color is 0 Allows 1 sided and 2 sided image alignment The default for SOURCE is TRAY 2 The default for the sub items ADJUST TRAY 1 ADJUST TRAY 2 and ADJUST TRAY 3 is 0 If a tray is configured to PLAIN or ANY SIZE and the print job does not specify the media type the printer will adjust the print quality for the type of print media it senses The default is EXPANDED SENSING which senses transparencies glossy paper and tough paper REJECT GUARD FUSER stops the print job when a noncompatible transparency is detected This option protects the printer fuser from damage ACCEPTED NOT ADVISED allows the job to print normally even though a non compatible transparency is being used The default value is REJECT GUARD FUSER Allows you to associate each paper type with a specific p
308. ing Disabled uses the Adobe PS paper handling The default is ENABLED POWERSAVE TIME 2 MINUTE Reduces power 15 MINUTES consumption when the printer has been 30 MINUTES inactive for an extended period 1 HOUR Allows you to set the 4 HOURS length of time the 15 HOURS printer remains inactive before going into PowerSave mode The default is 30 MINUTES DISPLAY BRIGHTNESS 1 10 Allows you to adjust the brightness of the printer s control panel The default is 5 PERSONALITY AUTO Sets the default PCL personality to automatic switching PS PCL or PostScript emulation The default is AUTO 416 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW ENWW Table 7 45 fee setup submenu continued e WARNINGS AUTO CONTINUE SUPPLIES LOW JAM RECOVERY CONTINUE STOP AUTO ON Allows you to set the amount of time that a clearable warning is displayed on the printer control panel The default is JOB which is displayed until v is pressed ON is displayed until the end of the job that generated the warning Determines printer behavior when the system generates an Auto Continuable error The default is ON ON automatically continues printing after 10 seconds OFF pauses printing Press v to continue printing Sets low supplies reporting options The default is CONTINUE STOP pauses printing when a low supply is reported Press v to continue printing Sets whether the printer will attempt to reprint pa
309. ing sequence 114 toner cleaning spilled 92 toner level detection 161 tools required for service 204 total page count resetting 448 transfer block print process 152 transfer kit resetting count 99 448 transfer roller engaging motor M5 removal and replacement 274 transfer section 164 transfer unit life 207 removal and replacement 218 replacement configuration 355 477 replacing 99 resetting count 448 warranty 21 transfer unit ITB cleaning control 167 detection 168 secondary 164 transfer unit life detection 169 transparencies HP supported 16 24 printing 26 tray 1 loading paper 61 paper jams 360 removal and replacement 216 ENWW tray 1 paper sensor removal and replacement 253 tray 1 pick up roller removal and replacement 237 tray 1 pick up solenoid removal and replacement 263 tray 1 separation pad removal and replacement 237 tray 2 end plate removal and replacement 291 loading paper 59 removal and replacement 291 tray 2 guide right HP 3500 removal and replacement 294 tray 2 guide right HP 3700 removal and replacement 291 tray 2 paper sensor removal and replacement 253 tray 2 pick up roller removal and replacement 238 tray 2 pick up solenoid removal and replacement 264 tray 2 separation pad removal and replacement 238 tray 3 loading paper 57 tray 3 see also 500 sheet paper feeder 296 trays input supported media 16 troubleshooting all black or solid color 393 alphabetical printer
310. inter drive shaft connection Reinstallation tip Make sure that the two tabs 1 at the rear of the feed guide fit into the slots 2 located just in front of the fuser opening viewed from the rear of the printer with the fuser removed Figure 6 52 Feed guide unit tab locations ENWW Main assembly parts 241 Swing guide removal right 1 Open the front door and remove the transfer unit and the print cartridges See Transfer unit removal and Print cartridge removal 2 Remove the top cover See Top cover removal Remove the print cartridges See Print cartridge removal 4 Remove two screws 1 from the right rod bracket 2 to release the bracket from the door Figure 6 53 Right swing guide removal 1 of 4 5 Remove two screws 1 and remove the swing rod arm 2 Figure 6 54 Right swing guide removal 2 of 4 242 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW 6 Push the swing guide 1 in as far as it will go Figure 6 55 Right swing guide removal 3 of 4 7 Remove one spring 1 and then pull the developing drum lock arm 2 off its shaft Figure 6 56 Right swing guide removal 4 of 4 8 Remove the right front swing guide rail see Pick up feed assembly removal step 24 Make sure to remove the screw that secures the rail screw 1 mentioned in step 19 of the Pick up feed assembly removal procedure ENWW Main assembly parts 243 9 Pull the swing guide 1 toward you as far as
311. inter engine The DC controller lets printing process continue under the OHT mode only when an OHT is detected The same applies to the following pages in continuous printing e When in AUTO print mode If a plain paper gloss paper gloss film or OHT is detected the DC controller selects and switches the print mode to the appropriate one gloss paper gloss film or OHT mode and continues printing When auto mode is selected the printer starts at a normal mode In continuous printing the print mode remains unchanged from the one selected for the first page unless it detects a media different from the first page when it judges it media discrepancy e When in OTHER print modes than the above two If a plain paper gloss paper or gloss film is detected the DC controller lets the printing process continue without changing the selected print mode If an OHT is detected the DC controller judges it media discrepancy The same applies to the following pages in continuous printing Skew control mechanism The skew control which corrects the position of paper fed askew is controlled by the registration shutter The skew control performs the following sequence of tasks See Figure 5 60 Skew control mechanism Pickup feed system 187 1 The registration shutter stops the fed paper and evens up the edge of the paper along the shutter 2 Asthe feed roller continues rotating the paper is pushed against the shutter and gets warped
312. ion ENWW Paper feeder The paper feeder is an optional unit that is installed at the bottom of the printer It picks up and delivers a sheet of paper to the printer Figure 5 65 Paper feeder illustrates the paper path Paper feeder Figure 5 65 Paper feeder The paper feeder is controlled by the DC controller The DC controller drives each load solenoids clutches at the required timing via the paper feeder PCB The paper sensor detects the presence of paper The paper feeder is supplied with 24V for solenoids and clutches and 3 3V for sensors of power ENWW Paper feeder 197 Figure 5 66 Paper feeder PCB signal flow illustrates the flow of signals to and from the paper feeder PCB DC controller PCB Paper feeder PCB pU pie eme exei l l eooo pp pace ararcea rans _ U Paper feeder paper sensor l I i E SS gt gt SL Cassette pickup solenoid l pr ho gt gt CL Cassette pickup clutch l l i 38V l l LO 24v l l IE l EE Sarees l Figure 5 66 Paper feeder PCB signal flow Pickup delivery sequence The paper feeder is driven by the feed motor M1 via a gear The following is the sequence of paper pickup at the paper feeder 1 The printer controls the fuser heater temperature and drives the scanner motor upon receipt of a print command from the formatter The feed motor M1 drives when the fuser heater temperature reaches the s
313. is section includes explanations of the printer configuration page and the event log Diagnostics provides instructions on how to access and use the diagnostic tools incorporated into the printer Service menu provides procedures for entering the service menu and performing service oriented tasks These tasks include counts for entering the serial number service ID transfer unit maintenance fuser maintenance color page total page and clearing the event log Diagrams provides graphical locations and tables for the printer s internal assemblies and sensors 306 Chapter Troubleshooting ENWW Troubleshooting process When the printer malfunctions or encounters an unexpected situation the printer control panel alerts you of the situation This section contains a pre troubleshooting checklist to filter out many possible causes of the problem A troubleshooting flowchart helps you diagnose the root cause of the problem The remainder of this chapter provides steps for correcting problems e Usethe pre troubleshooting checklist to evaluate the source of the problem and to reduce the number of steps required to fix the problem e Use the troubleshooting flowchart to pinpoint the root cause of hardware malfunctions The flowchart guides you to the appropriate section of this chapter that provides steps for correcting the malfunction Before beginning any troubleshooting procedure check the following e Are supply items within their rated
314. ise after a specified period Pickup feed system 193 3 Asitrotates counterclockwise by the M2 the delivery roller turns the paper around The reversed paper is fed to the duplex delivery unit by the guide at the reverse unit Delivery roller be Il Bap as gt X C L ION Fuser LA is d roller Duplexing feed unit Reverse unit Pressure roller Step1 Step2 Step3 Figure 5 64 Reverse control Duplex feed mode The printer has the following 3 different feed modes for duplex printing The possible feed modes depend on the print mode and paper size 1 1 sheet feed Print 1 sheet two sided page in 1 duplex print operation 2 2sheets feed Print 2 sheets two sided page in 1 duplex print operation 3 Alternate feed Print two sided sheets while retaining 3 sheets in process inside the printer during duplex print operation The table below shows the conditions of available duplex feed 194 Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW ENWW Table 5 6 Conditions of available duplex feed A4 Letter Plain paper 1 sheet feed Gloss paper Gloss film Plain paper 2 sheets feed Thin paper Alternate feed Plain paper Thin paper 1 sheet feed The duplex feed mode can be selected by command from the formatter Pleas
315. it CS IL Fuser delivery a roller gt O Pressure roller Figure 5 62 Fuser delivery unit PS7 Fuser delivery paper sensor PS8 Face down delivery sensor M1 Feed motor M2 Delivery motor ENWW Pickup feed system 191 Duplexing feed unit HP 3700 printer only The duplexing feed unit reverses the paper after one side is printed and re feeds it to the pickup feed unit for printing the other side The following is the sequence of paper feed at the duplexing feed unit 1 The paper passes through the fuser after the front side is printed 2 The delivery motor M2 rotates counterclockwise after a specified period of time from when the paper has passed the fuser and delivers the paper to the duplexing feed unit The paper is reversed here 3 When the reversed paper sensor PS9 detects the edge of the reversed paper the duplexing feed solenoid SL5 is turned on to rotate the duplexing feed roller 4 The paper is fed to the duplexing feed unit by the roller being positioned in line by the oblique roller and the delivery guide 5 The paper stops at the duplex pickup position as the edge of the paper reaches the PS10 and the SL5 is turned off 6 When the duplex pickup is ready the SL5 is turned on and it feeds the paper into the printer 192 Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW NOTE Figure 5 63 ENWW 7 The paper after re correction of skew by the registration roller is fed to th
316. it count manually through the control panel To ensure optimum print quality the printer will need to be calibrated by performing 3 Calibrate Now s using the printer control panel by selecting CONFIGURE DEVICE PRINT QUALITY CALIBRATE NOW The Transfer Kit count can be reset to zero by setting CONFIGURE DEVICE RESETS RESET SUPPLIES NEW TRANSFER KIT YES Replacement parts configuration 355 Paper path troubleshooting Jam error messages occur if paper fails to arrive at or clear the paper path sensors in the allowed time Dedicated paper sensors detect whether paper is present in the sensor and if paper is fed normally When the DC controller detects a jam it immediately stops the printing process and displays the appropriate jam message for the sensor that detects the jam The location of all paper path sensors is shown in the figure below 356 Chapter Troubleshooting ENWW Paper path jam areas Jams occur in the areas shown in the figure below Jam messages on the control panel correlate with these areas For instructions on clearing jams see the following sections in this chapter Figure 7 1 Jam area locations and sensor positions Area 1 Tray 1 pick up area Area 2 Tray 2 pick up feed area Area 3 Tray 3 pick up area Area 4 transfer feed area Area 5 duplex feed area HP 3700 only Area 6 fuser face down delivery area PS1 Tray 1 multipurpose paper sensor PS2 Tray 2 cassette paper sen
317. it will go Then move it slightly to the left this allows it to be pulled forward a little more and pull it forward until it stops Now pull the swing guide to the left to remove it The swing guide should pull out easily Do not force the guide because it is fragile NOTE The swing guide has a retainer 1 that holds the swing guide shaft 2 in place This retainer prevents the swing guide from being removed until the guide is all the way forward as show in the figure below This view is hidden by the image drive assembly and cannot be seen unless that assembly has been removed Figure 6 57 Swing guide shaft removal Reinstallation tip Make sure the developing drum lock arms 1 are in the upright latched 2 position before reinstalling the swing guide and pushing it back In the figure below the top arm 3 is unlatched and the lower arm 1 is correctly latched If these arms are in the unlocked position they will prevent the swing guide from moving back Also these arms will occasionally unlatch while pushing the swing guide back preventing the guide from being moved back If that occurs pull the swing guide forward reach behind the guide and relatch the lock arms Figure 6 58 Developing drum lock arm position for swing guide installation 244 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW Swing guide removal left 1 Remove the high voltage power supply PCB See High voltage power supply PCB removal 2 Remove
318. izontal scanning scale is the size of the image in horizontal scanning Every color has its own photosensitive drum in each cartridge in this printer The positions of each drum differ and the laser beam lengths vary because of the variations among the cartridges that is the horizontal scanning area depends on the color This can cause a color misregistration at the edge of the image Formatter s DC controller PCB signal Reference pattern VIDEO signal Measuring pattern ITB SCANNER MOTOR ACCELERATION DECELERATION LED DRIVE signal REGLED COLOR MISREGISTRATION DETECTION signal REGPDM Color misregistration sensor PS12 Figure 5 53 Color misregistration control Color misregistration detection This printer detects the positions of each color s misregistration detection patterns formed on the ITB to measure the misregistration 176 Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW The DC controller monitors the color misregistration sensors PS12 during the foregoing color misregistration control There are two units of PS12 on the ITB each having one light emitter LED and one light receiver PD The following is the sequence of this control 1 The DC controller sends LED DRIVE signal REGLED and lets the LED emit light 2 The light of the LED is reflected off the ITB and received by the PD on the sensor The light amounts received at the PD differ depending on whether or not the light is re
319. l Panel Message 59 08 00 HP 3700 only event log only 59 08 ZZ HP 3500 3550 only event log only ZZ is color 00 Black 01 Cyan 02 Magenta 03 Yellow 1 The connectors in the developing motor drive signal line are not connected properly Reseat the developing motor connector J5006 and the DC controller PCB connector J1019 2 Faulty developing motor Replace the developing motor 3 Faulty DC controller PCB Replace the DC controller PCB Printer error troubleshooting 347 Table 7 3 Numerical printer messages continued 59 XYcontinued 59 90 and 59 A0 Errors on control panel PRINTER ERROR 59 09 00 event log only alternates with 59 10 00 event log only An error occurred when the drum motor To continue started or while the drum motor was rotating turn off then on 1 The connectors in the drum motor drive signal line are not connected properly Reseat the drum motor connector J5002 and the DC controller PCB connector J1019 2 Faulty drum motor Replace the drum motor 3 Faulty DC controller PCB Replace the DC controller PCB 59 99 00 event log only An error occurred in the secondary transfer engaging mechanism 1 Faulty secondary transfer engagement sensor Replace the secondary transfer engagement sensor 2 Faulty secondary transfer engaging solenoid Replace the secondary transfer engaging solenoid 3 Faulty feed motor Replace the feed motor 4 Faulty DC controll
320. l be delivered to the face down delivery tray Color Misregistration Sensor PS12 replacement configuration To ensure optimum print quality the printer will need to be calibrated by performing 3 Calibrate Now s using the printer control panel by selecting Configure Device PRINT QUALITY CALIBRATE NOW Laser scanner Assembly replacement configuration To ensure optimum print quality the printer will need to be calibrated by performing 3 Calibrate Now s using the printer control panel by selecting Configure Device PRINT QUALITY CALIBRATE NOW Fuser replacement configuration Under normal circumstances the printer will prompt you to order a new fuser when the control panel reads ORDER FUSER KIT This message indicates the fuser is nearing its end of life When you replace a fuser under these circumstances the control panel will not automatically prompt you to reset the fuser count If you continue printing with the ORDER FUSER KIT message it will eventually covert to the REPLACE FUSER KIT message At that time printing is stopped and a new fuser must be installed When you replace a fuser under these circumstances the control panel automatically prompts you to reset the fuser count after you have installed the new fuser 476 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams ENWW ENWW If you replace the fuser for any reason before the control panel reads REPLACE FUSER KIT for instance if the fuser is defective you will need to reset the fuser count
321. lacement 301 pick up feed assembly removal and replacement 225 pickup delivery sequence 198 pickup feed system 182 unit 184 PIN 448 PJL Printer Job Language Technical Reference Manual 77 PJL see printer job language 404 postcard sprinting 28 power connections 62 consumption 12 rating information 22 power supply high voltage circuit 132 low voltage circuit 126 131 power switch removal and replacement 251 power on troubleshooting 310 PowerSave disabling 65 power consumption 12 ENWW PowerSave Time using 65 pressure atmospheric 13 pressure roller removal and replacement 239 primary transfer roller engaging disengaging control 171 print cleaning block 155 development block 151 electrostatic latent image formation 150 fuser block 154 process 147 150 151 152 154 155 transfer block 152 print cartridge changing 97 fuel gauge 436 installing 55 life 207 removal and replacement 219 safety datasheet 32 print quality calibrating the printer 383 general 381 printing evaluation pages 436 troubleshooting process 381 troubleshooting transparencies 381 print quality troubleshooting environmental problems 382 pages 383 paperjams 382 toner buildup 382 print server HP Jetdirect 69 installing 85 print stop test 442 printer assemblies 9 calibration 447 cleaning 91 configuration 47 configurations 3 5 connecting power 62 duty cycle 15 features 6 installation 47 maintenance 91 memory 78 package content
322. ld reset 1 Turn the printer on 2 Asthe printer performs its power on sequence press and hold v until all three lights on the control panel are lit 3 When SELECT LANGUAGE appears on the display press a until COLD RESET appears on the display 4 Press v The printer will perform a cold reset and then continue its power on sequence NVRAM initialization CAUTION Initializing NVRAM will reset the serial number the event log the page counts the calibration settings and the EIO card HP 3700 only Use the Service menu to restore the serial number and page counts You will also need to reconfigure any computers that print to this printer to recognize the printer Initialize NVRAM only when absolutely necessary In most situations use a Cold reset to reset printer variables but still retain the needed values in the Service menu Before initializing NVRAM print a configuration page and a supplies status page or go to the service menu to gather the following information e total page count and color page count e fuser kit count e Serial number To initialize NVRAM 1 Turn the printer on and watch the control panel display 2 When the display begins showing the memory count press and hold w until all three lights on the control panel are lit 3 Press a 4 Press Menu The display should show SKIP DISK LOAD 5 Press w until NVRAM INIT is highlighted 6 Press v The printer will initialize NVRAM and then continue its po
323. le 8 13 on page 509 FACE DOWN DELIVERY ASSEMBLY RM1 0469 000CN Table 8 19 on page 523 FACE UP TRAY ASS Y RM1 0468 000CN Table 8 5 on page 485 FAN HP3700 RK2 0017 000CN Table 8 9 on page 495 FAN HP3500 3550 RK2 0153 000CN Table 8 9 on page 495 FLAG SENSOR RC1 1330 000CN Table 8 11 on page 499 FOOT RC1 2165 000CN Table 8 24 on page 533 FOOT ASS Y RM1 0459 000CN Table 8 13 on page 509 Formatter PCB HP3500 3550 Formatter PCB Q1319 69001 Table 8 3 on page 481 HP3700 Formatter Kit HP3700 Q1321 69001 Q1321 67924 FORMATTER PCB HP3500 3550 includes cage Q1319 69001 Table 8 10 on page 497 FORMATTER PCB HP3700 includes cage Q1321 69001 Table 8 10 on page 497 FRONT DOOR ASSEMBLY RM1 0463 000CN Table 8 6 on page 487 FRONT ROD LEFT ASS Y RM1 0443 000CN Table 8 5 on page 485 FRONT ROD RIGHT ASSY ROD RIGHT ASS Y rm1 0444 000CN Table 8 5 on page 485 FUSER LI e E 10 127V Q3655 69001 Table 8 23 on page 531 FUSER 220 240V Q3656 69001 Table 8 23 on page 531 GEAR 104T 25T 104T 25T RC1 1291 000CN Table 8 8 on page 491 542 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams ENWW ENWW Table 8 27 Alphabetical parts list continued Description GEAR 120T 17T GEAR 20T GEAR 25T GEAR 26T 22T 20T GEAR 26T 47T GEAR 27T GEAR 29T GEAR 31T 19T GEAR 38T GEAR 39T GEAR 43T GEAR 45T 25T GEAR 50T 90T GEAR 54T 17T GEAR 59T GEAR 69T GEAR 74T GEAR 74T GEAR 79T GEAR 86T 23T GEAR 90T
324. leading edge of the paper in the paper path e whether paper is in the paper path when the jam occurs or if paper is stuck in the input tray e whether the jam occurs at power up or while paper is moving e whether the paper is damaged and if it is where the damage occurs on the paper and where in the paper path the paper stops e whether the jam occurs when feeding from one particular tray e whether the jam occurs only when duplex printing e whether a particular type of paper is jamming or not jamming e whether any of the supplies are non HP non HP supplies are known to cause paper jams e whether the customer is storing the paper correctly overloading the trays damaging the edge of the paper during loading or using paper that has already been fed through the printer 380 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW Image formation troubleshooting The section identifies some things that can result in poor print quality For additional information refer to the HP LaserJet Printer Family Print Media Guide Print quality problems associated with media Some print quality problems arise from use of inappropriate paper Use paper that meets HP paper specifications See Supported media weights and sizes The surface of the paper is too smooth Use paper that meets HP paper specifications See Supported media weights and sizes The driver setting is incorrect To change the paper type setting see Type and Size The paper you are usin
325. ler PCB connector J1012 2 Faulty color misregistration sensor CPR Replace the color misregistration sensor CPR 3 Faulty DC controller PCB Replace the DC controller PCB 54 21 54 22 54 23 54 24 Toner Y M C K level sensor abnormality 1 The connectors in the toner level sensor control line are not connected properly Reseat the memory controller PCB connector J201 and the DC controller PCB connector J1025 2 Faulty memory controller PCB Replace the memory controller PCB 3 Faulty DC controller PCB Replace the DC controller PCB 54 30 XX Perform a CALIBRATE NOW in the CONFIGURE DEVICE PRINT QUALITY menu on the printer control panel Printer error troubleshooting 343 Table 7 3 Numerical printer messages continued 54 XX PRINTER for 54 32 error ERROR continued The image density adjustment value color misregistration adjustment value and PWM adjustment value see note below are stored in the EEPROM NVRAM of the formatter Whenever a formatter or laser scanner unit is replaced you must calibrate the printer to update the values a Image density adjustment on formatter replacement b Color misregistration adjustment on formatter replacement c PWM adjustment on both formatter and laser scanner unit replacement NOTE The PWM adjustment value enables reproduction of an image in the best tone The formatter determines the value based on the amount of laser
326. ler batches e The selected colors are undesirable when printed Select different colors in the software application or printer driver e If you are using a reflective overhead projector use a standard overhead projector instead Print quality problems associated with the environment If the printer is operating in excessively humid or dry conditions verify that the printing environment is within specifications See the getting started guide for this printer for information on operating environment specifications Print quality problems associated with paper jams Make sure that all paper is cleared from the paper path e If the printer recently jammed print two to three pages to clean the printer e If the paper does not pass through the fuser which causes image defects to appear on subsequent documents print two to three pages to clean the printer However if the problem persists see Print quality troubleshooting pages Print quality problems associated with toner buildup Over time toner and other particles can build up inside the printer This buildup can cause the following print quality problems e marks at even intervals on the printed side of the page e toner that smears easily e toner specs on the page e vertical streaks or bands on the page To correct these types of problems clean the printer See Cleaning the printer and accessories in chapter 4 382 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW ENWW Print quality
327. libration The DC controller controls the D half following the sequence below upon receipt of a command from the formatter The following is the sequence of this control 1 The DC controller forms each color s density detection patterns on the ITB according to the image data received from the formatter at the best developing bias value adjusted under the D max control Image formation system 179 2 The DC controller detects the density of the density detection patterns on the ITB by the image density detection and sends the data back to the formatter See Figure 5 56 Image density detection below 3 The formatter calibrates the halftone based on such data to obtain an ideal halftone image Image density detection The density of all four colors image density detection patterns formed on the ITB is detected to adjust the image density The DC controller controls the color misregistration sensor PS5 during the foregoing D max and D half controls for this detection PS5 consists of two detection sensors which are used in conjunction with the images on the ITB each having one light emitter LED and one light receiver PD The following is the sequence of this control 1 The DC controller sends LED DRIVE signal REGLED and lets the LED emit light 2 The light of the LED is reflected off the density detection patterns on the ITB and received by the PD on the sensor The light amount received at the PD differs dependi
328. lick and for emphasis particularly in situations where italic type would be confusing Italic type is used to indicate related documents or emphasis DISPLAY type indicates text as seen on the printer control panel display Commands you use on a computer keyboard or on the printer control panel are shown in Keycap Two examples are Menu and Stop COURIER type indicates text that you type on a computer keyboard exactly as shown Notes contain important information set off from the text Caution messages alert you to the possibility of damage to equipment or loss of data Warning messages alert you to the possibility of personal injury Conventions ENWW Table of contents 1 Printer description Chapter contents sssssssssssssssssseeseen ener emeret etre nennen rmm enne Printer configurations cic iore rb tah cere Eia e nana EE np re ERR nda 3 HP Color LaserJet 3500 3550 printer sssssssssssssssseeeene 3 HP Color LaserJet 3500n 3550n printer sss 3 HP Color LaserJet 3700 printer sssssssssssssseeemeeeii HP Color LaserJet 3700n printer sssssssssssssseseeeeme i HP Color LaserJet 3700dn printer sssssssssssssssseseseeeee eene 5 HP Color LaserJet 3700dtn printer ssssssssssssssssseeeeenererennnnnn nene 5 Printer fe tUreS P 6 PrINTERASSEMDIIGS 2 sio2F wana T M ED
329. life e Does the configuration page reveal any configuration errors NOTE The customer is responsible for checking supplies and for using supplies that are in good condition Pre troubleshooting checklist The list below describes basic questions to ask the customer to help quickly define the problem s Table 7 1 Pre troubleshooting checklist Environment Is the printer installed on a solid level surface 1 degree Is the power supply voltage within 10 volts of the specified power Source Is the power supply plug inserted in the printer and the outlet Is the operating environment within the specified parameters as listed in Chapter 1 of this manual Is the printer exposed to ammonia gas such as that produced by diazo copiers or office cleaning materials Is the printer exposed to direct sunlight Media Does the customer use only supported media Is the media in good condition no curls folds etc Is the media stored correctly and within environmental limits Input trays Is the amount of media in the tray within specifications Is the media set into the tray correctly Are the paper guides aligned with the paper Is the cassette properly installed in the printer Print cartridges e Is each print cartridge properly installed ENWW Troubleshooting process 307 Table 7 1 Pre troubleshooting checklist continued Transfer unit and fuser e Are the transfer unit and fuser properly installed e Is the front door clo
330. light emitter Developing Toner feed roller cylinder I i I I WV C cartridge Figure 5 38 Cartridge diagram Figure notes e M3 Drum motor e M4 Developing motor e CL2 K developing clutch Developing engaging disengaging unit The developing engaging unit has a developing engaging lever which shifts up and down as the developing engaging clutch is engaged or disengaged being driven by the delivery motor M2 This engages or disengages the developing cylinder from the photosensitive drum The developing section performs the following ENWW Image formation system 157 Memory tag control Cartridge presence detection Cartridge life detection Developing cylinder engaging disengaging control a B wr gt Developing cylinder engaging disengaging detection 158 Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW NOTE Figure 5 39 ENWW 6 The above operations are detailed in the following sections The cartridges are driven by two motors so the K cartridge can be driven independently for monochrome operations thus preventing wear of the other cartridges photosensitive drums DC controller PCB E o L OQ z S Er o o9 T a OQ 39 i i Z R L gt m gt gt T s Lu Lu o c ra a S a a zc a e O w S Ow O O 5 p mw E LI Q T m gt gt e O a oO ioc a r X aao o ui o o x 2 Z Tm EX ra a 2 d p Y P Q zj 9 O S 2 oz jp w
331. light received from the printer engine 344 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 54 31 Media Sensor Abnormality After adjustment Value Out of Spec 1 Try to calibrate the media sensor again 2 Dirty media sensor Clean the media sensor 3 The connectors in the media detection signal line are not properly connected Reseat the media sensor connector J601 relay connector J5026 and DC controller PCB connector J1008 4 Defective media sensor Replace the media sensor 5 Defective DC controller PCB Replace the DC controller PCB 54 32 Electrical Adjustment When the media sensor is replaced the light intensity of the sensor must be adjusted Follow the procedure below to adjust the light intensity 1 Turn the printer OFF 2 Open the front door 3 While pressing down the engine test print switch turn the printer ON 4 Close the front door 5 Load paper into Tray 1 use plain white paper for test printing 6 As the printer goes into READY period press the engine test print switch and test print 7 One sheet of paper will be fed into the printer from Tray 1 and will be delivered to the face down delivery tray 54 33 1 Defective laser scanner Replace the laser scanner unit 2 Defective DC controller PCB Replace the DC controller PCB ENWW Table 7 3 Numerical printer messages continued Message 55 X PRINTER ERROR alternates with To continue turn off then on 57 4 PR
332. livery tray ENWW Ordering parts 475 The Transfer Kit count is set when it is first placed in a printer by a back up value contained on the formatter If using a DC Controller that was previously installed in another printer the Transfer Kit count will be set to the count of the first printer the DC Controller was installed in The Transfer Kit count cannot be reset in the Service Menu The Transfer Kit count can be reset to zero by setting Configure Device RESETS RESET SUPPLIES NEW TRANSFER KIT YES Resetting the Transfer Kit count to zero after it has been used will result in using the Transfer Kit past its specified life which may result in a failure before low is reached NOTE For the HP Color LaserJet 3700 series printer a non duplexing printer can obtain the ability to duplex if the DC Controller was previously installed in an HP Color LaserJet 3700 series printer that had duplexing Media sensor PS5 replacement configuration Light intensity of the media sensor must be adjusted Follow the procedure below to adjust the light intensity 1 Turn the printer OFF 2 Open the front cover 3 While pressing down the engine test print switch on the left side of the printer turn the printer ON Close the front cover Load plain white paper in the Tray 1 As the printer goes into Ready period press the engine test print switch and test print oc R One piece of paper will be fed into the printer from the Tray 1 and wil
333. ller engaging solenoid SL4 removal ssessssssse 265 Duplex feed solenoid SL5 removal HP 3700 only sse 266 Registration clutch CL1 removal ssssseeeee nennen een 266 Black K development clutch CL2 image drive removal sseeseesssss 267 Developing engaging drive clutch CL3 removal se 268 Motor and fans dn i red st ot d dues plica ened pe pde nale e pu 269 Feed motor M1 removal 1 rre Le edo Pape eget e DR ein aged 269 Delivery motor M2 removal sssesseeeeeenenn ennemis 271 Drum motor M3 removal 5 e cies tenete RR rn ea Rue ec X dia RE Roda nd 271 Developing motor M4 removal ssseseeee enm eem 273 Primary transfer roller engaging motor M5 removal sem 274 Exhaust fan FAN1 removal a E EE tttm nnne 277 Circuit Boards s tin cerei te REIR x DN 278 DC controller PCB removal 2 etit e b te io Mea se e Pec ate a dene rene 278 Formatter PGB removal s 5525 2 ce Pret et dii litur od addens 279 High voltage power supply PCB removal ssssssee eme 281 Low voltage power supply PCB removal sssssssssssee ees 285 Memory controller PCB removal sieran iinei eem eene nnns 286 Control Panel PCB removal isores iraa ATA AA 287 Miscellaneous pans 5 n eet eiit rit 288 Swing rod guide left removal
334. loping motor M4 removal ssssseseeeeee enm ennemis 273 Primary transfer roller engaging motor M5 removal ss 274 Exhiaust fan FANTI removal iii tte de te eee Lo Ride e De Dn e HR eda Rs 277 Circuit Boards ded eda eO ee ae 278 DC controller PCB removal 4 5 ner DX cre er dae PI DER ERU RUE 278 Formater FOB removal iii oet bet t e tips Liberte eta 279 High voltage power supply PCB removal sess emm 281 Low voltage power supply PCB removal sssssssssssesee eene 285 Memory controller PCB removal ssssseseeeeen ennemis 286 Control Panel PCB removal trece eed netter tente A A taie 287 Miscellaneous parts angie ere ee era ae ee cue er dee dne due quede euet eed 288 Swing rod guide left removal ssssssssseseeeenn eene nennen 288 Swing rod lock guide right removal sse mme nens 288 Transfer contact assembly removal sss eene 288 Developing contact assembly sssssssssssseeeee eene nnnm 288 Tray 2 cassette parts removal sssssssssssseese eene eere nnn nnne 291 Tray 2 cassette ere utc ace tue ep edu de bane nice eed re bbe 291 Cassette Tray 2 guide right removal ssssseee emen 291 500 Sheet paper feeder Tray 3 covers sssssssssssee eene 296 Front cover removal 500 sheet paper feeder sssssssss
335. lor e software applications e printer drivers e PC operating system e monitors e video cards and drivers e operating environment humidity for example Keep the above factors in mind when colors on your screen do not perfectly match your printed colors For most users the best method for matching colors on your screen to your printer is to print sRGB oolors Swatch book color matching HP Color LaserJet 3700 series printer only The process for matching printer output to preprinted swatch books and standard color references is complex In general you can obtain a reasonably good match to a swatch book if the inks used to create the swatch book are cyan magenta yellow and black These are usually referred to as process color swatch books Some swatch books are created from spot colors Spot colors are specially created colorants Many of these spot colors are outside of the gamut color range of the printer Most spot color swatch books have companion process swatch books that provide CMYK approximations to the spot color Most process swatch books will have a note on what process standards were used to print the swatch book In most cases they will be SWOP EURO or DIC To get optimal color matching to the process swatch book select the corresponding ink emulation from the printer menu If you cannot identify the process standard use SWOP ink emulation For best matching of PANTONE four color 4C process colors use th
336. lorer 4 x or Netscape Navigator 4 x or later by browsing to the HP Web Jetadminhost HP Web Jetadmin 6 5 and above have the following features e Task oriented user interface provides configurable views saving network managers significant time e Customizable user profiles let network administrators include only the function viewed or used e Instant e mail notification of hardware failure low supplies and other printer problems now route to different people e Remote installation and management from anywhere using only a standard Web browser e Advanced autodiscovery locates peripherals on the network so the network administrator does not need to manually enter each printer into a database e Simple integration into enterprise management packages e Quickly find peripherals based on parameters such as IP address color capability and model name e Easily organize peripherals into logical groups with virtual office maps for easy navigation For the latest information about HP Web Jetadmin go to http www hp com go webjetadmin UNIX The HP Jetdirect Printer Installer for UNIX is a simple printer installation utility for HP UX and Solaris networks It is available for download from HP Customer Care Online at http www hp com support net printing Linux For information about Linux support go to http www hp com go linux Utilities The HP Color LaserJet 3500 3550 series printer and the HP Color LaserJet 3700 seri
337. low for the HP Color LaserJet 3700 series printer perform steps c and d below ENWW Circuit Boards 279 a Disconnect two connectors 1 remove five screws 2 and remove the formatter enclosure cover 3 Figure 6 117 Formatter PCB HP 3500 3550 removal 1 of 2 b Remove seven screws 1 and remove the formatter PCB 2 Figure 6 118 Formatter PCB HP 3500 3500 removal 2 of 2 c Remove the network interface card if installed 280 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW d Disconnect one connector 1 remove two screws 2 and remove the formatter cover 3 2a og MT E b Figure 6 119 Formatter PCB HP 3700 removal 1 of 2 3 Disconnect one connector 1 remove six screws 2 and remove the formatter PCB 3 Ba i e Figure 6 120 Formatter PCB HP 3700 removal 2 of 2 High voltage power supply PCB removal Remove the top cover See Top cover removal Remove the upper rear door See Upper rear door removal 1 2 3 Remove the rear cover See Rear cover removal 4 Remove the lower rear door See Lower rear door rear output bin removal ENWW Circuit Boards 281 5 Disconnect two cables 1 The formatter cage removal for the HP Color LaserJet 3500 3550 and 3700 series printers is slightly different Refer to the figure below either HP 3500 3550 or the HP 3700 for the specific printer formatter cage being removed 6 Remove four screws 2 from the side of the c
338. lowing parts 1 CPU 2 Fuser heater safety circuit 3 Thermoswitch The function of each part is described as follows e CPU The CPU monitors the output voltages of the main and sub thermistors MAINTH SUBTH If the MAINTH voltage goes below approximately 0 92 V 230 C 446 F or the SUBTH voltage exceeds approximately 2 8 V 280 C 536 F the CPU judges the fuser faulty and initiates the following steps e The CPU sets the FUSER HEATER DRIVE signal FSRD to stop L via ASIC and turns off the heater e The CPU sets the RELAY DRIVE signal RLD to stop H e The fuser heater safety circuit turns the RELAY DRIVE signal RLD to stop H e The relay drive circuit cuts the relay RL301 OFF and interrupts the current to the fuser heater e Fuser heater safety circuit The CPU monitors the output voltages of the main and sub thermistors MAINTH and SUBTH It cuts the relay RL301 off and interrupts the current to the fuser heater when the MAINTH voltage is under approximately 1 0 V 240 C 464 F or the SUBTH voltage exceeds approximately 3 0 V 290 C 554 F e Thermoswitch When the thermoswitch reads a temperature exceeding 250 C 482 F itis disconnected interrupting the current to the fuser heater Engine control system 129 NOTE 130 The thermoswitch is some distance away from the fuser heater The actual temperature of the fuser heater is about 50 C 122 F higher than the te
339. ly Calibrate the printer See Calibrate Now later in this chapter The image density is not properly adjusted Calibrate the printer See Calibrate Now later in this chapter Deteriorated transfer unit If the transfer unit is at the end of its life or its surface is deteriorated replace the transfer unit Poor secondary transfer bias contacts On the secondary transfer roller check the bias contacts to the high voltage PCB Clean contacts if dirty Replace defective parts with deformed damaged contacts Deformed Deteriorated secondary transfer charging Replace the secondary transfer charging roller roller Defective high voltage PCB Replace the high voltage PCB Defective DC controller PCB Replace the DC controller PCB ENWW Image defects 391 Light color Print out a solid filled image of the problem light color using an external device In the course of printing turn the printer off and take the problem color s cartridge out Manually open the cartridge shutter If the toner image on the photosensitive drum is not fully transferred to the transfer unit go to step B in the table below If the toner image on the drum before transfer is light go to step A Table 7 18 Causes for one color printing light Poor developing bias contacts Check the developing bias contacts to the high voltage PCB Clean contacts if dirty Replace defective parts if contacts are deformed or damaged Deteriorated cartridge Replace th
340. m Tray 2 12 FUSER MOTOR Drives the feed motor M1 and registration clutch CL 1 for 10 seconds which rotates the fuser paper path rollers and Tray 3 drive rollers 13 DUPLEX MOTOR 3700 only Drives the delivery motor M2 which rotates the rear output paper path rollers 14 TRANSFER 2 SOLENOID Drives the feed motor M1 and the secondary transfer roller engaging solenoid SL4 which rotates the fuser paper path rollers Tray 3 drive rollers and engages the secondary transfer roller which raises it about 1 2 inch 15 DUPLEX SOLENOID Drives the feed motor M1 and the duplexing feed solenoid drive SL5 which rotates the fuser paper path rollers and duplexing feed roller Remove Tray 2 to see the gear turning on the right side of the duplex area inside Tray 2 16 BLACK DEVELOPER DRIVE Drives the drum motor M3 and black print cartridge drive clutch CL2 for 10 seconds which rotates the ITB belt CMYK print cartridge OPC drums and black developer 17 TRAY 3 DRIVE Drives the feed motor M1 and paper feeder pick up clutch CL4 for 10 seconds which rotates the fuser paper path rollers and Tray 3 drive rollers 18 TRAY 3 SOLENOID Drives the feed motor M1 and paper feeder pickup solenoid SL3 which picks paper from Tray 3 Print Stop Test This diagnostic test can be used to isolate the cause of problems such as image formation defects and jams within the engine This test allows you to stop the paper anywhere along the
341. mental toner full color misregistration and media SCREW TAPPING TRUSS MAX10 XB4 7401 005C Secures anything to plastic HEAD N SCREW STEPPED M4X4 5 RC1 1624000C Secures the right side of the N pick up feed assembly to the frame SCREW S M3X8 XA9 1500 000C Secures plastic to metal N front door components rear swing guide rail components to center frame see Figure 8 16 Lower Frame Assembly HP 3700 and HP 3500 3550 2 of 2 6mm 8mm 10mm 12mm M3 M4 FO kA k k o O 14 mm 16 mm 25 mm 206 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW Supplies The customer replaces print cartridges the fuser and the transfer unit as they are depleted Chapter 4 explains when to replace supplies and provides instructions on replacing them NOTE The printer tracks the amount of use on the customer replaceable supplies by keeping a page count Swapping supplies between printers might cause a misrepresentation of supply life values and is not recommended If you replace either the fuser or the transfer unit when servicing the printer and these supplies have not yet reached the end of their estimated life you must reset the page count for these supplies through the CONFIGURE DEVICE menu on the control panel See Fuser replacement configuration and Transfer unit ITB assembly replacement configuration for instructions on resetting the transfer unit and fuser counts Table 6 2 Approximate replacement intervals for pri
342. messages that are not listed are self explanatory Status messages Status messages reflect the current state of the printer They inform you of normal printer operation and require no interaction to clear them They change as the state of the printer changes Whenever the printer is ready not busy and has no pending warning messages the status message Ready is displayed if the printer is online Warning messages Warning messages inform you of data and print errors These messages typically alternate with the Ready or Status messages and remain displayed until the v button is pressed If CLEARABLE WARNINGS is set to Job status in the printer s configuration menu these messages are cleared by the next print job Error messages Error messages communicate that some action must be performed such as adding paper or clearing a paper jam Some error messages are auto continuable If AUTO CONTINUE ON is set in the menus the printer will continue normal operation after displaying an auto continuable error message for 10 seconds Any button pressed during the 10 second display of an auto continuable error message will override the auto continue feature and the function of the button pressed will take precedence For example pressing the Stop button will cancel the job Critical error messages Critical error messages inform you of a device failure Some of these messages can be cleared by turning the printer off and then on These mes
343. move the developing drum lock arm 2 Figure 6 64 Left swing guide removal 6 of 6 9 Remove the white left swing guide rail See Pick up feed assembly removal step 25 10 Pull the left swing guide 1 toward the front of the printer 248 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW 11 Remove the swing guide by pulling it to the right being careful not to force it The guide must be positioned all the way forward to release the catch on the shaft which will allow the swing guide to be removed Reinstallation tip Make sure the projected part at the bottom of the swing guide is placed into the guide rail Reinstallation tip Make sure the developing drum lock arms 1 are in the upright latched 2 position as shown in the figure below before reinstalling the swing guide If these arms are in the unlocked position they will prevent the swing guide from moving back Also while pushing the swing guide back these arms will occasionally unlatch preventing the guide from being moved back If that occurs reach behind the swing guide and relatch the lock arms Figure 6 65 Left swing guide replacement ENWW Main assembly parts 249 Switches SW3001 nos gt Figure 6 66 Switch locations SW1 Door switch SW100 1Test print switch SW3001Power switch Door Switch SW1 removal 1 Refer to the left swing guide removal procedure steps 1 through 5 and remove the transfer contact assembly See Swing guide
344. mperature read by the thermoswitch Failure detection If the CPU judges the fuser faulty it performs the following tasks 1 It stops the output of the FUSER DRIVE signal FSRD turn L 2 ltsets the RELAY DRIVE signal RLD to stop turn H 3 Itsends an error message to the formatter The following conditions cause the CPU to judge the fuser to be faulty e Set up failure The temperature of the main thermistor does reach 40 C 104 0 C 32 F when power is turned on within 1 7 seconds from when the heater energizes or the temperature of the main thermistor never becomes 5 C 41 F lower than the target temperature during the paper passing e Abnormally low temperature of the main thermistor Break in the main thermistor The temperature of the main thermistor stays at approximately 70 C 158 F equivalent to approximately 3 17 V or lower for 4 0 seconds or longer e Abnormally high temperature of the main thermistor The temperature of the main thermistor stays at 230 C 446 F equivalent to approximately 0 92 V or higher for 1 0 second or longer e Abnormally low temperature of the sub thermistor The temperature of the sub thermistor stays lower than 90 C 194 F for 2 5 seconds or longer e Abnormally high temperature of the sub thermistor The temperature of the sub thermistor stays at 280 C 536 F equivalent to approximately 2 8 V or higher for 0 1 second or longer Fuser detection
345. ms and how to resolve other problems with the printer Tools for troubleshooting 425 Alerts tab e The Alerts tab allows you to configure the printer to automatically notify you of printer alerts The Alerts tab has links to the following main pages e Set up status alerts e Set up e mail alerts available for the HP Color LaserJet 3500 3550 series printer only e Administrative settings Set up status alerts page On the Set up status alerts page you can choose to turn alerts on or off specify when the printer should send an alert and choose from two different types of alerts e a pop up message e atask bar icon Click Apply to activate the settings Set up e mail alerts page On the Set up e mail alerts page you can set the e mail addresses you want to have alerts sent to and specify what kind of alerts should go to which e mail address You can have up to four e mail destinations concerning the following alerts e Supplies e Service e Paper path e Advisory You must set up an SMTP server to send e mail alerts Administrative settings page On the Administrative settings page you can set the frequency of how often the HP toolbox checks for printer alerts Three settings are available e once per minute every 60 seconds e twice per minute every 30 seconds e twenty times per minute every 3 seconds If you want to reduce network I O traffic reduce the frequency that the printer checks for alerts Documentatio
346. ms 107 12 Press the ridges on the tab on the left side of the door and fit the peg into the round hole NOTE After replacing the fuser you must also replace the pickup roller See To replace the pickup roller for instructions To replace the pickup roller NOTE The printer should still be turned off 108 Chapter 4 Printer maintenance ENWW 1 Remove Tray 2 and place it on a flat surface 2 Useone finger to push on the blue side of the pickup roller until the peg comes out of the right hole E WL e o Ko 0 3 Pull down gently on the pickup roller to remove the left peg of the pickup roller from the printer ENWW Replacing supply items 109 4 Remove the new pickup roller from the bag m NOTE For information on how to properly dispose of the used pickup roller go to http www hp com recycle 5 Hold the blue side of the pickup roller and insert the left peg into the round hole in the printer 6 Pushin on the pickup roller while lifting up on the right side of the pickup roller so the pin goes into the hole 110 Chapter 4 Printer maintenance ENWW T 8 9 Rotate the blue side of the pickup roller until it clicks into place o a 9 e Replace Tray 2 Turn the printer on After a short time the printer control pan
347. n 3 Unhook the two claws 2 and remove the separation pad 3 Figure 6 150 500 sheet paper feeder separation pad removal Pick up drive unit removal 500 sheet paper feeder Remove the right cover See Right cover removal 1 2 Disconnect two connectors 1 3 Release the cables from the cable guide 2 4 Remove four screws 3 and remove the pick up drive unit 4 LL ML mm m N Figure 6 151 500 Sheet paper feeder pick up drive unit removal ENWW 500 Sheet paper feeder internal parts 299 500 Sheet paper feeder sensor solenoid motor PCB Figure 6 152 500 Sheet paper feeder sensor solenoid motor PCB locations 1 500 Sheet paper feeder PCB 2 500 Sheet paper feeder pick up clutch CL4 3 500 Sheet paper feeder pick up solenoid SL3 4 500 Sheet paper sensor PS3 500 Sheet paper feeder PCB removal 500 sheet feeder 1 Remove the right cover See Right cover removal 2 Disconnect four connectors 1 remove one screw 2 and remove the 500 sheet feeder PCB 3 Figure 6 153 500 Sheet paper feeder PCB removal 300 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW Pick up clutch CL4 removal 500 sheet feeder 1 Remove the right cover See Right cover removal 2 Disconnect one connector 1 and one spring 2 3 Remove three screws 3 look under the metal bracket for two of the three screws and remove the sheet metal bracket 4 4 Remove the swing unit 5 Figure 6 1
348. n 476 screws 205 transfer unit configuration 355 477 replacement parts miscellaneous 288 replacing fuser 103 pickup roller 108 reset cold 446 Restoring the Service ID 449 reverse control 193 reversed paper sensor PS9 removal and replacement 257 RGB 384 right cover removal and replacement 213 S safety information 37 safety statements laser safety for Finland 38 scanner motor control 144 ENWW screws types of 205 screws types 472 secondary transfer charging roller removal and replacement 239 secondary transfer roller engaging sensor PS16 removal and replacement 262 secondary transfer roller engaging solenoid SL4 removal and replacement 265 secondary transfer roller engaging disengaging control 172 detection 173 security levels 76 network 76 selecting paper 24 sensors locations 453 separation pad 500 sheet paper feeder removal and replacement 299 serial number formatter resetting 448 serialnumbers 22 service agreements 46 approach 42 ID 449 next day on site 46 on site 46 parts information CD 44 service menu accessing 448 PIN 448 settings locking 76 network security 76 settings tab embedded Web server 423 site requirements location 11 printer 11 size supported 16 skew control mechanism 187 SL1 see tray 1 pick up solenoid 263 SL2 see tray 2 pick up solenoid 264 SL4 see secondary transfer roller engaging solenoid 265 SL5 see duplex feed solenoid 266 snail t
349. n and configuration ENWW 2 Liftthe printer from the packing pallet and place it in the prepared location Two people must lift and move the printer WARNING Do not lift the printer by the Tray 2 handle 3 If you are using an optional 500 sheet paper feeder lift the printer using the handles and align the pegs on Tray 3 Lower the printer onto the tray NOTE Only one Tray 3 500 sheet input tray can be installed ENWW Unpacking the printer 51 4 Remove all external orange tape orange protectors and other packaging material 5 Open Tray 2 and Tray 3 if necessary and remove the orange shipping lock inside each tray 52 Chapter 3 Installation and configuration ENWW 6 Open the lower rear door and make sure that the two blue pressure release lever actuators are in the upright position The two release levers are located on the left and right side of the lower rear door 7 Close the lower rear door 8 Lift the front door handle and pull down the front door NOTE When you open the front door you will hear components clicking CAUTION Do not place anything on the transfer unit Do not touch the top of the transfer unit or the contacts on the left side of the transfer unit ENWW Unpacking the printer 53 9 Remove the orange tape and orange shipping locks on the rear left and right sides of the transfer unit Remove any remaining tape from the printer 54 Chapter 3 Installati
350. n and configuration ENWW Parallel configuration HP Color LaserJet 3700 series printer only NOTE Figure 3 6 NOTE NOTE ENWW TheHP Color LaserJet 3700 printer supports network and parallel connections at the same time A parallel connection is made by connecting the printer to the computer using a bidirectional parallel cable IEEE 1284 compliant with a b connector plugged into the printer parallel port The cable can be a maximum of 10 meters or 30 feet long When used to describe a parallel interface the term bidirectional indicates that the printer is able to both receive data from the computer and send data to the computer through the parallel port The parallel interface provides backwards compatibility however USB or network connection is recommended to optimize performance Parallel port connection 1 B connector 2 Parallel port To use the enhanced capabilities of the bidirectional parallel interface such as bidirectional communication between the computer and printer faster transfer of data and automatic configuration of printer drivers ensure that the most recent printer driver is installed For more information see Printer software later in this chapter Factory settings support automatic switching between the parallel port and one or more network connections on the printer If the parallel cable is plugged in the USB port is disabled Parallel configuration HP Color LaserJet 3700 ser
351. n leftward the left roller turns The rotation of the alignment roller turns the alignment gear The rotation of the alignment gear moves the alignment arm Being interlocked with the arm the ITB feed roller moves frontward or backward as the alignment arm moves The force to feed ITB on each side varies as the ITB feed roller moves back and forth This brings the ITB back to the original position before it has been drawn left or right and the misalignment of the ITB is corrected 170 Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW Figure 5 49 ENWW This mechanism functions whenever the ITB rotates to prevent misalignment of the ITB ITB feed roller Direction ITB moves after correction Direction ITB has moved before correction e arm Alignment gear Alignment gear Rib 1 t Direction ITB Alignment roller right rotates Alignment roller Al Wl left ignment roller Alignment roller left left right Rib ITB ITB Direction ITB has moved before correction ITB self aligning mechanism Primary transfer roller engaging disengaging control This controls the disengagement of the primary transfer roller from the photosensitive drum to transfer only K black toner onto ITB for monochrome print The DC controller sends a control command and drives the primary transfer roller engaging motor M5 The following is the sequence of this control 1 The primary transfer engaging cam insi
352. n sensor PS15 controls the bias according to the environmental conditions e Image density control D max The color misregistration sensor PS12 calibrates the bias value when the image density is at max e Image halftone control D half The color misregistration sensor PS12 calibrates the halftone data in the formatter BH BH S ond E o2 Image density ITB a Q BO BQ detection pattern B g z2 z5 Bu omj OF c TE s g Lu Ww S S a o S8 Lu LL o 9 a a gt w Lu gt oO 2 am EIE ples o 2 z 2 Jg q 2 w 2 a G i z 2 TT A Environment sensor PS15 Color misregistration sensor PS12 Figure 5 55 Image stabilization control Environmental change control This control calibrates each bias value to obtain the best image according to the environmental changes 178 Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW ENWW The environmental conditions sensor PS15 on top of the fan detects the temperature and the humidity The PS15 sends this information to the DC controller in the form of the TEMPERATURE DETECTION signal TEMSNS and the HUMIDITY DETECTION signal HUMSNS The DC controller monitors the environmental conditions of the printer based on these two signals The DC controller controls the following biases to prevent image defects when it detects an environmental change upon receipt of these two signals e Developing bias e Primary transfer bias e Secondary transfer bia
353. n tab The Documentation tab contains links to these information sources e User Guide Contains the information about the printer usage warranty specifications and support that you are currently reading The user guide is available in both HTML and PDF format e Install Notes Contains late breaking information about the printer 426 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW Advanced Printer Settings window When you click the Advanced Printer Settings link a new window opens The Advanced Printer Settings window has the following tabs e Information tab e Settings tab e Network tab Information tab The Information tab provides quick links to the following information e Device status e Configuration e Supplies status e Device information e Event log e Usage page HP Color LaserJet 3700 series printer only e Print Info pages Settings tab The Settings tab has links to several pages that allow you to view and change the printer s configuration NOTE Software settings can override settings made in HP toolbox e Configure Device Configure all printer settings from this page This page contains the traditional menus found on printers using a control panel display These menus include Information Paper Handling Configure Device and Diagnostics e Device Information Name the printer and assign an asset number to it Enter the name and e mail address for the primary contact who will receive information about the printer Ne
354. ncy defect ssssssssssssssseeeeeeen menn enn 381 Print quality problems associated with the environment sesssssssssssss 382 Print quality problems associated with paper jams ssssssss 382 Print quality problems associated with toner buildup sssssseesee 382 Print quality troubleshooting pages sssse meme 383 Calibrating the printer ssssseseeee emen een errem eren nnns 383 Using GOIO a cats 384 HP ImageREt 2400 riirii iniaiaiai iadaa Kiinaa EA AEA EEEE 384 Paper Select OM m E 384 Color options available for the HP Color LaserJet 3700 series printer 384 Standard red green blue SRGB sse ennemis 384 Printing in four colors CMYK available for the HP Color LaserJet 3700 series printer 1 cera e pce ead E d de ea ed d nde 385 CMYK ink set emulation PostScript only ssem e 385 Managing gero or 386 Pantin Grayscale 5 pitt tna nmn rib tdg 386 Automatic or manual color adjustment esssssssseeeeeeeneneennn 386 Manual color options eee enne eren enne n nennen nnne 386 MatChing COONS ET 388 Swatch book color matching HP Color LaserJet 3700 series printer only 388 Adjusting Color balarice sesonon irois cese tacere etude du E deve edo ndi 389 ENWW ENWW Image
355. nd 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation 3 For regulatory purposes this product is assigned a Regulatory model number This number should not be confused with the product names or the product numbers Boise Idaho 83713 USA 1 August 2004 For Regulatory Topics Only Australia Contact Product Regulations Manager Hewlett Packard Australia Ltd 31 41 Joseph Street Blackburn Victoria 3130 Australia European Contact Your Local Hewlett Packard Sales and Service Office or Hewlett Packard Gmbh Department HQ TRE Standards Europe Herrenberger Stra e 140 B blingen D 71034 Germany FAX 49 7031 14 3143 USA Contact Product Regulations Manager Hewlett Packard Company PO Box 15 Mail Stop 160 Boise ID 83707 0015 USA Phone 208 396 6000 34 Chapter 1 Printer description ENWW Declaration of Conformity according to ISO IEC Guide 22 and EN 45014 Manufacturer s Name Hewlett Packard Company Manufacturer s Address 11311 Chinden Boulevard Boise Idaho 83714 1021 USA declares that the product Product Name HP Color LaserJet 3700 3700n 3700dn 3700dtn Regulatory Model Number BOISB 0302 00 Including Q2486A Optional 500 Sheet Input Tray Product Options All conforms to the following Product Specifications SAFETY IEC 60950 1999 EN60950 2000 IEC 60825 1 1993 A1 1997 A2 2001 EN 60825 1 1994 A11 1996 A2 2001 Class 1 Laser LED Product GB4
356. nd turn the screws to secure the formatter door to the printer 9 Replace the DIMM access door by inserting the tabs on the door into the slots on the printer Swing the door shut 82 Chapter 3 Installation and configuration ENWW 11 Turn the printer on 12 If you installed a memory DIMM go to Enabling memory If you installed a language font DIMM go to Enabling the language font DIMM HP color LaserJet 3700 only Enabling memory If you installed a memory DIMM set the printer driver to recognize the newly added memory To enable memory for Windows On the Start menu point to Settings and click Printers or Printers and Faxes Select this printer and select Properties On the Configure tab click More In the Total Memory field type or select the total amount of memory that is now installed Click OK Go to Checking DIMM installation HP color LaserJet 3700 only ogg om gt Enabling the language font DIMM HP color LaserJet 3700 only If you installed a language font DIMM in the printer you must select the Font DIMM option in the printer driver for the font DIMM to work properly ENWW Installing memory and font DIMMs 83 84 To enable fonts from the PCL 6 printer driver for Windows On the Start menu point to Settings and click Printers Select this printer and select Properties On the Configure tab click More Select the Font DIMM check box In the Co
357. nd unroute the cable 260 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW 3 Remove one screw 2 and remove the waste toner level sensor 3 Figure 6 84 Waste toner level sensor removal Developing engaging sensor PS14 removal 1 Remove the laser scanner assembly See Laser scanner assembly removal 2 Disconnect one connector 1 unhook two claws 2 and remove the developing engaging sensor 3 eZ SSA me Figure 6 85 Developing engaging sensor removal Environment sensor PS15 removal 1 Remove the left cover See Left cover removal ENWW Sensors 261 2 Remove one 1 screw and remove the sensor 2 Disconnect the connector 3 while removing the sensor Figure 6 86 Environmental sensor removal Secondary transfer roller engaging sensor PS16 removal 1 Remove the pick up feed assembly See Pick up feed assembly removal 2 Turn the assembly upside down 3 Remove the cable 1 from the cable guides Using one hand gently push two claws 2 apart With your other hand pull the sensor 3 out by holding the cable connector 4 Disconnect the connector to remove the sensor Figure 6 87 Secondary transfer roller engaging sensor removal 262 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW Solenoids and Clutches Figure 6 88 ENWW Solenoid and clutch locations SL1 SL2 SL3 SL4 SL5 CL1 CL2 CL3 CL4 Tray 1 pick up solenoid Tray 2 pick up solenoid pick up feed as
358. neeens 266 Registration clutch removal 1 Of 2 seem 267 Registration clutch removal 2 of 2 sse 267 Black development clutch removal 2 of 2 sse 268 Developing engaging drive clutch removal see 268 Motor and fam locations iio ei EEE oreet ise et Mo EER 269 Feed motor removal 1 of 3 eserse niani tnnt kn 270 Feed motor removal 2 of 3 reanna nna E E eem 270 Feed motor removal 3 of 3 sssssssssssssee eem 271 Delivery motor remioval ciiin eet tette app de re bkn nth din 271 Drum motor removal 1 of 3 esena A A 272 Drum motor removal 2 of 3 ssssssssssseee een 272 Drum motor removal 3 of 3 sssssssssseseee een 273 Developing motor removal 1 of 3 ssssssse eene 273 Developing motor removal 2 of 3 sssssssssseee ene 274 Developing motor removal 3 of 3 sssssssssee een 274 Primary transfer roller engaging motor removal 1 of 4 ss 275 Primary transfer roller engaging motor removal 2 of 4 ssss 276 Transfer roller engaging motor removal 3 of 4 ssssssssesss 276 Transfer roller engaging motor 4 of 4 sssssseene 277 Fan removal EE 277 Circuit board locations raies oiai ra E AAR LA AETR AEAN KAA 278 DC controller PCB removal sssseee ene 279 Formatter PCB HP 3500 3550
359. nel Displays messages from the printers control panel for example Ready or PowerSave Settings tab This tab allows you to configure the printer from your computer The Settings tab can be password protected If this printer is networked always consult with the printer administrator before changing settings on this tab The Settings tab contains the following pages e Configure Device Configure all printer settings from this page This page contains the traditional menus found on printers using a control panel display These menus include Information Paper Handling Configure Device and Diagnostics e Alerts Network only Set up to receive e mail alerts for various printer and supplies events e E mail Network only Used in conjunction with the Alerts page to set up incoming and outgoing e mail as well as to set e mail alerts e Security Set a password that must be entered to gain access to the Settings and Networking tabs Enable and disable certain features of the embedded Web server e Other links Add or customize a link to another website This link is displayed in the Other Links area on all embedded Web server pages These permanent links always appear in the Other Links area HP Instant Support Order Supplies and Product Support e Device Information Name the printer and assign an asset number to it Enter the name and e mail address for the primary contact who will receive information about the printer e Langua
360. nerally the reverse of removal Occasionally directions for difficult or critical replacement procedures are included The information in this section is intended for authorized service personnel only Repair notices Turn the printer off wait five seconds then unplug the power cord before servicing the printer Failure to completely disconnect the printer could result in severe injury Never operate or service the printer with the protective cover removed from the laser scanner assembly The reflected beam although invisible can damage your eyes Never operate the printer with any parts removed The sheet metal parts can have sharp edges Be careful not to cut yourself when handling sheet metal parts Caution regarding electrostatic discharge ESD The printer contains parts that are sensitive to electrostatic discharge ESD Watch for the ESD reminder shown at the left when removing printer parts Protect the parts that are sensitive to ESD with protective ESD pouches a ESD Required tools Before servicing the printer gather the following tools e Phillips 2 magnetized screwdriver 152 mm 6 inch shaft e Small flat blade screwdriver e Small needle nose pliers e ESD strap e Penlight optional 204 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW NOTE All components in the HP Color LaserJet 3500 3550 and 3700 series printers use Phillips head screws that require a 2 Phillips screwdriver Ensure that you have a Philli
361. nfigure Font DIMMs dialog box click Add to add the font file oa fF oN gt In the Add Font DIMM dialog box browse to the location of the font file select the font file and click OK In the Configure Font DIMMs dialog box select the installed DIMM 8 Click OK Print a configuration page N Checking DIMM installation HP color LaserJet 3700 only Check that the DIMMS are installed correctly and working To check DIMM installation 1 Turn the printer on Check that the Ready light is on after the printer has gone through the startup sequence If an error message appears the DIMM may have been incorrectly installed 2 Print a configuration page Check the Installed Personalities and Options section on the configuration page and compare it with the configuration page printed before the DIMM installation 4 Ifthe amount of recognized memory has not increased The DIMM may not be installed correctly Repeat the installation procedure The DIMM may be defective Try a new DIMM Chapter 3 Installation and configuration ENWW Installing an HP Jetdirect print server card in the HP color LaserJet 3700 series printer You can install an HP Jetdirect print server card in the base model printer which comes with an open EIO slot To install the HP Jetdirect print server card 1 Turn the printer off ENWW Installing an HP Jetdirect print server card in the HP color LaserJet 3700 series printer 85 3 Locate the EIO sl
362. ng 88 HP Jetdirect print server card function 69 installing 85 HP Support Assistant 44 564 Index HP toolbox 74 424 HP Web Jetadmin 73 humidity site requirements 13 site requirments 11 storing supplies 13 l image distortion 398 formation system 146 halftone control D half 179 mask control 143 stabilization control 177 image defects all black or solid color 393 blank images 393 blank spots 397 color misregistration 398 color missing 397 dark color 392 dark images 392 distortion 398 from dirt on paper 394 horizontal lines 396 light color 392 light images 391 misplaced images 399 reversed color 400 smearing 399 snail tracks 400 vertical dots 394 vertical lines 395 image density control D max 179 detection 180 image drive assembly removal and replacement 223 information menu 407 information tab embedded Web server 423 inkjet transparenices avoiding 26 input trays supported media 16 installing DIMMs 79 HP Jetdirect external print server 85 88 memory 79 print cartridges 55 intermediate transfer belt see ITB 218 internal components part numbers 489 isolating problems 42 ENWW ITB transfer unit 164 transfer unit secondary 164 replacing 99 replacing before end of life 103 see transfer unit 218 J jam see paperjams 357 K Korean EMI statement 37 L language changing on display 63 control panel overlay 63 overlays 63 printer job PJL 404 language font DIMM enabling 83 laser co
363. ng ENWW Formatter previously installed in another printer replacement configuration When the formatter PCB is being replaced with one that was installed in another printer an NVRAM initialization will need to be performed Before doing an NVRAM INIT print a configuration page and a supplies status page in the INFORMATION menu to obtain the page counts counts for any of the supplies serial number and the born on date If a configuration page and a supplies status page cannot be printed this information can be obtained from the Service menu prior to replacing the formatter or performing this action 1 To perform an NVRAM initialization follow the procedure below 2 Press and hold the button after powering up until all LEDs are on then release the w button 3 Press the 4 button once and release 4 Press Menu once and release The list of choices will be displayed 5 Press w or a until NVRAM INIT is highlighted 6 Pressv to invoke an NVRAM INIT In addition the Total Mono Pages Total Color Pages Serial Number Service ID Cold Reset Paper if needed and the Fuser Kit Count will need to be reset using the service menu The Transfer Kit count will be unaffected by the replacement of a formatter To ensure optimum print quality the printer will need to be calibrated by performing 3 Calibrate Now s using the printer control panel by selecting CONFIGURE DEVICE PRINT QUALITY CALIBRATE NOW DC Controller New replacement
364. ng ENWW O only toggle this switch by opening and closing the front door Do not toggle this switch with the door open using a screw driver You can damage the gears on the right side and the print cartridges when closing the front door after the switch has been defeated If the front door switch is toggled with the front door open you will not be able to close the front door If this happens to close the door you must perform the following steps 1 Remove the right cover See Right cover removal in chapter 6 2 Align the engaging rack to the CORRECT position 1 as shown by the figure below CORRECT 3 Close the front door PS16 the secondary transfer roller engaging sensor is not included in the sensor tests A 59 99 on the control panel indicates an error occurred in the secondary transfer roller engaging mechanism PS16 may be the cause of the error Paper Path Test This diagnostic will generate one or more test pages that you can use to isolate the cause of paper jams To isolate a problem you can specify which input tray to use specify whether to use the duplex path and specify the number of copies to print Multiple copies can be printed to help isolate intermittent problems The following options become available after you enter the diagnostic Print test page Run the paper path test from the default settings Tray 2 no duplex and one copy To specify other settings scroll down the menu and select the setting th
365. ng on the toner density where the light is reflected off 3 The light receiver converts the received light amount to voltage and sends it to the DC controller in the form of the IMAGE DENSITY DETECTION signal REGPDD 4 The DC controller converts the REGPDD signals to density value digital and stores them DC controller PCB za a Q a eR 2 a OO 0 gg W Lu LLI Qc S Image density AG T detection pattern gt amp 5 o E 2 Lu lu 2 T s LU O a m c z a ee Color misregistration sensor R SSS Lp 4 LA Color misregistration sensor L Light emitter Light receiver LED PD Figure 5 56 Image density detection 180 Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW The DC controller notifies the formatter of each error when the following errors are found during image density detection The initial value is reset to the new image density adjustment value when an error occurs e Image density sensor abnormality warning No light is received at the light receivers e Image density out of guaranteed range warning The measurement is found to be out of specified range ENWW Image formation system 181 Pickup feed system The pickup feed system being comprised of various feed rollers picks up and feeds a sheet of paper This printer has two pickup trays the Tray 2 cassette and the Tray 1 multipurpose and two delivery trays the face down tray and the face up tray The Tray 1 multip
366. ngaging control This controls the disengagement of the developing cylinder from the photosensitive drum to prevent toner from being developed on the drum during non transferring time The developing cylinder is engaged disengaged when the DC controller drives the developing engaging clutch CL3 under a specified condition such as when one print is completed See Figure 5 39 Developing engaging disengaging unit The following is the disengaging sequence 162 Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW ENWW 1 The DC controller turns ON the developing engaging clutch CL3 2 When the CL3 stays engaged for specified time the drive of delivery motor M2 raises the developing engaging lever up 3 The developing engaging lever then raises the bottom of the cartridge in the back and disengages the developing cylinder from the photosensitive drum The developing cylinder will engage back with the drum when the DC controller turns ON the CL3 for a specified time to put the developing engaging lever back to its original position The developing cylinder disengages under the following conditions e Power is turned ON e Print operation is complete e During cartridge cleaning described on the following page e During ITB cleaning Developing cylinder engaging disengaging detection This monitors whether or not the developing cylinder is engaged with the photosensitive drum The DC controller monitors the developing engaging sensor PS14 du
367. nized with the BD signal e SERIAL CLOCK SCLK signal formatter output The formatter outputs this synchronizing clock signal when it sends or receives a status or command to or from the DC controller The formatter sends a command in synchronization with the falling edge of the SCLK signal and receives a status in synchronization with the start up of the SCLK signal e STATUS COMMAND SC signal formatter input and output This is a bi directional signal to send and receive a serial data between the formatter and the DC controller The formatter and the DC controller send and receive a status or command with this signal e STATUS CHANGE NOTIFY CCRT signal formatter input This signal notifies the formatter of any specific status changes to the printer The formatter refers to the DC controller through SC line to find out which status has changed upon receipt of a CCRT signal e PAPER FEED PFED signal formatter input This signal indicates that the printer engine is ready to pick up paper When a PFED signal is received becomes L the formatter sends a pickup command for the optional feeder to the DC controller e PAPER DELIVERY PDLV signal formatter input This signal indicates the delivery timing from the printer to the optional feeder When a PDLV signal is received becomes L the formatter sends a delivery command to the DC controller e PAPER RE FEED TOPR signal formatter input This signal notifies t
368. nly sseee 84 Installing an HP Jetdirect print server card in the HP color LaserJet 3700 series printer 85 To install the HP Jetdirect print server card ccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeseeseenaeeas 85 Installing an HP Jetdirect en3700 external print server ssese 88 4 Printer maintenance Chapter Content 91 Cleaning the printer and accessories sssssssssseene enne ener 92 Cleaning spilled toner ssssseee eem eene nennen nen 92 Managing SUppIIGS EE c 94 Siga csm e 94 Approximate replacement intervals for supplies for the HP Color LaserJet 3500 series printer 94 Approximate replacement intervals for supplies for the HP Color LaserJet 3550 3700 series printer sssssssssssssssesesssseeeeenee enne eene enne 94 Locating s pplies and parts eterne eek ta a desees e erae enden en eene e E HERE EN 96 Replacing supply items sssssssssssssssssssseeenee eene eren nnne nnne nnn enn nnne nns 97 Replacing the transfer Unit inci nine ecce ete Rota eeu ee ea ERE M ERE E RARE EE RR de da 99 Replacing the fuser and pickup roller ssssssssseenees 103 5 Theory of operation Chapter contents sssssssssssssssseseeseenee nene eene T 3 sf i TeXeler Ir liio
369. ns M1 Feed motor M2 Delivery motor M3 Drum motor M4 Developing motor M5 Primary transfer roller engaging motor FAN1 Exhaust fan Diagrams 455 PCBs Figure 7 23 PCB locations DC controller PCB Memory controller PCB High voltage power supply PCBs Low voltage power supply PCB Formatter PCB Control panel PCB OnhWN 456 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW J1022 ania J1014 E CP1015 SW1001 Figure 7 24 Location of DC controller PCB connectors HP 3700 31 J1022 ET vL CP1015 SW1001 Figure 7 25 Location of DC controller PCB connectors HP 3500 3550 ENWW Diagrams 457 Connector locations J1006 J1011 Figure 7 26 Connector locations for the HP Color LaserJet 3700 printer 1 of 2 458 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting J5010 D J5009 ENWW Figure 7 27 Connector locations for the HP Color LaserJet 3700 printer 2 of
370. ns 15 Tray T paper sizes EIA E tp d E t m Ra PAETA 16 Tray 2 paper SiZes ov RUP n e 17 Tay g paper Sizes cuni det tet eo eo n ds 17 Automatic two sided printer available on some models of the HP Color LaserJet 3700 series printer sss 17 Model names and numbers sssssssssssssseseee emen 22 Weight equivalence table ssssssesee em emm emn 29 Related documentation and software ssssssssssssssss 45 Printer drivers for the HP Color LaserJet 3500 3550 series printer 71 Printer drivers for the HP Color LaserJet 3700 series printer 72 Other software applications sssssssssssee nnen 75 Printer securty levels arrira tat te Pt tu ae eis etie ee eda 76 Gleaning the printer reete cete epe eerte e densi pete e eias 92 Approximate replacement intervals sssssssssse 94 Approximate replacement intervals sssssssssseeee 95 Basic operation sequence cceceeeeeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeaecaeeeeeeeeeeeteteetseaaeas 115 Motor Functions xo ooi itte tectis pt de dade Oeo ee 122 Function of Solenoids sse esent 123 Function of clutches 4 eibi seed tastes een que o Mane et 123 Print media and feed speeds sssssssssssssseeeeennnenees 187 Conditions of available duplex feed sssssssssssssseeeses 195 Common fastefers tene t ees tie
371. nsfer roller engaging solenoid SL4 when the power is turned on a door is closed and a print is completed The following is the sequence of this control 1 The secondary transfer roller is disengaged from the ITB since the engaging cam is pressing the engaging arm down 2 The DC controller sends a SECONDARY TRANSFER ENGAGING SOLENOID DRIVE signal and turns on the secondary transfer roller solenoid SL4 for 0 5 second 3 Asthe SL4 is turned on the feeder motor M1 drives the secondary transfer roller engaging cam and rotates it 4 Asthe cam rotates the secondary transfer roller engaging arm goes up and pushes the secondary transfer roller up 172 Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW The secondary transfer roller disengages from the ITB when the DC controller turns the SL4 again for 0 5 second and rotates the cam a half turn ITB P all Secondary transfer roller engaging cam A N X Q i B SL4 a I 1 Secondary transfer roller engaging Feed motor solenoid SOLENOID DRIVE signal SL2 FEED MOTOR CONTROL signal SECONDARY TRANSFER ENGAGING Secondary transfer AN roller Secondary transfer roller NM engaging arm Figure 5 51 Secondary transfer roller engaging disengaging control Secondary transfer roller engaging disengaging detection The DC controller monitors the secondary transfer roller engaging sensor PS16 when the secondary transfer is completed The secondar
372. nt cartridges Supply item Printer message HP 3500 3550 HP 3700Page Approxima To install Page counts counts te time period Black K print REPLACE BLACK 6 000 pages 6 000 pages HP 3500 See Print cartridge CARTRIDGE 6 months cartridge HP 3550 3 moval 700 4 months Cyan C print REPLACE CYAN 4 000 pages 6 000 pages 4 months See Print cartridge CARTRIDGE cartridge removal Magenta M REPLACE MAGENTA 4 000 pages 6 000 pages 4 months See Print print cartridge CARTRIDGE cartridge removal Yellow Y print REPLACE YELLOW 4 000 pages 6 000 pages 4 months See Print cartridge CARTRIDGE cartridge removal Approximate life is based on 1 000 pages per month for the HP Color LaserJet 3500 series printer and 1500 pages per month for the HP Color LaserJet 3550 3700 series printer Approximate average A4 letter size page count based on approximately 5 percent coverage of individual colors Table 6 3 Approximate replacement intervals for supply items Supply item Printer message HP 3500Page HP 3550 3700 Approxima To install counts Page counts te time period Image transfer REPLACE 60 000 pages 75 000 pages HP 3500 See kit transfer unit TRANSFER KIT 60 months Transfer unit HP 3550 3 700 50 months ENWW Supplies 207 Table 6 3 Approximate replacement intervals for supply items continued Supply item Printer message HP 3500Page HP 3550 3700 Approxima
373. nt to the printer by using a DOS COPY command or an ASCII file download utility The PJL Technical Reference Manual is located on CD ROM part number 5961 0976 Order a copy of this manual from the HP website at http www hp com In the following examples EC represents the escape character For more information on using escape characters see the PJL Technical Reference Manual To lock or unlock the printer control panel if a password has not been set send the following ASCII sequence to the printer EC 12345X PJL JOB PJL DEFAULT CPLOCK NONE or MINIMUM MODERATE or MAXIMUM QPJL EOJ ECS 12345X To set the password send the following ASCII sequence to the printer EC 12345X PJL JOB PJL DEFAULT PASSWORD numeric password 0 to 65535 QPJL EOJ ECS 12345X To lock or unlock the control panel if the password has been set send the following ASCII sequence to the printer EC 12345X PJL JOB PASSWORD numeric password PJL DEFAULT CPLOCK NONE or MINIMUM MODERATE or MAXIMUM QPJL EOJ ECS 12345X Setting security on the printer 77 Printer memory for the HP Color LaserJet 3700 series printer NOTE NOTE NOTE 78 The printer has three DIMM slots The bottom slot is for the firmware DIMM For maximum flexibility in DIMM support the formatter is designed with three 168 pin DIMM slots and a fourth 100 pin DIMM slot Use these DIMM slots
374. nter is in the special diagnostics mode the display should read Ready Diagnostics Mode To exit press Stop KEY 434 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW NOTE WARNING ENWW When the printer is in the special diagnostics mode the four tests listed above appear in the menu and are available to be run To access other diagnostic tests or to leave the special state press the Stop button and then select Exit diagnostics The printer will reset itself and then return to the normal state A good understanding of how the printer operates is required to use the engine diagnostics successfully Before proceeding with these diagnostic tests be sure you understand the information in Chapter 5 of this manual Diagnostics tests Different tests can be used to isolate different types of issues For component or noise isolation you can run the diagnostics with the left right and rear covers removed Do not operate the printer with the front door open Operating the printer with the front door open will cause the gears on the right side of the printer to become out of sync with the front door Upon closing the front door the gears on the right side and print cartridges can be damaged Take caution when performing printer diagnostics to avoid risk of injury Only trained service personnel should access and run the diagnostics with the covers removed Never touch any of the power supplies with the printer turned on Diagnostics 435 Diagnostics f
375. nterface troubleshooting 405 PJL JOB This command informs the printer of the start of a PJL job and synchronizes the job status information The printer counts print jobs including nested jobs incrementing the job counter for the PJL JOB command and decrementing it for PJL EOJ The printer accepts the NAME parameter and returns the name string in the unsolicited JOB start status message if unsolicited job status is enabled The printer transmits the unsolicited JOB status message to every I O channel that has enabled this function This message s format is PJL USTATUS JOB lt CR gt lt LF gt START lt CR gt lt LF gt NAME lt job name gt lt CR gt lt LF gt lt FF gt The printer resets the nested job counter whenever it switches the source to a different I O channel This prevents a corrupt job on one channel from disrupting the activities on another channel PJL EOJ This command identifies the end of a print job and is a hint for the I O switching algorithm The printer counts nested jobs and recognizes job boundaries when the counter decrements to zero The printer ignores isolated EOJ commands Each EOJ must be preceded by a JOB command PJL ECHO This printer supports the ECHO command which transmits its parameters over the I O channel to the host that issued the command PJL USTATUS JOB ON OFF This command enables or disables the JOB status for the I O channel that delivers the command PJL USTATUSOFF
376. ntrol 140 laser emission control 142 laser safety statements United States 37 laser scanner system 139 unit 139 laser scanner assembly removal and replacement 222 replacement configuration 355 476 left cover removal and replacement 210 left front cover removal and replacement 211 levels security 76 Linux software 73 loading paper procedure 57 59 61 locating parts and supplies 96 locking control panel settings 76 low voltage power supply circuit 126 131 low voltage power supply PCB removal and replacement 285 lower rear door removal and replacement 215 M M1 see feed motor 269 M2 see delivery motor 271 M3 see drum motor 271 M4 developing motor M4 273 M5 transfer roller engaging motor 274 ENWW maintenance agreements 46 printer 91 managing color 386 supplies 94 manual color adjustment 386 manual sensor test 436 matching colors 388 Material Safety Data Sheet MSDS 32 mechanisms flicker prevention 129 skew control 187 media colored paper 26 detection 189 glossy paper 26 heavy paper 28 loading tray 59 61 loading tray3 57 nonsupported 24 preprinted forms and letterhead 28 recycled paper 29 selecting 24 selection 384 sizes 16 special 26 transparencies 26 weight 29 weights 16 media sensor PS5 removal and replacement 255 replacement configuration 354 476 memory enabling 83 font DIMMs 79 installing 79 printer 78 memory controller PCB removal and replacement 286 memory tag cont
377. nufactured assemblies for some parts These are identified in chapter 8 and can be ordered from Hewlett Packard Customer Support Americas HPCS A or Hewlett Packard Customer Support Europe HPCS E Supplies Paper and print cartridges can be ordered directly from Hewlett Packard See chapter 8 for ordering information World Wide Web Printer drivers updated HP printer software and product and support information can be obtained from the following website In the U S http www hp com support clj3500 or http www hp com support clj3700 Printer drivers may be obtained from the following websites In China http www hp com cn support clj3500 or ftp www hp com cn support clj37 00 In Japan ftp www jpn hp com support clj3500 or ftp www jpn hp com support clj3700 In Korea http www hp co kr support clj3500 or http www hp co kr support clj3700 In Taiwan http www hp com tw support clj3500 or http www hp com tw support clj3700 or the local driver website http www dds com tw HP service parts information CD ROM This powerful CD ROM based parts information tool is designed to give users fast easy access to parts information such as pricing and recommended stocking lists for a wide range of HP products To subscribe to this quarterly service in the U S or Canada call 800 336 5987 In Asia Pacific call 65 740 4484 Parts identification and pricing information can also be checked via the World Wide Web at http www
378. o D 0 0 oo CD e 8 Onthe fuser squeeze and lift the black tabs to open the shutter door WARNING Do not open the fuser shutter door while the fuser is in the printer ds TEE 1 FETTE E 9 Remove any jammed paper NOTE If the paper tears make sure that all paper fragments are removed from the paper path before you resume printing 10 Hold the fuser with your thumbs on the blue ridges and your fingers on the blue latches Push both sides of the fuser into the printer Jn i H sajili um Hmm le 999 CF QQUS A Vvv JC C om jJ Jr N ENWW Paper path troubleshooting 375 11 Press the black ridges on the front of the fuser until the fuser clicks into place 12 To reattach the lower rear door rear output bin hold the door at a 45 degree angle and fit the peg into the round hole on the right side 13 Press the ridges on the tab on the left side of the door and fit the peg into the ro
379. o 215 x 355 mm 8 5 x 14 inches Prints on paper with weights from 60 g m2 to 163 g m2 16 to 43 Ib bond Prints on a wide range of media types including glossy heavy labels film overhead transparencies and envelopes Multiple gloss levels A 250 sheet paper feeder Tray 2 that supports letter legal executive executive JIS A4 A5 B5 JIS B5 ISO and 216 x 330 mm 8 5 x 13 inches paper sizes Optional 500 sheet paper feeder that supports letter and A4 paper sizes Tray 3 For more information see Print media specifications A 150 sheet face down output bin top and a 25 sheet face up output bin rear Optional 500 sheet paper feeder that supports letter and A4 paper sizes Tray 3 80 internal fonts available for both PCL and PostScript emulation 80 printer matching screen fonts in TrueType format available with the software solution Prints on paper from 76 x 127 mm 3 x 5 inches up to 215 x 355 mm 8 5 x 14 inches Prints on paper with weights from 60 g m2 to 163 g m2 16 to 43 Ib bond Prints on a wide range of media types including glossy heavy labels film overhead transparencies and envelopes Multiple gloss levels A 250 sheet paper feeder Tray 2 that supports letter legal executive executive JIS A4 A5 B5 JIS B5 ISO and 216 x 330 mm 8 5 x 13 inches paper sizes Optional 500 sheet paper feeder that supports letter and A
380. ode PD and is converted to voltage level Then it is compared with the reference voltage voltage equivalent to the target laser light amount inside the laser driver IC 3 The laser driver circuit controls the laser current until the voltage level of the laser light amount reaches the reference voltage 4 The laser driver circuit is put to Force LD OFF mode to turn the LD OFF and it stores the adjusted laser light amount in the capacitors 1C 103 IC112 Horizontal synchronous control The horizontal synchronous control horizontally aligns the scanning starting position of the image This control performs the following steps 1 The DC controller puts the laser driver circuit into Force LD ON mode during the unblanking interval to force the LD to emit light The unblanking interval is the interval when a LD emits light in the non image area 2 The laser beam is reflected from the BD mirror fixed at the scanning starting position in the optical path of the laser beam and sent to the BD circuit in the laser scanner unit 3 The BD circuit detects the laser beam generates a BD INPUT signal BD2l and sends the signal to the DC controller 4 The DC controller generates the HORIZONTAL SYNCHRONOUS signal Y BD1 M BD2 based on the BD2I signal and sends it to the formatter The signal BD21 is generated fresh based on the signal BD1 although both signals are output at the same time 142 Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW
381. of solenoids and clutches turn the printer ON Close the front cover Load plain white paper in the multi purpose tray As the printer goes into READY period press the engine test print switch and test print NO on R One sheet of paper will be fed into the printer from the multipurpose tray and will be delivered to the face down delivery tray The Transfer Kit count is set when it is first placed in a printer by a back up value contained on the formatter If using a DC Controller that was previously installed in another printer the Transfer Kit count will be set to the count of the first printer the DC Controller was installed in The Transfer Kit count cannot be reset in the Service Menu The Transfer Kit count can be reset to zero by setting CONFIGURE DEVICE RESETS RESET SUPPLIES NEW TRANSFER KIT YES Resetting the Transfer Kit count to zero after it has been used will result in using the Transfer Kit past it s specified life which may result in a failure before low is reached For the HP Color LaserJet 3700 series printer a non duplexing printer can obtain the ability to duplex if the DC Controller was previously installed in a 3700 printer that had duplexing Media sensor PS5 replacement configuration Light intensity of the media sensor must be adjusted Follow the procedure below to adjust the light intensity 1 Turn the printer OFF 2 Open the front cover 3 While pressing down the engine test print switch
382. ok two claws 2 To unhook the claws insert a pointed object into the two claw locations 2 under the sensor at the connector side of the sensor to release the claws then lift up on the connector side of the sensor 3 to remove it Figure 6 82 Rear output bin paper sensor removal ENWW Sensors 259 Color misregistration sensor PS12 removal NOTE When the color misregistration sensor is replaced in addition to replacing the sensor a configuration procedure must be performed For information on this configuration refer to Chapter 8 Replacement parts configuration 1 Refer to the pick up feed unit removal procedure steps 1 through 5 and release the right and left slide rods from the front door See Pick up feed assembly removal Push the swing guides in as far as they will go Refer to the pick up feed unit removal procedure steps 22 through 25 and remove the connector cover and the right and left swing guide rails See Pick up feed assembly removal Disconnect one connector 1 Remove one screw 2 the shaft holder 3 and the spring under the shaft holder located directly under the screw 2 Unhook two claws 4 and lift the color misregistration sensor 5 up to remove it Figure 6 83 Color misregistration sensor removal Waste toner level sensor PS13 removal 1 2 Remove the front left cover See Left front cover removal Remove one connector 1 from the DC controller PCB a
383. oller 239 print cartridge 219 printer covers 209 rearcover 215 rear output bin paper sensor PS11 259 registration clutch CL1 266 registration paper sensor PS4 254 reversed paper sensor PS9 257 right cover 213 right cover 500 sheet paper feeder 297 secondary transfer charging roller 239 secondary transfer roller engaging sensor PS16 262 secondary transfer roller engaging solenoid SL4 265 separation pad 500 sheet paper feeder 299 strategy 204 ENWW swing guide left 245 swing guide right 242 test print switch 251 thermistor main 239 thermistor sub 239 thermoswitch 239 transfer roller engaging motor M5 274 transfer unit 218 tray 1 216 tray 1 paper sensor PS1 251 253 tray 1 pick up roller 237 tray 1 pick up solenoid 263 tray 1 separation pad 237 Tray 2 291 tray 2 end plate 291 tray 2 guide right HP 3700 291 294 tray 2 paper sensor PS2 253 tray 2 pick up roller 238 tray 2 pick up solenoid 264 tray 2 separation pad 238 upper rear door 214 waste toner level sensor PS13 260 repair notices 204 repetitive defects 401 replacement color misregistration sensor PS12 configuration 355 476 DC controller PCB configuration 353 354 475 formatter PCB 352 474 formatter PCB and DC controller at same time 352 474 formatter PCB configuration 352 353 474 fuser configuration 355 476 laser scanner assembly configuration 355 476 media sensor PS5 configuration 354 media sensor PS5 configuratio
384. oller PCB with light emitter LED and light receiver PD on the back of the cartridge When a print operation starts the DC controller emits light from the LED with TONER LEVEL DETECTION LED DRIVE signal TONLED The light enters the toner container through the light guide attached to the cartridge It passes through the container and goes back through the light guide when the light receiver detects the light Upon detection of light the receiver sends the TONER LEVEL DETECTION signal TONSNS to the DC controller DC controller PCB z aA az D a OZ uu ED OZ zz uo Oo LEE EC u gt o gt O T iuc ac ES i o uw gt 3j Aa Ww LLI a n gt Memory controller PCB S ui z 239 O tr 3 Light guide O He Light receiver g LA M Light emitter E Cartridge Toner level detection When the toner level is high the light is interrupted by the toner so it does not reach the light receiver and vice versa when the toner level is low The DC controller detects the toner level based on the light amount and notifies formatter of the detected toner level If no light is detected by the light receiver within a specified time during toner level detection the DC controller judges the toner level sensor abnormal and sends an error message to the formatter All color toner level is detected in full color print and only K BK toner lever in monochrome print Developing cylinder engaging dise
385. olor LaserJet 3500 3550 series printer and HP Color LaserJet 3700 series printer provide carefully designed and tested color tables to provide smooth accurate color rendition of all printable colors HP ImageREt 2400 HP ImageREt 2400 is a technology that provides the best color print quality without having to change printer driver settings or make trade offs between print quality performance and memory HP ImageREt 2400 has been improved for this printer The improvements offer trapping technologies even greater control over dot placement and more precise control of toner quality in a dot These new technologies coupled with HP s multilevel printing process result in a 600 by 600 dpi printer that provides 2400 dpi color laser class quality with millions of smooth colors Paper selection For the best color and image quality it is important to select the appropriate paper type from the software printer menu or from the printer control panel See Selecting paper in chapter 1 Color options available for the HP Color LaserJet 3700 series printer Color options automatically enable optimal color output for diverse types of documents Color options use object tagging which allows optimal color and halftone settings to be used for different objects text graphics and photos on a page The printer driver determines which objects are used on a page and uses halftone and color settings that provide the best print quality for each object
386. olor LaserJet 3700 series printer Replacing the transfer unit Replace the transfer unit when the printer control panel displays REPLACE TRANSFER KIT The image transfer kit contains a replacement transfer unit for this printer WARNING Remove any jewelry or any other metal items from your body to avoid electric shock ENWW Replacing supply items 99 1 Lift the front door handle and pull down the front door WARNING Do not place anything on the transfer unit Do not touch the top of the transfer unit or the contacts on the left side of the transfer unit 2 Grasp the right blue handle Press and hold down the blue button Slightly lift the right side of the transfer unit 100 Chapter 4 Printer maintenance ENWW 3 Grasp the left blue handle and lift to remove the transfer unit from the printer NOTE For information on how to properly dispose of the used transfer unit go to http www hp com recycle 4 Using handles remove the new transfer unit from the bag Use the blue handles on both sides to hold the transfer unit ENWW Replacing supply items 101 6 Guide the left side of the transfer unit into the front door of the printer Insert the two pegs on the left side into the holes and then lower the right side into the door 7 Make sure that the blue button on the right blue handle has released popped up If the button has not released grasp the right blue handle and pull the transfer unit toward yo
387. on and configuration ENWW Installing the print cartridge 1 Remove a new print cartridge from the bag 2 Grasp both sides of the print cartridge and distribute the toner by gently rocking the cartridge from side to side 3 Remove and discard the orange shipping tape and the shipping locks from the new print cartridge NOTE Discard the shipping tape and the shipping locks according to local regulations ENWW Installing the print cartridge 55 4 Locate the color slot for the print cartridge 5 Align the print cartridge with the tracks inside the printer and using the handle insert the cartridge Repeat this procedure for the remaining three cartridges 56 Chapter 3 Installation and configuration ENWW Loading paper into Tray 3 optional 1 Pull the tray out of the printer 2 Adjust the length guides e Letter size paper Raise the blue rear stop e Ad size paper Lower the blue rear stop 3 Adjust the width guides e Letter size paper Press the center of the side width guides outward as far as possible e A4 size paper Press the blue ridges on the outside of the side width guides inward as far as possible ENWW Loading paper into Tray 3 optional 57 4 Load the paper into the tray If this is special paper such as letterhead load it with the side to be printed down and the top edge toward the front of the tray NOTE Do not fan paper before loading 5 Make sure th
388. ondary transfer charging roller OANDAABRWDHND 16 ITB transfer unit cleaning blade 17 Duplex feed roller 18 Fuser 19 Pressure roller 20 Fuser fixing sleeve unit ENWW Diagrams 451 Switches o SW1001 W3001 Figure 7 19 Location of switches SW1 Door switch SW100 1Test print switch SW3001Power switch 452 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW Figure 7 20 ENWW Sensors PS10 PS16 et PS6 P PS4 Location of sensors PS1 Tray 1 paper sensor PS2 Cassette paper sensor PS4 Registration paper sensor PS5 Media sensor PS6 Fuser front paper sensor PS7 Fuser delivery paper sensor PS8 Face down delivery paper sensor PS9 Reversed paper sensor PS10 Duplexing feed delivery paper sensor PS11 Face up tray sensor PS12 Color misregistration sensor PS13 Waste toner level sensor PS14 Developing engaging sensor PS15 Environmental conditions sensor PS16 Secondary transfer roller engaging sensor Diagrams 453 Solenoids and clutches Figure 7 21 Location of solenoids and clutches SL1 Tray 1 pick up solenoid SL2 Tray 2 pick up solenoid pick up feed assembly SL4 Secondary transfer roller engaging solenoid SL5 Duplex feed solenoid CL1 Registration clutch CL2 K development clutch image drive unit CL3 Developing engaging clutch developing engaging drive unit 454 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW Figure 7 22 ENWW Motors and fans Location of motors and fa
389. ons for more information Connectivity The printer provides a high speed Universal Serial Port USB 2 0 port for connectivity Memory The printer contains 64 megabytes MB of synchronous dynamic random access memory SDRAM HP Color LaserJet 3500n 3550n printer HP Color LaserJet 3500n 3550n printer The HP Color LaserJet 3500n 3550n printer includes the features of the HP Color LaserJet 3500 3550 printer plus an HP Jetdirect en3700 external print server for easy connectivity to 10 100base T networks Printer configurations 3 Figure 1 3 Figure 1 4 HP Color LaserJet 3700 printer HP Color LaserJet 3700 printer The HP Color LaserJet 3700 printer is a four color laser printer that prints 16 ppm in both monochrome and color Trays The printer comes with a multipurpose tray Tray 1 that holds up to 100 sheets of various paper types and sizes or 10 envelopes and a 250 sheet paper feeder Tray 2 that supports various paper sizes It supports an optional 500 sheet paper feeder Tray 3 See Print media specifications for more information Connectivity The printer has a USB port and a standard bidirectional parallel port IEEE 1284 compliant for connectivity Memory The printer contains 64 MB of SDRAM To allow for memory expansion the printer has three dual inline memory module DIMM slots that accept 64 128 or 256 MB RAM each This printer can support up to 448 MB of memory HP Color LaserJet 3700n p
390. ontinued eem Rm Message Clearing paper path Close front door Creating CLEANING PAGE DATA RECEIVED alternates with Ready Event Log Empty FLASH DEVICE FAILURE alternates with Ready To clear press v Flash disk X initializing alternates with DO NOT POWER OFF FLASH FILE OPERATION FAILED alternates with Ready To clear press v HP 3700 only The printer detected jammed or misplaced paper when turned on and is attempting to eject jammed pages The front door needs to be closed Damaged door open detection switch actuator The connector in the 24VB line is not properly connected Defective front door detection switch Defective DC controller PCB The printer is generating a cleaning page The printer returns to the Ready state when the cleaning page is finished printing The printer received data and is waiting for a form feed When the printer receives another file the message should disappear SHOW EVENT LOG was selected from the control panel and the event log is empty HP 3700 only A device failure has occurred on the specified storage device HP 3700 only The new flash DIMM installed in slot X is initializing HP 3700 only The printer received a PJL file system command that attempted to perform an illogical operation for example to download a file to a non existent directory 314 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting No action necessary Close the f
391. ontrol prevents vertical color misregistration It maintains the scanner motor s rotation at a constant speed to eliminate the rotational variations between the lines This is achieved by maintaining the phase difference between the two scanner mirrors The phase control performs the following steps 1 When the scanner motor rotates at a constant speed and a specified number of revolutions under the speed control the DC controller generates a phase reference clock based on the reference clock 2 The DC controller compares the intervals between the phase reference clock and the BD INPUT signal BD2I with the frequency comparator to detect rotational variations between the lines 3 The DC controller controls the rotational variations by sending the ACC1 signal when the interval of the BD2l is slower than the phase reference clock and sending the DEC1 when it is faster than the clock Failure detection The CPU monitors the frequency comparator in the ASIC to check that the scanner motor rotates at the specified number of revolutions Under the following conditions the CPU judges the optical unit faulty It stops the printer engine and notifies the formatter of the failure e Abnormal startup The scanner motor does not enter SCANNER READY period within five seconds from the start e Abnormal rotation The interval of the BDI signals goes out of the tolerance while the scanner motor rotates steadily and it continues until the ac
392. or PS7 within the allotted amount of time after paper is fed from the registration roller the CPU judges it a fuser delay jam 4 Fuser stationary jam When the paper does not pass the fuser delivery paper sensor PS7 within the allotted amount of time after paper has reached the fuser delivery paper sensor PS7 the CPU judges it a fuser stationary jam 5 Delivery delay jam When the paper does not pass the sensor through within the allotted amount of time after paper has reached the fuser delivery paper sensor PS7 the CPU judges it a delivery delay jam Pickup feed system 195 NOTE 10 11 12 Delivery stationary jam When the paper does not reach the face down paper sensor PS8 within the allotted amount of time after paper has reached the fuser delivery paper sensor PS7 the CPU judges it a delivery stationary jam Duplexing feed delay jam 3700 printer only When the paper does not reach the reversed paper sensor PS9 within the allotted amount of time after the delivery motor has started rotating counter clockwise the CPU judges it a duplexing feed delay jam Duplexing feed stationary jam 3700 printer only When the paper does not pass the sensor within the allotted amount of time since paper has reached the reversed paper sensor PS9 the CPU judges it a duplexing feed stationary jam Duplexing pickup delay jam 3700 printer only When the paper does not reach the duplexing feed paper sensor PS10 within
393. or press for more information 2 If the message persists after exiting help turn the printer off and then back on 3 Perform the following actions for the indicated errors 41 2 error laser scanner error perform the following steps 1 Connectors in laser scanner control line are not connected properly Reseat the DC controller PCB connectors J1022 J1026 J1027 and the laser scanner unit connectors J101A J101B J5001A J5001B J5020 2 Bad laser scanner unit replace the laser scanner 3 Bad DC controller PCB replace the DC controller PCB 41 3 error occurs when the correct media size is loaded in the designated paper tray but the printer mis reads it as the incorrect size perform the following steps 1 Registration shutter does not move smoothly and should be reseated or shutter is damaged and should be replaced 2 The DC controller PCB is defective Replace the DC controller PCB 41 5 error occurs when the correct media type is loaded in the designated tray but the printer mis reads it as the incorrect type perform the following steps 1 Defective media sensor replace the sensor 2 Defective DC controller PCB replace the PCB Printer error troubleshooting 335 Table 7 3 Numerical printer messages continued 41 7 error occurs when a page is jammed in the paper path See Paper path troubleshooting later in this chapter If the error reoccurs perform the following s
394. or use with HP Color LaserJet printers This printer can detect transparencies that were not designed for use with HP Color LaserJet printers The following table lists the standard sizes of paper that the printer supports in Tray 2 16 Chapter 1 Printer description ENWW Table 1 9 a n 2 paper sizes Dimensions Weight or thickness or Weight or thickness Capacity ro 216 by 279 mm 60 to 105 g m 250 sheets 8 5 by 11 in 16 to 28 Ib bond 75 g m 20 Ib bond Legal 216 by 356 mm 60 to 105 g m 250 sheets 8 5 by 14 in 16 to 28 Ib bond 75 g m 20 Ib bond Executive 184 by 267 mm 60 to 105 g m 250 sheets 7 3 by 10 5 in 16 to 28 Ib bond 75 g m 20 Ib bond Executive JIS 216 by 330 mm 60 to 105 g m 250 sheets 8 5 by 13 in 16 to 28 Ib bond 75 g m 20 Ib bond A4 210 by 297 mm 60 to 105 g m 250 sheets 8 3 by 11 7 in 16 to 28 Ib bond 75 g m 20 Ib bond A5 148 by 210 mm 60 to 105 g m 250 sheets 5 8 by 8 3 in 16 to 28 Ib bond 75 g m 20 Ib bond B5 JIS 182 by 257 mm 60 to 105 g m 250 sheets 7 2 by 10 1 in 16 to 28 Ib bond 75 g m 20 Ib bond B5 ISO 176 by 250 mm 60 to 105 g m 250 sheets 6 9 by 9 8 in 16 to 28 Ib bond 75 g m 20 Ib bond Capacity can vary depending on media weight and thickness and environmental conditions The following table lists the standard sizes of paper that the printer supports in Tray 3 Table 1 10 Tray 3 paper sizes Letter
395. ormatter and DC Controller should be replaced one at a time If the DC Controller and Formatter are replaced one at a time then the duplex printing capability will be transferred to the new DC controller or Formatter A printer specific PJL file will be needed to re enable duplexing in the current printer will not work on any other printer if both the formatter and DC Controller are replaced at the same time This file will only work in the current printer Call for assistance from HP Support to obtain the PJL file Also perform the Formatter and DC Controller replacement steps as required below Formatter New replacement configuration The values for Total Mono Pages Total Color Pages Serial Number Service ID Cold Reset Paper if needed and the Fuser Kit Count will need to be reset using the service menu The Transfer Kit count will be unaffected by the replacement of a formatter Print a configuration page and a supplies status page in the INFORMATION menu to obtain the page counts counts for any of the supplies serial number and the born on date If a configuration page and a supplies status page cannot be printed this information can be obtained from the Service menu prior to replacing the formatter To ensure optimum print quality the printer will need to be calibrated by performing 3 Calibrate Now s using the printer control panel by selecting CONFIGURE DEVICE PRINT QUALITY CALIBRATE NOW 352 Chapter Troubleshooti
396. ot Loosen and remove the two retaining screws holding the EIO slot cover to the printer and remove the cover You will not need these screws and cover again 4 Firmly insert the HP Jetdirect print server card into the EIO slot Insert and tighten the retaining screws that came with the print server card 86 Chapter 3 Installation and configuration ENWW 6 Reconnect the power cable and turn the printer on 7 Print a configuration page In addition to a printer configuration page and a Supplies Status page an HP Jetdirect configuration page that contains network configuration and status information should also print If it does not print uninstall and reinstall the print server card to ensure that it is completely seated in the slot 8 Perform one of these steps Choose the correct port See the computer or operating system documentation for instructions Reinstall the software choosing the network installation this time ENWW Installing an HP Jetdirect print server card in the HP color LaserJet 3700 series printer 87 Installing an HP Jetdirect en3700 external print server 1 Attach the HP Jetdirect en3700 external print server to a 10Base T or to a 100Base T local network by plugging the network cable into the network port on the rear panel 2 Attach the print server to the printer using the USB cable Insert the DC power cord from the power module into the power connecto
397. otor Li Low voltage i l Developing motor Li power supply f l Primary transfer p Noise circuit 1 i Ldisengaging motor _ l filter l l ees ge s I NAAT non conous I rm emory controller i H Zero crossing i ZEROX L 93V PCB i pa circuit i ee T i 1 24VB j 1 Rectifying l l Tt uL High voltage power f p circuit i i SV og supply PCB a UG H HH o oo ooo tl l b i l l l eee S S eaa Wee aA li I l r l ji I l I I Door open lt I l l detection switch i E Rectifying i I I SW1 i Ii filter es LEVAT l li circuit l l l l itchi 24VB Switching Ties REM24 11001 4 bit 1 i circuit Rectifying l sy CPU DOPENI filter Regulator i L I mus l HOW PIT a I i circuit ie l l o Media sensor b i 1 Po I FL 4 asy SOSIRE p Rectifying 43 3V I L Color misregistration 1 filter circuit SEES I E __ sensor __ MC ER ee a ie re eee H l I p 5V Environmental Li Overcurrent l condition sensor E Overvoltage i 1 45V p E detection circuit i 1 j Laser driver i li l l kbo ce E Dg ae MERERI IEEE i I 14 3 3V Sensor i I i I photo interrupter l I I I I l l l l Low voltage power supply circuit 433V i Control panel rr p rbM p o e R 43 3V l Formatter I I When the power switch SW3001 is turned on
398. otosensitive drum e Primary charging e Laser beam exposure e Developing block Makes the electrostatic latent image on the photosensitive drum visible by applying the toner on top of the image using the contact development method e Development e Transfer block Transfers a toner image on the photosensitive drum onto paper e Primary transfer The toner images are transferred onto paper in the order yellow Y magenta M cyan C and black K in one rotation of the ITB e Secondary transfer e Separation 148 Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW e Fuser block Fixes or fuses a toner image on paper e Fuser e Cleaning block Clears the residual toner on the photosensitive drum and the ITB e TB cleaning e Drum cleaning K photosensitive drum photosensitive drum i Electrostatic latent image i formation block Development block Fuser block Figure 5 26 Print process diagram ENWW 4 Primary transfer Transfer unit 5 Secondary transfer 6 Separation Cassette pickup Image formation system Registration Paper path 4 Direction of rotation photosensitivedrum and ITB Multi purpose pickup 149 Figure 5 27 Figure 5 28 Electrostatic latent image formation block This block consists of two steps where an electrostatic latent image is formed on the photosensitive drums The drum surface carries nega
399. outside of the published environmental specifications for the product or e improper site preparation or maintenance TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY LOCAL LAW THE ABOVE WARRANTIES ARE EXCLUSIVE AND NO OTHER WARRANTY OR CONDITION WHETHER WRITTEN OR ORAL IS EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED AND HP SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF MERCHANTABILITY SATISFACTORY QUALITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE Some countries regions states or provinces do not allow limitations on the duration of an implied warranty so the above limitation or exclusion might not apply to you This warranty gives you specific legal rights and you might also have other rights that vary from country region to country region state to state or province to province HP s limited warranty is valid in any country region or locality where HP has a support presence for this product and where HP has marketed this product The level of warranty service you receive may vary according to local standards HP will not alter form fit or function of the product to make it operate in a country region for which it was never intended to function for legal or regulatory reasons TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY LOCAL LAW THE REMEDIES IN THIS WARRANTY STATEMENT ARE YOUR SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDIES EXCEPT AS INDICATED ABOVE IN NO EVENT WILL HP OR ITS SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE FOR LOSS OF DATA OR FOR DIRECT SPECIAL INCIDENTAL CONSEQUENTIAL INCLUDING LOST PROFIT OR DATA OR OTHER DAMAGE WH
400. owing sections Troubleshooting process includes a pre troubleshooting checklist and a troubleshooting flowchart These tools contain information about common printer errors that can inhibit proper operation or create print quality problems These tools also include recommendations for solving the cause of the error Printer error troubleshooting explains each control panel display message and suggests recommendations for clearing the cause of each message When the printer message indicates a failure for which the root cause is not obvious use the printer error troubleshooting section and the troubleshooting tools section found later in this chapter to solve the problem Paper path troubleshooting provides techniques to solve feed problems Explanations regarding print media checks troubleshooting jams and the differences between jams caused by media and those caused by the printer are discussed Image formation troubleshooting suggests methods for solving print quality problems Interface troubleshooting provides techniques for isolating communication problems to the printer hardware printer configuration network configuration or software application Control panel troubleshooting provides procedures for printing a menu map from the printer control panel It also describes the control panel menus the items within each menu and the possible values for the menu items Troubleshooting tools help isolate the cause of printer failures Th
401. paper paper path entrance Table 7 10 Causes for wrinkled or folded paper paper path entrance to diagnose the problem If paper is not wrinkled at this stage use Table 7 11 Causes for wrinkled or folded paper paper path exit Table 7 11 Causes for wrinkled or folded paper paper path exit to diagnose the problem Table 7 10 Causes for wrinkled or folded paper paper path entrance Registration shutter is defective Make sure the registration shutter is clean and moves smoothly If the registration shutter is worn or damaged replace the paper pickup feed assembly Feed roller or registration roller is dirty or defective Clean the rollers or replace the paper pickup feed assembly as required Paper path has foreign substances or dirt Remove any foreign substances or dirt from the paper path If the paper pickup feed assembly is damaged replace the paper pickup feed assembly Table 7 11 Causes for wrinkled or folded paper paper path exit C mm 0000 Fuser inlet guide is dirty Clean the fuser inlet guide Fuser pressure roller is dirty or damaged Clean the pressure roller If the pressure roller is damaged replace the fuser Fuser sleeve is dirty or damaged Clean the fuser sleeve If the fuser sleeve is damaged replace the fuser Fuser delivery roller is dirty Clean the fuser delivery roller Paper is skewed Table 7 12 Causes for skewed paper mme p SO Paper dust or dirt has accumulated in
402. pecified temperature After the specified period after the scanner motor drive has started the paper feeder pickup solenoid SL3 is turned on The pickup roller rotates and picks paper up The double feeding of paper is prevented by the separation pad As the paper feeder pickup clutch CL4 is engaged the feed roller rotates and feeds the paper to the registration roller When the paper is detected by the registration paper sensor PS4 after passing through the roller the paper feeder pickup clutch CL4 is disengaged and the paper stops At the specific timing when the leading edge of paper should match the edge of the image on the ITB the paper feeder pickup clutch CL4 is engaged again to re feed the paper 198 Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW 6 The paper having had the image on the ITB transferred on it is fed to the fuser delivery unit Paper feeder PCB A o gt O Ww I wm T 9z On 23 eo 25 agl Bg 5 WO a m S Registration roller oo ox oO COE O Ta n p e p We as O 2T c x aD 2D OS amp o Xo o Oo a o ao ILL lw Lu oc z ce E o uz a tr uL ac Lu wa wa i 5 1 LL i ul Oo oc Lu g Ave a a t a Feed roller Cassette Tray 2 pickup roller Separation pad Figure 5 67 Pickup delivery sequence Paper jam detection A paper jam at the paper feeder during pickup delivery is detected in the same way as a paper jam at the printer
403. pen the paper with alcohol Cleaning spilled toner Defective print cartridges can develop leaks Also after a paper jam has occurred some toner might remain on the rollers and guides inside the printer The pages that print immediately after the jam can pick up this toner When cleaning the printer do not touch the ITB the black intermediate transfer belt in the transfer unit with the damp cloth or with your fingers When cleaning inside the printer the transfer unit should be removed Vacuum specifications Do not vacuum the printer or any spilled toner using a conventional vacuum Toner particles used in this product might be too fine for effective vacuuming and could result in damage to conventional vacuums A vacuum specifically designed for cleaning toner can be used if it is capable of filtering fine particles five microns in diameter 92 Chapter 4 Printer maintenance ENWW Cleaning mode During the printing process paper toner and dust particles can accumulate inside the printer Over time this buildup can cause print quality problems such as toner specks or smearing This printer has a cleaning mode that can correct and prevent these types of problems AaBbGc AaBbGG AoBbCc AaBbCc AaBbCC Figure 4 1 Toner specks AaBbCc AaBbcc AaBtE Cc AaBbCcc AaBbCc Figure 4 2 Toner smearing To clean the printer using the printer control panel 1 Press Menu to enter the MEN
404. peration ENWW Figure 5 21 ENWW The laser driver PCB is divided into two One is for Y M and the other for C K The Y M laser driver PCB only is described here as both are identical DC controller PCB Laser driver PCB 45V J1026 J101A Magenta laser driver circuit l 416 PDOUT1 18 GND C112 I I I 17 3 LD102 BD circuit 14 CNT20 6 a a E 13 CNT21 7 RAY id 10 VDO2 10 EE F3 11 VDO2 9 ud LD ia 8 PDOUT2 12 Fog t I l C103 d l l 15 BD21 5 l OPAN E E A ee ii I J1026 Yellow laser driver circuit 19 TROUPE I I jd LD101 d 3 CNT10 Eb Ex I 6 CNT11 RAY i I 9 VDO1 12 NDO1 PD E LD i y 4 q d y 4 I pod 1 p 4 po Aa Si Laser control block diagram The DC controller sends the VIDEO signals VDO VDO for forming images and the LASER CONTROL signals CTRLO CTRL1 for switching the operation modes of the laser driver circuit to each laser driver IC IC101 IC102 The laser driver IC controls the laser according to the combination of the LASER CONTROL signals The following table shows the combination of the LASER CONTROL signals for yellow Laser control OFF Ready to emit laser by VIDEO signals The LASER CONTROL signal is used for the following controls e Laser emission control e Automat
405. ply circuit This circuit applies a bias to the primary charging roller the developing cylinder the developing blade the primary and secondary transfer charging rollers and the pressure roller 132 Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW Figure 5 15 ENWW The DC controller controls the high voltage power supply circuit and generates the high voltage bias See Image formation system for the details on image formation Primary charging Photosensitive High voltage power roller drum DC controller PCB supply PCB T7771 l Developing Primary transfer roller blade Primary charging PR high voltage generation circuit Developing cylinder generation circuit generation circuit voltage generation circuit Secondary Secondary transfer high transfer roller voltage generation circuit Primary transfer high TR ISI voltage TR1I4 generation circuit High voltage power supply circuit Primary charging bias generation The primary charging biases PR11 PR12 PR13 PR14 are used to charge the photosensitive drum surface with negative potential to prepare for image formation They are the DC negative biases PR14 for K black and the rest for colors Y M C generated in the primary charging high voltage generation circuit in the high voltage power supply circuit The high voltage power supply circuit applies these biases to the primary charging rollers in each cartridge a
406. primary transfer current The DC controller measures the primary transfer current when the power is turned on or a door is closed When the measurement is over the specified value the DC controller judges it no cartridge and sends the error message to the formatter DC controller PCB L A des Sce lee Primary transfer CSS oe roller vo 5oOS w lo D LL LLI Ly o o5 Pu 22 05 E fq Photosensitive drum F m2 gt oc z Ira a O K cartridge C cartridge M cartridge qe Y cartridge ee M PRIMARY TRANSFER CURRENT VALUE signal TR112 Y PRIMARY TRANSFER CURRENT VALUE signal TR111 Figure 5 41 Cartridge presence detection Cartridge life detection The DC controller detects cartridge life data and passes information about the following aspects of the cartridge to the formatter e Toner level e Photosensitive drum e Developing unit When any of the data exceeds a specified value the DC controller judges the cartridge end of life and sends an error message to the formatter indicating either that the cartridge is nearing end of life Warning or that the cartridge has reached end of life End depending on the readings of the above data Toner level detection ENWW Image formation system 161 Figure 5 42 NOTE The DC controller detects the end of toner by monitoring the amount of time it takes for light to pass through the cartridge during printing There is a memory contr
407. print stop test 442 procedure 433 using 42 dimensions printer 15 DIMMs installing 79 disable cartridge check 436 documentation ordering 45 door switch location 452 removal and replacement 250 DOS commands parallel I O 404 drivers printer 45 drum drive unit part numbers 505 drum motor M3 removal and replacement 271 drum motor control 124 drum motor control circuit 124 duplex feed delivery paper sensor removal and replacement 258 duplex feed mode 194 duplex feed solenoid SL5 removal and replacement 266 duplexing does not work re enabling 352 474 feed unit HP 3700 192 duty cycle 15 ENWW E EIO troubleshooting 403 electrical specifications 12 electrostatic discharge caution 204 electrostatic latent image formation block print process 150 embedded Web server information tab 423 network connection 422 networking tab 424 settings tab 423 software 74 embossed media 25 enabling language font DIMM 83 enhanced I O EIO configuration 69 environment sensor PS15 removal and replacement 261 environmental change control 178 location requirements 11 specifications 13 stewardship program 31 error messages alphabetical list 312 numerical list 327 paper jams 357 errors 312 ESD see electrostatic discharge 204 event log display on control panel 436 printing 431 436 exchange program 44 exhaust fan FAN1 removal and replacement 277 extended warranty information 46 F face down see output bin 221 face down
408. printer controls the fuser heater temperature and drives the scanner motor upon receipt of a print command from the formatter 2 When the fuser heater reaches a specified temperature it drives the feed motor M1 3 The solenoid at each paper pickup source is turned on after a specified period from the scanner motor drive start e Tray 1 multipurpose tray Tray 1 solenoid SL 1 e Tray 2 cassette Tray 2 pickup solenoid SL2 As each pickup solenoid is turned on each pick up roller rotates and picks up paper The separation pad prevents the double feeding of paper As the registration clutch CL1 is turned on at the same time as solenoids both the registration roller and the feed roller rotate the paper fed to the registration roller 4 When the scanner is ready the drum motor M3 drives and rotates the ITB 5 After a specified period since the drum motor M3 drive start the secondary transfer roller engaging solenoid SL4 is turned on and pushes the secondary transfer roller against the ITB to rotate the roller See Secondary transfer roller engaging disengaging control for details 6 The registration shutter corrects the skew of the paper at the registration roller 7 When the paper is detected by the registration paper sensor PS4 after passing the registration roller the registration clutch CL 1 is turned off and stops the paper 8 When the paper end reaches the edge of the image on the ITB the registr
409. printer is turned on The number X specifies a sequence number indicating the current program being loaded The first side of a manual 2 sided print job has been printed and the printer is waiting for the output stack to be inserted for the second side to be printed A job sent requires a specific paper type and size that is not currently available Tray 1 is empty and no other tray is available MANUAL FEED was set to ON in the control panel There is no paper in the tray and a print job sent requires a specific paper type and size that is not currently available through Tray 1 The printer is executing a Component Test and the component selected is Solenoid The printer is executing a Component Test and the components selected are Solenoid and Motor 318 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting No action necessary Take the output stack out of the output bin and reinsert it in Tray 1 to print the second side of the 2 sided print job Press v to print from the tray or Press for help Press for help Turn MANUAL FEED off in the control panel Press v to print from another tray or Press for help No action necessary No action necessary ENWW Table 7 2 Alphabetical printer messages continued eem Rm Message No job to cancel NON HP SUPPLY DETECTED alternates with For help press NON HP SUPPLY IN USE alternates with Ready ORDER COLOR CARTRIDGE alternates with L
410. printer s paper path The test can be programmed to stop printing internal pages or an external print job when the paper reaches a certain position The test can also be programmed to stop from 0 to 60 000 mS If the timer is set to a value that is greater than it takes to print the job there are two ways to recover the printer 442 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW NOTE ENWW After the print job completes press Stop to return to the diagnostic menu before the timer times out After the timer times out press Stop You will have to cycle the door switch by opening and closing the front door to restart the engine and return it to a normal state When the timer trips the display shows the message PRINTING STOPPED PRESS Check TO CONTINUE Pressing v will print the previously selected job If you do not want the previous job to print press Stop first and then press the v button Do not attempt to execute a Print Stop test while the printer is calibrating a power cycle will be required If you encounter a jam message during testing cycle the door switch Information menu From the information menu the following pages can be printed Print Menu Map prints the control panel menu map which shows the layout and current settings of the control panel menu items Print Configuration used to help troubleshoot printer problems or to verify installation of optional accessories such as memory DIMMs paper trays and printer languages Print S
411. ps screwdriver and not a Posidriv screwdriver Figure 6 1 below shows the difference between a Phillips and a Posidriv screwdriver Note that the Phillips tip has more beveled surfaces Phillips Posidriv Figure 6 1 Phillips and Posidrive screwdriver comparison Types of screws Table 6 1 below describes the screws used in the printer and provides guidelines to help determine where to use each type of screw The screws can vary in length depending on the thickness of the material being fastened Always note where each type of screw is located and replace each one into its original location Table 6 1 Common fasteners peren que mmm ue M4X6 SCREW TP XA9 1450 000C Secures metal frame panels N to metal frame panels SCREW W WASHER M3X6 XA9 1477 000C Secures the drawer cross N member to the frame see Figure 8 11 Internal components 4 of 4 N SCREW W WASHER M3X8 XA9 1420 000C Secures metal to metal N ground wire feed guide rear two screws SCREW W WASHER M3X12 XA9 1452 000C Secures laser scanner N assembly to the metal frame ENWW Introduction 205 SCREW W WASHER RS M3X6 XA9 1461 000C Secures motor M2 to the frame Table 6 1 Common fasteners continued eee que emm ue SCREW RS M3X6 XA9 1499 000C Secures metal to metal N SCREW RS M3X8 XA9 1445 000C Secures any material N except metal to metal SCREW TP EN N XB4 7300 805C Secures sensor PCB to plastic environ
412. r 1 Connect the AC power cord to the printer and to a power outlet NOTE Do not connect the printer to the computer or to the network at this time 2 Turn the printer on After a minimum of two minutes the green ready light turns on 62 Chapter 3 Installation and configuration ENWW Installing a new control panel overlay optional Overlays are available for several languages and come shipped with the printer If you are setting up a printer for a language other than English complete the following procedure 1 Select the language from the sheet of adhesive control panel overlays 2 Position the new overlay over the top of the control panel Set the overlay in place by pressing down on the overlay and smoothing it across its surface ENWW Installing a new control panel overlay optional 63 Testing the printer operation 64 Print a demo page to ensure the printer is working properly 1 2 3 4 5 After printing the demo page the printer control panel displays the Ready message Press Menu to enter the MENUS Press to highlight Information Press v to select Information Press to highlight PRINT DEMO Press v to select PRINT CONFIGURATION Chapter 3 Installation and configuration ENWW Using PowerSave Time The adjustable PowerSave Time feature reduces power consumption when the printer has been inactive for an extended period You can set the length of time before the printer goes into PowerS
413. r 4C process colors from PANTONE certified applications depending on the swatch book used Using Color 385 Managing color Setting color options to Automatic will typically produce the best possible print quality for color documents However there may be cases when you want to print a color document in grayscale black and white or wish to change one of the printer s color options Using Windows print in grayscale or change the color options using settings found on the Color tab in the printer driver Using a Macintosh computer print in grayscale or change the color options using the Color Matching pop up menu in the Print dialog box Print in Grayscale Selecting the Print in Grayscale option from the printer driver prints a document in black and white This option is useful for printing color documents that will be photocopied or faxed When Print in Grayscale is selected the printer goes into monochrome mode regardless of what the COLOR BLACK MIX setting is This mode will reduce wear on the color cartridges Automatic or manual color adjustment The Automatic color adjustment option optimizes the neutral gray color treatment halftones and edge enhancements used for each element in a document For more information see your printer driver online Help NOTE Automatic is the default setting and is recommended for printing all color documents The Manual color adjustment option allows you to adjust the neutral gray color
414. r 25 Printing on special media Use these guidelines when printing on special types of media Transparencies When printing on transparencies use the following guidelines Handle transparencies using the edges Oils from your fingers deposited on the transparency can cause print quality problems Use only overhead transparencies recommended for use in this printer Hewlett Packard recommends using HP Color LaserJet Transparencies with this printer HP products are designed to work together for optimum printing results In either the software application or the printer driver select TRANSPARENCY as the media type or print from a tray that is configured for transparencies CAUTION Transparencies not designed for LaserJet printing will melt in the printer causing damage to the printer Do not use transparencies designed for monochrome printing Glossy paper When printing on glossy paper use the following guidelines In either the software application or the driver select Glossy as the media type or print from a tray that is configured for glossy paper Select Glossy for media weights up to 105 g m 28 Ib bond Select Heavy Glossy for media weights up to 120 g m 32 Ib bond Because these settings will affect all print jobs it is important to return the printer to its original settings once the job has printed NOTE Hewlett Packard recommends using HP Color LaserJet Soft Gloss paper with this printer HP products are de
415. r ERU a Pets 205 Approximate replacement intervals for print cartridges 207 Approximate replacement intervals for supply items ssussse 207 Pre troubleshooting checklist eesenn ens 307 Alphabetical printer messages ssssssssssssssseeneeenen nennen 313 Numerical printer messages sssssseeeeene eene 328 Error messages and associated jam locations ssseeesssss 358 Causes for multiple pages feeding ssee 360 Causes for jams in the Tray 1 pick up area sss 360 Causes for jams in the Tray 2 area sssssssssee eee 361 Causes for jams in the fuser face down delivery area sssssss 361 Transfer feed area tentus ttes Gur dei tado 362 Causes for wrinkled or folded paper paper path entrance 368 Causes for wrinkled or folded paper paper path exit 368 Causes for skewed paper sssssssssssseeeeennenn nnne 368 Causes for jams in the duplex area HP 3700 only sssssss 369 Fuser face down delivery area sss eene 370 Common causes of paper jams sssssssssssssseeeeen enne 378 Conventions xiii xiv Table 7 16 Table 7 17 Table 7 18 Table 7 19 Table 7 20 Table 7 21 Table 7 22 Table 7 23 Table 7 24 Table 7 25 Tabl
416. r assembly ENWW Illustrations and parts lists 487 Internal components 1 of 4 Figure 8 8 ENWW 488 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams Table 8 7 Internal components 1 of 4 y wemeumeesssy mmemsonon ENWW Illustrations and parts lists 489 A07 Figure 8 17 Figure 8 20 41008 15 Internal components 2 of 4 Figure 8 9 ENWW 490 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams Table 8 8 Internal components 2 of 4 ENWW Illustrations and parts lists 491 Table 8 8 Internal components 2 of 4 continued CABLE FORMATTER POWER SUPPLY RM1 0483 000CN HP3700 LN HP 3500 3550 DN 492 Chapter8 Parts and diagrams ENWW ENWW Illustrations and parts lists 493 PS15 CN1 T 9 d D we Figure 8 24 Figure 8 26 Internal components 3 of 4 10 Figure 8 ENWW 494 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams Table 8 9 Internal components 3 of 4 ENWW Illustrations and parts lists 495 Figure 8 23 J708 0 2 J201 1025 Figure 8 13 99 45002 J5017 5006 D J5004 J5014 p J1013 HP3700 ss amp HP3500 3550 J1001 vi J5007 Su pe HP3700 19 9002 Figure 8
417. r chipped pressure roller is not smooth Bumps on the fuser inlet guide due to dirt Clean the guide scratches adhered toner Dirty Worn Deformed fuser sleeve or Clean the fuser sleeve and pressure roller if there are any pressure roller bumps of dirt or toner Replace the fuser if deformed or scratched Worn face down delivery roller Replace the face down delivery roller Damaged face down delivery roller drive If damaged or worn replace the face down delivery roller gears drive gear If the delivery belt is damaged replace the belt Defective DC controller PCB Replace the DC controller PCB Upper rear door area jams area 6 The message 13 XX YY JAM INSIDE UPPER REAR DOOR can appear on the printer control panel if the upper rear door is open Make sure the upper rear door is closed when printing 1 Remove any paper visible in the top output bin ENWW Paper path troubleshooting 371 2 Open the upper rear door 4 Close the rear door 5 f no paper is visible open the lower rear door rear output bin 372 Chapter Troubleshooting ENWW 6 Press down on the green levers and remove any paper Return the green levers to the up position after removing the page M TOTO Al KUDA 7 Close the lower rear door
418. r delivery paper sensor PS8 Face down delivery unit paper sensor PS9 Reversed paper sensor 3700 printer only PS10 Duplexing feed delivery paper sensor 3700 printer only M1 Feed motor M2 Delivery motor M3 Drum motor SL1 Tray 1 multipurpose tray pickup solenoid SL2 Tray 2 cassette pickup solenoid SL4 Secondary transfer roller engaging solenoid SL5 Duplexing feed solenoid 3700 printer only CL1 Registration clutch The pickup feed system can be divided into the following three blocks 1 Pickup feed unit each pickup source to fuser inlet Pickup feed system 183 2 Fuser delivery unit fuser to delivery source 3 Duplexing feed unit 3700 printer only fuser delivery source to registration roller inlet Paper path for single printing a Paper path for duplex printing O O Fuser delivery unit Duplexing feed unit Figure 5 58 Pickup feed system blocks Pickup feed unit The pickup feed unit being comprised of the pickup unit and feed unit picks up paper from the Tray 2 cassette or Tray 1 multipurpose tray pickup tray one by one and feeds it into the printer until it reaches the fuser Figure 5 59 Pickup delivery unit block diagrams the pickup feed unit The following is the pickup feed sequence of operation 184 Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW 1 The
419. r on the rear panel and then insert into a power outlet 88 Chapter 3 Installation and configuration ENWW 3 The 10 or the 100 LED turns on indicating a network connection and the power status LED blinks After 15 seconds the power status LED light and the USB printer LED light appear green The power status LED will blink if there is network activity 4 Press the test button on the back of the external print server to print an HP Jetdirect configuration page Note the IP address for reference ENWW Installing an HP Jetdirect en3700 external print server 89 90 Chapter 3 Installation and configuration ENWW Printer maintenance Chapter contents ENWW This chapter contains the following sections Chapter Content A Am A u 91 Cleaning the printer and accessories 00 0 eect e ce eee eee ee eee niet etree eee taeeeeetaeeeetnieeeeesneeetee 92 Cleaning spilled toner ssssssseee nne eene nennen enne nnne 92 Managing SUPPIES Tm 94 SUA cq 94 Approximate replacement intervals for supplies for the HP Color LaserJet 3500 series PMET 94 Approximate replacement intervals for supplies for the HP Color LaserJet 3550 3700 series printer
420. r to the network administrator for assistance in troubleshooting network problems If the printer is not connected to an MS DOS based host proceed to Table 7 40 Communications check Communications check Table 7 40 Communications check Eme Rm Is your computer configured These parameters are required to communicate with the printer to the parameters described Verify that the configuration of the computer s communications in the configuration port matches these parameters instructions NOTE If these parameters are not set properly an error might display on the control panel EIO troubleshooting If the printer contains an optional HP Jetdirect print server and you cannot communicate with the printer over the network verify the operation of the print server Print a configuration page If the Jetdirect card does not appear under Installed personalities and options on the configuration page indicated by the arrow in see the troubleshooting section of the HP Jetdirect Print Server Software Installation Guide If the host system and printer are still not communicating replace the formatter PCB and the EIO card and reconfigure the printer If the problem persists a protocol analyzer might be needed to find the source of the problem Interface troubleshooting 403 CAUTION HP LaserJet printers are not designed to work with mechanical switch box products without proper surge protection These devices generate high tr
421. racks 400 software embedded Web server 74 for networks 72 HP toolbox 74 Linux 73 ordering 45 Index 569 printer drivers 71 UNIX 73 utilities 73 solenoid duplex feed SL5 266 locations 454 secondary transfer roller engaging solenoid SL4 265 special media printing 26 specifications electrical 12 environmental 13 media 16 preprinted paper 25 print media 16 printer 15 site requirements 11 space requirements 11 speed control 145 spilled toner cleaning 92 standby mode power consumption 12 status messages 312 storing printer 13 supplies 13 subassemblies 42 supplies locating 96 managing 94 ordering 43 467 partnumbers 471 replacing 94 207 status page printing 429 storing 13 Support Assistant HP 44 swatch book color matching 388 swing guide left removal and replacement 242 245 Switch see door switch 250 see power switch 251 see test print switch 251 switch boxes 404 switches locating 452 systems image formation 146 laser scanner 139 T technical reference guides 45 570 Index temperature ink requirements 25 maximum change rate 14 site requirements 11 13 storing supplies 13 test page printing 445 test print switch removal and replacement 251 testing the printer 64 tests see diagnostics 435 theory of operation basic 114 engine control system 119 thermistor main removal and replacement 239 thermistor sub removal and replacement 239 thermoswitch removal and replacement 239 tim
422. ray The available tray is switched as the face up tray opens and closes Open the face up tray for face up delivery and close the tray for face down delivery The following is the sequence of paper feed at the fuser delivery unit 1 The paper after the secondary transfer is fed into the fuser Pickup feed system 189 2 The paper is pressed between the fuser sleeve and the pressure roller to fuse the toner on top and then delivered out of the fuser 3 When the leading edge of the paper is detected by the fuser delivery paper sensor PS7 the delivery motor M2 drives and rotates the delivery roller 190 Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW 4 When the paper end is detected by the fuser delivery paper sensor PS7 the M2 rotates at double speed and delivers the paper out to the face down tray at high speed NOTE The feed speed is accelerated after paper passes away from the fuser when delivering from the face down tray because the fuser is far from the tray DC controller PCB A A o zo Z oZ 5 5 o e 5E e e t Ho C d g L we 0 cc amp Os gt z gt Q O O G o gt O 3 o Us oc oc o SD O O 5 T ic Face down tray 5 5 E delivery roller z z uU s n O m Li Ww ul a LL A 5 r OQ QO m W lt a o F PS8 E Y gt fr gt l a Delivery Lu roller A l m 0 8 l OQ NEN NEN NEN Fuser PS7 Mum IM es eve i Fuser sleeve un
423. rea redit tenebre bae Fre ee E nates 37 VCCI statement Japan ssssssssssseseeenem eene enne errem nne nennen nnne 37 Laser statement for Finland ciiin ieeieice seid trit pa deb RE dd dmm h EEA EE 38 ECC Regulations 2 repr eee eee 39 2 Service approach Chapter Content 41 Search approach uie rrt eer ueste ca teases RRRT I er leaner a EA OERAR CHR e eEURS Ve EIE ORE nace 42 Parts and supplies esssssssssssssssssssesese eene nnne en nene tr inen nn nrn rr ENE nnn nennen nes 43 Ordering parts eer erred hase Peta Read Ra RE ere da va rua se E eS 43 Ordering supplies ee 43 Exchange progra eL 44 DUD PLIES a e E N E E E E E EE A AE 44 World Wide Mab ecce rte eria hri en a E ente A EEE ER TRE T E E 44 HP service parts information CD ROM sssssssssssseseneeerene nennen 44 HP support assistant CD ROM 4 itecto nid eoa a a na da n ed daa aad adn 44 Customer care reseller sales and service support center ssssssssssesssss 44 Ordering related documentation and software ccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeseesenenaeeees 45 HP maintenance agreements sss eene nenne ener e nenne nens 46 On site Service agreements 2 ie ia d elidel e EGRE Ee RE ERE DE BYE CE RE ERR EXE RR Lee cR ad dd 46 3 Installation and configuration Chapter contents
424. ready The DC controller that drives the scanner motor sends the HORIZONTAL SYNCHRONOUS signals BD1 BD2 BD3 BD4 to the formatter upon receipt of print command The printer engine picks up paper It stops the paper at the registration paper sensor PS4 and sends the VERTICAL SYNCHRONOUS signal TOP to the formatter The formatter sends the VIDEO signals VDO1 VDO1 VDO2 VDO2 VDO3 VDO3 VDOA VDOA to the DC controller in synchronization with the BD1 4 signals upon receipt of the TOP signal The DC controller controls each color s laser driver circuits and turns on off the laser according to the VDO11 41 signals This forms a electrostatic latent image on each color s photosensitive drums The latent images are developed by toner and transferred onto the ITB in the order of Y yellow M magenta C cyan and K black Engine control system 135 8 The DC controller re feeds the paper after a specified time from TOP signal output and transfers the toner image from the ITB onto the paper This aligns the leading edge of the paper and the top of the image 9 The paper having had the toner image fixed on it is delivered to the delivery tray when the print is completed Printing continues when the DC controller receives another print command from the formatter during the first print See Image formation system and Pickup feed system Video interface signals
425. ree tabs at the bottom one tab 5 slips under the printer sheet metal base and the other two tabs 6 fit over the base Figure 6 36 Pick up feed assembly removal 7 of 13 15 Disconnect one spring 1 16 Remove two screws 2 and remove the gear unit 3 Figure 6 37 Pick up feed assembly removal 8 of 13 17 Remove two screws 1 232 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW 18 Unhook one claw 2 and pull the Tray 2 pick up gear 3 off the shaft Reinstallation tip When installing this gear 3 it may be necessary to hold the pick up feed roller steady while inserting the gear onto the shaft 19 Remove one screw 4 and remove the solenoid cover and solenoid 5 Figure 6 38 Pick up feed assembly removal 9 of 13 20 Lift the bushing tab 1 up slightly rotate it in the direction of the arrow 2 and then pull both the bushing and the Tray 2 pick up roller shaft 3 out of the printer Reinstallation tip When reinstalling the shaft 5 it should extend out approximately 17 mm about 5 8 inch 21 Lift the bushing tab 4 up slightly rotate it in the direction of the arrow 5 and then pull both the bushing and the metal shaft 6 out of the printer The shaft has a pin through the end that requires you rotate the shaft while pulling on it to release it Figure 6 39 Pick up feed assembly removal 10 of 13 ENWW Main Assemblies 233 22 Push the right swing guide 1 all the way back 2
426. reete ree eee HO eure rende aeree ex a Viele de eed ee eR eae He eT 47 Checking the package contents 0 eect eeceeee eee ttne eee teeta eee eet ANARAN NESER NENNE EEANN 48 UMpPAackinG the priliter 2 ertt e eaae edd de edu e exce n dde aa bx x nex cd 50 Installing the print cartridge iret eee x ne run th etu ae eR Rea e aen aput ds 55 Loading paper into Tray 3 optional sssini inaanak ini em enne 57 Loading paper into Tray 2 ir etie i ade beaten a o e XR ERE Ro a Rage pague Ra dees 59 Loading paper into Tray 1 optional procedure sssssseem nanten 61 erento 62 Installing a new control panel overlay optional seeeeeeeeeeeel 63 Testing the printer operation ssssssssssssesseeeeeeee nennen ener mre nennt nennen enne 64 Using PowerSave TIIiIe us eec tote tO Rr Ded redu d co eon Ear Ra Dee nudare la 65 To set PowerSawve TIME cercu croire pda Oe sarda ste eade e aan Drx eaae Rad 65 To disable enable POWerSave esses eeessesseentee seen nen enne seen nnne nennen nnns 65 USB configuration i eda di t iai ds a m e dela ee ed ae 66 Connecting the USB cable eo etre icto eere nta duc tea bue d rk ree dunque genere 66 Parallel configuration HP Color LaserJet 3700 series printer only sse 67 Network configurator pes 68 Enhanced I O EIO configuration HP color LaserJet 3700 series printer only 69 H
427. regulatory purposes this product is assigned a regulatory model number This number should not be confused with the product name or product number s This product was tested in typical configurations with Hewlett Packard Co products Roseville California 95747 USA 24 March 2004 For Regulatory Topics Only European Contact USA Contact Your Local Hewlett Packard Sales and Service Office or Hewlett Packard Gmbh Department HQ TRE Standards Europe Herrenberger Stra e 140 B blingen D 71034 Germany FAX 49 7031 14 3143 Hewlett Packard Co Corporate Product Regulations Manager 3000 Hanover Street Palo Alto CA 94304 USA Phone 650 857 1501 36 Chapter 1 Printer description ENWW Safety statements Laser safety statement The Center for Devices and Radiological Health CDRH of the U S Food and Drug Administration has implemented regulations for laser products manufactured since August 1 1976 Compliance is mandatory for products marketed in the United States The printer is certified as a Class 1 laser product under the U S Department of Health and Human Services DHHS Radiation Performance Standard according to the Radiation Control for Health and Safety Act of 1968 Since radiation emitted inside the printer is completely confined within protective housings and external covers the laser beam cannot escape during any phase of normal user operation WARNING Using controls making adjustments or performing proced
428. rements go to Step 6 Can the customer YES print successfully Interface from the host system A Run a print job from the host system B Perform corrective actions When you turn on the printer if it does not make any sound or if the control panel display is blank check the following items 1 Verify that the printer is plugged into an active electrical outlet with the correct voltage and not plugged into a surge protector or power strip 2 Verify that the on off switch is in the ON position 3 Make sure the fan is running indicating the system is operational 4 Verify that the firmware DIMM HP 3700 only and the formatter are seated and operating properly 5 Remove any HP Jetdirect or other devices then try to turn the printer on again 310 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW Make sure the control panel display is connected Check the two fuses on the power supply If necessary replace the power supply Q e cows o If necessary replace the DC controller ENWW Troubleshooting process 311 Printer error troubleshooting NOTE NOTE The following tables explain messages that might appear on the printer control panel Alphabetical printer messages and their meanings are listed in the Table 7 2 Alphabetical printer messages table and numerical printer messages are listed in the Table 7 3 Numerical printer messages table Not all messages are described in the tables those
429. removal 1 of 2 esses 280 Formatter PCB HP 3500 3500 removal 2 of 2 sss 280 Formatter PCB HP 3700 removal 1 of 2 sese 281 ENWW ENWW Figure 6 120 Figure 6 121 Figure 6 122 Figure 6 123 Figure 6 124 Figure 6 125 Figure 6 126 Figure 6 127 Figure 6 128 Figure 6 129 Figure 6 130 Figure 6 131 Figure 6 132 Figure 6 133 Figure 6 134 Figure 6 135 Figure 6 136 Figure 6 137 Figure 6 138 Figure 6 139 Figure 6 140 Figure 6 141 Figure 6 142 Figure 6 143 Figure 6 144 Figure 6 145 Figure 6 146 Figure 6 147 Figure 6 148 Figure 6 149 Figure 6 150 Figure 6 151 Figure 6 152 Figure 6 153 Figure 6 154 Figure 6 155 Figure 6 156 Figure 6 157 Figure 6 158 Figure 7 1 Figure 7 2 Figure 7 3 Figure 7 4 Figure 7 5 Figure 7 6 Figure 7 7 Figure 7 8 Figure 7 9 Figure 7 10 Figure 7 11 Figure 7 12 Figure 7 13 Figure 7 14 Figure 7 15 Figure 7 16 Figure 7 17 Formatter PCB HP 3700 removal 2 of 2 sss 281 HP 3500 3550 and HP 3700 sse enm eene 282 High voltage power supply PCB removal 1 of 5 sssssssssss 282 High voltage power supply PCB removal 2 of 5 sss 283 High voltage power supply PCB removal 3 or 5 ssssssssss 283 High voltage power supply PCB removal 4 of 5 sssssssess 284 High voltage power supply PCB removal 5 of 5
430. removal left 2 Remove the door switch 1 by sliding it out Figure 6 67 Door switch removal 250 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW ENWW Test print switch SW1001 removal Replacing the test print switch requires the replacement of the DC controller PCB See DC controller PCB removal Power switch SW3001 removal Replacing the power switch requires replacement of the low voltage power supply PCB See Low voltage power supply PCB removal Switches 251 Sensors RS Figure 6 68 Sensor locations PS1 Tray 1 multipurpose paper sensor PS2 Tray 2 cassette paper sensor PS4 Registration paper sensor PS5 Media sensor PS6 Fuser front paper sensor PS7 Fuser delivery paper sensor PS8 Face down delivery paper sensor PS9 Reversed paper sensor PS10 Duplexing feed delivery paper sensor PS11 Face up tray sensor PS12 Color misregistration sensor PS13 Waste toner level sensor PS14 Developing engaging sensor PS15 Environment sensor PS16 Secondary transfer roller engaging sensor 252 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW Tray 1 multipurpose tray paper sensor PS1 removal Replacement of the Tray 1 paper sensor requires replacement of the entire pick up feed assembly See Pick up feed assembly removal Tray 2 cassette paper sensor PS2 removal 1 Remove the pick up feed assembly See Pick up feed assembly removal 2 Turn the pick up feed assembly over 3 Remove the Tray
431. ressing in on two tabs 2 and pulling the cover out of the printer Figure 6 134 Developing contact assembly removal 2 of 3 4 Unhook the cables from the left side cable guides 1 on the contact assembly ENWW Miscellaneous parts 289 5 Pull out on the top of the assembly while pressing in on two tabs 2 Once the top is released pull up slightly and outward to remove the developing contact assembly 3 As you remove the assembly unroute the grounding wire 4 Reinstallation tip When installing the developing contact assembly install the tab at the bottom of the assembly into the slot in the frame then insert and latch the two tabs 2 at the top Figure 6 135 Developing contact assembly removal 3 of 3 290 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW Tray 2 cassette parts removal The following section describes the removal procedures for Tray 2 and associated parts including the right guide in the printer Tray 2 cassette The separation pad and the end plate are the only replaceable components on the tray Replacement of any other component requires replacement of the entire tray For replacement of the separation pad see Tray 2 separation pad removal For replacement of the tray or the end plate refer to Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams for the location of the end plate Cassette Tray 2 guide right removal The removal of the right guide is different for the HP Color LaserJet 3500 and 3700 series
432. ring the developing cylinder engagement disengagement operation See Figure 5 39 Developing engaging disengaging unit The developing engaging lever has a projection on the top that pushes the developing engaging flag up and shields the PS14 when the developing engaging lever stays lifted up When the developing cylinders are engaged the PS14 is not shielded by the flag so it does not output DEVELOPING ENGAGING DETECTION signal DEVHPSNS Condition L When the lever is lifted up the PS14 is shielded by the flag and outputs DEVELOPING ENGAGING DETECTION signal DEVHPSNS Condition H The DC controller judges the disengagement mechanism faulty and sends the error message to the formatter when the DEVHPSNS signal is not input output within a specified time during engagement disengagement operation Cartridge cleaning control This control is for the primary charging roller cleaning As the printer prints pages toner gets attracted to the primary charging rollers Accumulated toner on the roller can cause some image defects therefore it needs to be cleared away The DC controller sends a command for this control every specified number of pages Image formation system 163 Figure 5 43 The DC controller disengages the developing cylinder to start this control and apply two negative biases alternately to the primary charging roller This attracts the toner away from the primary charging roller to the photosensitive drum
433. rint mode ENWW ENWW Table 7 44 Print quality menu continued eum o es qmemm OPTIMIZE T1 UP T1 DOWN T2 UP 1 T2 UP 2 T2 DOWN 1 T2 DOWN 2 LEADING EDGE UP LEADING EDGE DOWN REDUCE BKGROUND 1 REDUCE BKGROUND 2 FUSER DOWN 1 FUSER DOWN 2 FILM OFFSET GHOST PREVENTION PRE ROTATION RESTORE OPTIMIZE Allows you to optimize certain parameters for all jobs rather than or in addition to optimizing by paper type The default for each item is OFF RESTORE OPTIMIZE resets all of the values to OFF T1 UP Use when toner does not adequately transfer from the print cartridge drum to the ITB T1 DOWN Use when toner transfers unevenly from the print cartridge drum to the ITB T2 UP 1 Use when poor transfer occurs on the entire surface of the media from the ITB to the paper at the secondary transfer roller T2 UP 2 Use when T2 UP 1 did not completely solve the problem T2 DOWN 1 Use when poor transfer in black or freckles appear on the entire surface of the media especially in purple T2 DOWN 2 Use when T2 DOWN 1 did not completely solve the problem LEADING EDGE UP Unassigned LEADING EDGE DOWN Unassigned REDUCE BKGROUND 1 Unassigned REDUCE BKGROUND 2 Unassigned FUSER DOWN 1 Use when hot offset occurs the image repeats because toner sticks to the fuser film instead of the paper toner gets transferred to the paper later in the wrong place
434. rinted Re send the missing pages ENWW Printer error troubleshooting 331 Table 7 3 Numerical printer messages continued Message 13 90 00 JAM INSIDE FRONT DOOR alternates with REMOVE INCOMPATIBLE TRANSPARENCIES 13 XX YY JAM REMOVE TRAY 2 alternates with For help press 13 XX YY JAM INSIDE LOWER REAR DOOR alternates with Clear jam then press v 13 XX YY JAM INSIDE UPPER REAR DOOR alternates with Clear jam then press v 13 XX YY JAM IN TRAY 1 alternates with For help press Clear jam then press v 332 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting There is a jam inside the front door caused by incompatible transparencies HP 3700 only There is a jam in the duplex path or the paper access plate in the duplex area needs to be closed A page is jammed in the lower rear door rear output bin There is a jam inside the upper rear door the upper rear door was opened during printing or the door has been left open and a print job was sent to the printer A page is jammed in the multipurpose tray Press for help or See Paper path troubleshooting later in this chapter for more information CAUTION Use only transparencies specified for use with HP Color LaserJet printers Noncompatible transparencies can damage the printer See the HP LaserJet Printer Family Print Media Specification Guide 1 Remove all non compatible transparencies from Tray 1 Load compatible transparencies in Tra
435. rinter HP Color LaserJet 3700n printer The HP Color LaserJet 3700n printer includes the features of the HP Color LaserJet 3700 printer plus an HPJetdirect 615n print server for easy connectivity to 10 100 base T networks 4 Chapter 1 Printer description ENWW Figure 1 5 Figure 1 6 ENWW HP Color LaserJet 3700dn printer HP Color LaserJet 3700dn printer The HP Color LaserJet 3700dn printer includes the features of the HP Color LaserJet 3700n printer automatic two sided duplex printing and a total of 128 MB of SDRAM HP Color LaserJet 3700dtn printer HP Color LaserJet 3700dtn printer The HP Color LaserJet 3700dtn printer includes the features of the HP Color LaserJet 3700dn printer with an additional 500 sheet paper feeder Tray 3 Printer configurations 5 Printer features Table 1 1 Features HP Color LaserJet 3500 3550 HP Color LaserJet 3700 series printer series printer Performance e 12ppm in both monochrome and color If the performance of the printer is less than this see the HP Color LaserJet 3550 and 3700 series printer User Guide or theHP Color LaserJet 3500 and 3700 series printer User Guide for factors affecting printer performance Prints on a variety of media For more information see Print media specifications 64 MB of SDRAM User interface Graphic display on control panel Enhanced control panel help HP Toolbox a web application for status and
436. rints all data received before this command e Performs a reset lt esc gt E in PCL lt cntrl gt D in PostScript e Turns control over to PJL This command is also a valid HP GL 2 terminator The UEL command must be immediately followed by the PJL command prefix Characters or control codes other than PJL such as lt CR gt or lt LF gt enable the default language and process the print job in that language All jobs must begin and end with the UEL command Besides entering PJL the UEL command has the same effect as the lt esc gt E command However the lt esc gt E command should always be included to ensure backward compatibility PJL COMMENT This command designates the current line as a comment which is ignored The syntax is PJL COMMENT lt words gt lt CR gt lt LF gt PJL INFO CONFIG This command solicits a response to describe the installed options and allows the printer to configure the installed options automatically as the applications require PJL INFO ID This command identifies the printer type to the host for reference when selecting printer drivers for automatic installation The command syntax is PUJL INFO ID lt CR gt lt LF gt PJL INFO USTATUS This command queries the state of unsolicited JOB status PAGE and TIMED status are not supported The syntax is PJL INFO USTATUS CR lt LF gt PJL INFO PAGECOUNT This command returns the number of pages printed by the engine I
437. rk card configure that card through the control panel Configure device menu HP Jetdirect print servers An HP Jetdirect print server network card can be installed in the printer EIO slot These print server cards support multiple network protocols and operating systems HP Jetdirect print servers facilitate network management allowing you to connect a printer directly to your network at any location HP Jetdirect print servers also support Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP which provides network managers with remote printer management and troubleshooting through HP Web Jetadmin software NOTE Installation of these cards and network configuration should be performed by a network administrator Configure the card either through the control panel the printer installation software or with HP Web Jetadmin software NOTE See to the HP Jetdirect print server documentation for information on which external devices or EIO network cards are supported Available enhanced I O interfaces HP Jetdirect print servers network cards provide software solutions for e Novell NetWare Network e Microsoft Windows and Windows NT networks e Apple Mac OS AppleTalk e UNIX HP UX and Solaris e Linux Red Hat and SuSE e Internet printing For a summary of available network software solutions see the HP Jetdirect Print Server Administrator s Guide or visit HP Customer Care online at http www hp com support net printing ENWW Enhanced
438. rol 160 menu map printing 407 menus locking 76 messages alphabetical list 312 critical error 312 error 312 numerical list 327 status 312 warning 312 model numbers 22 Index 565 modes duplex feed 194 motor delivery M2 271 developing M4 273 drum M3 271 exhaust fan FAN1 277 feed M1 269 functions 121 locations 455 transfer roller engaging M5 274 MS DOS commands 404 MSDS Material Safety Data Sheet 32 multifeeds 360 multipart forms avoiding 24 multipurpose tray see tray 1 216 N network configuration 68 troubleshooting 403 networking tab embedded Web server 424 networks AppleTalk 70 enhanced I O EIO 69 enhanced I O EIO configuration 69 enhanced I O interfaces 69 HP Web Jetadmin 73 I O interfaces 69 Novell NetWare 70 security 76 setting printer security 76 software 72 UNIX Linux 70 Windows 65 70 nonsupported media 24 Novell NetWare 70 NVRAM initialization 446 O operating systems supported 424 operation basic 114 engine control system 119 major systems 114 timing sequence 114 options color 384 ordering accessories 43 documentation 45 drivers 45 parts 43 parts and supplies 43 software 45 566 Index output bin locating 9 P pages maximum per month 15 paper recycled 29 selecting 24 selection for color printing 384 paper feeder 197 paper jams detection 199 duplex 369 front door area 362 fuser area 373 fuser face down delivery area 370 fuser face down d
439. rol panel settings by establishing a password and locking the printer control panel You can choose from multiple levels of security You can lock certain control panel menus allowing users to change the rest of the menus or you can lock all of the menus and you can even lock the Stop button Levels of security Table 3 4 Printer security levels Lock setting Control panel items locked Service menu locked with factory set PIN LOW I O submenu System setup submenu Resets submenu Service menu locked with factory set PIN MEDIUM Configure Device menu including all submenus Diagnostics menu Service menu locked with factory set PIN HIGH Information menu Paper Handling menu Configure Device menu including all submenus Diagnostics menu Service menu locked with factory set PIN Stop button 76 Chapter 3 Installation and configuration ENWW NOTE ENWW Use HP Web Jetadmin software HP LaserJet Utility for Macintosh or an ASCII escape sequence to set security HP software which comes on the software CD ROM is easier to use than an ASCII escape sequence For instructions about locking the control panel by using either HP Web Jetadmin software or the HP LaserJet Utility for Macintosh go to the online Help for that software Using an ASCII PJL escape sequence to set security If you decide to use the ASCII escape sequence you must use an MS DOS or Windows ASCII editor to create the commands The commands must also be se
440. roller removal ssssssssssseeeeeee 237 Tray 1 separation pad removal sss 237 Tray 2 pick up roller removal sssssssssseee ee 238 Tray 2 separation pad removal sss 238 Secondary transfer charging roller removal sseeseeee 239 Feed guide unit removal 1 of 2 sss emm 240 Feed guide removal 2 of 2 ssssssssssssseeeeeene eene 241 Feed guide printer drive shaft connection sseee 241 Feed guide unit tab locations esssseseeem em 241 Right swing guide removal 1 of 4 ssssssssssse em 242 Right swing guide removal 2 of 4 ssssssssssse em 242 Right swing guide removal 3 of 4 ssssssssss em 243 Right swing guide removal 4 of 4 ssssssssssseem 243 Swing guide shaft removal sssssssssee eee eee 244 Developing drum lock arm position for swing guide installation 244 Left swing guide removal 1 of 6 sssssssseennmm 245 Left swing guide removal 2 of 6 sssssssssseeee eene 246 Left swing guide removal 3 of 6 ssssssssseeem eee 246 Left swing guide removal 4 of 6 sssssssssn ee 247 Left swing guide removal 5 Of 6 ssssssssssee e 247 Conventions xix XX Figure 6 64 Figure 6 65 Figure 6 66 Figure 6 67 Figure 6 68 Fi
441. roller removal 1 Remove Tray 2 2 Push the roller 1 in the direction of the arrow then remove it by pulling the right side out 2 first Figure 6 46 Tray 2 pick up roller removal Tray 2 separation pad removal 1 Remove Tray 2 2 Remove any paper from the tray 3 Push the lifting plate 1 down 4 Unhook two claws 2 by pressing in on them then lift up on the separation pad 3 to remove it Figure 6 47 Tray 2 separation pad removal Reinstallation tip The separation pad contains a spring attached to the back side of the pad This spring must be removed and installed on the replacement pad 238 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW CAUTION Figure 6 48 ENWW Secondary transfer charging roller removal 1 Remove the transfer unit and the print cartridges See Transfer unit removal and Print cartridge removal When handling the secondary transfer charging roller hold the shaft and bushing do not hold the sponge part of the roller 2 Liftthe blue handle 1 straight up once the right side is out continue lifting to release the left side and remove the roller 2 Secondary transfer charging roller removal Reinstallation tip When handling the secondary transfer charging roller hold the shaft ends and bushings do not hold the sponge part of the roller Fuser sleeve unit removal Replacement of the fuser sleeve unit requires replacement of the entire fuser See Fuser removal
442. rom the Control Panel NOTE This section provides information about performing the printer diagnostics Printer display menu Control Panel Fuel Gauges used to determine if cyan magenta yellow or the black print cartridge is in a low or out condition Diagnostics test menu Print Event Log This item prints an event log that displays the last 50 entries in the printer s event log starting with the most recent Show Event Log This item displays on the control panel the last 50 events in the event log starting with the most recent PQ Troubleshooting This item prints a series of print quality assessment pages that help troubleshoot print quality problems Disable Cartridge Check special mode test This diagnostic test allows you to print internal pages or sends an external job to the printer with one or more print cartridges removed or swapped Because the cartridges are not keyed the diagnostic test can be run with one to four cartridges removed or swapped to another location Consumable supply errors are ignored while in this mode Once in this mode you can navigate the menus and print internal pages or send an external print job to the printer This diagnostic test can be used to isolate print quality problems related to individual cartridges and to isolate individual cartridge problems such as noise Do not remove or swap cartridges before entering the disable cartridge check diagnostic After entering the test you c
443. ront door Replace the door open detection switch actuator the switch arm for the front cover and right frame Reseat the DC controller PCB connector J1010 Replace the door open switch Replace the DC controller PCB Press Menu to enter the menus Load the cleaning page into Tray 1 Select PROCESS CLEANING PAGE Press v to continue No action necessary Printing may continue for jobs that do not require the Flash DIMM To remove this message from the display press v If the message persists remove and re install the Flash DIMM If the message persists replace the Flash DIMM No action necessary Printing may continue To remove this message from the display press v If the message reappears there might be a problem with the software application ENWW Table 7 2 Alphabetical printer messages continued eem 0 um Message FLASH FILE SYSTEM IS FULL alternates with Ready To clear pressv FLASH IS WRITE PROTECTED alternates with Ready To clear pressv FIIDEVICE FAILURE alternates with To clear press v FS FILE OPERATION FAILED alternates with To clear press v FS FILE SYSTEM IS FULL alternates with To clear press v FS IS filesys is write protected V1 I ine 2 alternates with To clear press v Genuine HP supplies installed GENUINE HP SUPPLIES DESIGNED FOR lt PROD gt HP 3700 only The printer received a PJL file system command that
444. rs may be printed ona single line The default is NO HP 3700 only Allows you to select to print PS emulated PostScript error pages The default is OFF ENWW Table 7 43 Printing menu continued FORM Allows you to configure LENGTH settings for the printer ORIENTATION control language FONT puero ines ner pe SOURCE The default is 0 FONT ORIENTATION determines NUMBER long edge versus short FONT PITCH edge page layout The default is PORTRAIT SYMBOL SET HP Color LaserJet 3700 APPEND CR series printer only TO LF FONT SOURCE selects the SUPPRESS source of the font used on BLANKPAGES the printer control panel The default is INTERNAL FONT NUMBER is the number of the font you select If this font is a contour font use FONT PITCH to set the pitch of a fixed space font The default is 10 00 HP Color LaserJet 3700 series printer only SYMBOL SET sets the symbol set used by the printer control panel The default is PC 8 APPEND CR TO LF sets whether a carriage return is appended to each line feed in a backward compatible PCL job The default is NO SUPPRESS BLANK PAGES sets whether jobs using PCL that include blank form feeds will automatically suppress the blank pages YES indicates that form feeds will be ignored if the page is blank HP Color LaserJet 3700 series printer only Print quality menu The Print quality menu allows you to adjust all aspects of print quality
445. rum motor is a three phase eight pole DC motor with a built in drive circuit The drum motor drives the four color photosensitive drums the K black developing cylinder and the ITB The drum motor operates under the control of the DRUM MOTOR ACCELERATION signal DRMITBACC and the DRUM MOTOR DECELERATION signal DRMITBDEC from the DC controller DC controller PCB DRUM motor a zc E l 24V l J1019 J5002 I 7 24VB 7 I l 1 8 24VB 6 l I I l 11 DRMITBACC 3 I l 12 DRMITBDEC 2 ws I I I wal DRMITBFG 1 I T PGND 5 l l i l 10 PGND 4 I HT f I Drum motor control circuit The DC controller monitors the DRUM MOTOR SPEED DETECTION signal DRMITBFG to control the RPM of the drum motor 124 Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW Figure 5 9 Figure 5 10 ENWW Under the following conditions the DC controller judges the drum motor faulty and sends an error message to the formatter e Drum motor start abnormality The interval of the DRMITBFG signals does not become regular in 1000 ms from the drum motor start e Drum motor rotation abnormality The interval of the DRMITBFG signal stays irregular for 100 ms or more after it has become regular Developing motor control This developing motor control controls the drive of the developing motor M4 The developing motor a three phase eight pole DC motor with a built in drive circuit drives the Y M and C cartridges The
446. s Z Developing engaging flag L i m 2 a a gt z W a Oo Or7 2 OL m E i i K cartridge 1 I 9 rv O gt tu PS14 a Developing engaging lever we I Y cartridge l CL3 Developing engaging disengaging unit M2 Delivery motor M3 Drum motor M4 Developing motor CL2 K developing clutch Developing engaging clutch Image formation system 159 Figure 5 40 Memory tag control The memory tag is a nonvolatile memory built in the print cartridge The cartridge usage condition is monitored by reading writing the data stored in the memory tag The cartridge usage condition is stored in the memory tag as a memory data The memory controller reads writes a memory data into the tag at the specified timing upon receipt of a command from the DC controller The DC controller updates a memory data sent from the memory controller and sends it back to write into the memory tag at a specified timing When the following status is received the DC controller judges a memory tag abnormal and sends a cartridge memory abnormality warning to the formatter e Access abnormality reading writing failed e Data abnormality wrong data is read written Memory tag Memory data Memory controller PCB DC controller PCB Cartridge Memory tag control Cartridge presence detection 160 Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW The DC controller judges the cartridge presence based on the
447. s If the environment sensor detects a temperature below 30 C or over 80 C the DC controller determines this an environment sensor abnormality and sends an error message to the formatter Image density control D max This control calibrates the value of the developing bias to stabilize the image density The DC controller runs the D max control under the following conditions e Power on e A door is closed after replacement of cartridge e A specified time has elapsed since the last rotation of the developing cylinder e A specified amount of environmental conditions has changed since the last image density control e Acommand is received from the formatter The following is the sequence of this control See Figure 5 56 Image density detection on the following page 1 The DC controller forms 2 lines of density detection patterns 1 line each of the identical patterns at both sides in each color on the ITB 2 The DC controller measures the density of each detection pattern by controlling the color misregistration sensor See Figure 5 56 Image density detection on the following page 3 The DC controller adjusts the developing bias according to the density of the detection patterns to obtain the correct density Image halftone control D half The control is to measure the halftone density sent from the formatter and send the measurement back to the formatter so that the formatter can perform an ideal halftone ca
448. s Software installer automates the printing system installation Online Web registration HP toolbox a Web application for checking printer status and settings for Windows 98 2000 Me and XP users PostScript Printer Description files PPDs for use with the Apple PostScript drivers that come with the Mac OS HP Toolbox a Web application for checking printer status and settings for Mac OS X v10 1 and v10 2 users HP Web Jetadmin a browser based system management tool See http www hp com go webjetadmin for the latest HP Web Jetadminsoftware HP Jetdirect Printer Installer for UNIX available for download from http www hp com support net_printing Printer software 75 Setting security on the printer This printer features control panel locking which allows network administrators to prevent users from changing certain printer control panel settings When a menu is locked unauthorized users trying to change settings in the printer control panel will receive the following message Access Denied MENUS LOCKED You can use HP Web Jetadmin software the HP LaserJet Utility for Macintosh or an ASCII escape sequence to perform this procedure For instructions on locking the printer control panel using either the HP Web Jetadmin software or the HP LaserJet Utility for Macintosh see the online Help for these utilities Locking the control panel You can prevent users from changing printer cont
449. s 1022 J1019 J1016 J1027 Hers aeoeaio y jefes o eir ol d d ld Emm I EE EE ES 85 2 HSBS Reus amp gs Es alelale AFFSRLED 3 7 4 REEE BE ale gees I 8 GND 2 x E J5020D li Eme JES EE ES E AFFSRSNS 1 S9zaziiz55m022 a99 EE EE N J5020DH Rez aas zziz aaa 8 FULED ei hasia E SRA ose 5 EECEESE U 265 v a a 3 E L1 PNE a soled pue otc gt 8 8 ve 45014D Nir TI 45017D o 4 714 J5008H J5017H Go a ae eae J5014DH ER J5002 J5006 J5004 J5008L 35017 J5014L diddi ial 2 T _ PS14 g Laser Scanner J Developer SL2 i Engagin 1 Unit D Weah Drum Motor Developer Motor Delivery Motor Cassette Guannar Pick up Bk Developer Face up Tray Sensor MD Developer Foca Primary Transfer Solenoid Clutch or Engaging eed Motor Duplex Feed Roller Engaging Fixing Front Clatch Sensor Motor Sensor ee es S a iaa nS PS10 PS6 ale issoro Memory Controller PCB AL aiy secoron Envenmon Waste Toner soos rio 3706 inn ewe Toner Detection ensor Full Sensor noe E E SIS soos IT ML 0H PS15 PS13 J5005DH gl gn Face down p eis Jsoosp Emitter Receiver Delivery Sensor Bae LEDI Q1 PS8 aal 555 388 PERRI 1 GND 16 sss aon SST do Registration Clutch 2 TONLED J202 J708 4 TONSNS3 ofod sosicteltsetesfot 50290 TONSNS2 TONSNS1 xag al 2 2 Sebald 2 she EE 5 Ja a 5 2 aao a al 2 x SH x 5 o3 ER PP E vega celat 6 Im 2B E z oS ens i ENS EAE B aes BEES e EOEB ogor ye B0q MEMRD ER BZ GE t reerete ta e 5600 E3 I ds IE E
450. s 48 setting network security 76 software 71 specifications 15 testing operation 64 troubleshooting errors 312 unpacking 50 Index 567 printer components removal and replacement 201 printer covers removal and replacement 209 printer drivers additional 72 ordering 45 software 71 printer features 6 Printer Job Language PJL commands 404 Technical Reference Manual 77 printing four colors 385 grayscale 386 menu map 407 process print 147 production number 22 protective functions 129 132 PS1 see tray 1 paper sensor 253 PS10 see duplex feed delivery paper sensor 258 PS11 see rear output bin paper sensor 259 PS12 see color misregistration sensor 260 PS13 see waste toner level sensor 260 PS14 see developing engaging sensor 261 PS15 see environment sensor 261 PS16 see secondary transfer roller engaging sensor 262 PS2 see tray 2 paper sensor 253 PS4 see registration paper sensor 254 PS5 see media sensor 255 PS6 see fuser front paper sensor 256 PS7 see fuser delivery paper sensor 256 PS8 see face down delivery paper sensor 257 PS9 see reversed paper sensor 257 punched paper 24 R rear cover removal and replacement 215 rear output bin see lower rear door 215 rear output bin paper sensor removal and replacement 259 recovery feature paper jam 377 recycled paper 29 recycling print cartridge 32 reference materials partnumbers 471 registration clutch CL1 removal and replacement 2
451. s or below at ambient temperature replace the fuser 3 Faulty DC controller PCB replace the DC controller PCB ENWW Printer error troubleshooting 339 Table 7 3 Numerical printer messages continued Message 50 X FUSER ERRORcontinued 51 XY PRINTER ERROR alternates with To continue turn off then on 52 XY PRINTER ERROR alternates with To continue turn off then on 340 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting A laser scanner error has occurred X Description 1 beam detect error 2 laser error Y Description 0 no color K black C cyan M magenta Y yellow A laser scanner motor failure has occurred X Description 1 scanner error 2 scanner startup error 3 scanner rotation error Y Description 0 no color K black C cyan M magenta Y yellow 50 9 error Fuser Failure Abnormally High Temperature Sub Thermistor 1 The connector between the fuser and the printer is not connected properly Reseat the fuser Check the connector J5013 between the fuser and the printer Replace it if damaged 2 Short in the sub thermistor Turn the printer off and remove the fuser Measure the resistance between the fuser connectors J5013LA 4 SUBTH and J5013LA 3 3 3V If it reads 600 ohms or below at ambient temperature replace the fuser 3 Faulty DC controller PCB replace the DC controller PCB Press v to continue If the message persists turn the printer o
452. s t te etico cte foede eaa 153 Siege PME 154 FUSING ettet mae mitt 155 ITB cleaning iiio iie eno i etes B die eso ed tee pend 155 Dr mi cleanitig nnt tone nte ein e d e etos dots 156 Cartridge diagram 1 Lene eec ue toii cr dee 157 Developing engaging disengaging unit sss 159 Memory tag control saciesas ba aedi rd eite edd LL edd de a nde tb hla 160 Cartridge presence detection sse 161 Toner level detection iniii ttd dee dete eed ds 162 Transfer section diagram sss eene 164 Transfer Sections itte rne m aee ER dee d etes 166 ITB cleaning control rhet het RR E RRURRRH ERN IRR RR RR RA BR Ires 167 Waste toner full detection nuceni eene 168 Transfer unit detectlon riegan ione Ree e e eae LT ARI ERR aaneants 169 Transfer unit life detection control sesss 169 ITB self aligning mechanism seme 171 Primary transfer roller engaging disengaging control s 172 Secondary transfer roller engaging disengaging control 173 Secondary transfer roller engaging disengaging detection 174 Color misregistration control sssssseee eme 176 Color misregistration detection ssssseem e 177 Image stabilization control asean nanta A menn 178 Image density detection iinit ieii tenter trate patent nnn
453. s v 41 3 UNEXPECTED SIZE IN TRAY X alternates with LOAD TRAY X TYPE SIZE 41 5 UNEXPECTED TYPE IN TRAY X alternates with LOAD TRAY X TYPE SIZE 334 Chapter Troubleshooting HP 3700 only when an EIO device is installed A connection with the card in the EIO slot has been abnormally broken Paper is loaded that is longer or shorter in the feed direction than the size configured for the tray The printer senses a different paper type in the paper path than what is configured in the tray Press v to continue printing NOTE A loss of data will occur Load the paper as instructed Press v to print If the incorrect size was selected press Stop to cancel the job or press for help If the incorrect tray was selected press Stop to cancel the job Configure the trays correctly and resend the job Ensure all trays are configured correctly Load the paper as instructed Press v to print If the incorrect type was selected press Sroe to cancel the job or press for help Configure the trays correctly and resend the job Ensure all trays are configured correctly ENWW Table 7 3 Numerical printer messages continued Message 41 X PRINTER ERROR alternates with To continue press v ENWW A printer error has occurred X Description 2 Beam detect misprint error 3 Media feed error size 5 Media feed error type 7 Feed delay error 1 Press v to continue
454. sages are not affected by the auto continue setting If a critical error persists service is required The following table lists and describes control panel messages in alphabetical order Alphabetical printer messages The following table lists the alphabetical control panel messages The numerical messages are listed in the following table 312 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW Table 7 2 Alphabetical printer messages Access Denied An attempt has been made to modify a Contact the printer administrator to change MENUS LOCKED menu item while the control panel settings security mechanism is enabled by the printer administrator The message will disappear shortly and the printer will return to the Ready or BUSY state Calibrating lt TEST gt The printer is calibrating Calibrating The printer is calibrating the media No action necessary sensor Perform a cold reset to clear passwords Media sensor is not calibrated Canceling X The printer is in the process of canceling No action necessary a job The message will continue to be displayed while the job is stopped the paper path flushed and any remaining incoming data on the active data channel is received and discarded JOB NAME Cannot duplex close rear bin HP 3700 only Close the lower rear door rear output bin or load paper that is supported for autoduplexing See Supported media weights and sizes in Chapter 1 alternates with The lower rear door rear o
455. se the cartridge until the toner is gone or replace the cartridge to remove the message To continue printing press v If this toner cartridge is a new genuine HP supply test the cartridge using Diagnostics mode on the printer control panel and select Disable Cartridge Check If the message follows the cartridge replace the cartridge and return it to HP If you believe you purchased an HP supply please call the HP fraud hotline at 1 877 219 3183 Service or repairs required as a result of using non HP supplies is not covered under HP warranty Order the identified print cartridge Printing will continue until REPLACE COLOR CARTRIDGE is shown NOTE Estimated pages remaining is based upon historical page coverage with this supply See Ordering parts in Chapter 8 for more information Printer error troubleshooting 319 Table 7 2 Alphabetical printer messages continued Message ORDER FUSER KIT alternates with LESS THAN X PAGES alternates with Ready For help press Order Supplies alternates with Ready ORDER TRANSFER KIT alternates with LESS THAN X PAGES alternates with Ready For help press Paused alternates with To return to Ready press the STOP key Performing PAPER PATH TEST Performing upgrade Please wait Powersave on Printing CONFIGURATION eem Rem The fuser is near end of life The printer Order the fuser kit Printing can continue is ready and
456. se two pins 1 then swing the top out and down 2 to release the bottom hooks and remove the cover 3 p VERE pem uc X 7 2 E A ee A i o Figure 6 146 500 Sheet paper feeder front cover removal 296 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW Right cover removal 500 sheet paper feeder 1 Remove Tray 3 2 Liftup to release two pins 1 and pull the top edge of the cover 2 in the direction of the arrow to remove the cover 3 Figure 6 147 500 sheet paper feeder right cover removal Left cover removal 500 sheet paper feeder 1 Remove Tray 3 2 Liftup on the top edge of the cover to release two pins 1 and pull the edge in the direction of the arrow 2 to remove the cover 3 Figure 6 148 500 sheet paper feeder left cover removal ENWW 500 Sheet paper feeder Tray 3 covers 297 500 Sheet paper feeder internal parts 500 Sheet paper feeder pick up roller 500 Sheet paper feeder pick up drive unit 500 Sheet paper feeder separation pad wh Pick up roller removal 500 sheet paper feeder 1 Remove Tray 3 2 Turn the 500 sheet paper feeder over Move the left side of the roller unit 1 to the left 2 then pull it out and to the right 3 Figure 6 149 500 Sheet paper feeder pick up roller removal 298 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW Separation pad removal 500 sheet paper feeder 1 Remove Tray 3 2 Push the lifting plate 1 dow
457. sed Condensation e Does condensation occur following a temperature change particularly in winter following cold storage If so wipe affected parts dry or leave the printer on for 10 to 20 minutes Was a print cartridge opened soon after being moved from a cold toa warm room If so allow the print cartridge to sit at room temperature for one to two hours Miscellaneous Check for and remove any non HP components print cartridges memory modules and EIO cards from the printer If hardware or software configuration has not changed or the problem is not associated with any specific software contact the Customer Care Center see Chapter 1 Remove the printer from the network and ensure that the failure is associated with the printer before beginning troubleshooting For any print quality issues calibrate the printer See Calibrate Now for instructions Troubleshooting flowchart The flowchart on these two pages highlights the general processes to quickly isolate and solve printer hardware problems Each heading depicts a major troubleshooting step A yes answer to the questions allows you to proceed to the next major step 308 Chapter Troubleshooting ENWW ENWW A no answer indicates that additional testing is needed Proceed to the referenced section in this chapter and follow the instructions After completing this additional testing proceed to the next major step in the troubleshooting flowchart Power On
458. sembly Tray 3 pick up solenoid not shown see 500 sheet paper feeder Secondary transfer roller engaging solenoid Duplex feed solenoid Registration clutch K development clutch image drive unit Developing engaging clutch developing engaging drive unit Tray 3 pick up clutch not shown see 500 sheet paper feeder Tray 1 multipurpose tray pick up solenoid SL1 removal 1 Remove the pick up feed assembly See Pick up feed assembly removal Solenoids and Clutches 263 2 Remove one screw 1 disconnect one connector 2 and remove the Tray 1 pick up solenoid 3 Figure 6 89 Tray 1 pick up solenoid removal Tray 2 pick up solenoid SL2 removal 1 Remove the right cover See Right cover removal 2 Referto the Pick up feed assembly removal procedure steps 4 and 6 through 10 and remove the paper drive gear plate 3 Remove two screws 1 disconnect one connector 2 and remove the cover plate 3 Figure 6 90 Tray 2 pick up solenoid removal 1 of 2 264 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW 4 Remove one screw 1 and remove the solenoid 2 Figure 6 91 Tray 2 pick up solenoid removal 2 of 2 Secondary transfer roller engaging solenoid SL4 removal 1 Remove the pick up feed assembly See Pick up feed assembly removal 2 Remove five screws 1 the gear side plate 2 plate 3 solenoid 4 and the connector cover 5 Figure 6 92 Secondary transfer roller engaging
459. sensor lever Reseat the lever to make the movement smooth is not smooth Foreign substances dirt on the fuser inlet guide Clean the fuser inlet guide Misplaced image Table 7 36 Causes for a misplaced image Paper is skewed See Table 7 12 Causes for skewed paper to resolve the reason for the skew Oblique rollers are worn If problem only occurs on Replace the oblique rollers the back side of duplex printing only ENWW Image defects 399 Table 7 36 Causes for a misplaced image continued DC controller PCB is defective Replace the DC controller PCB Calibrate the printer after replacing the DC controller See Calibrate Now later in this chapter Reversed color Table 7 37 Causes for reversed color The FFC flat cable that connects the DC controller Reseat the FFC to the DC controller PCB J1001 to the formatter is not correctly connected Defective DC controller PCB Replace the DC controller PCB Snail tracks Table 7 38 Causes for reversed color Occurs in high temperature high humidity Replace the fuser environments on the 2nd side printed when duplexing Cased by the fuser pressure roller being bent in or out NOTE See the print modes in CONFIGURE DEVICE PRINT QUALITY PRINT MODES to associate each paper type with a specific print mode For example there are several BEST print modes that can be set for a specific media type that will enhance print quality Results will vary
460. serJet 3500 3550 printer ssssssssssseene 3 HP Color LaserJet 3500n 3550n printer sss 3 HP Color LaserJet 3700 printer ssssssssssssseeemeeeii HP Color LaserJet 3700n printer sssssssssssssseseeeeee i HP Color LaserJet 3700dn printer sssssssssssssssesseeeemeemennenen nnn 5 HP Color LaserJet 3700dtn printer ssssssssssssssssseseseeeerereenenen nne 5 Printer features 6 Printer assemblies redet ede epiac eese tera tente ue erento d esa E ERU n a aae i aa a a adada eak 9 Front and rear features 0 ccceeceeeeeeeenneceeceeeeeeee eee cde caaaeaecaeeeeeeee eee nennen rmertr nnne nennen 9 Site requirements 2 sodes exta tete Ha EDD o DERE aa MER RQUN DA ER Ld Qua Rae Edu Nah ua Dena EM QAI Ae Raid OR 11 Space requirements sisside siiani e aaea a a a CER aA Tin aee aa 11 Electrical Specifications i re tae netten a aada 12 Environmental specifications sssssssssssssseeseeeee eene ennemis 13 Printer specitications e 15 Duty Cyclo u s titt pee RN NO ON 15 Print media Specifications iscissi En ne dae deve aede da e rece Diva Fade Le s teda taces 16 Supported media weights and sizes sssssssssssssssssseee eene 16 Hewlett Packard warranty statement ssssssssssssseeeee enne eene 19 HP s Premium Protection Print Cartridge Warr
461. series printer Lower rear door rear output bin 25 sheets of standard paper EIO connection available on the HP Color LaserJet 3700 series printer DIMM access door available on the HP Color LaserJet 3700 series printer ENWW Site requirements Figure 1 9 ENWW The printer must be kept in a proper location to maintain the performance level that has been set at the factory In particular be sure that the environment adheres to the specifications listed in this chapter Below are recommendations for the printer location and placement Make sure the printer has the following e awell ventilated dust free area e a hard level surface not more than a 2 angle that can support approximately 43 4 kg 95 5 Ibs e a level surface that supports all four corners of the 500 sheet paper feeder e constant temperature and humidity Do not install near water sources humidifiers air conditioners refrigerators or other major appliances Make sure to keep the printer away from the following e direct sunlight dust open flames or water e direct flow of exhaust from air ventilation systems e magnets and devices that emit a magnetic field e areas subject to vibration e walls or other objects There must be enough space around the printer for proper access and ventilation See the figures Figure 1 9 Space requirements for the HP Color LaserJet 3500 3550 series printer and Figure 1 10 Space requirements for the HP Color LaserJe
462. side 4 to remove the unit om Figure 6 17 Transfer unit removal Reinstallation tip When reinstalling the transfer unit align the two pins 1 on the left side of the door with the two holes 2 in the left side of the transfer unit Figure 6 18 Transfer unit installation Print cartridge removal 1 Open the front door ENWW Main Assemblies 219 NOTE When performing any servicing inside the printer all four print cartridges should be removed 2 Donottouch the surface of the print cartridge drum 2 The cartridges have flaps that close when the front door is opened to protect the print drum However if the flaps do not close flip them down to cover the exposed area of the print drum Figure 6 19 Print cartridge removal Grasp the blue handle 1 of a cartridge and pull it slightly upward and out to remove it Fuser removal WARNING Be sure to turn the power off and unplug the power cord before removing the fuser When removing the fuser wait ten minutes to allow it to cool before removing it NOTE If the fuser failed or has been replace for some reason other than reaching its end of life end of life is indicated by a control panel message stating that the fuser requires replacement then in addition to replacing it a configuration procedure must be performed For information on this configuration refer to Chapter 8 Replacement parts configuration Replacement parts configuration 1 Remove
463. side cleaning tab is out of position This tab is located on the right side of the ITB about in the middle of the ITB assembly Push it back into position If it will not move back into position replace the ITB assembly Check the yellow cartridge for damage compare it to the magenta cartridge and replace it if necessary Verify that the cleaning blade left hand tab lock lever is in the forward position Verify that the ITB assembly shipping locks have been removed Shipping locks are located at the bottom toward the door hinge end of the ITB assembly on the left and right side Printer error troubleshooting 329 Table 7 3 Numerical printer messages continued Error occurs at power up and can Perform the following steps Be raneen nas 1 Open the door and verify the toner Cartridges not seated correctly cartridges are seated properly Damaged cartridge shutter arm Remove and reinstall the cartridges Close the door slowly and look inside to see if the toner shutters open properly while the door is closing If they are sticking inspect the cartridges Broken cartridge alignment for any damage to the wire arm or knob shutter Replace the cartridge if it sticks for more than 10 seconds Broken ITB coupling lever on the front door front door engaging tab Left rail guide out of place or missing If the cartridges look OK go through the diagnostic Disable Cartridge check and change toner cartridges
464. signed to work together for optimum printing results If HP Color LaserJet Soft Gloss paper is not used with this printer print quality may be compromised Colored paper When printing on colored paper use the following guidelines Colored paper should be of the same high quality as white xerographic paper Pigments used must be able to withstand the printer fusing temperature of 190 C 374 F for 0 1 second without deterioration Do not use paper with a colored coating that was added after the paper was produced The printer creates colors by printing patterns of dots overlaying and varying their spacing to produce various colors Varying the shade or color of the paper will affect the shades of the printed colors 26 Chapter 1 Printer description ENWW NOTE NOTE NOTE ENWW Envelopes Envelopes can be printed only from Tray 1 Set the tray media size to the specific envelope size Adhere to the following guidelines to help ensure proper printing on envelopes and to help prevent printer jams e Do not load more than ten envelopes into Tray 1 e The weight rating of envelopes should not exceed 90 g m 24 Ib bond e Envelopes should be flat e Do not use envelopes with windows or clasps e Envelopes must not be wrinkled nicked or otherwise damaged e Envelopes with peel off adhesive strips must use adhesives that can withstand the heat and pressures of the printer fusing process e Envelopes should be loaded
465. sly installed in another printer replacement configuration 353 DC Controller New replacement configuration ss 353 DC Controller previously installed in another printer replacement configuration 354 Media sensor PS5 replacement configuration sse 354 Color Misregistration Sensor PS12 replacement configuration 355 Laser scanner Assembly replacement configuration see 355 Fuser replacement configuration ssssssssseeene enne 355 Transfer unit ITB assembly replacement configuration eeeeeseesess 355 Paper path troubleshooting sssssssssssssssssseenennenen nennen eee nn nennen nnne 356 Paper path jamm areas eee RH ud a TX ENDE AERE IIR A RN HERR aS Eo densa ddn 357 Paper jam error message nietos ret Eee ERR A Te eR ERRE Le add RARE de EE RRET eee EE 357 Paper path areas jam troubleshooting ssssse eme 360 Paper jam recovery Teatlire e prid Ed d dent ERR de o REA dun 377 Avoiding paper jams etre 377 General paper path troubleshooting cc cceecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceaecaeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeennenaeens 379 IEIUNII 380 Image formation troubleshooting sssssseene nennen nennen nnns 381 Print quality problems associated with media ssssssssssssseeeee 381 Overhead transpare
466. sor PS3 Tray 3 paper sensor 500 sheet feeder PS4 Registration paper sensor PS5 Media sensor PS6 Fuser front paper sensor PS7 Fuser delivery paper sensor PS8 Face down delivery paper sensor PS9 Reversed paper sensor HP 3700 only PS10 Duplexing feed delivery paper sensor HP 3700 only OnahWNDN Paper jam error message Use the following table to help pinpoint and clear specific paper jams and refer to Paper path jam_areas for jam location areas in the printer To identify the specific Jam location code for the HP Color LaserJet 3700 series printer display the event log entries on the control panel ENWW Paper path troubleshooting 357 Table 7 4 Error messages and associated jam locations Error message Event log Action code 13 01 00 HP 3500 3550 13 20 00 HP 3700 Pick up delay jam 13 02 00 HP 3500 3550 13 20 00 HP 3700 Pick up stationary jam 13 05 00 HP 3500 3550 13 20 00 HP 3700 Fuser delay jam 13 06 00 HP 3500 3550 13 20 00 HP 3700 Fuser stationary jam 13 09 00 HP 3500 3550 13 20 00 HP 3700 Delivery delay jam 358 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 13 01 00 13 02 00 13 05 00 13 06 00 13 09 00 This printer checks the paper movement at all pickup sources twice if necessary since the paper pickup can be delayed due to a pickup error When paper does not reach the registration paper sensor PS4 within time T after paper pickup the CPU judges it the pickup delay jam
467. sor PS13 when the power is turned on a door is closed and a print is completed ENWW Image formation system 167 Figure 5 46 The waste toner container has a light guide and a waste toner level sensor PS13 on the top The light from the light emitter on the PS13 is let in to the waste toner container through the light guide attached to the cartridge It passes through the container and goes back through the light guide when the light receiver on the PS13 detects the light Upon detection of light the receiver sends a WASTE TONER FULL DETECTION signal WTNSNS to the DC controller When the toner level is low the light will not be interrupted by the toner so it reaches the light receiver and vice versa when the toner level is high The DC controller judges the waste toner full and sends a Waste toner full warning 1 to the formatter when the light does not reach the receiver on the PS13 that is when the WTNSNS signal is not output The DC controller then counts the number of prints upon receipt of warning 1 It sends a Waste toner full warning 2 after the specified number of print determine it full DC controller PCB Light receiver 25 69 4 Lo OZ WE We a Light guide Waste toner container NIS i as Light po emitter oc Lu E lt Waste toner notfull gt Lu lt PS13 Waste toner full sensor Waste toner Waste toner full gt Waste toner full detection
468. ssees ensem rhet enne n entente testen sensn nen nenten nns 215 Lower rear door rear output bin removal sssseemen 215 Tray 1 multipurpose removal seen een eene enne 216 Malt Sr T nnle cJ 217 Transfer unit removal ssssssssssssssssssssssee enne enne aiai aaia iaaiiai 218 Print cartridge removal irte eot a et dre da oda eres pode dn um 219 FUSER removal M 220 Face down delivery assembly removal ccccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeecneeeeeeeeeeeeeetaeeeeetieeeeeee 221 Laser scanner assembly removal sse eene enne 222 Image drive assembly removal sssssessseeseenee ener 223 Developing engaging drive assembly removal sse 225 Pick up feed assembly removal sssesssseneeeneeeeen mener 225 Main assembly parts 4 eee ie idee nda Redde Yd ee Ra EEEa 236 Tray 1 pick up roller removal ssssssssssssssssesseeee nennen eene nennen nnne 237 Tray 1 separation pad removal sssssssssssssssssseseeeee eene 237 Tray 2 pick up roller removal ssssssssssssssesseeeen enne ener ener 238 Tray 2 separation pad removal ssssssssssssssssssseeneeee nennen nnne 238 Secondary transfer charging roller removal ssee e 239 Fuser sleeve unit removal sssssssssssssssssesessenneeenerenet enne erret 239 Pressure roller r
469. ssembly See Exhaust fan FAN1 removal step 9 3 Remove one connector 1 from the left side of the laser scanner assembly 222 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW 4 Remove six screws 2 and pull the laser scanner assembly out slightly disconnect two flat cables 3 and remove the assembly Figure 6 22 Laser scanner assembly removal Reinstallation tip Connect the connectors see callout 3 above first then install the laser scanner assembly Ensure that the top of the laser scanner fits into the slots first before installing the remainder of the unit Image drive assembly removal CAUTION Do not disassemble the image drive assembly 1 Remove the right cover See Right cover removal 2 Push the engaging rack 1 all the way back to the right until it stops Refer to Pick up feed assembly removal procedure step 7 for additional information Reinstallation tip Once the image drive assembly has been reinstalled the engaging rack 1 must be pushed to the left forward towards the front of the printer as far as it will go to return it to its original position Refer to Pick up feed assembly removal step 8 Reinstallation Tip for additional information on positioning the engaging rack CAUTION Incorrect installation can result in damage to the print cartridge drive pins the image drive assembly drive pins and the swing guide mechanism 3 Disconnect one connector 2 ENWW Main Assemblies 223
470. sssess 78 Installing memory and font DIMMS ssseseeeenn menm nennen nnne 79 Enabling memory ssssssesssseeeneeenen nee a NE AAA ANAE nennen eterne nenne nnns 83 Enabling the language font DIMM HP color LaserJet 3700 only sssssse 83 Checking DIMM installation HP color LaserJet 3700 only sees 84 Installing an HP Jetdirect print server card in the HP color LaserJet 3700 series printer 85 To install the HP Jetdirect print server card ssssssssssssssee 85 Installing an HP Jetdirect en3700 external print server sssseeeee 88 Chapter contents 47 Checking the package contents Figure 3 1 HP Color LaserJet 3500 3550 printer package contents HP Color LaserJet 3500 3550 USB cable Power cable Four print cartridges CD ROM the CD ROM contains the user guide Control panel overlay Getting started guide NOOR WND Figure 3 2 Additional contents shipped with the HP Color LaserJet 3500n 3550n printer 1 HP Jetdirect en3700 external print server 3500n 3550n only 2 Power cable 48 Chapter 3 Installation and configuration ENWW NOTE Figure 3 3 Figure 3 4 NOTE ENWW The items listed here are for the external print server connection HP Color LaserJet 3700 3700n or 3700dn printer package contents HP Color LaserJet 3700 3700n or 3700dn Power cable Four print cartridges CD ROM the CD ROM contains
471. ssssseessees 296 Right cover removal 500 sheet paper feeder sssssssssssssseeeee 297 Left cover removal 500 sheet paper feeder sssssssssssseeseeeee 297 202 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW ENWW 500 Sheet paper feeder internal parts cccccccccccccceccececeeeeeceeeeeeeeeesessusesesesaeaeaeaeaeaeaeaeaeaea 298 Pick up roller removal 500 sheet paper feeder sssssssssssssssseeses 298 Separation pad removal 500 sheet paper feeder sssssssssssssssssss 299 Pick up drive unit removal 500 sheet paper feeder sssssssssssssss 299 500 Sheet paper feeder sensor solenoid motor PCB seseeeee 300 500 Sheet paper feeder PCB removal 500 sheet feeder sssssssss 300 Pick up clutch CL4 removal 500 sheet feeder sssssssssssss 301 Pick up solenoid SL3 removal 500 sheet feeder sssssssssseees 301 Paper sensor PS3 removal 500 sheet feeder sssssssssssss 302 Chapter contents 203 Introduction WARNING WARNING Removal and replacement procedures are provided for all replaceable parts in the printer Removal and replacement strategy This chapter explains how to remove and replace major printer components HP does not support repairing individual subassemblies or troubleshooting to the component level Replacement is ge
472. ssssssssesseneeeeenn mem 126 Low voltage power supply circuit ssssssssseeeneneen eer 131 Laser scanner system sssssssssssssseene ene nennen eden nnne serene nennen enne 139 Ez green HS 140 Scanner motor Control 2 coit dai N re esa aeo We ey du mena Ros 144 Image formation system ossessi eer Ld a UE cer E Lu ee RO ERE le EO eu Et RREA 146 mila 147 Developing SCHON pe 156 Cartridge cleaning Control nicca eerie E E 163 Tra ster section meniti i a ae i a a OA TB cleaning control enaa Lip agr ana n aa E aal D Waste toner Tull detectlon 1 rene re et picea ice iet et std aa ea coe tee a Ve eene eden 167 Transfer ITB Unit detection rrt red uer pat exu cede uet ped deas 168 Transfer unit life detection cceccccccceceeeeeeeeceeeaeeeeceeeeeeeeseceneaeaeeeeeedsesaneaeeaeeneeeeeeneess 169 ITB self aligning mechanism seen nennen nnne 170 Primary transfer roller engaging disengaging control eesseeees 171 Secondary transfer roller engaging disengaging control eseessssss 172 Secondary transfer roller engaging disengaging detection ssessssssss 173 Color misregistration control ssssssseeeeemm emend C4 Image stabilization Control 12 1 o Cei ee lr belied reo Fab tera ARA 177 ile ionic epudiiedeease 182
473. startup error 59 7Y and 59 8Y Error on control panel Error occurred when the developing motor started or while the developing motor was rotating For all the following errors perform 7 Developer motor M4 startup the actions listed below error 8 Developer motor M4 rotation error 59 5Y and 59 6Y Error on control panel 9 Drum motor M3 startup error 59 05 00 and 59 06 00 Event log only turn off then on 6 Primary transfer roller engaging motor M5 rotation error 9 when Y is also 9 Secondary An error occurred when the primary transfer engaging mechanism error transfer roller engaging motor started or A Drum motor M3 rotation error while the motor is rotating C Delivery motor M2 rotation error 1 The connectors in the primary transfer roller engaging motor drive signal line are Y Description not connected properly Reseat the motor connector J5005 and the DC controller PCB connector J1014 0 No color K Black C Cyan 2 Faulty primary transfer roller engaging motor Replace the motor M Magenta Y Yellow 3 Faulty DC controller PCB Replace the DC controller PCB 346 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW Table 7 3 Numerical printer messages continued eme o omm Rm ENWW 59 7Y Control Panel Message 59 07 00 HP 3700 only event log only 59 07 ZZ HP 3500 3550 only event log only ZZ is color 00 Black 01 Cyan 02 Magenta 03 Yellow 59 8Y Contro
474. t 3700 series printer with optional Tray 3 on the following pages Space requirements The printer must have the following amounts of space above and around it Space requirements for the HP Color LaserJet 3500 3550 series printer 1 Height 722 mm 28 4 in 2 Depth 1480 mm 58 3 in 3 Width 699 5 mm 27 6 in Site requirements 11 Figure 1 10 WARNING Space requirements for the HP Color LaserJet 3700 series printer with optional Tray 3 1 Height 862 mm 34 in 2 Depth 1480 mm 58 3 in 3 Width 699 5 mm 27 6 in Electrical specifications Power requirements are based on the country region where the printer is sold Do not convert operating voltages This may damage the printer and void the product warranty Table 1 2 Electrical specifications lists the electrical specifications required to run the printer safely and Table 1 3 Power consumption for 110 and 220 volt average in watts 1 lists the power consumption Table 1 2 Electrical specifications tem 110 volt models 220 volt models Power requirements 100 to 127 V 10 50 to60 220 to 240 V 10 A a 50 to 60 Hz 2 Hz Minimum recommended circuit 5 3A capacity for typical product Heat output Ready BTU hour HP Color LaserJet 3500 3550 HP Color LaserJet 3500n 3550n 12 Chapter 1 Printer description ENWW NOTE ENWW Table 1 3 Power consumption for 110 and 220 volt average in watts con
475. t BD INPUT signals BD21 BD41 NOTE The DC controller monitors and controls the rotation speed of the scanner motor according to the timing the BDI signals are input to be the specified speed 3 When the scanner motor rotates at the specified speed the DC controller passes on the VIDEO signals from the formatter to the laser driver circuit The laser driver circuit emits the laser diode according to the VIDEO signals VDO1 4 VDO1 4 4 The laser beam strikes the four face mirror rotating at a constant speed through the collimator lens and the cylindrical lens 5 The laser beam reflected off the four face mirror passes through the focus lens and scans on the photosensitive drum at a constant speed 6 When the photosensitive drum rotates and the laser beam scans on it both at a constant speed a latent image is formed on the photosensitive drum NOTE This printer has two scanner motors and generates two BDI signals The BDI signal for Y and M s scanner motor is generated by the M laser s reflected light and the BDI signal for C and K s scanner motor by the K black laser s reflected light NOTE This printer scans two lines with one scanner mirror The scanning direction depends on the color Y and C left to right M and K right to left Laser control The laser control instructs the laser driver to turn on off the laser diode according to the LASER CONTROL signal sent from the DC controller 140 Chapter 5 Theory of o
476. t Regulations Manager Hewlett Packard Australia Ltd 31 41 Joseph Street Blackburn Victoria 3130 Australia European Contact Your Local Hewlett Packard Sales and Service Office or Hewlett Packard Gmbh Department HQ TRE Standards Europe Herrenberger Stra e 140 B blingen D 71034 Germany FAX 49 7031 14 3143 USA Contact Product Regulations Manager Hewlett Packard Company PO Box 15 Mail Stop 160 Boise ID 83707 0015 USA Phone 208 396 6000 ENWW Declaration of Conformities 35 Declaration of Conformity according to ISO IEC Guide 22 and EN 45014 Manufacturer s Name Hewlett Packard Company Manufacturer s Address 8000 Foothills Blvd Roseville California 95747 5677 USA declares that the product Product Name Jetdirect en3700 External print server Regulatory Model Number RSVLD 0101 Model number J7942A conforms to the following Product Specifications SAFETY EMC IEC 60950 1999 3 Edition EN 60950 2000 IEC 60825 1 1993 A1 1997 A2 2001 EN 60825 1 1994 A11 1996 A2 2001 Class 1 Laser LED GB 4943 1995 EN 55022 1998 Class B FCC Title 47 CFR Part 15 Class B ICES 003 Issue 4 2004 EN 55024 1998 A1 2001 A2 2003 EN 61000 3 2 2000 EN 61000 3 3 A1 2001 GB 9254 1998 Supplementary Information 1 The product herewith complies with the requirements of the Low Voltage Directive 73 23 EEC and the EMC Directive 89 336 EEC and carries the CE marking accordingly 2 For
477. t cover removal ENWW Covers 213 Top cover removal 1 Open the printer front door and remove the transfer unit See Transfer unit removal 2 Remove the right cover See Right cover removal 3 Remove the left cover See Left cover removal 4 Remove four screws 1 unhook one claw 2 and lift the cover off the printer Figure 6 11 Top cover removal Upper rear door removal 1 Open the upper rear door 2 Press in on the left hinge 1 pushing towards the right to release the hinge pin then pull the left side out and to the left 2 to remove the cover Figure 6 12 Upper rear door removal 214 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW Rear cover removal 1 Release two claws on the right side of the rear cover by inserting a flat blade screwdriver into each claw location 1 and twist the screwdriver to release each claw then pull the cover out and to the right 2 to remove it Figure 6 13 Rear cover removal Lower rear door rear output bin removal 1 Open the lower rear door 2 Press in on the left hinge 1 pushing towards the right to release the pin then pull the left side of the tray out and to the left 2 to remove it a Figure 6 14 Lower rear door removal Reinstallation tip Hold the tray at about a 45 degree angle when reinstalling it ENWW Covers 215 Tray 1 multipurpose removal 1 Open the Tray 1 2 Remove two pins 1 by flexing the
478. t the specified time The values of these biases vary according to the commands from the DC controller Developing bias generation The developing biases DEV1 DEV2 DEV3 DEVA are used to adhere the toner to an electrostatic latent image formed on the photosensitive drum They are the DC negative biases one for each color C Y M K generated in the developing high voltage generation circuit in the high voltage power supply circuit The high voltage power supply circuit applies these biases to the developing cylinders in each cartridge at the specified time The values of these biases vary according to the commands from the DC controller Developing blade bias generation The developing blade bias BLD is output to charge the toner uniformly It is the DC bias It is generated in the developing blade high voltage generation circuit in the high voltage power supply circuit and shared by all colors C Y M K The high voltage power supply circuit applies this bias to the developing blades in the cartridges at the specified time Engine control system 133 Primary transfer bias generation The primary transfer biases TR11 TR12 TR13 TR14 are output to transfer the toner on the photosensitive drum to the ITB They are the DC positive biases one for each color C Y M K generated in the primary transfer high voltage generation circuit in the high voltage power supply circuit The high voltage power supply circuit applies them to th
479. teps 1 Check that your paper meets HP specifications see the Media Specification guide at http www hp com Check the separation pads and replace if worn Replacement part numbers e Tray 1 RC1 0939 000CN e Tray 2 RC1 0954 000CN e Tray 3 RC1 0827 000CN Check the pick up rollers The Tray 2 3 pick roller may be broken or out of place Verify that it is properly positioned Pick up rollers wear with age and rough media Replacement part numbers e Tray 1 RC1 1535 000CN e Tray 2 3 RC1 0731000CN 336 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW Table 7 3 Numerical printer messages continued Message 49 XXXX PRINTER ERROR alternates with To continue turn off then on ENWW A critical firmware error has occurred that caused the processor on the formatter to abort operation This type of error can be caused by invalid print commands corrupt data or invalid operations In some cases electrical noise in the cable can corrupt data during transmission to the printer Other causes include poor quality parallel cables poor connections or home grown applications On rare occasions the formatter is at fault which is usually indicated by a 79 Service Error 1 Press Stop to clear the print job from the printer memory 2 Turn the printer off and then back on 3 Try printing a job from a different software application If the job prints go back to the first application and try printing a different file If the message
480. ter with print cartridges and optional Tray 3 HP Jetdirect 35 mm 131 mm 0 159 kg en3700 external 1 4 in 5 2 in 0 35 Ibs print server Table 1 7 Acoustic emissions Activity level Operator 1m Bystander 1m LpAm64 dB A LpAm49 dB A LwAd6 4 Bels A de teams a8 a pao ae iwase Bets LpAmN A dB A LpAmN A dB A LWAdN A Bels A NOTE These values are subject to change For current information see http www hp com support clj3500 for the HP Color LaserJet 3500 series printer http www hp com support clj3550 for the HP Color LaserJet 3550 series printer or htto www hp com support clj3700 for the HP Color LaserJet 3700 series printer Duty cycle The HP Color LaserJet 3500 series printer maximum duty cycle is 45 000 pages per month Maximum duty cycle for the HP Color LaserJet 3550 series printer and HP Color LaserJet 3700 series printer is 55 000 pages per month ENWW Printer specifications 15 Print media specifications For optimum results use conventional 75 g m to 90 g m 20 to 24 Ib photocopy paper Verify that the paper is of good quality and is free of cuts nicks tears spots loose particles dust wrinkles curls or bent edges Supported media weights and sizes Table 1 8 Tray 1 paper sizes1 shows the media types and sizes supported by the printer and the printer accessories Table 1 8 e 1 paper sizes Dimensions Weight or thickness Capacity Minimum size paper 76
481. tests are available in the component test menu 1 TRANSFER MOTORS Drives the drum motor M3 and developing motor M4 for 10 seconds which rotates the ITB belt CMYK print cartridge OPC drums and CMY developers DRUM AND DRUM MOTOR Drives the drum motor M3 for 10 seconds which rotates the ITB belt and the CMYK print cartridge OPC drums BLACK LASER SCANNER Drives the scanner motor cyan black for 10 seconds CYAN LASER SCANNER Drives the scanner motor cyan black for 10 seconds MAGENTA LASER SCANNER Drives the scanner motor magenta yellow for 10 seconds YELLOW LASER SCANNER Drives the scanner motor magenta yellow for 10 seconds DEVELOPER MOTORS Drives the developer motor M4 which rotates the C M Y print cartridge developers Diagnostics from the Control Panel 441 ALIENATION MOTOR Drives the delivery motor M2 and the developing engaging clutch CL3 which rotates the rear output paper path rollers and engages disengages the CMYK print cartridge developer rollers This test does not rotate the print cartridge developer rollers 9 TRANSFER 1 MOTOR Drives the primary transfer roller engaging motor M5 which engages disengages the CMYK ITB primary charging rollers 10 MP TRAY SOLENOID Drives the feed motor M1 and the multi purpose pickup solenoid SL 1 which picks paper from the Tray 1 11 TRAY 2 SOLENOID Drives the feed motor M1 and the cassette Tray 2 pickup solenoid SL2 which picks paper fro
482. the Tray 2 Clean the rollers feed roller or registration roller Cassette feed roller and registration roller are worn Replace the feed roller or the pickup feed irregularly assembly Registration shutter is defective Make sure the registration shutter moves smoothly its springs are in place and it is clean If the registration shutter is damaged replace the pickup feed assembly 368 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW NOTE ENWW Area 5 Duplex jam troubleshooting Table 7 13 Causes for jams in the duplex area HP 3700 only mm mm Scratched Dented duplex feed guide If damaged or dented replace the duplex feed guide Worn Deformed oblique roller If worn or deformed replace the oblique roller Damaged oblique roller drive gears Check the oblique roller drive gears in the transfer unit block Replace the gear if damaged or worn Defective duplex feed paper sensor lever Reseat the duplex feed paper sensor lever if it does not move smoothly or it is out of position Replace the lever if damaged or deformed Defective duplex feed solenoid Disconnect the duplex feed solenoid connector J1013 from the DC controller PCB Measure the resistance between the connector J1013 5 DUSL and J1013 4 24VA If it is not approximately 160 ohms replace the duplex feed solenoid Defective DC controller PCB Replace the DC controller PCB Duplex jam area removal area 5 This message appears for HP Color LaserJet 3700dn and
483. the allotted amount of time after paper has reached the reversed paper sensor the CPU judges it a duplexing pickup delay jam Duplexing pickup stationary jam 3700 printer only When the paper does not pass the sensor within the allotted amount of time since paper reached the duplexing feed paper sensor PS10 the CPU judges it a duplexing pickup stationary jam Door open jam When the front cover is opened during printing operation the CPU judges it a door open jam Residual paper jam The CPU judges a residual paper jam for two conditions e When paper is detected by the registration paper sensor PS4 the fuser front paper sensor PS6 or the fuser delivery paper sensor PS7 the CPU judges it the residual paper jam e When paper is detected by the fuser front paper sensor PS6 or the fuser delivery paper sensor PS7 the CPU judges it the residual paper jam If paper is detected by sensors other than the PS6 and PS7 the DC controller delivers the paper automatically The automatic paper delivery system delivers a residual paper automatically if possible when the power is turned on or the printer starts printing The CPU sends an automatic paper delivery request to the formatter when it detects a residual paper that can be possibly delivered automatically Upon receipt of a command for an automatic delivery from the formatter the CPU drives each motor and delivers such paper out of the printer 196 Chapter 5 Theory of operat
484. the lower rear door See Lower rear door rear output bin removal 220 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW 2 Hold the release tabs on each side of the fuser by placing your thumbs on the top tabs 1 and your forefingers on the lower tabs 2 Press up on the bottom tabs 2 to release the assembly and pull it toward you to remove it M H ee M Figure 6 20 Fuser removal Face down delivery assembly removal 1 Remove the following covers a b C d e f g Upper rear door see Upper rear door removal Rear cover see Rear cover removal Lower rear door see Lower rear door rear output bin removal Right cover see Right cover removal Left cover see Left cover removal Left front cover see Left front cover removal Top cover see Top cover removal 2 Remove six screws 1 ENWW Main Assemblies 221 3 Pull the face down assembly out slightly disconnect one connector 2 from the back and then remove the assembly 3 Figure 6 21 Face down delivery assembly removal Laser scanner assembly removal CAUTION Do not disassemble the laser scanner assembly It is not adjustable Do not touch the lens on the front of the laser scanner assembly when holding it 1 Remove the face down delivery assembly See Face down delivery assembly removal 2 Remove the exhaust fan FAN1 a
485. the paper Secondary transfer roller DC bias 3 Secondary transfer Step 6 Separation Paper is separated from the ITB by the elasticity of paper Image formation system 153 The static charge on the back of the paper is decreased with the static charge eliminator to reduce static cling and make it easy to separate the paper Static charge X eliminator Secondary transfer roller Figure 5 34 Separation Fuser block A toner image is fixed or fused onto paper in this block The toner image transferred on top of the paper through the transfer block can be smeared easily by hands since it is only attracted to paper by static electricity The toner image on paper is fused by pressure and heat to permanently print it on paper here Step 7 Fusing A toner image on the paper is fixed onto paper with on demand fusing method in this step This printer has a low heat capacity ceramic heater which warms up quickly and does not require power during standby This allows for a short wait period and thus energy saving 154 Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW A positive DC bias is applied to the pressure roller to enhance the power to hold the toner on paper and prevent the toner from being attracted to the fuser sleeve offset Fuser heater ceramic Fuser sleeve Toner DC bias Pressure roller Cleaning block Figure 5 35 Fusing This block consists of two steps and clears the residual toner from the IT
486. the toner on the ITB to the paper It is interlocked with the ITB The secondary transfer roller engaging cam is to engage or disengage the secondary transfer roller from the ITB It is rotated by the delivery motor M1 as the secondary transfer roller engaging solenoid SL4 opens or closes The secondary transfer roller engaging sensor monitors whether or not the roller is engaged with the ITB The transfer section performs the following 164 Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW ENWW a BR ov gt ITB cleaning control Waste toner level monitor Primary transfer roller engaging disengaging control Secondary transfer roller engaging disengaging control Secondary transfer roller engaging disengaging detection Image formation system 165 The above operations are discussed in the following sections DC controller PCB signal DRUM MOTOR CONTROL FEED MOTOR CONTROL signal Waste toner container PRIMARY TRANSFER ENGAGING MOTOR CONTROL signal SECONDARY TRANSFER ENGAGING SOLENOID DRIVE signal us Waste toner conveyor E CA 43 rg c Lc 20o0 LD Lco o cz z uo Eje ok rr FO 9 W ow E c Wu Lu 2A Sa O Oz o Nz PS10 Y PS16 m 35 I Secondary transfer roller Secondary transfer roller engaging cam Figure 5 44 Transfer section M1 Feed motor M3 Drum motor M5 Primary transfer engaging motor SL4 Secondary transfer engaging solenoid PS
487. tical lines White vertical line appears in image See Table 7 27 Causes for white vertical lines Horizontal lines Horizontal line appears in image See Table 7 28 Causes for horizontal line White horizontal lines White horizontal line appears in image See Table 7 29 Causes for white horizonal lines Missing color Image in a particular color does not come See Table 7 30 Causes for out in color a missing color 390 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW Table 7 16 Image defects continued Blank spots Blank spots appear in image See Table 7 31 Causes for blank spots Poor fusing Toner image is not fully fixed on paper See Table 7 32 Causes for poor fusing Distorted Image Image is distorted See Table 7 32 Causes for poor fusing Color misregistration Some color is misregistered See Table 7 34 Causes for smearing Smearing Image smeared in whole or in part See Table 7 35 Causes for smearing Misplaced image Whole image is incorrectly placed See Table 7 36 Causes for a misplaced image Reversed color White in image is output in color and See Table 7 37 Causes for color is output in white reversed color Snail tracks Streaks in the page that look like snail See Table 7 38 Causes for tracks Eventually the paper may wrinkle reversed color Light image Table 7 17 Causes for light images Image density is not adjusted correct
488. tinued Ready Power Save Heat output Ready BTU HP Color LaserJet 3700 HP Color 26 26 LaserJet 3700n HP Color 26 26 LaserJet 3700dn HP Color 26 26 LaserJet 3700dtn The power consumptions reported are the highest values measured for color and monochrome printing using standard voltages The printing speed is 16 ppm for letter size media and 16 ppm for A4 size media The default activation time from Ready mode to PowerSave is 30 minutes The recovery time from PowerSave to the start of printing is 12 minutes These values are subject to change For current information see http www hp com support clj3500 for the HP Color LaserJet 3500 series printer http www hp com support clj3550 for the HP Color LaserJet 3550 series printer or http www hp com support clj3700 for the HP Color LaserJet 3700 series printer Environmental specifications Keep the printer within the environmental conditions shown in Table 1 4 Environmental specifications for optimum performance Table 1 4 Environmental specifications Temperature 17 to 25 C 62 6 to 77 F 10 to 27 C 50 to 81 F Humidity 20 to 60 RH 10 to 70 RH Altitude Not applicable 0 to 2600 m 0 to 8530 ft Supply storage requirements The life of supplies is greatly affected by their storage environment Use Supply storage requirements to determine the shelf life of stored supplies Table 1 5 Supply storage requirements Storage t
489. tive electrical charges in areas that are not exposed to the laser beam through the steps in this block The image with negative charges on the drum is called an electrostatic latent image as it is invisible to the human eyes Time t gt L 100 4 500 4 x Unexposed area Surface potential V Laser beam Primary charging exposure Primary transfer Primary charging step 1 step 2 step 4 step 1 Electrostatic latent image formation Step 1 Primary charging As a preparation to forming a latent image a uniform negative potential is applied to the photosensitive drum surface in this step The primary charging roller interlocked to the photosensitive drum directly charges the drum This roller is made of a conductive rubber The DC bias is placed on the roller to enable it to charge a negative potential on the drum surface Primary charging roller Z DC bias 777 Primary charging Step 2 Laser beam exposure 150 Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW Figure 5 29 ENWW An electrostatic latent image is formed on the photosensitive drum in this step As the laser beam scans the negatively charged drum surface the negative potential on the exposed area gets neutralized and forms an electrostatic latent image Laser beam Laser beam exposure Development block The electrostatic latent image on the photosensitive drum surfac
490. to the above caution for reinstallation information Figure 6 110 Primary transfer roller engaging motor removal 1 of 4 5 Remove the one screw 1 from the rear swing guide rail 2 and remove the rail 6 Pull gear 3 and its shaft out to the left ENWW Motor and fans 275 7 Remove the motor cover 4 by pressing down on the tab 5 while pulling the cover slightly to the left and up then pull it and out to remove it Figure 6 111 Primary transfer roller engaging motor removal 2 of 4 8 Remove the gear 1 and then remove two screws that secure the motor Reinstallation tip When reinstalling the gear 1 insert the gear with shaft that was removed in the previous step callout 3 in the figure above from inside the printer through this gear cuml Figure 6 112 Transfer roller engaging motor removal 3 of 4 276 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW 9 Disconnect one connector 1 and lift the primary transfer roller engaging motor 2 up slightly and then pull it to the left to remove it Figure 6 113 Transfer roller engaging motor 4 of 4 Exhaust fan FAN1 removal 1 Remove the left cover See Left cover removal 2 Remove two connectors 1 from the DC controller PCB 3 Unhook four claws 2 and pull the fan motor 3 out to remove it Figure 6 114 Fan removal Reinstallation tip Be sure the arrow on the fan points to the outside when reinstalling the exhaust fan
491. transfer roller engaging disengaging control sessesss 172 Secondary transfer roller engaging disengaging detection sseesssssss 173 Color misregistration control sssssssseeeme emend LA Image stabilization control esssssseeee nennen ener nennen nnns 177 Pickup feed system i E ea din ER dec EE EE EC RR EUR RE ERROR a daa 182 Pickup feed unit sssssssssssssssssssssseseseeenen ener nrer nnne nennen tns n nnns nnnm ness 184 FUSEr GElIVERY UNM EM 189 Duplexing feed unit HP 3700 printer only ssse eeetaeeeeeeeaeeeeeee 192 Jam detection niece rre a a E ERES CEREMED a GE SER Der VES LE anes SERIO CE EE EET Yero 195 ENWW Conventions vii viii Paper feeder obe E uetus a aaa e dnte ef copas 197 Pickup delivery sequence ssssssssssssssssemeeenennenen emend DG Paper jam detection ssssssssssssssssssssssseesenen nennen eren nennen nennen nnns 199 6 Removal and replacement Chapter Content M 201 WCPO AUCH OM m 204 Removal and replacement strategy 0 0 2 cece eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeseeeaeeeseeaeeetenaaees 204 aee R 204 Caution regarding electrostatic discharge ESD see 204 Tz tBtfe c 204
492. tration and the image stability as required Go into sleep when a sleep command is sent from the formatter Adjust the color misregistration and control the image stability according to the executable command Carry out the image stabilization control every specified number of print or time after the power is turned on Return to the INTR period as Soon as another print command is sent from the formatter Basic operation 115 Power on sequences The figure below shows the sequence from the time the power is switched on until STBY period CPU initialization ASIC initialization Video interface communication ready Video interface communication start Printer ID check Initial drive Feed motor drive Drum motor drive Delivery motor drive Developing motor drive Developing engaging disengaging control Note 1 Secondary transfer roller N Engaging engaging check Disengaging Secondary transfer roller disengaging Note 2 re e Environment detection Check residual paper in the printer Cartridge presence toner level check Note 6 Standby Figure 5 2 Power on sequence Figure notes 1 See Developing engaging disengaging unit later in this chapter 2 See Secondary transfer roller engaging disengaging control 3 The sequences inside the dotted line box are performed when required 116 Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW 4 The color misregis
493. tration control controls the correction of both horizontal and vertical misregistration See Color misregistration control later in this chapter for more information 5 The image stabilization control controls the correction of the high voltage bias output value and VIDEO signal PWM value for a stable image See Image stabilization control later in this chapter for more information ENWW Basic operation 117 ke 2 o 2 D o Q o a Oo ox w o wn o os O xe 2 Oo a o s Q E 9 2 n gt o gt Lo D gt c o i D a Oo a 2 Oo E e Q Oo o f He o x x a peeds ajqnoq peeds jeuuoN DuiBebu3 Pod x BuiDebu3 1 lonuoo eunyexedwey Sieous ueawjog 101uo9 einjejedu uej jud puooes juf1 n NM c Hc z Jo1uoo eunje1eduie dn uueA Jo33u09 einje1eduie dn xs IST ING UN e puewwos jud seq Jaysuesy Arepuooes Z yoe q seiq Jaysuesy Ajeuiug ueAd seig 1ejsueJ Ae ejuaBew seiq 1ejsue Hewnd moja seiq 19JsueJ Hewnd seig Buidoje eq seq BuiBreyo Kreulug 0LSd 10sues Jaded Aaaljap uwop eoe Sd 10sues Jaded fiewjep Burxi j pSd 10sues 1eded uoneasibey c 19 yano Buibebue Buidoje eg 119 yan uoneuisiBeu 71S piouejos DuiDeDue 1ejsueJ repuooes ZIS 119 prouejos dn xord 40joui 1euueog Z pW 1010u1 Buidoje eq EI
494. treatment halftones and edge enhancements for text graphics and photographs To access the Manual color options from the Color tab select Manual and then Settings Manual color options Manual color adjustment allows you to adjust the Color or Color Map and Halftoning options individually for text graphics and photographs NOTE Some applications convert text or graphics to raster images In these cases the Photographs settings will also control text and graphics Halftone options affect the resolution and clarity of your color output You can select halftone settings for text graphics and photographs independently The two halftone options are Smooth and Detail For the HP Color LaserJet 3700 series printer the following options are available for the Halftone setting e The Smooth option provides better results for large solid filled print areas It also enhances photographs by smoothing out fine color gradations Choose this option when uniform and smooth area fills are top priority e The Detail option is useful for text and graphics that require sharp distinctions among lines or colors or images that contain a pattern or a high level of detail Choose this option when sharp edges and details are top priority 386 Chapter7 Troubleshooting ENWW The Neutral Grays setting determines the method used for creating gray colors used in text graphics and photographs For the HP Color LaserJet 3700 series printer the follo
495. tridge Laser scanner unit is defective Replace the laser scanner for any missing color Calibrate the printer after replacing the laser scanner See Calibrate Now later in this chapter High voltage PCB is defective Replace the high voltage PCB DC controller PCB is defective Replace the DC controller PCB Calibrate the printer after replacing the DC controller See Calibrate Now later in this chapter Blank spots Table 7 31 Causes for blank spots Poor secondary transfer bias contacts On the secondary transfer roller check the bias contacts to the high voltage PCB Clean contacts if dirty Replace defective parts if the contacts are deformed or damaged High voltage PCB is defective Replace the high voltage PCB DC controller PCB is defective Replace the DC controller PCB Calibrate the printer after replacing the DC controller See Calibrate Now later in this chapter Poor fusing Table 7 32 Causes for poor fusing Media is not within specifications For example Use media that meets specifications See F in media that is too thick causes poor fusing chapter 1 ENWW Image defects 397 Table 7 32 Causes for poor fusing continued Fuser is not within nip width specifications Refer to the Table 7 39 Repetitive defect cause later in this chapter to find out if the interval of the poorly fixed places agrees with that of a fuser sleeve If so replace the fuser sleeve unit Replace the fuser F
496. trol Panel 443 Set Registration Allows 1 sided and 2 sided image alignment Create Cleaning Page used to generate a cleaning page to clean spots off the fuser rollers Process Cleaning Page used to feed a cleaning page to clean spots off the fuser rollers 444 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW Test pages Figure 7 17 ENWW Printing test pages helps you determine whether the printer engine and the formatter are functioning Engine test page To verify that the printer engine is functioning print an engine test page Use a small pointed object to depress the test page switch located on the left side of the printer as shown in The test page should have a series of horizontal lines The test page can use only Tray 2 as the paper source so ensure paper is loaded in Tray 2 Test page switch Formatter test page To verify that the formatter is functioning print a configuration page as follows 1 Press v to enter the MENUS 2 Press to highlight INFORMATION 3 Press v to select INFORMATION 4 Press to highlight PRINT CONFIGURATION 5 Pressv to select PRINT CONFIGURATION Testpages 445 Engine resets This section provides information about the printer s cold reset and the NVRAM initialization Cold reset A cold reset unlocks menus that have been locked and resets variables in the control panel However it does not clear the values in the Service menu such as the serial number and page counts To perform a co
497. turn to the SET REGISTRATION menu when the page is completed This message is displayed when a Print Stop Test is run and the time expires The printer is generating the supplies status page The printer will return to the online Ready state when the page is completed HP 3700 only The printer is generating the usage page The printer will return to the online Ready state when the page is completed This message precedes all other processing tasks or appears when the printer receives non printable data eem 0 Rm No action necessary No action necessary No action necessary No action necessary No action necessary No action necessary Follow the instructions on the printed pages Follow the instructions on the printed pages Press v to continue printing No action necessary No action necessary No action necessary Printer error troubleshooting 321 Table 7 2 Alphabetical printer messages continued Message Processing INTERMITTENT MODE alternates with For help press Processing JOB NAME Processing JOB NAME alternates with from tray X RAM DISK DEVICE FAILURE alternates with Ready To clear press v RAM DISK X Initializing alternates with DO NOT POWER OFF RAM DISK FILE OPERATION FAILED alternates with Ready To clear press v RAM DISK FILE SYSTEM IS FULL alternates with Ready To clear press v RAM DISK IS WRITE PROTECTED
498. tus page in the Information menu to obtain the page counts counts for any of the supplies serial number and the born on date If a configuration page and a supplies status page cannot be printed this information can be obtained from the Service menu prior to replacing the formatter or performing this action 1 To perform an NVRAM initialization follow the procedure below 2 Press and hold the w button after powering up until all LEDs are on then release the w button Press the 4 button once and release Press Menu once and release The list of choices will be displayed Press or a until NVRAM INIT is highlighted Press v to invoke an NVRAM INIT D o o 474 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams ENWW In addition the Total Mono Pages Total Color Pages Serial Number Service ID Cold Reset Paper if needed and the Fuser Kit Count will need to be reset using the service menu The Transfer Kit count will be unaffected by the replacement of a formatter To ensure optimum print quality the printer will need to be calibrated by performing 3 Calibrate Now s using the printer control panel by selecting Configure Device PRINT QUALITY CALIBRATE NOW DC Controller New replacement configuration To ensure optimum print quality the printer will need to be calibrated by performing 3 Calibrate Now s using the printer control panel by selecting Configure Device PRINT QUALITY CALIBRATE NOW Light intensity of the media sensor must be
499. twork tab The Network tab allows the network administrator to control network related settings for the printer when it is connected to an IP based network This tab will not appear if the printer is directly connected to a computer or if the printer is connected to a network using anything other than an HP Jetdirect print server HP toolbox links The HP toolbox links at the left of the screen provide links to the following options e Select a device Select from all HP toolbox enabled devices e View current alerts View the current alerts for all set up printers You must be printing to view current alerts e Text only page View HP toolbox as a site map linking to text only pages ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 427 Printer configuration page Use the configuration page to view current printer settings to help troubleshoot printer problems or to verify installation of optional accessories such as memory DIMMs paper trays and printer languages 1 Press v to enter the MENUS 2 Press w to highlight INFORMATION 3 Press v to select INFORMATION 4 Press w to highlightPRINT CONFIGURATION PAGE 5 Pressv to selectPRINT CONFIGURATION PAGE The message PRINTING CONFIGURATION appears on the display until the printer finishes printing the configuration page The printer returns to the READY state after printing the configuration page NOTE If the printer is configured with EIO cards for example an HP Jetdirect Print Server
500. u 9 After the front door is closed after a short time the printer control panel displays the message NEW TRANSFER KIT 10 If the message NEW TRANSFER KIT does not appear you must reset the transfer unit count To reset the transfer unit count go to step 11 11 On the printer control panel press w to highlight YES and then press v to select it The transfer unit count is reset the printer recalibrates and then the printer is ready to use 102 Chapter4 Printer maintenance ENWW NOTE ENWW If the old transfer unit was not at end of life when it was replaced for example if it was damaged the transfer unit count must be reset using the printer control panel Replacing the transfer unit when it is not at end of life If you replace the transfer unit when it is not at the end of life for instance if it is defective you will need to reset the transfer unit count and then calibrate the printer through the control panel To reset the transfer unit count do the following Press Menu to enter the MENUS Press to highlight Configure Device Press v to select Configure Device Press to highlight RESETS Press v to select RESETS Press to highlight RESET SUPPLIES Press v to select RESET SUPPLIES Press to highlight NEW TRANSFER KIT 9 Press v to select NEW TRANSFER KIT 10 Press to highlight YES 11 Press v to select YES o NO a F WORN To calibrate the printer do the following Press Menu to enter the
501. und hole 14 Close the lower rear door rear output bin Turn the printer on Lower rear door area jams area 6 1 Open the lower rear door rear output bin 376 Chapter Troubleshooting ENWW NOTE ENWW 2 Press down on the green levers and remove any paper 3 Liftthe green levers and close the lower rear door 4 f printing does not resume press v Paper jam recovery feature This printer automatically provides paper jam recovery a feature that allows you to set whether the printer should attempt to automatically reprint jammed pages The options are e AUTO Printer will attempt to reprint jammed pages e OFF Printer will not attempt to reprint jammed pages During the recovery process the printer may reprint several good pages that were printed before the paper jam occurred Be sure to remove any duplicated pages To disable paper jam recovery Press v to enter the MENUS Press w to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE Press v to select CONFIGURE DEVICE Press to highlight SYSTEM SETUP Press v to select SYSTEM SETUP Press to highlight JAM RECOVERY Press v to select JAM RECOVERY Press to highlight OFF 9 Press v to select OFF Cos mW 9x Os m OO Ns ux 10 Press the Menu button to return to the Ready state To improve print speed and increase memory resources you may want to disable
502. upplies Status Page prints a page that indicates remaining life of supplies Supplies Status displays on the control panel the remaining life of supplies Print Usage Page HP 3700 only Indicates page count for each tray and the size and type of media printed Print Demo used to test print quality by printing a demo page Print File Directory HP 3700 only Prints the name and directory of files stored in the printer such as a RAM disk Print PCL Font test page HP 3700 only Prints available PCL fonts Print PS Font List HP 3700 only Prints the available PS emulated PostScript fonts Configure device menu printing menu Print PS Errors HP 3700 only Allows you to print the PS error pages Configure device menu resets menu Restore Factory Settings allows you to clear the page buffer remove all perishable personality data reset the printing environment and return all default settings to factory defaults Reset Supplies New Transfer Kit or New Fuser Kit Allows you to inform the printer that a new transfer kit or new fuser kit has been installed which will reset the page count of that supply to zero Configure device menu print quality menu Calibrate Now used to calibrate the printer to maintain optimum print quality It executes all printer calibrations DMAX DHALF color plane registration and drum phase adjustment Adjust Color Print Modes and OptimizeThese can be used to optimize print quality Diagnostics from the Con
503. ure 5 34 Figure 5 35 Figure 5 36 Figure 5 37 Figure 5 38 Figure 5 39 Figure 5 40 Figure 5 41 Figure 5 42 Figure 5 43 Figure 5 44 Figure 5 45 Figure 5 46 Figure 5 47 Figure 5 48 Figure 5 49 Figure 5 50 Figure 5 51 Figure 5 52 Figure 5 53 Figure 5 54 Figure 5 55 Figure 5 56 Figure 5 57 Figure 5 58 Figure 5 59 Figure 5 60 Figure 5 61 Figure 5 62 Figure 5 63 Figure 5 64 Figure 5 65 Figure 5 66 Figure 5 67 Figure 6 1 Figure 6 2 Figure 6 3 Figure 6 4 Figure 6 5 Figure 6 6 Figure 6 7 Laser scanner Unit 5 55 m teet dehet eiue 139 Laser control block diagram sesssseeene emen 141 Image mask cortrollz es urere et tior trema deett o e ch 143 Scanner motor control sss iiaei eene ii iii 144 Image formation system ssssssssseeeeeneeeennenmneenenn nennen 146 Image formation system signal paths sssse 147 Print process diagram acest eee erede ee as 149 Electrostatic latent image formation sene 150 Primary charging 2 tre LL eb ee pie 150 Laser beam exposure 20 0 2 cc cee cee eececee cece ee eeeeeeeeaaaeaaeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeesaeaeeeeeeeeess 151 Image developmient a b eet a ate ee din tee ede ne e pea 152 Potential difference between the developing cylinder and the exposed CIC EES 152 Primary transfer e net eed eee tee e a e e ede eee 153 Secondary transfer to da Ree
504. ures other than those specified in this service manual may result in exposure to hazardous radiation Canadian DOC regulations Complies with Canadian EMC Class B requirements Conforme la classe B des normes canadiennes de compatibilit lectromagn tiques CEM EMI statement Korea APBAr Pm Be ID o 2 2 HAFS Bue 3e U HFEA SANSOME mE GE Ae MS EUC Figure 1 13 EMI statement for Korea VCCI statement Japan OZXi li Tre See SA IDE VCC ORE 3E54 DS 2 BTR CT Ox SICA SCC EBEL TIM ORES L4 Tb E Va VSARIGHEL T He hat Saseeesle RT kid JJ Rb SRBC CEL ORY VEL C FU Figure 1 14 VCCI statement for Japan ENWW Safety statements 37 Laser statement for Finland Luokan 1 laserlaite Klass 1 Laser Apparat HP Color LaserJet 3550 3550n 3700 3700n 3700dn 3700dtn laserkirjoitin on k ytt j n kannalta turvallinen luokan 1 laserlaite Normaalissa k yt ss kirjoittimen suojakotelointi est lasers teen p syn laitteen ulkopuolelle Laitteen turvallisuusluokka on m ritetty standardin EN 60825 1 1994 mukaisesti VAROITUS Laitteen k ytt minen muulla kuin k ytt ohjeessa mainitulla tavalla saattaa altistaa k ytt j n turvallisuusluokan 1 ylitt v lle n kym tt m lle lasers teilylle VARNING Om apparaten anv nds p annat s tt n i bruksanvisning specificerats kan anv ndaren uts ttas f r osynlig laserstr Ining som verskrider gr nsen f r laserklass 1
505. urface temperatures of the fuser sleeve and the fuser heater at the target temperature Fuser Power supply unit DC controller PCB puerum Sia Cpe ee eee MEME ee SSS 1 I li l I log i I i I i i I I Ded I i I Mai T i I an Sub thermistor EN thermistor AN I THO TH2 ar i IC1002 i I l ASIC l I EN I I tty i Thermoswitch i I TP n i I EN mi l I I i Fuser sleeve i i Fuser heater I i unit IE Fuser contro safety circuit i rat circuit l Fuser heater OZTU L i RED i I H1 I I I BTH l l SU i IC1001 I l i CPU i MAINTH I I I I J 388V i l I I L I Re ate ae am ences a eee I Pl ye ate et Figure 5 13 Heater temperature control circuit Two thermistors monitor fuser fixing heater temperature e Main thermistor TH1 Monitors the print temperature and the between sheets temperature It is placed in contact with the inside surface of the fuser sleeve and monitors the sleeve temperature e Sub thermistor TH2 Monitors the temperature rise at the end the initial rotation temperature and the start up temperature It is placed in contact with the fuser heater As the surface temperature of the fuser heater rises the resistances of both thermistors reduce and the voltage of the FUSER HEATER TEMPERATURE DETECTION signals MAINTH SUBTH varies The CPU IC1001 on the DC
506. urpose tray paper sensor PS1 detects the presence of paper on the Tray 1 multipurpose tray and the Tray 2 cassette paper sensor PS2 and detects the presence of paper in Tray 2 The DC controller controls three motors feed motor M1 delivery motor M2 drum motor M3 and four solenoids SL1 SL2 SL4 SL5 to drive each feed motor SL5 is only for the 3700 printer There are 6 photo interrupters PS4 PS6 PS7 PS8 PS9 PS10 along the paper path to monitor the arrival or passing of papers PS9 and PS10 are only for the 3700 printer Duplex printing is available only on the 3700 printer Figure 5 57 Pickup feed system illustrates the motors solenoids switches and sensors 182 Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW NOTE Figure 5 57 ENWW The terms fixing and fuser refer to the same operation or assembly and are used interchangeably in this document Also ITB unit and transfer unit refer to the same assembly and are used interchangeably throughout this document DC controller PCB A A z A on xe am s rgjgTro q o3 a vfz aT A a 2 2 Z Sf 6a S u2 uos oo 5 562 69 2 90 2 2 6 a EL FE lz2 l xo gdez29 z5 Pl Piero z o o o o gt 105 o ua amp Ec ot c o 2106 amp z ac u c u xz alo S a a gt za Z cas a9 a z uu a sicmcioj u S ut FO 9los 9 5E6O toS5 o Q E os S 92 a a oe ella T zmr roolmos t jws Slza D Sl lax Ersal EOC
507. urpose tray paper sensor PS1 removal seene 253 Tray 2 cassette paper sensor PS2 removal sss 253 Registration paper sensor PS4 removal ssssssse eem 254 Media sensor PS5 removal sssssssssssssseeeenene emere 255 ENWW Fuser front paper sensor PS6 removal ssssssseee emen 256 Fuser delivery paper sensor PS7 removal sssseeeee 256 Face down delivery paper sensor PS8 removal sss 257 Reversed paper sensor PS9 removal HP 3700 only sees 257 Duplex feed delivery paper sensor PS10 removal HP 3700 only 258 Rear output bin paper sensor PS11 removal ssssssssssssseeeeeee 259 Color misregistration sensor PS12 removal seen 260 Waste toner level sensor PS13 removal ssseeeen 260 Developing engaging sensor PS14 removal ssss 261 Environment sensor PS15 removal sssssssssee emnes 261 Secondary transfer roller engaging sensor PS16 removal ssssssss 262 solenoids and Clutches 4 cedri ee ee ede eee Lee Ld eed ode sitet lin ce d es 263 Tray 1 multipurpose tray pick up solenoid SL 1 removal sesseesss 263 Tray 2 pick up Solenoid SL2 removal ssssseeeeeee eee 264 Secondary transfer ro
508. user front paper sensor PS7 Fuser delivery paper sensor PS8 Face down delivery paper sensor PS9 Reversed paper sensor HP 3700 only PS10 Duplexing feed delivery paper sensor PS11 Face up tray sensor PS12 Color misregistration sensor PS13 Waste toner level sensor PS14 Developing engaging sensor PS15 Environmental conditions sensor PS16 Secondary transfer roller engaging sensor Diagnostics from the Control Panel 437 Table 7 50 Paper path and manual sensor test control panel information Symbol PAPER PATH MANUAL SENSORS SENSOR TEST HP 3700 only S9 0 or 1 0 or 1 Reversed paper sensor HP 3700 only PS10 0 or 1 0 or 1 Duplexing feed paper sensor P C Multi purpose tray PS1 0 or 1 0 or 1 paper sensor E Paper feeder Tray 3 PS3 0 or 1 0 or 1 paper sensor F Registration paper PS4 0 or 1 0 or 1 sensor H Fixing delivery paper PS7 0 or 1 0 or 1 sensor Face down delivery PS8 0 or 1 0 or 1 paper sensor J Developing engaging PS14 0 or 1 0 or 1 sensor 6 EM coque p per T M Face up tray sensor PS11 HP 3500 3550 Oor1 Oor1 HP 3700 X Waste toner full sensor PS13 HP 3500 3550 Oor 1 Oor1 HP 3700 X Door open detection SW1 HP 3500 3550 0or1 Switch Oor1 HP 3700 X Media sensor 0 unknown 1 normal 3 OHT 4 glossy 5 gloss film 6 non assured OHT X indicates a blank no value is displayed N this sensor can be tested by shining a light into the lower sensor hole 438 Chapter 7 Troubleshooti
509. user sleeve is scarred or damaged Replace the fuser Pressure roller is scarred or damaged Refer to the Table 7 39 Repetitive defect cause later in this chapter to find out if the interval of the poorly fixed places agrees with that of a pressure roller If so replace the fuser Thermistor is deteriorated Replace the fuser DC controller PCB is defective Replace the DC controller PCB Calibrate the printer after replacing the DC controller See Calibrate Now later in this chapter Image distortion Table 7 33 Causes for distortion or blurring Transfer unit is defective Replace the transfer unit Calibrate the printer after replacing the transfer unit See Calibrate Now later in this chapter Defective secondary transfer roller If it does not rotate smoothly or it is deformed replace the secondary transfer roller DC controller PCB is defective Replace the DC controller PCB Calibrate the printer after replacing the DC controller See Calibrate Now later in this chapter Color misregistration If the misregistration occurs in a particular color go to A If it occurs in all colors go to step B otherwise perform the steps in order from the top down Table 7 34 Causes for smearing The color misregistration is not properly Calibrate the printer See Calibrate Now later in adjusted this chapter Remove the ITB shipping locks Open the front door to access these locks There are two locks located
510. utput bin was CANNOT DUPLEX opened during the automatic duplex job or the printer detected a paper size that could not go through the auto duplexer Cannot duplex close rear bin HP 3700dn and 3700dtn only Close the lower rear door rear output A 2 sided print job has been sent to the bin printer while the lower rear door rear Replace the face up tray sensor lever output bin is open or the face up tray sensor is damaged Reseat the face up tray sensor connector J711 or the sensor connection on the DC controller PCB Replace the face up tray sensor PS11 5 Replace the DC controller PCB Checking paper path The engine is turning its rollers to check No action necessary for possible paper jams Checking printer The engine is doing an internal test 1 CHOSEN PERSONALITY NOT The printer encountered a request for a 1 Press v to continue AVAILABLE alternates with personality that did not exist in the printer The job is aborted and no pages will be printed CLOSE UPPER REAR DOOR The upper rear door is open Close the upper rear door Cleaning The printer is in the process of cleaning Clearing event log This message is displayed while the No action necessary event log is cleared The printer will back up one screen to Service Menu upon completion of printing the page 2 2 Try a different driver To continue pressv ENWW Printer error troubleshooting 313 Table 7 2 Alphabetical printer messages c
511. vice RESETS RESET SUPPLIES NEW TRANSFER KIT YES Ordering parts 477 Illustrations and parts lists The following illustrations and parts tables list the field replaceable units FRUS for this printer At the end of this chapter are two tables listing all of the parts shown in this chapter Alphabetical parts list lists the parts in alphabetical order and Numerical parts list lists the parts in numerical order by part number Both tables list the appropriate figure in this chapter where the part can be found COVERS LEFT RIGHT REAR Figure 8 6 CENTER FRAME ASS Y FRONT COVER ASS Y Figure 8 12 Figure 8 7 FUSER __ Figure 8 27 TRAY 2 Cassette Figure 8 19 RIGHT SWING FRAME ASS Y FACE DOWN DELIVERY ASS Y Figure 8 25 Figure 8 23 LOWER FRAME ASS Y Figure 8 15 16 TRANSFER UNIT LEFT SWING FRAME ASS Y Figure 8 24 Figure 8 26 Figure 8 1 Main parts 1 of 3 478 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams ENWW MAIN RIGHT SIDE PLAT IMAGE DRIVE ASS Y Figure 8 13 Figure 8 17 DEVELOPING DISENGAGING ASS Y Figure 8 18 PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD ASS Y Not Shown Figure 8 4 MAIN LEFT SIDE PLATE ASS Y Figure 8 14 gt 5 lt Q m m LL bo amp m x o a N e N o o g 2 DO iL CASSETTE PICK I Figure 8 22 Main parts 2 of 3 Figure 8 2 479 Illustrations and parts lists ENWW PAPER PICK UP DRIVE ASS
512. wer on sequence 446 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW Calibration bypass During certain diagnostic procedures you will need to bypass the automatic calibration that is performed whenever the printer is turned on To bypass calibration 1 Turn the printer on and watch the control panel display 2 When the display begins showing the memory count press and hold w until all three lights on the control panel are lit Press a Press Menu The display should show SKIP DISK LOAD Press a until SKIP CALIBRATION is highlighted Press v The printer will skip calibration and then continue its power on sequence o ommo Calibrate Now Use the following procedure to calibrate the printer whenever you replace the DC controller the formatter the color misregistration sensor PS12 the transfer unit or the laser scanner 1 Press v to enter the MENUS 2 Press w to highlight configure device 3 Press v to select configure device Press w to highlight PRINT quality Press v to select PRINT quality Press to highlight CALIBRATE NOW Press v to select CALIBRATE NOW Wait for the printer to calibrate o Noe ENWW Engine resets 447 Service menu This section provides information about accessing the service menu and its operation Accessing the Service menu The Service menu is PIN protected for added security Only authorized service people have access to the Service menu When you select SERVICE from the list of menus you are
513. wing options are available for the Neutral Grays setting e Black Only generates neutral colors grays and black using only black toner This guarantees neutral colors without a color cast e 4 Color generates neutral colors grays and black by combining all four toner colors This method produces smoother gradients and transitions to non neutral colors and it produces the darkest black The Edge Control for the HP Color LaserJet 3500 3550 series printer setting determines how edges are rendered Edge control has two components adaptive halftoning and trapping Adaptive halftoning increases edge sharpness Trapping reduces the effect of color plane misregistration by overlapping the edges of adjacent objects slightly NOTE Selecting this setting may significantly slow down the HP Color LaserJet 3500 3550 series printer s speed For the HP Color LaserJet 3700 series printer the following levels of edge control are available e Maximum is the most aggressive trapping setting Adaptive halftoning is on for this setting e Normal is the default trapping setting Trapping is at a medium level and adaptive halftoning is on e Light sets trapping at a minimal level and adaptive halftoning is on e Off turns off both trapping and adaptive halftoning For the HP Color LaserJet 3500 3550 series printer the following levels are available e Maximum is the most aggressive trapping setting e Normal sets the trapping at a medium level
514. y 1 Press for help Remove Tray 2 then clear the paper jam in the duplex path or close the paper access plate in the duplex area See Paper path troubleshooting later in this chapter NOTE If Jam Recovery is set to OFF some pages will not be reprinted Re send the missing pages Press for help See Paper path troubleshooting later in this chapter Close the upper rear door Press for help or See Paper path troubleshooting later in this chapter Press for help or See Paper path troubleshooting later in this chapter NOTE If Jam Recovery is set to OFF some pages will not be reprinted Re send the missing pages ENWW Table 7 3 Numerical printer messages continued Message 13 XX YY JAM IN TRAY X alternates with For help press Clear jam then press v 20 INSUFFICIENT MEMORY alternates with For help press To continue press v 22 EIO X BUFFER OVERFLOW alternates with To continue press v 22 PARALLEL I O BUFFER OVERFLOW alternates with To continue press v 22 SERIAL I O BUFFER OVERFLOW alternates with To continue press v 22 USB I O BUFFER OVERFLOW alternates with To continue press v 40 BAD SERIAL TRANSMISSION alternates with To continue press v ENWW A page is jammed in tray X The printer has received more data from the computer than fits in available memory HP 3700 only when an EIO device is installed The printer ElO card
515. y transfer roller engaging cam has the secondary transfer roller engaging flag on its shaft When the secondary transfer roller is engaged with the ITB this flag shields the PS16 and the SECONDARY TRANSFER ENGAGING DETECTION signal T2SNS is output condition H and vice versa when the roller is disengaged condition L The DC controller monitors the position engagement of the roller based on this signal ENWW Image formation system 173 The DC controller judges the engagement disengagement mechanism faulty and sends the error message to the formatter when the T2SNS signal is not input output within a specified time during the engagement disengagement operation DC controller PCB A Secondary transfer roller DETECTION signal T2SNS SECONDARY TRANSFER ENGAGING Secondary transfer Secondary transfer roller roller engaging cam V engaging sensor Secondary transfer roller engaging detection lever Secondary transfer roller Secondary transfer roller ox engaging cam engaging detection lever sar PS16 lt Engaged gt lt Disengaged gt Figure 5 52 Secondary transfer roller engaging disengaging detection Color misregistration control This controls the correction of color misregistration caused by the variation of cartridges and the laser scanner unit In particular this control corrects the following e Horizontal scan starting position e Horizontal scanning scal

HP Color Laserjet Printer 3550 User's Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents